BE Civil Degree Programme 18

REVISED SYLLABI
FOR
B.E DEGREE (CIVIL ENGINEERING) PROGRAMME
SECOND TO EIGHTH SEMESTER
FOR THE STUDENTS ADMITTED FROM THE
ACADEMIC YEAR 2014-2015 ONWARDS
THIAGARAJAR COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(A Government Aided ISO 9001-2008 certified
Autonomous Institution affiliated to Anna University)
MADURAI – 625 015, TAMILNADU
Phone: 0452 – 2482240, 41
Fax: 0452 2483427
Web: www.tce.edu
THIAGARAJAR COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING, MADURAI – 625 015
DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
I) Vision
To establish process of learning to meet the global standards for sustainable built
environment
II) Mission
We are committed to:
 Provide quality education through innovation in teaching and learning

practices meeting the global standards
 Encourage faculty and students to carry out socially relevant and forward
looking research
 Offer consultancy services using state of the art facilities fulfilling the needs of
the industry and society
 Enable our students, faculty and staff to play leadership roles for the
betterment of the society in a sustainable manner
III) Programme Educational Objectives (PEO) for B.E Civil Engineering

programme:
PEO1. Graduates of the programme will contribute to the development of

sustainable Infrastructure for the betterment of society
PEO2. Graduates of the programme, as an employee of an organization or as an
employer, will continuously update their domain knowledge for continuous
professional development with focus on research & development and
industry interaction
PEO3 Graduates of the programme will accept and create innovations in providing
solution for sustainable built environment
PEO4 Graduates of the programme will discharge their duties as professional Civil
Engineers with quality and ethics
Consistency of PEOs with Mission of the Department
PEOs/
M1 M2 M3 M4
Mission
PEO 1 - - M S
PEO 2 S S S -
PEO 3 M M M S
PEO 4 M - M M
iv) Programme Specific Outcomes (PSO) for B.E Civil Engineering programme
Graduating Students of B.E. Civil Engineering programme will be able to:
PSO 1: Investigate, Analyze, Plan and Design the problems in multivarious domains of civil
engineering
PSO 2: Work with ethical principles and sound managerial skills in the promotion of civil
engineering infrastructure keeping in mind, health, safety and sustainability of the
society
Programme Outcomes (POs) of B.E. (Civil Engineering)
Graduating Students of B.E. Civil Engineering programme will:
1. Engineering Knowledge: Apply knowledge of mathematics, science,

engineering fundamentals and an engineering specialization to the solution of
complex engineering problems.
2. Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, research literature and analyze complex

engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles
of mathematics, natural sciences and engineering sciences.
3. Design/ Development of Solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering

problems and design system components or processes that meet specified
needs with appropriate consideration for public health and safety, cultural,
societal and environmental considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge

and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and
interpretation of data and synthesis of information to provide valid
conclusions.
5. Modern Tool Usage: Create, select and apply appropriate techniques,
resources and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and
modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the
limitations.
6. The Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by contextual

knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the
consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of professional

engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and demonstrate
knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and

responsibilities and norms of engineering practice.
9. Individual and Team Work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a

member or leader in diverse teams and in multi-disciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities

with the engineering community and with society at large, such as being able
to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make
effective presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
11. Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and

understanding of engineering and management principles and apply these to
one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and
in multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long Learning: Recognize the need for and have the preparation and
ability to Engage in independent and lifelong learning in the broadest
context of technological
Change.
Consistency of PEOs with POs of the programme
PEO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
/ PO
PEO1 M S M L - S S L L M M M
PEO2 M M M M L S M M S S S S
PEO3 S S S S M M S M M M L M
PEO4 S S S S L L M M M M M M
Category L T P Credit
14CE210 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS II BS 2 1 0 3
Preamble
Vector calculus is a form of mathematics that is focused on the integration of vector fields. An
Engineer should know the Transformations of the Integrals, as Transformation of Line Integral to
surface and then to volume integrals. The Laplace transform method is a powerful method for
solving linear ODEs and corresponding initial value problems as well as systems of ODEs arising in
Engineering. The knowledge of transformations is to create a new domain in which it is easier to
handle the problem that is being investigated. Complex Integration approach is very useful to
evaluate many improper integrals of a real variable.
Prerequisite
Differentiation, Integration and Elementary calculus.
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to
Course Outcomes Bloom’s Expected Expected

level attainment Proficiency
level (grade)
(%)
CO1 Find area and volume using double and triple Understand 60 C
Integral.
CO2 Apply the concepts of Differentiation and Apply 65 B
Integration in Vectors.
CO3: Apply Laplace transform technique to solve the Apply 60 C
given ordinary differential equation.
CO4: Predict an analytic function, when its real or Apply 65

Imaginary part is known. B
CO5: Find the Singularities and its corresponding Understand 70 B
Residues for the given function.
CO6: Predict the suitable method to evaluate Understand 70 B

the Contour integration.
Mapping with Programme Outcomes

COs PO1 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 S S M S
CO2 M M M S S
CO3. S S S S M
CO4. S S M
CO5. M M M S
CO6. S S
S- Strong; M-Medium; L-Low
Assessment Pattern
Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Terminal Examination
1 2 3
Remember 10 10 10 10
Understand 30 30 30 20
Apply 60 60 60 70
Analyze 0 0 0 0
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0
Course Level Assessment Questions
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1 2 1
   dxdydz
1. Predict the value of 0 0 0
2. Distinguish between triple integral and volume integral.
3. Estimate the area enclosed by the curves y  x and x  y  2

2
a x
4. Predict the limits of   f ( x, y)dydx, by changing the order of integration.
0 0
1.
Using Taylor’s theorem, show that
( Z  1) 2 ( Z  1) 3
log Z  ( Z  1)    ......., where | Z  1 | 1
2 3
  
2. f  ( x 2  y 2 ) i - 2xy j taken around the rectangle
Using Green’s theorem for
bounded by the lines x=0,x=a, y=0 and y=b.
3. If f ( z )  u (r , )  iv (r , ) is differentiable at z  re i , then show that
v
ur  , u   r v r
r

 
y '' 9 y  cos 2t , y(0)  1 & y   1
1. Solve the Equation 2 using Laplace Transform.
 p 8 
2. Compute L-1  2 

 p  4p 5
t
Using convolution theorem in Laplace Transform, evaluate  SinuCos(t  u)du
0
t
6
3. Show that  e 4t t sin 3tdt  2 .
0 ( s  8s  25) 2
Course Outcome 4 (CO4)
1. Compute an analytic function f(z)=u+iv, where u  e ( x cos y  y sin y) .

x
 s2 
2. Using convolution theorem, compute L1  2 2 

 ( s  a )( s  b ) 
2 2
3. Show that the map w = 1/z maps the circles and straight lines as circles or straight
lines.
4. Demonstrate the Milne Thompson method to construct an analytic function f(z)=u+iv,
given either u(x,y) or v(x,y).
Course Outcome 5 (CO5) :
1. Define the term Residue of f(z) at z = a.
2. Give an example of meromorphic function.

1
3. Identify the singular points of
(2 sin z  1) 2
z 1
4. Identify the residue of at its poles.
z  2z
2
Course Outcome 6(CO6):
2
Cos2
1. Evaluate (i) 
0
5  4Cos
d

x2
(ii) 
0
( x 2  1)( x 2  4)
dx

x sin mx
(iii) dx
0
x2  a2
z4
2. Examine the Laurent’s series expansion of f ( z )  ,
( z  3)( z  1) 2
in (i) 0 < |z-1| < 4 (ii) |z-1| > 4
3. Distinguish between isolated singularity and removable singularity.

4. Distinguish between Cauchy’s fundamental theorem and Cauchy’s fundamental
theorem.
Concept Map
Syllabus:
MULTIPLE INTEGRALS: Double integrals –Change of order of integration –Double integrals in polar
coordinates –Area enclosed by plane curves –Triple integrals –Volume of Solids –Change of variables in
double and triple integrals.
VECTOR CALCULUS: Gradient, divergence and curl –Directional derivative –Irrotational and solenoidal
vector fields –Simple problems on Vector differentiation–Vector integration –Green’s theorem in a
plane, Gauss divergence theorem and Stokes’ theorem(excluding proofs) –Simple applications.
LAPLACE TRANSFORM : Laplace transform –Sufficient condition for existence –Transform of

elementary functions –Basic properties –Transforms of derivatives and integrals of functions -
Derivatives and integrals of transforms -Transforms of unit step function and impulse functions –
Transform of periodic functions. Inverse Laplace transform -Statement of Convolution theorem –
Initial and final value theorems–Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant coefficients
using Laplace transformation techniques. ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS : Functions of a complex variable –
Analytic functions: Necessary conditions –Cauchy -Riemann equations and sufficient conditions
(excluding proofs) –Harmonic and orthogonal properties of analytic function –Harmonic conjugate –
Construction of analytic functions –Conformal mapping: w = z2, sinz, ez and bilinear transformation.
COMPLEX INTEGRATION :Complex integration –Statement and applications of Cauchy’s integral

theorem and Cauchy’s integral formula –Taylor’s and Laurent’s series expansions –Singular points –
Residues –Cauchy’s residue theorem –Evaluation of real definite integrals as contour integrals
around unit circle and semi-circle (excluding poles on the real axis).
Text Book
1. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 41st Edition, Khanna Publications, Delhi, 2011.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 8th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2009.
Reference Books
1. T.Veerarajan, Engineering Mathematics, 3 rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
2. Thomas Phinny, Calculus, 13 th Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi,2005.
3. B.V.Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata Macraw Hill, New Delhi,2011
Course content and lecture schedule

Module Topic No.of
No. Lectures
1 Multiple Integrals
1.1 Double integrals and areas 2
1.2 Triple integrals and volumes 2
Tutorial 1
1.3 Change of order of integration 1
1.4 Change of variables between Cartesian and polar with applications 2
Tutorial 1
2 Vector Calculus
2.1 Operators Grad, div and curl with properties 2
2.2 Solenoidal and irrotational vectors 2
Tutorial 1
2.3 Vector integration(three famous theorems) 3

Tutorial 1
3 Laplace Transformation
3.1 Laplace transformation-properties, inverse laplace transforms 3
Tutorial 1
3.2 Periodic functions, convolution theorem, initial value theorem and final 3
value theorem
3.3 Solution of differential equations and integral equations 2
Tutorial 1
4 Analytic Functions
4.1 Analytic functions, C-R equations and properties 2
4.2 Harmonic functions and Milne Thomson’s method 2
Tutorial 1
4.3 Conformal maps and bilinear transformations 3
Tutorial 1
5 Complex Integration
5.1 Cauchy’s theorem and consequences 1
5.2 Evaluating integrals using Cauchy’s integral formula 2
5.3 Taylor’s and Laurent’s expansions 2
Tutorial 1
5.4 Singularities and Cauchy’s residue theorem 1
5.5 Contour integration using unit circle and semicircular contours 3
Tutorial 1
Total 48
Course Designers:
1. S.Jeyabharathi sjbmat@tce.edu
2. G. Jothilakshmi gjlmat@tce.edu
appmat@tce.edu
3. A.P.Pushpalatha
14CE221 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS PC 2 2 0 3
Preamble
A structure is made up of constituent elements like beam, column and membrane. The constituent
elements should have adequate size to resist applied loads to build a safe structure. Their size is
decided by material properties of the elements, particularly their strength. Man seems to have had
information regarding the strength of structural material even in ancient times. They had worked
out empirical rules which they used to dimension elements of structures like the pyramid, coliseum,
harbors, bridges and aqueducts that bring awe to the beholder even today. The Greek had even
developed statics, the foundation of mechanics of materials, and people like Archimedes put this
into practice by hoisting huge structural elements and putting them in place. But this ancient
knowledge was lost during the middle ages and only during the renaissance the science of material
strength was recovered. At that time people like Leonardo da Vinci took mechanics of structures to
great heights. He investigated the strength of materials experimentally, the bending of beam and its
variation with different lengths and loads. He even investigated the strength of columns.
But the first attempt to find safe dimension for a structural element, analytically, was attempted
only in the 17th century. It started with Galileo’s famous book on strength and mechanics of
materials, called, ‘Two New Sciences.’ That was the start of Strength of Materials. There was rapid
development in the field of mechanics of materials at the end of the 19th century. Testing of
materials attracted attention and soon the National Bureau of Standards was born in USA. Research
took on a new turn facilitating closer contact between engineers and physicists. Meanwhile in the
field of Strength of Materials, refinements in stress analysis, both analytical and experimental took
place. Fields like fracture mechanics, stress concentration, ductility, strength theories, fatigue,
experimental stress analysis are few among a vast horde of new fields of study that have emerged
from a renewed interest in Strength of Materials in twentieth century.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, students Expected Expected
will be able to
Attainment Proficiency
Level in % Level in
grade
CO1: Compute resultant, resolve several
concurrent forces and also to apply Apply 70 A
equilibrium concepts
CO2: Compute simple stresses and strains Apply 70 A
CO3: Compute principal stresses and strains Apply 70 A
CO4: Practice shear force and bending moment Apply 70 A
computations and construct shear force
and bending moment diagrams
CO5: Compute geometric properties of sections Apply 70 A
CO6: Compute bending and shear stresses for Apply 70 A
various sections and plot the variation
across the cross section.
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1. M M M - - - - S - - - - M L
CO2. S S S - - - - - - - - - M L
CO3. S S S M - - - - - - - - M L
CO4. S S S S - M - S - - - - M L
CO5. S S S S - M - - - - - - M L
CO6. L L L - - - - - - - - - L L
Assessment Pattern
Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Terminal
Tests
Category Examination
1 2 3
Apply 80 80 80 80
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -
1. What are the methods available for finding resultant of two forces?
CO1: Computing resultant and resolution of forces
2. State the polygon rule for finding the resultant of several concurrent forces.
3. Obtain the components of a 5kN force forming angles of 40°, 60° and 110°
respectively with x,y and z axes .
4. Determine the magnitude and direction of resultant of the following two forces acting
on a bolt. One force is of magnitude 10kN making an angle of 60° with the horizontal
axis and pointed right side up and another force of magnitude 15kN making an angle
30° with the horizontal axis and pointed right side down.
CO2: Computing simple stresses and strains
1. Define Poisson’s ratios mention its use.

2. A steel bar of rectangular section 25mm x 40mm carries an axial load of 40kN.
Determine the average tensile stress over the normal cross section of the bar.
3. A 30m long wire is subjected to a tensile force of 4.45kN. It stretches by an amount
of 25mm. Find the modulus of elasticity of the material if the cross sectional area of
the wire is 25.8 mm2.
4. A bar of varying cross–section consists of two sections of lengths. It is subjected to
an axial pull F. Find the total elongation.
5. The Young’s modulus of a material is 20 MPaand its rigidity modulus is 80 MPa.
Determine its bulk modulus
6. A circular rod of 100mm diameter and 500mm length is subjected to an axial force of
2000kN. Determine the modulus of rigidity, Bulk modulus and the change in volume if
the Poisson’s ratio is 0.30 and Young’s modulus is 200 GPa.
7. A bar of 20mm diameter is tested in tension. It is observed that when a load of 40kN
is applied, the extension measured over a gauge length of 200mm is 0.15mm and
contraction in diameter is 0.004mm. Find the Poisson’s ratio and the elastic
constants.
CO3: Computing principal stresses and strains
1. Obtain the equations for finding normal and tangential stress for a member subjected to
direct stresses in two mutually perpendicular directions accompanied by a shear stress
2. How will you draw Mohr’s circle for finding normal and tangential stresses for a body
subjected to two mutually perpendicular tensile stresses?
3. The principal stresses at a point in a bar are 160N/mm2 (tensile) and 80N/mm2
(compressive). Determine the resultant stress in magnitude and direction on a plane
inclined at 60º to the axis of the major principal stress. Also, determine the maximum
intensity of shear stress in the material at the point
4. At a certain point in a strained material, the stresses on the two planes at right angles to
each other are 40N/mm2 and 20N/mm2 both tensile. They are accompanied by a shear
stress of magnitude 20N/mm2. Determine graphically the location of principal planes and
evaluate the principal stresses.
1. Define shear force and bending moment.
CO4: Practice of shear force and bending moment computations and constructing shear force
and bending moment diagrams
2. A cantilever beam of span 6m is subjected to a point load of 10kN at free end.
Draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams.
3. A simply supported beam of span 6m is subjected to two point loads of 15kN and
20kN at 2m and 4m from left end. Draw the shear force and bending moment
diagrams.
CO5: Computing geometric properties of sections
1. State parallel axes theorem.

2. Write the significance of perpendicular axis theorem
3. A unsymmetrical I section is having top flange of size 100mm x 25mm, web of
size 20mm x 200mm and bottom flange of size 125mm x 25mm. Compute the
moments of inertia about xx and yy axes. Also, determine the radius of gyration
1. State the assumptions made in the theory of simple bending.

CO6: Interpretation of bending and shear stresses in various sections and plotting
the variation across the cross section.
2. Sketch the bending stress distribution in a simply supported beam of rectangular
section.
3. A T-beam having flange dimensions 150mm x 50mm and web dimensions 50mm x
150mm is simply supported over a span of 4m and carries a uniformly distributed load of
2 kN/m over the entire span. Determine the maximum tensile and maximum
compressive stress. Also, sketch the bending stress distribution across the cross section.
4. A timber beam is simply supported at its ends and carries a concentrated load at
the mid span. The maximum longitudinal stress is ’f’ and the maximum shearing
stress is q. Find the ratio of the span to depth of the beam ignoring the self-
weight of the beam. If f = 12 MPa and q = 1MPa.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Basics of statics : Introduction, force on a particle, coplanar forces, resultant of several concurrent
forces, resolution of forces , equilibrium of a particle, principle of transmissibility, Varignon’s
theorem, external and internal forces, free body diagram, requirements of equilibrium of a rigid
body.Simple Stresses and Strains : Introduction, stress, strain, tensile, compressive and shear stress
– Hooke’s law – Young’s modulus, rigidity modulus, Bulk modulus, Poisson’s ratio, Volumetric strain,
relationship between elastic constants. Principal stresses and strains: Analysis of plane stress and
strain, principal stresses and strains – Mohr’s circle. Shear Force and Bending Moment:
Introduction, types of beams – cantilever, simply supported over hanging, fixed and continuous
beams. Types of loads – concentrated load, uniformly distribute load, uniformly varying load and
couples. Shear force and bending moment diagram for statically determinate beams (cantilever,
simply supported and over hanging). Geometric properties of sections: Centroid and moment of
inertia of plane areas and compound sections, parallel axes and perpendicular axis theorems, polar
moment of inertia and radius of gyration. Bending and shear stresses: bending stresses,
shear stresses in various sections.
Text Book
1. Rajput. R.K., “Strength of Materials”, S. Chand Publications, 2010.
Reference Books
1. Timoshenko. S.P. and Young D.H., “Elements of Strength of Materials”, 5th
edition (SI Units), Affiliated East-West Press Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
2. Ferdinand P. Beer and E. Russell Johnston Jr, “Mechanics of Materials”,
McGraw Hill Book Company, Singapore, 1992.
3. Egor. P. Popov, “Mechanics of Materials”, Prentice Hall, 1976.
4. Bansal, R.K., “A Text Book of Strength of Materials”, Laxmi Publications (P)
Ltd., New Delhi 2010.
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1.0 Basics of statics
Introduction – Force on a particle, coplanar forces and resultant of
1.1 1
several concurrent forces
1.2 Resolution of forces and equilibrium of a particle 1
Tutorial 2
1.3 Principle of transmissibility and Varignon’s theorem 1
External and internal forces, free body diagram and equilibrium of
1.4 1
a rigid body
Tutorial 2
2.0 Simple stresses and strains
2.1 Introduction to stress and strain,tensile, compressive and shear 1
stress and strain
2.2 Hooke’s law ,Young’s Modulus, Rigidity Modulus, Bulk Modulus, 1
Poisson’s Ratio
Tutorial 2
2.3 Relationship between elastic constants 2
2.4 Stress-strain diagram for mild-steel, Elastic Limit 1
Tutorial 3
3.0 Principal stresses and strains
3.1 Plane Stress and Plane Strain 2
3.2 Principal stresses and strains, Mohr’s circle method 1
Tutorial 3
4.0 Shear Force and Bending Moment
4.1 Introduction to types of beams – Cantilever ,Simply 1

Supported,Overhanging, Fixed and,Continuous Beams
Introduction to types of loads - Concentrated Load,Uniformly Distributed

Load,Uniformly Varying Load,Couples
4.2 Shear Force and Bending Moment diagram for cantilever beams 2
Tutorial 2
4.3 Shear Force and Bending Moment diagram for simply supported beams 2
Tutorial 2
4.4 Shear Force and Bending Moment diagram for overhanging beams 1
Tutorial 2
5.0 Geometric properties of sections

5.1 Centroid and Moment of Inertia of simple and compound sections 2
(Rectangular, circular, flanged, angle, and channel cross-sections) -
Parallel axes and perpendicular axis theorems
Tutorial 2
6.0 Bending and shear stresses
6.1 Bending stresses in various sections - (Rectangular, circular, flanged, 2

angle, and channel cross-sections)
Tutorial 2
6.2 Shear stress in various sections – (Rectangular, circular, flanged, angle, 2

and channel cross-sections)
Tutorial 2
Total Hours(24 Theory + 24 Tutorials) 48
Course Designers:
1. Dr. B. Sivagurunathan sivagurunathan@tce.edu

2. Dr. S. Nagan nagan_civil@tce.edu
14CE230 SURVEYING PC 2 2 0 3
Preamble
Surveying is the process of determining by measurement, the relative positions of points on or near
the earth surface. The data collected from a survey is used in the preparation of plans, maps,
profiles, charts and diagrams. In addition survey may be used for the delineation of property
boundaries, computation of areas and volumes also to set out the proposed work on the ground.
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
On the successful completion of the course, Expected

Expected
students will be able to: Proficiency
Attainment
Level in grade
Level in %
(CO1) Compute the linear Apply 70 A

measurement in chain surveying and
angular measurements in compass
surveying.
(CO2) Demonstrate the significance of Understand 70 A
plane table surveying in preparation of
plans
(CO3) Find the relative position of Apply 70 A
points on the ground using levelling
principles.
(CO4) Find the distance and heights of Apply 70 A
objects using tacheometric principle
(CO5) Compute the volume of cutting Apply
and filling using longitudinal and cross 70 A
sectioning methods.
(CO6) Explain the importance of Understand 70 A

advanced techniques involved in
surveying.

CO3. S S L - - - - - - - - - L -
CO4. L L L - - - - L - - - - L L
CO3. S S L - - - - - - - - - L -
CO4. S S M - - - - - - - - - M -
CO5. S S M L - - - L - - - - M L
CO6. L L L - L - - - - L - - L L
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 40 50 60 60
Analyse --- --- --- ---
Evaluate --- --- --- ---
Create --- --- --- ---

1. Define surveying and list out its objectives

2. Enumerate the factors to be considered for choosing chain survey.
3. Describe briefly the process of chaining.
4. State the different methods of surveying with prismatic compass.
5. Under what circumstances is a compass traverse suitable?
6. Describe the construction of a prismatic compass with neat sketch and state the
functions of its parts.
1. Enumerate the various methods of plane tabling. Discuss the methods of radiation
and intersection in detail.
2. List the advantages and disadvantages of plane table survey.
3. State the three point problem in plane tabling and describe how it is solved by
Bessel’s method.
4. Explain with sketches the different methods of locating a point on the plan by plane
table. Discuss the relative merits of these methods.
5. Describe the various components of a plane table. What are their functions?
1. The following consecutive readings were taken with dumpy level, the instrument
having been shifted after second, fourth and seventh readings.
0.900,1.250,2.450,1.370,2.945,3.125,3.725,0.105,1.975,2.025 and 1.775. The first
reading was taken with a staff held on a benchmark of elevation 100.000m. Enter the
readings in a level book and calculate the reduced levels using rise and fall method.
Apply usual checks.
2. The following consecutive readings were taken with a level and 5m leveling staff on
continuously sloping ground at a common interval of 20m.
0.385; 1.030; 1.925; 2.825; 3.730; 4.685; 0.625; 2.005; 3.110; 4.485. The RL of the
first point was 200m. Calculate the RL of the points by rise and fall as well as height
of collimation method. Also find the gradient between first and last point.
3. The following staff readings were observed successively with level, the instrument having
been moved forward after the 2nd, 4th and 8th readings.
0.875; 1.235; 2.310; 1.385; 2.930; 3.125; 4.125; 0.120; 1.875; 2.030; 3.765.
The RL of the first point was 150m. Calculate the RL of the points by rise and fall as
well as height of collimation method. If the distance between the first and last point
was 1500m, find its gradient.

1. The following observation refer to a tacheometric survey. Compute the reduced levels of P,
Q and R and the horizontal distances PQ and QR. Assume the tacheometer fitted with
anallatic lens.
Inst Stn Height of Staff Vertical Staff readings Remarks
axis at angle
Bottom Middle Top
P 1.440 BM - 2024’ 1.200 1.830 2.460 RL of BM =

37.725m.
P 1.440 Q + 4036’ 1.350 1.820 2.209
Staff being held
Q 1.410 R + 6012’ 0.720 1.880 2.040 vertically
2. A tacheometer was set up at a station A and the following readings were obtained on a
vertically held staff. The constants of the instruments were 100 and 0.1. Find the horizontal
distance from A to B and the reduced level of B.
Station Staff station Target reading Vertical angle Remarks
A B 3.500 + 4020’ RL of BM = 150.000m and

height of instrument at
B 0.500 - 2020’ A=1.500m
3. Find the elevation of the top of chimney from the following data.
Inst Stn Reading on BM Angle of Remarks
elevation
A 0.860 18036’ RL of BM=421.380m
B 1.220 10012’ Distance AB = 50m
Stations A and B and the top of chimney are in the same vertical plane.

1. A series of offsets were taken from a chain line to a curved boundary at intervals of
5m in the following order: 1.75, 2.50, 4.75, 5.85, 3.95, 4.90, 6.55 and 5.25m.
Calculate the area enclosed between the survey line, irregular boundary and the first
and last offsets, using the Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rule.
2. The following perpendicular offsets were taken from a chain line to hedge
Chainage 0 15 30 45 60 70 80 100 120 140
(m)
Offset 7.60 8.50 10.7 12.8 10.6 9.5 8.3 7.9 6.4 4.4
(m)
Calculate the area between the survey line, the hedge and the end offsets by
Simpson’s rule.

1. Explain the principle underlying EDM
2. State the significance of Total station in the modern methods of surveying
3. Discuss the application of GPS in surveying.
4. List the sources of errors in GPS and its limitations.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction: Definition, classification of surveys, Chain surveying: Ranging and Chaining, obstacles
in chaining, Errors in chain survey. Compass surveying: Prismatic compass, Magnetic declination,
local attraction, Computation of compass traverse. Plane table surveying: Accessories, setting up,
plane table techniques. Levelling: Types of levels, temporary adjustments of a level, methods of
levelling, fly levelling, longitudinal sectioning and cross sectioning, contouring. Areas and Volumes:
Calculation of areas and volumes by mid-ordinate, average ordinate, trapezoidal and Simpson’s
methods. Theodolite Survey: Measurement of horizontal and vertical angle, Stadia, tangential and
trignometrical levelling. Curves: setting out of simple and compound curves. Modern methods of
surveying: Electronic Distance Measurement (EDM), Global Positioning System (GPS), Total station
and its application.
Text Book
1. Punmia,B.C, Ashok K Jain and Arun K Jain, “ Surveying” Vol. I&II, Laxmi
Publication, 16th Edition, New Delhi, 2005.
Reference Books
5. Kanetkar,T.P, and Kulkarni,S.V,“Surveying and Levelling” Vol.I&II, United Book
Corporation, 23rd Edition, Pune,1997.
6. Arora,K.R,”Surveying” Vol.I&II, Standard BookHouse Publishers & Distributors,
New Delhi, 2008.
7. Venkatramaiah C, “Textbook of Surveying”, University Press, 2 nd Edition,
Hyderabad, 2011.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

Module
Topic No. of Lectures
No.
1. Chain and Compass Surveying
1.1 Definition and classification of Survey 1
1.2 Ranging and chaining, 1
1.3 Obstacles in chaining and errors in chaining 1
1.4 Description of Prismatic compass, measurement of bearings 1
1.5 Local attraction and magnetic declination 1
1.6 Computation of compass traverse 2
2 Plane table Surveying
2.1 Study of accessories and setting up of plane table 1
2.2 Radiation and intersection method 1
2.3 Three point and two point problem 3
3 Levelling
3.1 Types of levels 1
3.2 Temporary adjustment of levels 1
3.3 Fly levelling 2
3.4 Longitudinal and cross sectioning 1
3.5 Drawing contours and uses of contour maps 2
4 Areas and Volumes
4.1 Calculation of areas and volumes by mid-ordinate, average 3
ordinate, trapezoidal and Simpson’s methods
5 Measurement using Theodolite
5.1 Components of transit theodolite and its adjustments 1
5.2 Measurement of horizontal and vertical angle 1
5.3 Measurement of distances and heights using stadia method 2
5.4 Measurement of distances and heights using tangential 1
method
5.5 Measurement of distances and heights using trignometrical 2
method
5.6 Curves and its classification 1
5.7 Setting out of simple circular curves 1
5.8 Setting out of compound curves 1
6 Modern Methods of Surveying
6.1 Electronic Distance Measurements (EDM) 1
6.2 Applications of Global Positioning System (GPS) 1
6.3 Application of Total Station 2
Course Designers:
1. Dr. K. Sudalaimani ksciv@tce.edu
2. Dr. T. Baskaran tbciv@tce.edu
PC 3 0 0 3
14CE240 ENGINEERING GEOLOGY
Preamble
Engineering Geology is the
application of the geologic sciences to engineering practise for the purpose of assuring that the
geologic factors affecting the engineering works are recognised and adequately provided for.
Engineering geologic studies may be performed during the planning and design. A civil engineer
should be able to understand an engineering geologic report, and incorporate adequate measures
into the design of engineering works he is concerned with.
Prerequisite
 Basic Sciences
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, Expected Expected
students will be able to Attainment Proficiency Level in
Level in % grade
CO1: Acquire the knowledge of the Understand 60 B

topographical formation, interior earth,
gradational activities and weathering.
And also the theory of plate tectonics
which answers the reason for the
occurrence of earthquake, landslides in
an area.
CO2: Interpret minerals and rocks and Apply

60 B
assessment of its physical, mechanical
and engineering properties.
Apply
CO3: Determine geological structures and its 60 B
relevance on civil projects.
Analyse 60 B
CO4: Analyze the surface and subsurface
geological structures of the crust, soil
and weathered thickness through
geophysical exploration and report
writing aspects with relevance to civil
engineering projects.
Evaluate
CO5: Assess the geological aspects of the site 60 B
suitability with relevance to the
design of structures civil and vice-
versa. Analyse
60 B
CO6: Generate surface and subsurface
geological structures of the earth’s crust
through geological cross section
mapping
Cos PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO5. - - L - - M S M M L S S S S
CO6. - - - - - M M L L L L M S -
CO3. - - - - - L - L L L - L M L
CO4 L L L M M S S L L L - M M L
CO5. M M M S M S S S S L S S S S
CO6. L - M L - - - - - - - - - -
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Tests Terminal
1 2 3
Apply 30 20 20 20
Analyse 0 20 20 20
Evaluate 0 20 20 20
Create 0 0 0 0
1. Define continent.
2. Distinguish folded mountain and MOR.
3. List subdivisions of oceans.
4. Name the gradational forces.
5. Conclude topographical formation of the earth.
6. Describe chemical weathering and its impact on civil works.
7. Explain physical weathering.
8. Distinguish physical weathering from the chemical weathering products.
9. Generalise gradational activities and its impact on civil works.
10. Outline landslides and its types.
1. Define earthquake.
2. Outline relation between convectional current and plate movements.
3. List types of subdivisions of earth’s interior.
4. Name the ratings of earthquake..
5. Generalise the effect of earthquake.
6. Distinguish focus and epicentre.
7. Explain physical properties and behaviour of seismic waves within the earth’s
interior.
8. Summarise compositional layers of the earth.
9. Conclude the occurrence of earthquake with respect to plate tectonic theory
10. Illustrate internal structure of the earth.
1. Define mineral.
2. Explain characteristics of sedimentary rocks in origin.
3. Conclude the influence of rock types in the selection of dam site.
4. Describe textures and structures of igneous rocks.
5. Explain textures and structures of sedimentary rocks.
6. Outline engineering properties of important igneous rocks.
7. Summarise physical properties of rocks.
8. Exhibit properties of the following minerals and rocks. a.Quartz b.calcite
c.Kaoloinite d. Granite e.sandstone f.marble
9. Show the importance of rock properties in civil engineering works.
10. Illustrate the relationship between origin and properties of rocks.
1. Analyse folds with respect to stress.

2. Classify faults with neat sketches.
3. Examine influence of rock structures over design of civil projects.
4. Distinguish folds and faults.
5. Appraise types of joints and its impact on civil project.
6. Outline the geophysical prospecting method for estimating thickness and
depth of soil, weathered rock and depth to bed rock.
7. Illustrate how structures of rocks influence in the design of civil projects.
8. Relate concept of plate tectonics and rock structures.
9. Investigate the importance of rock structures in planning of civil engineering
works.
10. Illustrate the importance of geological cross sections in the planning and
design level.
1. Appraise the importance of engineering geology in civil engineering design

and planning works.
2. Assess various types of properties of rocks and its suitability in civil works.
3. Compare suitability of rock types for various civil structures.
4. Conclude the suitability of rock structures for various civil projects.
5. Criticise the role of engineering geologist in the civil projects.
6. Describe site suitability for construction of dams.
7. Explain site suitability for tunnel construction.
8. Summarise site suitability for road formation.
9. Determine site suitability for tall buildings.
10. Differentiate suitable and unsuitable site with respect to rock types and its
structures.
Concept Map
Syllabus
General Geology: Topographical formation-continents and oceans, Gradational forces - Weathering,
and Landslides; Seismology: Seismic waves - Types and its characteristics, internal Structure of the
Earth, Plate Tectonics - Earthquakes; Minerals and Rocks -Types of rocks and their textures and
structures, Physical and Engineering Properties of Rocks; Structural Geology: Classification of Folds,
Faults and Joints and its relevance on civil engineering structures; Engineering Geology: Geological
and Geophysical investigation for site selection of Dams, Tunnels, Roads and Bridges.
Text Book
1. Parbin Singh: Engineering and General Geology, Taylor & Francis, 2009.
Reference Books
1. F.G. Bell (2007) Engineering Geology, Elsevier, 2nd ed.
2. F.G.H. Blyth & M.H. deFreitas (2001) A Geology for Engineers, Elsevier, 7th ed.
3. Structural Geology, 2010. Fossen H. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
4. Gonzalez de Vallejo, L.I. and Ferrer, M., 2011, Geological Engineering,
CRC Press/Balkema, 678 pp.
5. Legget, R.F. and P.F. Karrow, 1983, Handbook of Geology in Civil Engineering,
McGraw Hill, 1340 pp.

Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1. GENERAL GEOLOGY
1.1 Introduction and importance of geology in civil engineering 1
1.2 Topgraphical formation – continents 1
1.3 Topographical formation – oceans 1
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1.4 Gradational forces- definition and its activities 1
1.5 Weathering-definition and its types 1
1.6 Weathering-products and its thickness and depth estimation 1
1.7 Landslides-definition and classification 1
1.8 Landslides-prediction and prevention techniques 1
2 Seismology
2.1 Seismic waves definition, types and its characteristics 1
2.2 Interior of the earth – physical, chemical and its properties, 2
and behaviour of seismic waves
2.3 Plate Tectonics theory – Origin and concept of theory, 1
definition of plates, types, movement and its characteristics
2.4 Convectional current -plate movement, earthquake, types and 2
its classification, terminologies, ratings of earthquake
3 Minerals and Rocks
3.1 Minerals – definition, physical properties description 1
3.2 Minerals - Important minerals physical properties 2
3.3 Rocks – origin, types 1
3.4 Rocks – Physical, Mechanical and engineering properties 2
3.5 Rocks – important igneous rocks physical, mechanical and 1
engineering properties
3.6 Rocks – important sedimentary rocks physical, mechanical 1
and engineering properties
3.7 Rocks – important metamorphic rocks physical, mechanical 1
and engineering properties
3.8 Rocks – Igneous textures and structures 1
3.9 Rocks – sedimentary textures and structures 1
3.10 Rocks – metamorphic textures and structures 1
4 Structures of rocks
4.1 Folds – types and its relevance to planning and in civil works 1
4.2 Faults – types and its relevance to planning and in civil works 1
4.3 Joints - types and its relevance to planning and in civil works 1
4.4 Geological structure – geological map interpretation and 2
analysis (cross section).
4.5 Geophysical study – estimation of thickness and depth of soil 1
and weathered rock and depth to bed rock.
5 Engineering Geology
5.1 Geological investigation on site analysis for construction of 1
dams
tunnels
tall buildings and bridges
roads
Total Hours 36
Course Designers:
1. S.Palanivel spciv@tce.edu
2. Mr.S.Subramanian ssciv@tce.edu
14CE250 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE BS 3 0 0 3
Preamble
The objective of this course is to make the students to understand the basic concepts of
environment, ecology and scientific concepts of the current environmental issues. The course also
emphasizes the importance of conserving and protecting the environment for sustainable
development
Course Outcomes

Expected Expected
attainment Proficiency
Level % (grade)
80 A
CO1. Explain the nature of various eco systems, their structure, composition, Understand
function, inter-dependency and values 80 A
CO2. Enunciate the values of bio-diversity, threats and suggest Understand
appropriate strategies for its conservation
CO3. Identify sources of environmental pollution and assess its Apply 80 A
implications
CO4. Implement strategies in achieving sustainable development and disaster Apply 80 A
management
CO5. Demonstrate various ethical principles, legal acts and traditional value Apply 80 A
systems in the conservation of environment
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO PO PO PO P PO12 PSO1 PSO2

7 8 9 10 O
1
1
CO L - - - - - M - - - - - L -
1
CO L - - - - - M - - - - - - -
2
CO S L - - - - S - - - - - - -
3
CO S L - - - - S - - - - - - -
4
CO S L - - - - S - - - - - L L
5
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 20 20 40 40
Analyze -- -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- -- --
Create -- -- -- --
11. Explain biotic and abiotic components of an ecosystem

12. Discuss any one energy flow model of an ecosystem
13. Describe various types of ecological pyramids
14. Sketch the food web and food chain in a forest environment
15. Report on the various stages of ecological succession.
16. Discuss the various values of bio-diversity and its importance
17. List a few hot spots in India
18. Demonstrate the In-situ and Ex-situ conservation of bio-diversity
19. India is a mega bio-diversity region. Discuss
20. Apply a pilot model to combat deforestation
21. Review the ecological and commercial uses of forest resources
22. Write the significance surface water on the ground water resources
23. Summarize the major consequences of over exploitation of natural resources
24. Identify the sources of air, water and soil pollution through various case studies
25. Name a few primary and secondary air pollutants
26. Demonstrate the effect of green house gases and acid rain
27. Summarize various precaution methods to be followed during earth quake,
tsunami and flood
1. Define “Tsunami”
2. Explain the major causes for flood
3. How do you practice at the time of Tsunami and Earth quake
Execute the concept of 3R principles for the prevention of environmental pollution
1. Put into practice a green building for energy saving structure
2. Specify national and international strategies to control pollution
List a few renewable energy sources for sustainable development
3. Describe the advantages of hydrogen economy over carbon economy in the
environmental aspects

28. Appraise the role of individual responsibility and ethics on the preservation of
environment
29. Organize the various environmental acts to control pollution
30. Report the significance of water pollution act 1974
31. Compare the traditional values with a modern lifestyle and its impact on the
environmental crises
Concept Map
Syllabus
Environment and Ecosystem - Multidisciplinary nature of environment -Ecosystem- Types of
Ecosystem-Energy flow in ecosystem-Ecological succession-pyramids - Loss of ecosystem -Case
studies. Biodiversity and Natural resources–Biodiversity-types, values and threats -Bio-geographical
classification, Hot spots of biodiversity-Endangered and endemic species- conservation of bio-
diversity. Natural resources-types-over exploitation, effects and control. Role of individual in
conservation of natural resources - Case studies. Environmental pollution and control -
Environmental pollution – types, causes, effects and control measures – Radiation hazards -
protection and safety-Climate change – causes and its effect on environment– acid rain - ozone layer
depletion-remedial measures. Disaster management - case studies. Strategies for Sustainable
Environment - Green Chemistry –Zero carbon technology, Hydrogen economy - Green Building
concepts –Millennium Development Goals. Environmental Ethics and Values Social issues and the
environment, Need for public awareness, Environmental Ethics, Traditional value systems in India,
Legal provisions-Environmental acts and issues in enforcement, Value education-Safety, health and
environment, National and International Organizations in Environment, Objectives and functions-
Case studies
Text Book
8. Kausik and Kausik, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, 3 rd Edition, New Age
International Publishers, New Delhi, 2008
Reference Books
9. Wright and Nebel, ‘Environmental Science towards a sustainable’, future, Prentice
Hall of India Ltd,2000.
10. S.K. Garg and Garg, ‘Ecological and Environmental studies’, Khanna Publishers,
Delhi,2006
11. Gillbert M. Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, Second
Edition, pearson education publication , Delhi,2004.
Module
No.
1.0 Environment and Ecosystem
1.1 Multidisciplinary nature of environment 1
1.2 Ecosystem-Types of Ecosystem (forest, grass land, 1
desert, aquatic ecosystem)
1.3 Energy flow in ecosystem, Ecological succession-
2
pyramids
1.4 Loss of ecosystem - Case studies 2
2.0 Biodiversity and Natural resources
2.1 Biodiversity-types, values and threats 2
2.2 Bio-geographical classification and Hot spots of 1
biodiversity
2.3 Endangered and endemic species – Insitu , Ex-situ- 2
conservation of bio-diversity
2.4 Natural resources- types-Forest, water, land, food, energy 2
2.5 Over exploitation of natural resources - effects and 2
control
2.6 Role of individual in the conservation of natural 1
resources-Case studies.
3.0 Environmental Pollution and Control
3.1 Environmental pollution – Air, water, soil and noise 3
pollution causes, effects and control measures
3.2 Radiation hazards - protection and safety 1
3.3 Climate change – causes and its effect on environment– 2
acid rain - ozone layer depletion-Remedial measures
3.4 Disaster management (earthquake, tsunami and flood) - 2
case studies
4.0 Strategies for Sustainable Environment
4.1 Green Chemistry–Zero carbon technology, Hydrogen 2
economy
4.2 Green Building concepts 1
4.3 Millennium Development Goals 1
5.0 Environmental Ethics and Values
5.1 Social issues and environment- need for public awareness 1
5.2 Environmental Ethics, Traditional value systems in India 2
5.3 Legal provisions- Environmental acts - Air, water, soil, 2
forest and wildlife acts - issues in enforcement
5.4 Value education-Safety, health and environment 1
5.5 National and International Environmental Organizations - 2
Objectives and functions- Case studies
Total hours 36
Course Designers:
1. Dr.M.Kottaisamy mmksami@tce.edu
2. Dr.T.Vel Rajan tvciv@tce.edu
3 Dr.S.Chandran schandran@tce.edu
BUILDING MATERIALS AND
14CE270 PC 2 0 2 3
TECHNOLOGY
Preamble
This theory cum practical course is designed to give an exposure on the theoretical concepts of
various materials and techniques in construction.
It also gives an overview on planning aspects of residential building components, lighting and
ventilation as per NBC provisions.
This course also aims to apply the theoretical knowledge to practical problems.
Course Outcomes
COs for Theory part:

will be able to Attainment Proficiency
Level in % Level in
grade
CO1- Identify and classify buildings based on National
Building Codal (NBC) provisions Understand 85 S
CO2 - Orient and plan, components of residential
building such as: open spaces, habitable rooms, Apply 85 S
kitchen, bath and water closet as per NBC
provisions with lighting and ventilation
requirements
CO3 - Identify various construction materials like
stones, bricks, timber, cement, lime, concrete, Understand 85 S
steel, plastics, flyash, GGBS, Silica fume, PCC
and RCC. Explain their properties with specific
utilization in the construction industry.
CO4 - Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of

the principles and concepts relevant to
Apply
construction techniques in super structure such 85 S
as: masonry work, arches, lintels, staircase,
DPC, floor– ground floors, upper floors, flooring
roof – flat and pitched roofs, weathering
courses- types, pointing, finishing, scaffolding,
shuttering, shoring, underpinning. Able to
apply appropriate technique for given
situations
COs for Practical part
Expected Expected
Level in % Level in
grade
CO5 Apply NBC provisions and plan components of Analyse 85 S
residential buildings for the given plot size
with suitable lighting and ventilation
provisions
CO6 Conduct tests on building materials like bricks, 85 S
stones, timbers, steel and cement. Apply
CO7 Use appropriate tools and equipment for 85 S

testing building material such as: bricks, Apply
stones, steel rods, timber
CO8 Demonstrate different types bonds in brick Apply 85 S
masonry work
CO9 Identify and classify the different types of Apply 85 S

staircases in the campus discussing its
details

COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO7. L L L L
CO8. M S M L L L L
CO3 M L M L L L L
CO4 M L M L L L L
CO5 M S M M M L L
CO6 M
CO7 M
CO8 M M M
CO9 M
Assessment Pattern: Theory Part:
Continuous Test 3 Terminal

Assessment Examination
Bloom’s
Tests (Theory part
Category
Practical only for 100
1 2
Examination marks)
Remember 20 10 (30 marks) 20
Understand 40 30 40
Apply 40 60 40
Analyse 0 0 0
Evaluate 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0
Practical Part: Continuous Assessment mode
Course Level Assessment Questions (Theory Part)
32. List the classification of building as per NBC

33. Sivakasi Crackers factory is planning to store its finished goods. Suggest a
suitable building giving its salient features.
34. Differentiate institutional and commercial buildings.
1. Define the term orientation of buildings

2. Write the meaning of habitable room
3. How should a residential building of 300sq.m with kitchen, bedroom, living
room and bath & water closet be positioned to derive max benefit from natural
agencies?
1. As a civil engineer how would you recommend a stone for building

construction
2. Write the purpose of addition gypsum to cement.
3. How is proportioning of ingredients done for manufacturing concrete?
1. Mention the use of lap in brick masonry

2. Write the purpose of lacing course in stone masonry
3. Identify why a double scaffolding is preferred than single scaffolding for stone
masonry construction? Give suitable reasons.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Orientation of Buildings: Classification of buildings as per NBC. Site selection and

its influencing factors, National Building Codal provisions for components of
residential buildings: Open spaces, Living room, Bed room, Kitchen, Bathroom
and Water closet, National Building Codal provisions for lighting and ventilation
aspects in buildings. Materials for Construction: Natural materials- stones,
aggregates, timber, lime. Man- made materials: bricks, cement, steel, concrete,
plastics, flyash, GGBS, Silica fume, PCC and RCC. Technologies of Construction:
Masonry- Stone and Brick, Damp Proof Course, Lintels and Arches, Flooring,
Roofing, Stairs, Scaffolding, Pointing, Plastering, Painting, Special Construction
Techniques: Shoring, Underpinning. Construction Tools and Machinery: Tools:
plumb bob, spirit level, level tube, rammer, spade, shovels, straight edge, mortar
pans, sieves, trolley, vibrators, bulldozers, draglines, cableways, belt conveyors
Machinery: batching plants, transit mixers and vibratory trucks for ready mixed
concrete, pumps, air compressors, hoists and cranes, Choice of construction
equipments for different types of works.
References:
Text Book
12. Punmia B.C., Ashok Kumar Jain, Arun Kumar Jain, “Building Construction”, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd., 2012
Reference Books
1. Rangwala S.C., “Engineering Materials” Charotar Publishing House, Anand, India,
2014
2. Deodhar S.V., “Construction Equipment and Job Planning”, Khanna Publishers, New
Delhi, 2014
3. Surendra Singh, “Building Materials”, Vikas Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1996
4. Bindra and Arora, “Building Materials and Construction”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New
Delhi, 1994
5. National Building Code of India, Bureau of Indian Standards, 2005
6. Peurifoy. R. L, “Construction Planning, Equipment and Methods”, McGraw Hill Co.,
New York, 2010
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule (Theory Part)
Module Topic No. of

No. Lectures
1.0 Orientation Buildings
1.1 Classification of Buildings as per NBC

1
1.2 Site selection and its influencing factors
1.3 National Building Codal provisions for components of residential buildings:

2
Open spaces, Living room, Bed room, Kitchen, Bathroom and Water closet
1.4 National Building Codal provisions for lighting and ventilation aspects in 1
buildings
2.0 Materials for Construction
2.1 Natural materials - Stones, timber, lime, aggregates – properties and uses 2
2.2 Man made materials- Bricks, cement, concrete, steel, plastics, flyash, GGBS, 2
silica fume, PCC and RCC
3.0 Technologies of Construction
3.1 Stone Masonry 2
3.2 Brick Masonry 2
3.3 Damp Proof Course

2
3.4 Lintels and Arches
3.5 Flooring 2
3.6 Roofing 2
3.7 Stairs 2
3.8 Scaffolding 1
3.9 Pointing, Plastering, Painting 1
3.10 Special Construction Techniques 1

4.0 Construction Tools: plumb bob, spirit level, level tube, rammer, spade,
shovels, straight edge, mortar pans, sieves, trolley
1
Machinery: batching plants, transit mixers and vibratory trucks for ready
mixed concrete, pumps, air compressors, hoists and cranes
Total Hours 24
List of Exercises for Practical Part
Module Exercise No. No. of

No. Lectures
1. Apply NBC provisions and plan components of residential 2

buildings for the given plot size
2. Apply suitable lighting and ventilation provisions of NBC for 2
components of residential buildings for the given plot size
3. Conduct tests on building materials - bricks 2
4. Conduct tests on building materials - stones 2
5. Conduct tests on building materials - timber 2
6. Conduct tests on building materials - steel 2
7. Conduct tests on building materials - cement 2
8. Demonstrate different types bonds in brick masonry work 2

9. Demonstrate different types bonds in brick masonry work 2
10. Identify and classify the different types of staircases in the campus 2
discussing their details
11. Identify and classify the different types of masonry in the campus 2
discussing their details
12. Identify and classify the different types of roofs, floors, finishes provided 2
in the campus discussing its features
Total Hours 24
Course Designers:
1. Dr. G. Chitra gcciv@tce.edu
2. Dr. D. Brindha dbciv@tce.edu
3. Ms. D. Srividya dsciv@tce.edu
3.
14CE280 SURVEY LAB I
PC 0 0 2 1
Preamble
The theory part of Surveying can be experimented in Survey lab I. This includes the experiments on
chains, compass, plane table and levels.
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, students will Expected Expected
be able to Attainment Proficiency
Level in % Level in
grade
(CO1): Select the appropriate surveying tools in the Apply 95 S

field
(CO2): Measure, book and plot the details of the given Apply 95 S
terrain.
(CO3): Perform the required adjustments as well as Apply
compensate the errors in the field measurements. 95 S
(CO4): Locate the field position on the plan or vice versa Apply
(CO5): Locate the elevation of given points with respect
to a given datum. Apply
95 S
95 S
(CO6): Plot LS and CS of the given terrain Apply 95 S

CO1. M L L L - S - - - L - - L L
CO2. S L L S - S - S - L - - M L
CO3. S S S S - - - S - L - - M L
CO4. S S S S - S - - - L - - M L
CO5. S S S S - S - - - L - - M L
CO6. S S S S M S - - - S - - M L
List of Experiments:
1. Chain survey – Ranging and Chaining
2. Prismatic Compass – Open traverse
3. Prismatic Compass – Closed traverse
4. Plan table surveying – Radiation and Intersection method
5. Three point problem – Trial and Error method
6. Three point problem – Tracing sheet method
7. Three point problem – Bessel’s method
8. Three point problem – Right angle method
9. Two point problem
10. Fly levelling
11. Check levelling
12. Plotting of Longitudinal sectioning and Cross sectioning
Course Designers:

14CE290 WORK SHOP PC 0 0 2 1
(Common to B.E. Mechanical Engineering and B.E. Mechatronics Engineering)
Preamble
Workshop is a hands-on training practice to Mechanical and Civil engineering students. It deals with
fitting, carpentry, sheet metal and related exercises. Also, it will induce the habit of selecting right
tools, planning the job and its execution.
Prerequisite
NIL
Course Outcomes

Expected Expected
Level % level
CO1. Construct the different laminas of regular shapes. Apply 100 A

CO2. Prepare the different types of fitting using MS plate. Apply 100 A
Apply 100 A
CO3. Create simple sheet metal components
Apply 100 A
CO4. Prepare the different types of joints using wooden material.
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO PO PO PO PO PO12 PSO1 PSO2

7 8 9 10 11
CO M M L L L - - - M - - - L -
1
CO M L - - - - - - - - - - L -
2
CO L - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3
CO M L L L L - - - L - - - L -
4
CO7. S L L L L L L L L L L L
CO8. S L S L L L L L L L L L
CO9. S S S L L L L L L L L L
CO10. S L S L L L L L L L L L
Syllabus
I Card Board Exercises (4 Hours/6 periods)
1. Construction of cube, Triangular, square, Pentagonal and Hexagonal Prisms (Any one solid)
2. Construction of Triangular, square, Pentagonal and Hexagonal Pyramids (Any one solid)
II Fitting (6 Hours/9 periods)
Preparation of Square, V, L, Gauge, Taper, Radius and Dove tail Fitting (Any one Fitting Exercise)
III Sheet Metal Exercises (6 Hours/9 periods)
Preparation of Liter Cone, Dust pan (Straight, Taper) and Tray (Straight, Taper) - (Any one sheet
metal Exercise)
IV Carpentry (6 Hours/9 periods)
Preparation of Door frame using Mortise & Tenon joint and Mitered Mortise & Tenon joint.
V Demo on Plumbing (2 Hours/3 periods)
Assessment Pattern
All the exercises are evaluated on continuous assessment basis based on the fit/finish of the
component, measurement and record. Students are given with additional attempt on each trade for
their better performance (within the specified time of each trade). The distribution of marks in each
trade is as follows:
Trade Fit/Finish Record Total (Marks)
Card Board Exercises 15 5 20
Fitting 15 5 20
Sheet Metal 25 5 30
Carpentry 25 5 30
 Students are evaluated based on continuous assessment only and pass mark
should be minimum 50. Also no terminal examination for this course.
 If he/she got less than 50 marks, he/she has to undergo the terminal
examination for 100 marks in subsequent semester as supplementary
examination.
Course Designers:
1. C. Paramasivam cpmech@tce.edu
2. ML. Mahadevan mlmmech@tce.edu
FOURIER SERIES AND Category L T P Credit
14CE310 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL 2 1 0 3
EQUATIONS
Preamble
An engineering student needs to have some basic mathematical tools and techniques. This emphasizes the
development of rigorous logical thinking and analytical skills of the student and appraises him the complete
procedure for solving different kinds of problems that occur in engineering. Based on this the course aims at
giving adequate exposure in the theory and applications of Fourier series, Fourier Transforms, PDE’s and BVP.
Prerequisite
Knowledge on Integration and basic differentiation
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Course Outcomes Bloom’s attainment level Proficiency
level
(%) (%)
CO1 : Express the periodic functions arising in the Apply 70 B

study of engineering problems as Fourier series of
Sines and Cosines
CO2: Find the Fourier series for discrete data 60 B

Apply
using Harmonic analysis.
CO3 Solve some of the well-known integral 70 B

transforms (like Fourier, Fourier Sine and Cosine) Apply
and properties
CO4: Solve Partial Differential Equations, linear, 65 B

nonlinear, homogeneous and non-homogeneous, understand
by various methods
CO5: Formulate simple Engineering problems as Understand 60 C

Partial Differential Equations and state the
boundary conditions.
CO6: Solve the standard Partial Differential 70 B

Apply
Equations arising in engineering problems like
Wave equation, Heat flow equation (one
dimensional Cartesian coordinates) by Fourier
series.
S S
CO1 S S S S S
CO2 M M
CO3. S M M
CO4. S S S M
CO5. S M S M
CO6. M M S S
CO7 S S S S S

Bloom’s Category Terminal Examination
1 2 3
Remember 10 10 10 0
Apply 60 60 60 70
Analyze 0 0 0 0
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0
CO7: Solve the standard Partial Differential Apply 65 B

Equations arising in engineering Problems like heat
flow equation (two dimensional Cartesian and
polar coordinates) by Fourier series.
Mapping with Programme Outcomes and Programme Specific Outcomes
Assessment Pattern

1. Define periodic function with an example.

2 
cos n u
2. Prove that x2 =
3
  (1)
n 1
n
n2
  x   .
 x2 , 0  x 1
3. Find Fourier cosine series of f ( x)   .
2  x, 1  x  2
1. Define harmonic analysis in Fourier series

2. If a function f (x) is given by the following tables of values find the harmonic analysis of the
function up to third harmonic.
x 0 1 2 3 4 5
y 9 18 24 28 26 20
3. Compute the harmonic analysis for the following table values up to second harmonic
x 0 /6 /3 /2 2 / 3 5 / 6
y 10 12 15 20 17 11
1. State Shifting Property in Fourier transforms.

e 
 ax
2. Find FST of e ax

, a  0 , Find FS xe ax  and FS   and deduce the value of
 x 

sin sx
o x dx

  2
dx  1  cos x 
3. Apply Parseval’s identity, evaluate 0 ( x2  1)2  4 (ii) 0  x  dx

sin 4 x
(iii) 0 x 2 dx
1. Find the PDE by eliminating arbitrary functions from (i) z  e ny ( x  y)

(ii) lx  my  nz   ( x  y  z ) .
2 2 2
2. Solve the following Partial Differential Equation
(i) z  px  qy  p 2   q 2   (ii) z  px  qy  3 pq .
3. Solve ( D
3
 D 2 D' DD' 2 ) z  e 2 x y  cos( x  y) .
1. Find the temperature u ( x, t ) in a bar which is perfectly insulated laterally whose ends are
kept at temperature 00 c and whose initial temperature in ( o C ) is f ( x ) = x ( 10 – x ). Given
that its length is 10 cm consent cross section of area 1 cm 2, density 10.6 gm / cm 3 thermal
conductivity 1. 04 cal / cm degree and specific heat 0. 0 56 cl /cm degree. Frame the
boundary conditions for the given data.
2. A bar of length a is at 0 temperature. At t = 0 the end x = a is suddenly raised to

temperature u 0 and the end x = 0 is insulated. Find the temperature at the any point x of the
bar at any time t > 0 , assuming that the surface of the bar is insulated. Frame the boundary
conditions for the given data.
3. An infinite string is initially at rest along the x – axis. It’s one end which is at x = 0 is given a
periodic transverse displacement a 0 sin t, t > 0 show that the displacement of any
 tx x
a 0 sin  ( c ), t  c 
point of the string at any time is given by y ( x, t ) =   where c is
x
 0, t  
 c 
the velocity. Frame the boundary conditions for the given data.
Course Outcome 6(CO6)
35. A string is stretched and fastened to two points’ l’ apart .Motion is started by
displacing the string into the form y=k(lx-x2) from which it is released at time t=0 find
the displacement of any point of the string at a distance x from one end at any time t.
36. A bar 10 cm long has originally a temperature of 00 c throughout its length. At time t =
0 second the temperature at the end x = 0 is raised to 200 c , while that at the end x = 10
is raised to 400 c . Determine the resulting temperature distribution in the bar.
37. A rod of length l has its ends A and B kept at 00c and 1200c respectively until steady
state condition prevail. If the temperature at B is reduced to 00c and kept so while that
of A is maintained, find the temperature distribution of the rod.
1. A thin semi circular plate of radius a has its bounding diameter kept at temperature
zero and its circumference at f ( ),0     . Find the steady state temperature

distribution at any point of the plate. If f( ) =k, find the temperature.
2. An infinitely long plane uniform plate is bounded by two parallel edges x > 0 and x= l
and an end at right angles to them. The breadth of this edge y = 0 is l and is
maintained at a temperature f(x). All the other three edges are at temperature 00c. Find
the steady state temperature at any interior point of the plate
3. Find the steady state temperature in a circular plate of radius ‘a’ which has one half of
its circumference at 00c and the half at k0c.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Fourier Series: Dirichlet’s conditions, General Fourier Series, Half range Sine and Cosine series, Change of
Interval, Harmonic Analysis, Complex form of Fourier Series. Fourier Transformation: Fourier Integral
Theorem, Fourier Transform, Fourier Sine and Cosine Transforms, properties, Parseval’s Identity, Discrete
Fourier Transform, Discrete Time Fourier Transform. Partial Differential Equations: Formation, Solution of
standard types of first order equations, Lagrange’s linear equation, Linear partial differential equations of
second and higher order with constant coefficient. Boundary Value Problems: Classification of Second Order
linear partial differential equations, One-dimensional Wave equation, One dimensional heat equation, Solution
by Fourier Series, Steady State Solution of two dimensional heat equation in Cartesian Co-ordinates, Laplace
equation in Polar Co-ordinates, Solution by Fourier Series method.
Text Books
38. B.S. Grewal: Higher Engineering Mathematics, 39th Edn. , Khanna Publishers,
New Delhi, 2007.
39. Veerarajan .T, “Engineering Mathematics”, 3rd Edition. , Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2004.
Reference Books
1. Kreyszig,E., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John wiley and sons,(Asia)Pte Ltd.,
Singapore.2006.
2. Kandasamy.P, Thilagavathy.K, Gunavathy.K , “Engineering Mathematics Vol. III”,

S.Chand &
Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.
Module Topic No. of

No. Lectures
1. Fourier Series
1.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, General Fourier Series 2
Tutorial 1
1.2 Half range Sine and Cosine series 1
Tutorial 1
1.3 Change of Interval 1
Tutorial 1
1.4 Harmonic Analysis 1
Tutorial 1
1.5 Complex form of Fourier Series 1
Tutorial 1
2. Fourier Transformation
2.1 Fourier Integral Theorem, Fourier Transform 2
Tutorial 1
2.2 Fourier Sine and Cosine Transforms 1
Tutorial 2
2.3 Properties, Parseval’s Identity 1
Tutorial 1
2.4 Discrete Fourier Transform, Discrete time Fourier Transform 1
Tutorial 1
3 Partial Differential Equations
3.1 Formation 1
Tutorial 1
3.2 Solution of standard types of first order equations 2

Tutorial 1
3.3 Lagrange’s linear equation 1
Tutorial 1
3.4 Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order 1

with constant coefficient
Tutorial 1
4 Boundary Value Problems
4.1 Classification of Second Order linear partial differential 1

equations
Tutorial 2
4.2 One-dimensional Wave equation, Solution by Fourier Series 2
Tutorial 2
4.3 One dimensional heat equation, Solution by Fourier Series 2
Tutorial 2
4.4 Steady State Solution of two dimensional heat equation in 2

Cartesian Co-ordinates, Solution by Fourier Series
Tutorial 2
4.5 Laplace equation in Polar Co-ordinates, Solution by Fourier 1

Series
Tutorial 2
Total 48
.
Course Designers:
Prof. P. Subramanian psmat@tce.edu
Dr. M. Sivanandha Saraswathy Sivanandha@tce.edu
ncmat@tce.edu
Dr. N. Chitra
14CE321 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS PC 2 2 0 3
Preamble
This course offers the basic modules of mechanics of solids such as articulated structures,
suspension cables and suspension bridges. This course aims at determination of axial and bending
stresses, design of circular shafts, slope and deflection of beams, effect of moving loads and
construction of influence lines.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of Engineering Mathematics and physics.
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, students will be Expected Expected
able to Attainment Proficiency
Level in% Levelin
grade
CO1 Compute axial and bending stress. Apply 70 A
CO2 Select sections for circular shafts Apply 70 A
CO3 Determine slope and deflection of determinate beams Apply 70 A
CO4 Calculate forces in member of a truss Apply 70 A
CO5 Demonstrate the effect of moving loads and to construct Apply 70 A

influence line diagram for determinate beams
CO6 Analyse suspension cables, three hinged stiffening girders Apply 70 A

and three hinged arches

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 S S M - - L - - - M - - L L
CO2 M M - - - - - - - - L - L L
CO3 S S - - - - - - - - - - L L
CO4 S S - M - M - - - - - - M M
CO5 S S - - - L M - M S - - M M
CO6 S S M - - L M - - - - - M L

Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 80 80 80 80
Analyze -- -- -- --
Create -- -- -- --
Course Level Assessment Question
40. A rectangular column of size 250mm x 350mm is subjected to a load of 500kN

at 120mm from the shorter edge and 45mm from the longer edge. Determine
the stress distribution. What is the maximum load the column can sustain if the
permissible stresses are +3.5 MPa and -35.0 MPa.
41. A 6m long truss member comprises two ISA 100x100x10 section placed back
to back. Determine its maximum load carrying capacity assuming E = 190GPa
and σy = 360MPa.
42. A mild steel square tube of external dimensions 100mm and 5mm wall
thickness is 3.6m long. Determine the maximum permissible eccentricity of
load in the axial direction if the load is 80 percent of the Euler’s load. Assume E
= 200GPa and σy = 250MPa when
i.) Both ends are hinged
ii.) One end is fixed and other end is free
1. How will you obtain deflection of a close coiled helical spring?

2. Find the power transmitted by a shaft of 60mm diameter at 3Hz. If the maximum
permissible shear stress is 70N/mm2.
3. A solid shaft has to transmit 337.5kW at 100rpm. If the shear stress is not to exceed
65N/mm2 and the internal diameter is 0.6 of the external diameter, find the external and
internal diameters assuming that the maximum torque is 1.3times the mean.
43. Develop the governing differential equation of beams.

44. A cantilever beam of span 6m is subjected to two point loads of 10kN and 15kN
at 6m and 4m from the fixed end. Obtain the slope and deflection under the load
points.
45. A simply supported beam of span 4.5m is subjected to a uniformly distributed
load of 12kN/m over the left half of the span. Obtain the maximum deflection
using Macaulay’s method.
46. Determine the force in the members of the truss shown in the following Figure
47. Determine the force in the members of the cantilever truss shown in Fig.
48. Determine the force in the members BC, CE and EF of the truss of problem 5
using method of sections.

49. Mention the propositions related to two point loads.
50. A uniformly distributed load of intensity 30kN/m crosses a simply supported
beam of span 60m from left to right. The length of udl is 15m. Find the value of
maximum bending moment at a section 20m from left end. Find also the absolute
maximum bending moment and shear force in the beam.
51. Construct the influence line diagram for shear force at section 3m and for
bending moment at 4m for a simply supported beam of span 6m. Using the
influence line diagram, obtain the shear force at 3m and bending moment at 4m
if the beam is subjected to two point loads of 15kN and 20kN at 1.5m and 4.5m
respectively.
1. A suspension cable 100m span and 15m dip is stiffened with a three hinged girder.
If a concentrated load of magnitude 100kN crosses the span, determine the
maximum tension in the cable. Also, determine the greatest bending moment and
shear force in the stiffening girder. State the position of the load in the above cases.
2. A light cable 18m long is supported at two ends at the same level. The supports are
16m apart. The cable supports 120N load dividing the distance into two equal
parts. Find the shape of the cable and the tension in the cable.
3. A three hinged symmetric parabolic arch of span 60m and rise 12m is subjected to
a concentrated load of 40kN acting at a distance 10m from its left support and a
uniformly distributed load of intensity 10kN/m acting over its entire right half
portion. Draw the bending moment diagram
Concept Map
Syllabus
Axial and bending stresses: Direct and bending stresses – uniaxial and biaxial eccentricities – middle
third rule – core of the section – analysis of long column – different end conditions – Euler’s theory –
Rankine’s formula.Torsion of circular shafts: Introduction – derivation of torsion equation –
assumptions – power transmitted by shafts – design of shafts. Slope and deflection of beams:
Determination of slope and deflection of determinate beams – cantilever, simply supported and
over hanging beam - Double Integration Method, Macaulay’s Method, Moment area Method and
Conjugate Beam Method. Analysis of Trusses: Force in members of a truss – Method of Joints –
Method of Sections. Moving Loads and Influence Line: Influence lines for reactions, shear force and
bending moment in statically determinate structures due to concentrated and distributed moving
loads. Cables , stiffening girders and arches: Analysis of cables, three hinged stiffening girders and
three hinged arches
Text Book
1. Roger T. Fenner, J.N. Reddy., Mechanics of solids and Structures second Edition, CRC Press -
2012
2. Punmia, B.C., Arun Kumar, Ashok Kumar., Theory of structures, Laxmi Publications, New
Delhi, 2002.
Reference Books
1. S S Rattan., Strenth of Material, McGraw Hill Educational Private (india)Limited.2011
2. Bhavikatti S S, “Structural Analysis”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi. 2009
3. Rajput., Strength of materials, S.Chand publishers, 4th edition, 2006
4. Thandavamoorthy, ‘‘Analysis of Structures”, Oxford &IBH Publishers, New Delhi.2008
5. Junnarkar, S.B. & Shah, H.J.., Mechanics of structures, vol.I, II, Charotar Publishing House,
India, 1999
6. NPTEL material http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105106116/
Course Content
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1.0 Axial and Bending Stresses
1.1 Direct and bending stresses 1
1.2 Uniaxial and biaxial eccentricities 1
Tutorial 2
1.3 Middle third rule, core of the section 1

1.4 Analysis of long column,different end conditions 2
Tutorial 3
1.5 Euler’s theory, Rankine’s formula 2
Tutorial 2
2.0 Torsion of circular shafts
2.1 Introduction, derivation of torsion equation 1
2.2 Power transmitted by shafts and design of shafts 2
Tutorial 3
3.0 Slope and deflection of beams
3.1 Determination of slope and deflection of determinate beams – cantilever, 2
simply supported and over hanging beam by double integration Method
Tutorial 2
3.2 Macaulay’s Method 1
Tutorial 1
3.3 Moment area method 1
Tutorial 1
4.0 Analysis of Trusses
4.1 Force in members of a truss by Method of Joints 2
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
Tutorial 2
4.2 Force in members of a truss by Method of Sections 2
Tutorial 2
5.0 Moving Loads and Influence Line
5.1 Influence lines for reactions, shear force and bending moment in statically 2
determinate structures due to concentrated and distributed moving loads.
Tutorial 2
6.0 Cables, Suspension Bridges and Arches
6.1 Analysis of suspension cables 1
6.2 Three hinged stiffening girders 1
Tutorial 2
6.3 Three hinged arches 2
Tutorial 2
Total hours (24 Theory + 24 Tutorials ) 48

Course Designers:
14CE330 FLUID MECHANICS PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble
Fluid Mechanics is a subject of engineering science deals with the behaviour of fluids at rest as well
as in motion. It is an important subject with unlimited practical applications ranging from biological
system systems to automobiles, airplanes and spacecraft propulsion. Thus this subject is given
considerable importance in Civil, Mechanical and Chemical Engineering at core as well as at
professional levels.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals knowledge of Engineering Mathematics and Physics
Course Outcomes

will be able to: Attainment Proficiency
level in% Level in grade
(CO1) Find the basic properties of fluids and Apply 70 A

their application in real world problems.
(CO2) Compute the variation of pressure in Apply 70 A
fluid at rest and calculate the hydrostatic forces
and point of application on a plane or curved
surface.
(CO3) Derive the continuity equation for Apply 70 A
compressible and incompressible flow
(CO4) Apply Bernoulli’s equation to solve a Apply 70 A
variety of fluid flow problems.
(CO5) Estimate the major and minor losses in Apply 70 A
pipe flow and calculate the flow through pipes
connected in series and in parallels
(CO6) Determine the boundary layer thickness Understand 70 A
and other boundary layer properties

CO9. S S - - - - - - - - - - L -
CO10. S S L L - L - - - - - - M L
CO3. S S - S - - - - - - - - M -
CO4. S S - S - - - - - - - - M -
CO5. S S L M - L - - - - - - M L
CO6. M M - - - - - - - - - - L -
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 60 60 60 60
Analyse --- --- --- ---
Evaluate --- --- --- ---
Create --- --- --- ---
1. State Newton’s law of viscosity. Give examples for Newtonian fluids.

2. A cylindrical shaft of 90mm diameter rotates about a vertical axis inside a fixed
cylindrical tube of length 50cm and 95mm diameter. If the space between the tube
and shaft is filled by a lubricant of viscosity 2 poise, determine the power required to
overcome viscous resistance when the shaft is rotated at a speed of 240 rpm
3. The space between the two square flat parallel plates is filled with oil. Each side of the plate
is 75cm. The thickness of the oil film is 15mm. The upper plate which moves at 3m/s
requires a force of 120N to maintain the speed, Determine (i) The dynamic viscosity of oil
and (ii) The kinematic viscosity of oil, if the specific gravity of oil is 0.95.
4. A mass of liquid weighs 500 N when exposed to standard earth’s gravity g =
9.81m/s2. (i) What is its mass? and (ii) What will be its weight in a planet with
acceleration due to gravity of 3.5m/s2.
1. Convert 1kg/cm2 into equal head of water and mercury

2. U tube differential mercury manometer is connected on one side to pipe A containing oil of
specific gravity 1.5 while on the other side to pipe B containing oil of specific gravity 0.9. The
pipe A lies 3m below pipe B. The mercury level in the limb communicating with pipe A lies
2m below the center of pipe A and 3m below center of pipe B in the limb communicating
with pipe B. Determine the difference in pressure between the two pipes.
3. A 6m deep tank contains 4 m of water and 2 m of oil of relative density 0.88. Determine the
pressure at the bottom of the tank and at the interface of two liquids.
4. Find the pressure represented by a column of (i) 10 cm of water, (ii) 5 cm of oil of
relative density 0.75 and (iii) 2 cm of mercury.
1. Prove that the total energy at any point of the fluid is constant for ideal steady
incompressible fluid flow.
2. Obtain relevant stream function for the given velocity components of steady incompressible
flow, u = x + y and v = x – y
3. The diameters of a pipe at the sections X and Y are 10 cm and 20 cm respectively.
Find the discharge through the pipe if the velocity of water flowing through the pipe at
X is 3.0 m/s. Also find the velocity at section Y.
1. List the forces acting on a fluid flow. Mention the forces accounted for deriving
Euler’s equation of motion
2. A pipe carrying water has a 30 cm x 15 cm venturimeter which is positioned inclined at 30 0
to the horizontal. The flow is upwards. The converging cone is 45 cm in length and Cd = 0.98.
A differential U tube mercury manometer connected to inlet and throat shows a reading of
30 cm. (i) Calculate the discharge in the pipe and (ii) If the pressure at the inlet is 50 N/cm 2,
determine the pressure at the throat.
3. In a smooth pipe of uniform diameter 25cm a pressure of 50N/cm 2 was observed at section
1 which was at elevation of 10m. At another section 2 at elevation of 12m the pressure was
20N/cm2 and the velocity was 1.25m/s. Determine the direction of flow and the head loss
between the two sections. Water is flowing through the pipe.
1. Consider a laminar flow through a pipe, draw the velocity distribution and shear
stress distribution across the pipe.
2. Derive Darcy Weisbach formula of finding the loss of head due to friction in pipes.
3. Derive an expression for finding the loss of head due to viscous flow through a
circular pipe.
4. An oil of viscosity 8 poise and specific gravity 0.9 is flowing through a horizontal pipe of 50
mm diameter. If the pressure drop in 100m length of the pipe is 2000 kN/m 2, determine (i)
Rate of flow of oil, (ii) Centre line velocity, (iii) Total frictional drag over 100m length of pipe
and (iv) Velocity and shear stress at 10 mm from the wall. Assume laminar flow through the
pipe

1. Draw the HGL and TEL for a uniform diameter pipe, its one end is connected to the
bottom of tank and the other end is open to atmosphere.
2. An existing 30 cm diameter pipeline of 3.2 km length connects two reservoir with 13 m
difference in their water levels. Calculate the discharge. If a parallel pipe of 30 cm diameter
is attached to the last 1.6 km length of the existing pipe, find the new discharge.
3. The difference in water surface levels in two tanks which are connected by three
pipes in series of length 350 m, 200 m and 250 m and diameters 20 cm, 30 cm and
15 cm respectively is 20 m. Determine the rate of flow of water, if coefficient of
friction for these pipes is same and equal to 0.005 by considering all losses.
4. A reservoir discharges its liquids through a horizontal pipeline into the atmosphere. The
pipeline consists of two pipes, one of 10 cm diameter and 25 m long and another 12 cm
diameter and 35 m long connected in series. The friction coefficient f = 0.005 for both the
pipes. The water level in the tank is 10 m above centre line of the pipe at the entrance.
Calculate the discharge when the 10 cm diameter pipe is joined to the tank.

1. Define displacement thickness in connection with boundary layer.
2. Describe the development of boundary layer and its importance with neat sketch.
3. Find the displacement thickness, momentum thickness, energy thickness and shape factor
for the velocity distribution in the boundary layer is given by u / U = (y / δ) 1/7 where δ =
boundary layer thickness.
4. The velocity distribution in the boundary layer is given by u / U = y / δ, where u is the
velocity at a distance of y from the plate and u = U at y = δ, δ being boundary layer
thickness. Find the displacement thickness, momentum thickness, energy thickness
and shape factor.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Fluid Statics: Fluid properties like density, specific weight, specific volume, specific gravity, viscosity,
surface tension, compressibility, capillarity and types of fluids. Pressure Measurements: Pascal’s
law, Hydrostatic law, Manometers, Pressure gauges, total pressure and centre of pressure on
submerged surfaces, metacentre and metacentric height. Fluid Kinematics: Classification of fluid
flows, continuity equation, potential function and stream function. Fluid Dynamics: Euler’s equation,
Bernoulli’s equation and its application. Flow Measurements: Discharge measurement in pipes using
Pitot tube, Venturimeter and Orificemeter. Boundary layer theory and its application. Flow through
pipes: Reynold’s experiment, Laminar and turbulent flow through circular pipes, major and minor
losses in pipes, flow through syphon, pipes in series and parallel.
Text Book
2. Modi P.N and Seth S.M, “Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics Including Hydraulic
Machines” Standard Book House” New Delhi, 20 th Edition 2015
Reference Books
13. Yunus A. Cengel and John M. Cimbala, “Fluid Mechanics” Fundamentals and
Applications, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2010
14. Bansal R.K, “A Text Book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”
Lakshmi Publications, New Delhi, 2010
15. Kumar.K.L, “Engineering Fluid Mechanics” S.Chand Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
16. Subramanya, K, “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines Problems and
Solutions” Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.

Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1 Properties of fluids and fluid statics
1.1 Basic concepts of fluid mechanics, types of fluids 1
1.2 Different Properties of fluids 1
1.3 Problems on properties of fluids 2
2 Pressure and its measurement
2.1 Pascal’s law, Hydrostatic law 1
2.2 Types of manometers and its applications 2
2.3 Total pressure and centre of pressure 2
2.4 Metacentre and metacentric height 1
3 Fluid Kinematics
3.1 Classification of fluid flows 1
3.2 Continuity equation for three dimensional incompressible flow and 2
problems
3.3 Concept of velocity potential function and stream function with problems 2
4 Fluid Dynamics
4.1 Forces acting on fluid flow 1
4.2 Derivation of Euler’s and Bernoulli’s equation 1
4.3 Problems to find the energy of the flowing fluid 2
5 Flow Measurement
5.1 Pitot-tube and its application 1
5.2 Venturimeter and its applications 2
5.3 Orificemeter and its application 1
5.4 Development of boundary layer thickness and its application 1
5.5 Problems on boundary thickness 2
6 Flow through pipes
6.1 Reynold’s experiment to determine the type of flow 1
6.2 Hagen Poiseuille equation 1
6.3 Problems on laminar flow through pipes 1
6.4 Turbulent flow, Darcy Weisbach equation 1
6.5 Problems on turbulent flow through pipes 1
6.6 Major and minor losses in pipes 2
6.7 Flow through syphon pipe 1
6.8 Pipes in series and parallel and problems 2
Total Hours 36
Course Designers:
1. Mr. M. Ramasamy mrciv@tce.edu
14CE340 WATER SUPPLY ENGINEERING HSS 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course work aims at imparting the knowledge on various stages of works
involved in planning, designing and execution of protected water supply system to a
town/city. Starting from demand estimation, identification of sources, studying the quality
aspects of water at these sources, evolving a suitable treatment method to bring the quality
to the permissible standards and finally, distribution of this treated water to the individual
dwelling units are well addressed.
Course Outcomes
be able to: Attainment Proficiency
Level in% Level in
grade
CO1. Estimate the total water demand for a town/city Apply 70 A

CO2. Identify suitable sources of water to meet the Understand 70 A
demand
CO3. Design the conduits for transportation of water Apply 70 A
from the source to treatment plant and to the city
CO4. Prepare the physical, Chemical and biological Understand 70 A
characteristics of different sources of water
CO5. Design an appropriate treatment system for the Apply 70 A
water available at the source
CO6. Design a good water distribution system for an Apply 70 A
individual building and for a community.
Cos PO1 PO2 PO PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
3 9
CO11. S L L L - - S - - - - - M L
CO12. S S M M - - S - - - - - M L
CO3. S S S S - - M - - - - - M M
CO4. S S L S - S S M M - L - L L
CO5. S S S S - - S M - - L - M M
CO6. S S S S - - S - - - L - L L
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 40 40 40 40
Analyse -- -- -- --
Create -- -- -- --
1. Identify design period for different components of water supply system
2. Describe fluctuation in water demand
3. Explain the factors affecting per capita demand of a city
4. Identify a suitable method for prediction future population of a rapidly growing city
1. List the different groundwater sources available
2. Explain the factors influencing the selection of a particular source of water for a town
3. Show the importance of selection of an appropriate site for a river intake
1. Distinguish gravity system from pumping system of water supply
2. A water supply scheme is to be designed for serving a population of 6.0 Lakhs,
the storage reservoir is situated at 15 Km away from the city and the loss of head
from the source to the city is 20m. Calculate the size of the supply main using
Darcy and Hazen William formula. Take f = 0.012, CH =130 and maximum daily
demand as 200 lpcd. The entire day demand is to be supplied in 10 hours.
1. Demonstrate the procedure for fixing biological character for water
2. Distinguish safe water from wholesome water
3. Identify the importance of chemical characters of water
1. Describe the mechanisms of removal in filtration process
2. Explain the theory of chlorination and the factors affecting chlorination
3. Design a rapid sand filter to treat 10 million litres of raw water per day allowing 0.5% of
filtered water for backwashing. Half hour per day is used for backwashing. Assume
necessary data.
1. Explain the merits of grid iron system over dead end system
2. Demonstrate the procedure for detecting leakages in a pipe main
3. A town with a population of 1 million has a continuous water supply. Average supply in
270LPCD, the water being supplied by direct pumping. The total supply of 270 lpcd is
phased as follows:
Time Lpcd
5A.M to 11 A.M 90
11A.M to 3 P.M 54
3 P.M to 9 P.M 81
9 P.M to 12 Midnight 27
12 Midnight to 5 A.M 18
Water is supplied from the treatment plant at a uniform rate of 11.25 million
litres per hour, for all the 24 hours. Find out the capacity of the reservoir required for
distribution of water. Assume no loss or drawal from the trunk main
Concept Map
Syllabus
Demand Estimation - Importance and need for planned water supplies - water demand –
Types, per capita demand, factors affecting per capita demand - variation in demand – Design
periods - population forecasting – different methods. Identification of sources, Intakes and
Transport of water - Sources of water - Surface sources - ponds, lakes, streams, rivers -
Ground water sources - occurrence, aquifers and their types – Wells - open wells, Tube wells -
springs and their types - Infiltration galleries - Infiltration wells - Intakes and their types.
Transport of water - hydraulic design of pressure pipe - Pipe materials - pipe joints - pipe
appurtenances, testing of pipe line - Pumps for lifting water – types. Quality Assessment -
Quality of water – Physical quality, chemical quality, Biological quality - water borne diseases -
Water quality standards. Treatment of water – Screening - Sedimentation – theory, types of
settling, Stokes law - Coagulation – theory, chemicals used, flocculation - Jar test – design of
sedimentation tank - Filtration – removal mechanisms, filter media, types, slow sand, rapid
sand and pressure filters, filter design. Disinfection – methods. Chlorination – action, factors
influencing, free chlorination, combined chlorination – ozonation, UV radiation – water
softening – Desalination – Reverse Osmosis - Miscellaneous treatment of water - water
treatment practices in rural areas. Water Distribution - Distribution systems – requirements,
layouts and methods - Distribution reservoirs – storage capacity, mass curve method - Leak
detection - Analysis of distribution network - Hardy Cross method - Water supply system in
buildings – house connection, pipe fittings, storage tanks, piping systems.
Text Book
17. Garg S.K “Water Supply Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, 12 th Edition, New Delhi
2005.
Reference Books
18. Steel E.W., “Water Supply and sewerage”, Mc Graw Hill Publishers, New Delhi.
1991
19. Peavy, Rowe, Tchobanoglous, “Environmental Engineering”, McGraw Hill Publishers,
New Delhi. 1995
20. Birdie G.S and Birdie J.S “Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering” Dhatpat Rai
Publishing Company New Delhi, 7 th edition 2004
21. Gilbert M. Masters , “ Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science”, third
Edition, 2008
22. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development,
Government of India, New Delhi, 2003
23. Chatterjee A.K. Water Supply, Waste Disposal and Environmental Engineering, 8th
ed., New Delhi, Khanna Publisher. 2010
24. IS10500:2012 Water Quality Standards ,New Delhi 2012
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1 Demand Estimation
1.1 Importance and need for planned water supplies. 1
1.2 Water demand – Types, 1
1.3 Per capita demand, factors affecting per capita demand. Variation in
1
demand
1.4 Design periods. Population forecasting – Different methods, 2
2 Identification of sources, Intakes and Transport of water
2.1 Sources of water: Surface sources: ponds, lakes, streams, rivers 1
2.2 Ground water sources 1
2.3 Intakes and their types 1
2.4 Transport of water - hydraulic design of pressure pipe 2
2.5 Pipe materials, pipe joint, Pipe appurtenances, testing of pipe line. 1
2.6 Pumps for lifting water – types. 1
3 Quality Assessment
3.1 Quality of water – Physical quality, chemical quality 1
3.2 Biological quality 1
3.3 Water borne diseases, Water quality standards 1
4 Treatment of water
4.1 Objectives of treatment of water - Screening 1
4.2 Sedimentation – theory, types of settling, Stokes law 1
4.3 Coagulation – theory, chemicals used, flocculation, Jar test. 1
4.4 Design of sedimentation tank 2
4.5 Filtration – Filter media - removal mechanisms, Slow sand filter 1
4.5.1 Rapid sand and pressure filters 1
4.5.2 Filter design 2
4.6 Disinfection – methods, Ozonation and UV radiation 1
4.7 Chlorination – action, factors influencing 1
4.8 Water softening 1
4.9 Desalination – Reverse Osmosis - Miscellaneous treatment of water 1
4.10 Water treatment practices in rural areas. 1
5 Water Distribution
5.1 Distribution systems – requirements, layouts, methods. 1
5.2 Distribution reservoirs – storage capacity, mass curve method. 2
5.3 Leak detection 1
5.4 Analysis of distribution network - Hardy Cross method 2
5.5 Water supply system in buildings – house connection, pipe fittings, 1
storage tanks, piping systems.
Total hours 36
Course Designers:
1. Dr. T. Vel Rajan tvciv@tce.edu
2. Mr. P. Balakrishnan balakrishnancivil@tce.edu
14CE351 CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble
Concrete Technology focuses more on detailed understanding of concrete making materials and
production process. Recent developments in concrete materials are also given adequate
consideration. Going through the course, student would develop adequate understanding on
concrete production process and properties and uses of concrete as a modern material of
construction. The course will also enable the student to make appropriate decision regarding
ingredient selection and use of concrete.
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to E
A
L

CO1. Explain the properties and tests of various constituents present in concrete Understand 7
CO2. Understand various manufacturing process of concrete and properties and Understand 7
workability tests of fresh concrete
CO3. Design concrete mix as per IS and ACI standards Apply
CO4. Enumerate the mechanical behaviour and properties of hardened concrete 7
Understand
CO5. Demonstrate the long term properties of concrete and identify the solutions for field
problems Apply 7
CO6. Select the suitable type of special concrete for real time situations
Apply
7
CO13. - - - - - - S - - M L L M L
CO14. - - - - - - S L - M L L M M
CO3 L L M M - - S S - - L M S M
CO4 - - - - - - S - - - L M M M
CO5 - - - - - - S - - S S M S S
CO6 - - - M - S S S M - M S S S
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 20 40 60 60
Analyze -- -- -- --
Create -- -- -- --
1. Differentiate admixtures and additives.

2. Define specific gravity and bulk density.
3. Explain the process of hydration of cement.
1. Explain the various factors influencing the workability of concrete.

2. Define the term laitance.
3. Summarize the methods of curing of concrete.
1. Solve suitable concrete mix for M40 concrete for the following concrete.
i. Characteristic strength on concrete at 28 days : 40N/mm 2
ii. Ordinary Portland Cement of 53 grade
iii. Degree of Workability : 75 – 100 mm slump
iv. Degree of Exposure : Mild
v. Maximum size of Aggregate : 20 mm
vi. Specific Gravity of Coarse Aggregate : 2.75
vii. Specific Gravity of Coarse Aggregate : 2.63
viii. Specific Gravity of Cement : 3.05
ix. Degree of Quality control : Good.
2. Design a suitable concrete mix with the following particulars using IS 10262-
1982.
x. Characteristic strength on concrete at 28 days : 20N/mm 2
xi. Ordinary Portland Cement of 53 grade
xii. Degree of Workability : 50-75 mm slump
xiii. Degree of Exposure : Mild
xiv. Maximum size of Aggregate : 20 mm
xv. Specific Gravity of Coarse Aggregate : 2.7
xvi. Specific Gravity of Coarse Aggregate : 2.6
xvii. Specific Gravity of Cement : 3.15
xviii. Degree of Quality control : Good.
3. Construct the step by step procedure of concrete mix design as per ACI
method
1. Define water cement ratio and gel space ratio.

2. Construct the procedure to determine the tensile strength of concrete.
3. Discuss the various types of non destructive testing methods

1. Identify the type of shrinkage and rectify the problem.
2. Select suitable type of protective measures may apply on rebars against
corrosion.
3. A RCC structure is to be constructed in a marine environment. Discuss the
various preventive measures you would recommend to make the structure
safe against corrosion of rebars.

1. Choose the suitable special concrete that can be used for the following
situations and explain briefly.
a. To reduce the self weight of the structure.
b. To enhance the tensile strength of concrete.
c. Shuttering and formwork is not possible.
2. Differentiate light weight and heavy weight concrete.
3. Choose the suitable type of concrete for congested reinforced area.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Concrete making Materials:
Cement- raw materials, composition - Hydration, chemistry of cement – Types and grades of cement
- Tests and specifications – consistency, setting time, soundness and fineness test. Aggregates -
source, natural and artificial. Fine aggregates- gradation, fineness modulus, specific gravity, bulk
density , bulking of sand, water absorption, moisture content and measurement methods, presence
of deleterious content . Coarse aggregates – size and shape, gradation, fineness modulus, specific
gravity, bulk density sieve analysis, water absorption. Tests on coarse aggregates- impact, crushing,
abrasion and attrition, water absorption, alkali aggregate reaction. Water- Qualities of water for
concreting, tolerable concentrations of impurities, use of sea water and its effects. Admixtures -
Types of Admixtures- super plasticisers, plasticisers, retarders, accelerators, air entrained admixtures
and pozzolanic admixtures Concrete Production & Fresh concrete: Batching of ingredients; mixing,
transporting, and placing - Compacting, finishing, and curing of concrete - Workability, bleeding and
segregation of concrete - Factors influencing it - Tests on workability of concrete. Concrete mix
design: Concept of Mix design-Quality acceptance criteria as per Indian standard method. Design of
concrete mixes as per IS-10262, ACI method (procedure only). Engineering properties of concrete:
Compressive strength and parameters affecting it - Tensile strength - direct and indirect; Modulus of
elasticity and Poisson's ratio, flexural strength of concrete- Non-destructive test , partially
destructive test.
Dimensional stability and Durability of concrete: Creep - parameters affecting - Shrinkage of

concrete - types and its significance - Introduction to durability; relation between durability and
permeability - Chemical attacks on concrete- sulphate attack, chloride, acid attacks, sea water
attacks, carbonation attacks - Corrosion of steel rebars, corrosion preventive measures. Special
concretes: Properties and applications of: high strength, high performance and reactive powder
concrete - Lightweight, heavyweight, and high density concrete, Shotcrete, Self compacting
concrete
Text Book
1. Shetty M.S., “Concrete Technology”, 7th edition, S.Chand and company Limited, 2012.
2. Nevile A.M., “Properties of concrete”, 5th edition, Pearson India, 2012.
Reference Books
1. Mehta, P.K., "Concrete: Microstructure, Properties and Materials " 4th edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Education Private Limited, 2013
2. Gambhir, “Concrete Technology”, 5th edition, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited,
2013.
3. Santha Kumar A.R., “Concrete Technology”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2009.
4. www.nptel.ac.in
IS Codes
1. IS: 10262-2009, Recommended guidelines for Concrete Mix Design.
2. IS: 456 - 2000, Plain and Reinforced concrete – code of practice
3. SP: 23-1982, Handbook on concrete.
4. ACI Committee 2111.1- 91, standard practice for selecting proportions for normal, heavy weight
and mass concrete, Part I, ACI manual of concrete practice, 1994.
Module
No.
1.0 Concrete making Materials
1.1 Cement : raw materials, composition 1
1.2 Hydration, chemistry of cement 1
1.3 Types & grades of cement

2
1.4 Tests and specifications – consistency, setting time, soundness test, 2
fineness test, chemical analysis
1.5 Aggregate- sources, natural and artificial 1
1.6 Fine aggregate- bulking of sand, presence of deleterious content, 1

water absorption and moisture content
1.7 Coarse aggregates – size and shape, gradation, fineness modulus, 1

specific gravity, bulk density sieve analysis, water absorption.
1.8 Tests on coarse aggregates- impact, crushing, abrasion and attrition, 2

Module
No.
water absorption, alkali aggregate reaction
1.9 Water and its quality for concreting 1
1.10 Types of admixtures – super plasticisers, plasticisers, retarders, 2

accelerators, air entrained admixtures and pozzolanic admixtures
2.0 Concrete Production & Fresh concrete

2.1 Batching of ingredients, mixing, transporting, and placing 2
2.2 Compacting, finishing, and curing of concrete 2

2.3 Workability, bleeding and segregation of concrete - Factors 2
influencing it
2.4 Tests on workability of concrete 1
3.0 Concrete mix design

3.1 Concept of Mix design-Quality acceptance criteria as per IS 1
3.2 Design as per IS-10262 2
3.3 ACI method (procedures only) 2

4.0 Engineering properties of concrete
4.1 Compressive strength and parameters affecting it 1
4.2 Tensile strength - direct and indirect; Modulus of elasticity and 2

Poisson's ratio, flexural strength of concrete
4.3 Non-destructive test , partially destructive test 1
5.0 Dimensional stability and Durability of concrete

5.1 Creep and Shrinkage of concrete 1
5.2 Test on durability – Chemical attacks of concrete, Corrosion of steel 2

rebars
5.3 Corrosion preventive measures 1
6.0 Special concretes
6.1 Properties and applications of: high strength, high performance and 1
reactive powder concrete
6.2 Lightweight, heavyweight, and high density concrete 1
6.3 Shotcrete, Self compacting concrete 1
Total hours 36
Course Designers:
1. Dr.K.Arunachalam hodciv@tce.edu
2. Dr.D.Brindha dbciv@tce.edu
PROBLEM SOLVING USING
14CE360 ES 3 0 0 3
COMPUTER
Preamble
The course on problem solving using computers is intended to introduce the students to
computational thinking, methodology of programming with emphasis on modularity and the
coding of computer programs. Upon completion of the course, the students would be able to
master the principles of structured programming and demonstrate significant experience in
problem solving.
Prerequisite
 Nil
Course Outcomes
l Expected Expected
Level in % Level in
grade
CO1: Comprehend and practice the following Apply
terms in the context of problem solving
by a computer: Problem specification,
input-output analysis, algorithm,
flowchart, pseudo-code, High level
language, assembly language,
machine language, and compilation
and execution.
CO2: Develop simple programs in C Analyze
language involving constants and
variables, operators and expressions,
arrays, input and output statements,
control and iterative statements by
appropriate choice of data types,
expressions and control structures.
CO3: Apply problem solving strategies such Apply
as divide and conquer, merging,
solving by analogy etc in design of
simple applications. (Including
applications from Surveying like
Simpson’s rule and Flow problems
using discharge (Ex: Diverging pipes),
Bernoulli’s theorem, continuity
equation)
CO4: Utilize structures and unions in Apply

development of simple applications like
payroll management, Grade calculation
etc.
CO5: Deploy the concept of Dynamic Apply

memory allocation and pointers for
simple programs like matrix
manipulation, stack implementation
etc.
CO6: Utilize the extensive set of library Apply
functions available in C for creating
and processing data files.
CO7: Develop simple applications in team for Apply

simple engineering problem in C
language (Civil applications :Shear
force, Bending moment, slope and
deflection calculations of various
beams with different loading
conditions, Centre of gravity and
Moment of Inertia)

CO1. M - - - - - - - - - - -
CO2. M - - - - - - - - - - -
CO3. M L L - - - - - - - - -
CO4. M L L - - - - - - - - -
CO5. M L L - - - - - - - - -
CO6. M L L - - - - - - - - -
CO7. M M M - S - - L L L L L
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Continuous Assessment Terminal
Category Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Examination
Apply 40 50 50 50
Analyze 0 10 10 20
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0
Attainment of Course outcome 7 is evaluated through Mini Project which involves design and
development of simple engineering applications using modular programming.

4. Differentiate a compiler and interpreter.
5. Draw the flowchart for generation of Fibonacci sequence.
6. Develop the algorithm for exchange of two variables.
7. Determine the hierarchy of operations and evaluate the expression

𝟖.𝟖(𝒂+𝒃)𝟐
−𝟎.𝟓+𝟐𝒂/(𝒒+𝒓)
𝒄
k=3/2*4+3/8+3 and convert the equation 𝒛 = 𝒊
(𝒂+𝒃)∗( )
𝒎
8. Rewrite the following program using conditional operators.
main()
floatsal;
printf(“ENTER SALARY”);
scanf(“%f”,&sal);
if(sal<40000 &&sal>25000)
printf(“MANAGER”);
else
if(sal<25000 &&sal>15000)
printf(“ACCOUNTANT”);
else
printf(“CLERK”);
9. Evaluate the output of the following code:

main()
int x=4,y=0,z;
while (x>=0)
x--;
y++;
if (x==y)
continue;
else
printf(“\n%d%d”,x,y);

1. A company needs a program to figure its weekly payroll. The input data,
consisting of each employee’s identification number, pay rate, and hours
worked, is in the file datafile.dat in secondary storage. The program should
input the data for each employee, calculate the weekly wages, save the input
information for each employee along with the weekly wages in a file, and
display the total wages for the week on the screen, so that the payroll clerk can
transfer the appropriate amount into the payroll account. Discuss the problem
solving approach you would follow to develop the program.
2. Design an algorithm using factoring technique to establish all the primes in first
n positive integers.
3. In the Company Payroll Program, use means-ends analysis to develop the algorithm
for calculating pay. What are the ends in the analysis? What information did we start
with and what information did we want to end up with?

1. Create a structure to specify data on students given: Roll number, Name,
Department, Course, Year of Joining Assume there are not more than 450 students
in the college,
a. Write a function to print names of all students who joined in a particular year.
b. Write a function to print the data of a student whose roll number is given.
2. A factory has 3 divisions and stocks 4 categories of products. An inventory table is
updated for each division and for each product as they are received. There are three
independent suppliers of products to the factory:
a. Design a data format to represent each transaction.
b. Write a program to take a transaction and update the inventory.
c. If the cost per item is also given, write a program to calculate the inventory sales.
3. Create a structure called library to hold accession number, title of the book, author
name, price of the book and flag indicating whether book is issued or not. Write code
to list all the books by a given author and list the count of books in the library.

1. Consider the following code segment:
inti,j=25;
int*pi,pj=&j;
……
*pj=j+5;
j=*pj+5;
pj=pj;
*pi=i+j;
Each integer occupies 2 bytes of memory. The value assigned to i begin at the
hexadecimal address F9C and the value assigned to j begins at address F9E.
Compute the values of following:
(a) &i (b)&j (c)pj (d) *pj (e)i (f) pi (g)*pi (h) (pi+2)
(i) (*pi+2) (j) *(pi+2)
2. How many bytes in memory would be occupied by the following array of pointers to
strings? How many bytes would be required to store the same strings, if they are
stored in a two dimensional character array?
Char *mess[] = {“DEPARTMENT”“OF”“INFORMATION”“TECHNOLOGY”};
Can an array of pointers to strings be used to collect strings from the keyboard?
Justify your answer.
3. Interpret the meaning of the following declarations involving pointers:

in (*p[10]) (char a); int *(*p[10]) (char a); int *(*p[10]) (char *a);
int *(*p) (char(*a)[]); int *p (char *a[]));
1. Write a program to count the number of occurrences of any two vowels in succession
in a line of text in a file. For Example, in the sentence “THIAGARAJAR COLLEGE OF
ENGINEERING” such occurrences are EE,IA.
2. Write a program to read a file and count the number of characters, spaces, tabs and
new lines present in it.
3. Write a program that will generate a data file containing the list of customers and
their corresponding telephone numbers. Use a structure variable to store the name
and telephone of each customer. Write code to determine the telephone number of a
specified customer.

Design and Development of applications like
a. Encryptor/ Decryptor
b. Physics problem solver
c. Sudoku solver
d. Hospital management system
e. Random number generator
f. Electric circuit solver etc.
g. Scientific Calculator
Mini Project Details: (Team size: 5)
 Problem identification.
 Problem Analysis and Modular design.
 Develop algorithm/pseudo code and draw the flowchart – module wise individually.
 Develop programs module level, test and debug individually.
 Integrate the modular programs and present the results in a team.
 Document the above process as a report.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction to Problem Solving – Problem Specification, input-output analysis,
Algorithms – Design and Analysis, Implementation of Algorithms, Flowcharts, Programming
– High level languages, language translators, syntax, semantics, compilation and execution,
Debugging and Program verification.
Fundamentals of C - C Character set, Keywords, Constants and variables, Data types,

Input and Output statements, Operators and Expressions, Operator Precedence, Type
Conversion, Type casting. Control Statements, Branching and Looping
Problem Solving Techniques – Solving by analogy, Means-ends analysis, Divide and

Conquer, Building Block Approach – Merging of Solutions.
Basic Algorithms – Exchange of variables, Counting, Summation of set of numbers,

Generation of Fibonacci sequence, Number to character conversion.
Factoring Methods – Greatest Common Divisor of two integers, Generation of Prime

numbers, raising number to larger power
Array Techniques – Counting of array elements, array reversal, partitioning an array,

removal of duplicates in an array –Single and Multidimensional Arrays in C
Text Processing – Strings in C

Pointers – Declaration, Operations on Pointers, Pointers and one dimensional Arrays,
Pointers and Multidimensional Arrays, Array of pointers, Dynamic Memory allocation.
Functions – Function Definition, Function Prototypes, Passing arguments to a function,

Pointers to functions, Recursion.
Storage Classes – Automatic, External, Static and Register
C Preprocessor – Preprocessor directives, Macro Expansion, Conditional Compilation.
Structures and Unions – Definition, Processing a structure, Array of structures, Pointers to

structures, Passing structures to Functions and Returning structure variables from functions,
Self Referential Structures, Unions and Bit Fields. Files – Reading and writing a file,
processing a data file, Unformatted Files and Binary Files.
Text Book
1. R.G.Dromey, “How to solve it by Computers”, Pearson Education India , 2008.
2. Byron S.Gottfried, “Programming with C”, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt Ltd, Third
Edition, 2010.
3. Al Kelley and Ira Pohl, “A Book On C”, Addison-Wesley , Fourth Edition, 1997.
Reference Books
4. Donald Ervin Knuth, “The Art of Computer Programming : Fundamental Algorithms”
Volume I, Addison-Wesley, Third Edition, 2002.
5. YashavantKanetkar, “Let us C”,BPB Publications, 13th Edition, 2012
6. YashavantKanetkar, “Understanding Pointers in C”, BPB Publications, 4th Edition,
2009.
Module
Topic Hours
No
1 Introduction to Problem Solving
1.1 Problem Specification
1
1.2 Input Output Analysis
1.3 Algorithm – Design and Analysis 1
1.4 Flow Charts 1
1.5 Programming – High level languages, language translators, syntax,
1
semantics, compilation and execution
1.5 Debugging and Program verification. 1
2 Fundamentals of C
2.1 Character set
1
2.2 Constants, Variables and Key words
2.3 Data types and Declarations
2.4 Input and Output Statements 1
2.5 Operators and Expressions

Arithmetic, Relational, Logical and Conditional Operators, Bit wise
2.5.1 1
Operators
2.5.2 Operator Precedence 1
2.5.3 Type Conversion
2.5.4 Type Casting 1
2.6 Control Statements
2.6.1 Branching
2.6.2 Looping 1
2.6.3 Break, Continue and Goto statements
2.7 Single and Multidimensional Arrays 2
2.8 Strings 1
3 Problem Solving Techniques
3.1 Solving by analogy 1
3.2 Means-ends analysis
3.3 Divide and Conquer
1
3.4 Building Block Approach – Merging
3.5 Recursion 1
Basic Algorithms – Exchange of variables, Counting, Summation of set
3.6 .1 of numbers, Generation of Fibonacci sequence, Number to character 2
conversion.
Factoring Methods – Greatest Common Divisor of two integers,
3.6.2 1
Generation of Prime numbers, raising number to larger power
Array Techniques – Counting of array elements, array reversal,
3.6.3 1
partitioning an array, removal of duplicates in an array
3.6.4 Text Processing - Strings in C 1
4 Pointers
4.1 Pointer to variables -Declaration and Operations
4.2 Pointers and one dimensional Arrays 1
4.3 Pointers to Strings
4.4 Pointers and Multi-dimensional Arrays 1
4.5 Array of Pointers
4.6 Dynamic Memory allocation 1
5 Functions
5.1 Function Definition and Function prototypes
1
5.2 Passing Arguments to a function
5.3 Pointers to Functions 1
5.4 Recursion 1
6 Storage Classes 1
7 C Preprocessor
7.1 Preprocessor Directives
7.2 Macro Expansion 1
7.3 Conditional Compilation
7.4 Multiple File Inclusions 1
8 Structures and Unions
8.1 Definition and Processing of Structure
1
8.2 Array of Structures
8.3 Pointers to Structures
8.4 Passing Structures to Functions, Returning structure variables from
functions 1
8.5 Self-Referential Structures
8.6 Unions
1
8.7 Bit Fields
9 Files
9.1 Reading and writing to a file 1
9.2 Processing a Data file 1
9.3 Unformatted Files and Binary files
Total Lectures 36
Course Designers:
1. Mr. M.P.Ramkumar ramkumar@tce.edu
Preamble
14CE380 COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING LAB This laboratory course work is
intended to provide students with
opportunities to acquire knowledge and to develop skills in viewing Category L T P Credit
and drawing the plan, section and elevation of the different types of
the buildings manually as well as by using the drafting software PC 0 0 2 1
AutoCAD. Manual drafting can be used to develop drafting skills
where computer-aided design (CAD) software is not available.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Level in % Level in grade
(CO1): Develop drafting skills in drawing sectional elevations of Apply 95 S
components of building manually
(CO2): Develop drafting skills in drawing plan, section and Apply 95 S
elevation of residential buildings manually
(CO3): Develop drafting skills in drawing plan, section and
elevation of public buildings manually Apply 95 S
(CO4): Develop drafting skills in drawing sectional elevations of
components of building using AutoCAD software
(CO5): Develop drafting skills in drawing plan, section and Apply 95 S
elevation of residential buildings using AutoCAD software
(CO6): Develop drafting skills in drawing plan, section and
elevation of public buildings Apply 95 S
using AutoCAD software

CO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO11. S S -- L S M -- M M M -- -- M --
CO12. S S -- L S M -- M M M -- -- M --
CO13. S S -- L S M -- M M M -- -- M --
CO14. S S -- L S M -- M M M -- -- M --
CO15. S S -- L S M -- M M M -- -- M --
CO16. S S -- L S M -- M M M -- -- M --
List of Experiments
Manual Drafting
1. Fully panelled door / Partly glazed and wooden panelled door – Elevation and cross section
2. Fully panelled window / Fully glazed window – Elevation and cross section
3. Dog legged staircase – Plan and Sectional Elevation
4. King post / Queen post wooden trusses
5. Single floor residential building - Plan, Section and Elevation
6. Storied residential building with Dog legged staircase - Plan, Section and Elevation
7. Framed office building - Plan, Section and Elevation
8. Residential building – Plan, Section and Elevation using given area
Drafting using AutoCAD software
1. Single floor residential building - Plan, Section and Elevation
2. Storied residential building with Dog legged staircase - Plan, Section and Elevation
3. Framed office building - Plan, Section and Elevation
4. Residential building – Plan, Section and Elevation using given area
Demonstration
1. 3D view of a single floor residential building
Reference Books
1. V.B. Sikka, “A Course in Civil Engineering Drawing”, 4th edition, S.K. Kataria & Sons, New
Delhi, 2010.
2. M.G. Shah, C.M. Kale & S.Y.Patki, “Building Drawing with an Integrated Approach to Built
Environment”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi, 2004.
3. George Omura, “ Mastering in AutoCAD 2002”- BPB Publications, New Delhi,
2002
4. Verma.B.P, "Civil Engineering Drawing and House Planning", Khanna Publishers, 1989.
5. “A Guide to building information modeling for Owners, Managers, Designers, Engineers, and
Contractors”, John Wiley and Sons. Inc., 2008
IS Codes
1. IS 962:1967 Code of Practical for Architectural and Building Drawing
2. IS 1003:1977 Part I, II Specification for Timber Panelled and Glazed Shutters
3. IS 2191:1983 Part I, II Specification for Wooden Flush Door Shutters
Course Designers
Dr. S. Arulmary samciv@tce.edu
Dr. M.C. Sundarraja mcsciv@tce.edu
Passed in Board of Studies Meeting held on 18.04.2015 Approved in 50th Academic Council Meeting held on 30.05.2015
14CE390 SURVEY LAB II
PC 0 0 2 1
Preamble
Knowledge on basic survey methods (Survey Lab I) is essential in order to determine the distance
and heights of the objects using stadia, tangential as well as trignometrical principle.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of surveying and Survey Lab I
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to: Expected Expected
Level in% Level in
grade
(CO1) Measure horizontal and vertical angles using Apply 95 S
Theodolite.
(CO2) Locate the position of the object after finding Apply 95 S

the distance and heights using stadia method
of survey
(CO3) Find the position of points in the field by Apply 95 S

tangential method of surveying
(CO4) Find the position of points in the field by Apply 95 S

tacheometric method of surveying
(CO5) Set out a simple circular curve in the field. Apply 95 S
(CO6) Locate and plot the different features of the Apply 95 S

land by conducting total station survey

CO17. L L - - - - - - - L - - L L
CO18. S S - L - - - - - L - - L L
CO19. S S - L - - - - - L - - L L
CO20. S S - L - - - - - L - - L L
CO21. S S M - - - - M - M - - L L
CO22. S S M L S - - M - M - - L L
List of Experiments:
1. Study of theodolite and measurement of horizontal angle by repetition method.
2. Measurement of horizontal angle by reiteration method.
3. Determine the distance and heights of the objects using Stadia tacheometric method.
4. Determine the distance and heights of the objects using tangential tacheometric method.
5. Find the gradient between two points using stadia and tangential tacheometric principle.
6. Find the distance and elevation of the inaccessible (single) object by single plane method.
7. Find the distance and elevation of the inaccessible (single) object by double plane method.
8. Find the elevation of the inaccessible (double) object by double plane method.
9. Determine the elevation of the given point using subtense bar.
10. Measurement of horizontal, sloping and vertical distances of the object using Total station.
11. Setting out a circular curve using Total Station.
12. Demo on instruments like GPS and Electronic Distance Meter.
Course Designers:

14CE4C2 CAPSTONE I PC 0 0 2 2
Preamble
The purpose of this course is to apply the concept of mathematics, science and
engineering fundamentals and an engineering specialization to solve complex
engineering problems.
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, Expected Expected Proficiency

students will be able to Attainment Level in grade
level in %
CO1 Explain the basic concepts of core engineering Understand 70 A

courses in the programme
CO2
Explain the importance of mathematics and 70 A
science in the programme and its correlation in Understand
core engineering courses of the programme
CO3 Solve basic problems in core engineering of the Apply 70 A

programme
CO4 Solve complex problems by applying the Apply 70 A

concepts of core engineering, mathematics and
science course
CO5 Analyse complex problems in the core Analyze 70 A

engineering courses of the programme

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO PSO2
1
CO1 M L - - - - - - - - - L L -
CO2 M L - - - - - - - - - L L -
CO3 S M L L L - - - M - - L M L
CO4 S S L L M - - - M - - L M L
CO5 S S M L S - - - M - - L S L
Syllabus
Engineering Group1
Strength of Materials: Basics of statics- Simple Stresses and Strains- Principal stresses and strains-
Shear Force and Bending Moment- Geometric properties of sections- Bending and shear stresses
Surveying: Chain surveying-Compass surveying-Plane table surveying-Levelling-Areas and volumes-

Theodolite survey-Curves- Modern methods of surveying
Geology: General geology-Seismology-Minerals and rocks-Structural geology-Engineering Geology
Engineering Group 2
Building Materials and Technology: Orientation in buildings-Materials for

construction-Technologies for construction-Construction tools and Machinery.
Mechanics of Solids: Axial and bending stresses- Torsion of circular shafts- Slope and deflection
of beams- Analysis of Trusses- Moving Loads and Influence Line- Cables, stiffening girders and arches
Fluid Mechanics: Fluid statics-Pressure measurements-Fluid kinematics-Fluid

dynamics-Flow measurements in pipes-Boundary layer theory-Flow through pipes.
Engineering Group 3
Water Supply Engineering: Demand estimation-Identification of sources, intakes and

transport of water-Quality assessment-Treatment of water-Water distribution.
Concrete Technology: Concrete making Materials- Cement-Fine aggregate-Coarse aggregate-
Water-Admixtures- Concrete Production & Fresh concrete- Concrete mix design- Engineering
properties of concrete- Dimensional stability and Durability of concrete- Special concretes
Assessment Pattern
(Common to B.E./B.Tech Programmes)
Test 1: Engineering Group 1 (60 Marks), Duration : 90 Minutes
Objective Type Questions : 30 (10 Questions from each group)
Fill up the blanks : 30 (10 Questions from each group)
Test 2: Engineering Group 2, Engineering Group 3 ; Duration : 90 Minutes

(60 Marks)
Test 3: Comprehensive (60 Marks); Duration : 90 Minutes
Test Marks Obtained Converted to
Test1 60 Marks (Max) 20 Marks (Max)
Test 2 60 Marks (Max) 20 Marks (Max)
100 Marks (Max)
No re-test will be conducted at any circumstances
Course Designers:
1. Engineering faculty 1: Dr.T.Baskaran

2. Engineering Faculty 2: Dr.D.Brindha
14CE410 MATHEMATICS - IV BS 2 2 0 3
Preamble
The theory of probability is a unified mathematical theory with applications to many natural
sciences; physics, engineering, medicine, economy, etc., all benefit from probabilistic
computations. The main mission of the Indian Statistical System shall be to provide within
the decentralized structure of the system reliable, timely and credible social and economic
statistics to assist decision making within and outside the Government, stimulate research
and promote informed debate relating to conditions affecting people's life. Based on this, the
course aims at giving adequate exposure in basic concepts of probability, probability
distributions, regression and correlation, test of hypothesis and design of experiments.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Course Outcomes Bloom’s Proficiency
attainment
level
level (%) Level (grade)
CO1 : Infer axioms of probability, elementary Understand 70 B

theorems, conditional probability, discrete and
continuous random variables
CO2: Apply the concept of expectation and 60 B

Apply
moment generating functions of discrete and
continuous distributions in Engineering problems.
CO3 Identify the correlation, regression in linear 70 B

forms. Apply
CO4: Apply the concept of least square method in 65 B

fitting linear and non linear regression curves. Apply
CO5: Explain the test of hypothesis for small and Understand 70 B

large samples by using various tests like t-test, F-test,
z-test and chi-square test
CO6: Apply the concept of ANOVA to measure the 60 C

effect of extraneous variables. Apply
Mapping with Program Outcomes
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 S M S S S
CO2 S M S S M
CO3. S S S S S
CO4. S S M S
CO5. M M M S S
CO6. S S S S
Correlation: S-Strong; M-Medium; - L- Low
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Remember 10 10 10 0
Apply 60 60 60 70
Analyse 0 0 0 0
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0
1. A and B toss affair coin alternately with the understanding that the one who obtains
the
head first wins. If A starts, what is his chance of winning?
2. Define conditional probability

3. A box contains 7 red and 13 blue balls. Two balls are selected at random and are
discarded without their colors being seen. If a third ball is drawn randomly and
observed to
be red, estimate the probability that both of the discarded balls were blue.
1. Predict the value of ‘a’ if P(X = x) = a (2/3)x ; x = 1,2,3……

2. The distribution function of a Random variable X is given by F(x) = 1 – (1+ x) 𝑒 −𝑥 ; x ≥
0. Find the density function and mean.
3. Estimate the moment generating function of the random variable X given pdf
f(x) = 2𝑒 −2𝑥 ; x > 0
R1.23 r r
1. Compute if r12 =0.77; 13 =0.72; 23 =0.52.
2. Differentiate between correlation and regression of variables
3. Coefficient of correlation between x and y is 0.48. Their covariance is 36. The
variance is 16. Find the standard deviation of y.
1. Fit a parabola for a following data

X: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Y: 2 6 7 8 10 11 11 10 9 7
2. Determine the plan of regression of Y on X1 and X2 for the following data:
Y: 90 72 54 42 30 12
X1: 3 5 6 8 12 14
X2: 16 10 7 4 3 2
3. In a distribution
 1  2,  2  3,  3  3, r12  0.7, r23  0.5, r31  0.5 Find
(i)
r23.1 (ii ) R1.23 (iii )b12.3 , b13.2 (iv ) 1.23
Course Outcome 5 (CO 5):
1. Explain Null hypothesis.

2. The nicotine contents in two samples of tobacco are given below:
Sample 1: 21 24 25 26 27 -
Sample 2: 22 27 28 30 31 36
Can you demonstrate that the two samples came from the same normal population?
3. Twenty people were attacked by a disease and only 18 survived. Will you reject the
hypothesis that the survival rate if attacked by the disease is 85% in favor to the
hypothesis that it is more at 5% level?
Course Outcome 6 (CO 6):
1. Model the format of two-way classification ANOVA table

2. Compare and contrast Randomized Block Design and Latin Square Design
3. Analyze the variance in the following |Latin Square:
B 20 C17 D25 A34
A23 D21 C15 B24
D24 A26 B21 C19
C26 B23 A27 D22
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction to Probability: Sample spaces and events, counting, probability, the Axioms
of probability, Some elementary theorems, Conditional probability, total probability, Baye’s
theorem, Central limit theorem (only statement) Standard Distributions: Random variables,
Discrete, continuous Random variables, Distribution and density functions, binomial,
Poisson, geometric, hyper geometric, uniform, exponential and normal distributions,
Stochastic process (basic definitions) Correlation and Regression: Simple linear
correlation and regression, multiple and partial Correlation Coefficients, method of least
squares, plane of regression . Test of Hypothesis: Sampling design, sampling distributions,
, Large and small sample tests, Test for (1)Proportion (2) Difference between two
proportions, (3)means and (4) variances for large and small samples, Tests of goodness of
fit and independence of attributes. Design of Experiments: Introduction, aim, basic designs
of experiments, completely randomized design, randomized block design, latin square
design.
Text Books
1. S.C.Gupta, V.K.Kapoor, “ Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Tenth Edition,
Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi, 2002
2. T.Veerarajan, “ Probability and Statistics”, Second edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education, New Delhi, 2008
Reference Books
1. Jack R.Benjamin and C.Allin Cornell, “Probability, Statistics & Decisions for Civil
Engineers”, First revised edition, Dover publications, Mineola, New York,2014
2. J.N.Sharma, J.K.Goel, “Mathematical Statistics”, Seventh Edition, Krishna

Prakasham Mandir, Meerut, 1998.
3. Miller Freund’s, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Eighth edition, PHI Learning
Private Limited, Delhi, 2003
Course contents and Lecture Schedule
S.No Topics No. of

Lectures
1 Introduction to probability
1.1 Sample spaces and events, counting, probability, the 1

Axioms of probability
1.2 Some elementary theorems, Conditional probability 1
Tutorial 2
1.3 Total probability, Baye’s theorem ,central limit 2

theorem
Tutorial 2
2 Standard distributions
2.1 Random Variables, Discrete and Continuous RVs 2
2.2 Distribution and Density functions 1
2.3 Binomial , Poisson distributions 1
2.4 Geometric and Hypergeometric Distributions 1
Tutorial 2
2.5 Uniform, exponential Distributions 1
2.6 Normal distribution , stochastic process( definitions) 1
Tutorial 3
3 Correlation and regression
3.1 Simple linear correlation and regression 1
Tutorial 2
3.2 Multiple and partial correlation coefficients 1
3.3 Method of least squares 2
3.4 Plane of regression 1
Tutorial 3
4 Test of Hypothesis
4.1 Sampling design and Sampling Distributions 1
4.2 Large Sample Tests- Z test for proportion, mean 2
Tutorial 3
4.3 Small sample Tests- t test, F test 1
4.4 Chi-square tests 1
Tutorial 3
5 Design of experiments
5.1 Introduction , aim ,basic designs of experiments 1

5.2 Completely randomized design, randomized block 1
disign
Tutorial 2
5.3 .Latin square design 1
Tutorial 2
Total Hours 48
Course Designers
1. Mr. P. Subramanian psmat@tce.edu
2. Dr. M. Sivanandha sarawathi sivanandha@tce.edu
3. Dr. N. Chitra ncmat@tce.edu

14CE420 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS PC 2 2 0 3
Preamble
This course offers the various methods of analysis for indeterminate beams and portal
frames. It aims at determination of end moments and constructing shear force and bending moment
diagrams for the beams and frames. Also, ILD for indeterminate beams will be dealt with.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of strength of materials and mechanics of solids.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Attainment Proficiency Level in
level in % grade
CO1 Construct ILD for indeterminate beams Apply 70 A
CO2 Analyse beams and frames by strain energy 70 A

method
Apply
CO3 Analyse continuous beams, fixed beams and Apply 70 A

propped cantilever using theorem of three
moments
CO4 Analyse beams and frames by slope deflection Apply 70 A

method
CO5 Analyse beams and frames by moment Apply 70 A

distribution method
CO6 Analyse beams and frames by matrix stiffness Apply 70 A

method
1
CO1 S S M - - L - - - M - S M L
CO2 M M - - - - - - - - L - M L
CO3 S S - - - - - - - - - S M L
CO4 S S - M - M - - - - - S M M
CO5 S S - - M L M - M S - S M M
CO6 S S M - M L M - - - - S M M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 60 60 60 60
Analyze 20 20 20 20
Create -- -- -- --
10. State Muller Breslau’s principle

11. Write the significance of influence line diagrams.
12. Express the equation for finding influence line diagram ordinate for reaction of
a propped cantilever beam.
13. Sketch the shape of influence line diagram for shear force at any section of a
two span continuous beam of two equal spans
14. Draw the influence line diagram for reaction at A and B of a two span
continuous beam ABC with simply supported ends having length AB=BC = 6m
Compute ILD ordinates at 2m intervals
15. Derive the influence line diagram for the prop reaction at B of a propped
cantilever. Using the influence diagram, determine the prop reaction if the
beam has a span of 8m and subjected to three point loads of 15kN, 10kN and
20kN at 2m,4m and 6.5m from the propped end
4. Define the term strain energy

5. State theorem of minimum strain energy as applied to indeterminate beams.
Also, write the governing equation.
6. A propped cantilever beam AB of span 6m is subjected to a uniformly distributed
load of 15kN/m over the entire span and point loads of 10kN and 15kN at 2m and
4m respectively from the propped end B. Determine the prop reaction using strain
energy method.
7. A propped cantilever beam AB of span 6m is subjected to a uniformly distributed
load of 15kN/m over the entire span and a point load of 10kN at 2m from the
propped end B. Determine the prop reaction using strain energy method.
8. A two span continuous beam of equal spans is subjected to a uniformly
distributed load of 20kN/m over the entire length of both spans. Determine the
reaction at mid support by strain energy method.
9. Find the force in the members of the truss loaded as shown in Fig.1. Use strain
energy method. A and E same for all members

16. Write the application of Clapeyron’s theorem of three moments.
17. Outline area and c.g distances of free body diagram of any two loading
conditions
18. A continuous beam ABC fixed at end A and continuous over supports B and C.
The span AB=8m carries a uniformly distributed load of 6kN/m over the entire
span. The span BC=5m carries a non-central concentrated load of 15kN acting at
a distance of 3m from support B. Analyse the beam and draw bending moment
diagram using theorem of three moments. (EI is constant)
19. A continuous beam ABCD simply supported at ends A and D and continuous
over supports B and C. The span AB=5m carries a non central concentrated load
of 15kN at 2m from A. The span BC=4m carries a uniformly distributed load of
6kN/m over the entire span. The span CD=5m carries a central concentrated load
of 10kN. Analyse the beam and draw bending moment diagram.Use theorem of
three moments. (EI is constant)

20. Brief slope deflection equation and mention the use of conjugate beam method
in
deriving slope deflection equation.
21. List out the reasons for the sway of portal frame with neat sketches
22. Write the slope deflection equation in case of frames with side sway explaining
the sign convention followed
23. A continuous beam ABCD of 14 metres span fixed at ends A and D and
continuous over supports B and C. The span AB=5m carries a central load of
10kN.The span BC=4m carries a uniformly distributed load of 4kN/m over the
span BC. The span CD=5m carries a central load of 8kN. Analyse the beam using
slope deflection method and draw the bending moment diagram. (EI is constant)
24. Define the terms stiffness and distribution factor
25. Write the advantage of moment distribution method over slope deflection
method
26. Express fixed end moments due to applied clockwise couple in a beam of span
‘l’.
27. Calculate the end moments of a three span continuous beam ABCD of span
AB=4.0m loaded with a uniformly distributed load of 20kN/m over the entire
span, span BC=5.0m loaded with a point load of 40kN acting at 3.0m from B and
span CD=5.0m loaded with 60kN acting at 2.0m from C with fixed ends at A and
D. Use Moment distribution method.
28. Analyze a rectangular portal frame ABCD with fixed end at A and hinged end at D
having dimensions AB=6m, DC=4.0m, and the horizontal member BC=5.0m. The
frame is loaded with a concentrated load of 60kN acting at a distance of 3.0 m
from the rigid joint B on the member BC and a uniformly distributed load of
20kN/m over the entire length of the vertical member DC. Use Moment
distribution method

1. How would you obtain structure stiffness matrix?
2. Write the general element stiffness matrix of a two span continuous beam.
3. A continuous beam ABC fixed at end A, continuous over support B and freely supported at C.
The span AB=6m carries a uniformly distributed load of 15kN/m over the entire span. The span
BC=5m carries a non-central concentrated load of 20kN acting at a distance of 3m from
support B. Analyse the beam by matrix stiffness method. (EI is constant). Draw the shear force
and bending moment diagrams.
4. A portal frame of spans AB = 3m, BC = 4.5m and CD = 3m is subjected to a

uniformly distributed load of 15kN/m over the entire span of BC. Analyse by
matrix stiffness method and draw the bending moment diagram. MI of spans AB
and CD : I and that of BC is 2I
5. Analyse the continuous beam shown in Fig. By matrix flexibility method
Concept Map
Syllabus
ILD for indeterminate beams: Muller Breslau’s principle – Influence line diagrams for propped
cantilever and continuous beams Strain Energy Method: Introduction – Castigliano’s theorem of
minimum strain energy – Analysis of beams ,frames and trusses. Theorem of Three Moments:
Clapeyron’s theorem of three moments - Analysis of continuous beams. Slope Deflection Method:
Derivation of slope deflection equation – Analysis of continuous beams. Moment Distribution
Method: Stiffness – carry over factor – distribution factor - Analysis of continuous beams – Analysis
of portal frames with and without side sway (single storey and single bay). Matrix Methods:
Structure Stiffness Matrix – Analysis of continuous beams – Analysis of portal frames without side
sway (single storey and single bay) by matrix stiffness method – Analysis of continuous beams by
matrix flexibility method.
Text Book
3. Punmia, B.C., Arun Kumar, Ashok Kumar., Theory of structures, Laxmi Publications, New
Delhi, 2014.
4. Devdas Menon., Structural Analysis,Alpha Science International, 2008.
Reference Books
7. Wang.,C.K., “ Indeterminate Structures” McGraw Hill Book Co., Newyork, 1994
8. Pandit G.S and Gupta S.P., “ Structural Analysis – A Matrix Approach” Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Ltd. New Delhi, 2007
9. Reddy,C.S., “Basic Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi, 2010
10. Junnarkar, S.B. & Shah, H.J.., Mechanics of structures, vol.I, II, Charotar Publishing House,
India, 2000
11. Thandavamoorthy, ‘‘Analysis of Structures”, Oxford &IBH Publishers, New Delhi.2008
12. Jindal,R.L, “Indeterminate Sructures”, S.Chand and Company Ltd., New Delhi 2000
13. NPTEL materials (http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105106050)
Course Content
Module No. Of
Topic
No. Lectures
1.0 ILD for indeterminate beams
1.1 Muller Breslau’s Principle 1
1.2 Influence line diagram for propped cantilever 1
Tutorial 2
1.3 Influence line diagram for continuous beams 2

Tutorial 2
2.0 Strain Energy Method
2.1 Castigliano’s theorem of minimum strain energy 1
2.2 Analysis of continuous beams 1
Tutorial 2
2.3 Analysis of frames 1
Tutorial 1
2.4 Analysis of trusses 1
Tutorial 1
3.0 Theorem of three moments
3.1 Clapeyron’s theorem of three moments 1
Tutorial 2
4.0 Slope Deflection Method
4.1 Derivation of slope deflection equation 1
Tutorial 2
5.0 Moment Distribution Method
5.1 Definition of stiffness, carry over factor and distribution factor 1

Tutorial 2
5.3 Analysis of portal frames without side sway 1
5.4 Analysis of portal frames with side sway 2
Tutorial 3
6.0 Matrix Methods
6.1 Structure stiffness matrix 1
6.2 Analysis of continuous beams by matrix stiffness method 2
Tutorial 3
6.3 Analysis of portal frames without side sway by matrix stiffness method 2
Tutorial 2
Module No. Of
Topic
No. Lectures
6.4 Analysis of continuous beams by matrix flexibility method 2
Tutorial 2
Total hours (24 Theory + 24 Tutorials ) 48

Course Designers:
14CE430 HYDRAULICS AND HYDRAULIC Category L T P Credit
PC 3 0 0 3
MACHINERY
Preamble: This course aims at an experimental way of studying the fluid flow, which deals
with measurement, design and behavior of flow in open channels. Further, it also involves
Dimensional analysis, model testing and design of hydraulic machines at an optimum cost.
Prerequisite
Engineering Mathematics, Physics and Fluid Mechanics
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Level in % Level in grade
(CO1) Explain the various types of open channels Understand 70 A
and their flows
(CO2) Design the various types of most efficient Apply 70 A
channel sections
(CO3) Apply the principles of Dimensional Apply 70 A
Analysis and Model Analysis in hydraulic
engineering problems.
(CO4) Compute the forces exerted by the jet of Apply 70 A
water on fixed and moving plates.
(CO5) Design and study the performance of Apply 70 A
various types of hydraulic turbines.
(CO6) Design and study the performance of Apply 70 A
various types of pumps.

COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO 2
CO15. L L L L - - - - - - - - L -
CO16. S S S S - - - M - - - M M L
CO3 S S S S - - - - - - - - M L
CO4 S S L L - L - - - - - - M L
CO5 S S S S - L L M - - - - M L
CO6 S S S S - L L M - - - - M L
.

Assessment Pattern
Continuous Assessment Tests Terminal
Bloom’s
Examinati
Category 1 2 3
on
Apply 60 60 60 60
Analyse --- --- --- ---
Evaluate --- --- --- ---
Create --- --- --- ---
1. What is an open channel flow?

2. Define the following terms
i. Hydraulic radius (ii). Wetted Perimeter and (iii) Slope of the bed
3. Differentiate between steady and unsteady flow in a channel.
4. Why is a bed slope provided for an open channel?
5. List the advantages of Hydraulic jump.
1. A rectangular channel is 7m wide and 1.8m deep. If the bed of the channel is laid at a
slope of 1in 6000, calculate the velocity of flow and discharge. Use Chezy’s equation
and assume C= 50
2. Determine the dimensions of the most economical trapezoidal earth-lined channel to
carry 15m3/s at a slope of 1in 2400. Apply Manning’s equation and assume n = 0.020
3. The discharge of water through a rectangular channel of width 7m, is 16m 3/s when
the depth of flow of water is 1.2m, Calculate (i) Specific energy of the flowing water,
(ii) critical depth and critical velocity and (iii) value of minimum specific energy.
4. A rectangular channel 2m wide has a discharge of 0.25m 3/s, which is measured by a
right angled V notch. Find the position of the apex of the notch from the bed of the
channel if the maximum depth of water is not to exceed 1.3m. Assume Cd = 0.62
5. A sewer pipe is to be laid at a slope of 1 in 7500 to carry a maximum discharge of
1m3/s, when the depth of water is 75% of the vertical diameter. Compute the
diameter of this pipe, if the value of Manning’s N is 0.025
1. Briefly explain, (i) Geometric similarity, (ii)Kinematic similarity and (iii) Dynamic
similarity
2. Explain Rayleigh’s method of obtaining relation between a given set of variables
influencing a phenomenon.
3. The frictional torque T of a disc of diameter D rotating at a speed N in a fluid of
viscosity μ and density ρ in a turbulent flow is given by
T = D5N2 ρ φ [μ/D2N ρ] Prove this by the method of dimension.
4. The discharge Q of a centrifugal pump depends upon the mass density of the fluid ρ,
the speed of the pump N, the diameter of the impeller D, the manometric head H,
viscosity of the fluid μ and acceleration due to gravity g. Obtain an expression for Q,
using Buckingham’s π theorem.
5. A 7.0 m high and 10 m long spillway discharges 90 m 3/s discharge under a head of
2m. If 1:10 scale model of this spillway is to be constructed, determine model
dimensions, head over spillway model and the model discharge. If model
experiences a force of 7200N, determine force on the prototype.
1. Derive an expression for the force exerted by a jet of water on a fixed vertical plate in
the direction of the jet.
2. Draw the velocity triangles for unsymmetrical moving curved vane when the jet
strikes tangentially at one of its tip.
3. A jet of water 50mm in a diameter, issues with a velocity of 10m/s and impinges on a
stationary flat plate which destroys its forward motion. Calculate the force exerted by
the jet on the plate and the work done.
4. A jet of water having velocity of 30m/s strikes a curved vane which is moving with a
velocity of 15m/s. The jet makes an angle of 30 0 with the direction of motion of vane
at inlet and leaves at an angle of 120 0 to the direction of motion at outlet. Draw the
velocity triangles at inlet and outlet. Also calculate (i) van angles at inlet and outlet
(θ,Φ) and (ii) work done per second on the vane by the jet.
1. Differentiate radial flow and axial flow turbines.

2. Define specific speed of turbine.
3. Design a Pelton wheel for a head of 50m when running at 250 rpm. The Pelton
wheel develops 90kW shaft power. The velocity of buckets =0.45 times the
velocity of jet, overall efficiency is 85% and co-efficient velocity is 0.98
4. An inward radial flow reaction turbine works at 500rpm under a head of 100m.
The diameter of turbine at inlet is 1.0m and flow area is 0.35m 2. The angles
made by absolute velocity and relative velocities at inlet are 15 0 and 600
respectively with the tangential velocity. Determine (i) Volume rate of flow, (ii)
Power developed and (iii) Hydraulic efficiency of turbine.
5. A turbine is to operate under a head of 30m at 300 r.p.m. The discharge is
10m3/s. If the efficiency is 90% determine (i) Specific speed of the turbine, (ii)
Power generated and (iii) type of the turbine.
1. What is priming?
2. Mention the importance of connecting the pumps in series and in parallel?
3. Define slip of a reciprocating pump, at what condition the negative slip occur.
4. A centrifugal pump having outer diameter equal to two times the inner diameter
and running at 1000 rpm, works against a total head of 40m. The velocity of flow
through the impeller is constant and equal to 2.5 m/s. The vanes are curved
back at an angle of 40 o at outlet. If the outer diameter of the impeller is 600mm
and width at outlet is 50mm, determine (i) Discharge through the pump, (ii)
Vane angle at inlet (θ), (ii) Work done by impeller on water per second and (iii)
Manometric efficiency.
5. The cylinder bore diameter of a single acting reciprocating pump is 200mm and
its stroke is 400mm. The pump runs at 50 rpm and lifts water through a height of
25m. The delivery pipe is 22m long and 100mm in diameter. Find the theoretical
discharge and theoretical power required to run the pump. If the actual
discharge is 4.2 litres/s. Find the percentage of slip. Also determine the
acceleration head at the beginning and middle of the delivery stroke.
Concept Map
Syllabus:
Open channel flow: Definition, classification, and velocity distribution in open channels.
Chezy’s and Manning’s equation. Flow through rectangular, Trapezoidal and Circular
channels. Hydraulically most efficient channel section. Froude’s number, Specific energy
diagram, Hydraulic jump, Notches, Weirs, Venturi flume and Standing wave flume.
Dimensional Analysis: Fundamental dimensions and derived quantity, Dimensional
homogeneity, Rayleigh’s method and Buckingham’s Pi-Theorem, Similitude, Model testing,
Dimensionless number. Impact of jets:Impact of jets on vanes. Water turbines: Historical
development of turbines and classification, Pelton wheel, Francis turbine, Kaplan turbine,
specific speed and Cavitation. Pumps: Types of pumps, Selection of pumps, Troubles and
remedies, Multistage pumps, Characteristics curves, Specific speed. Single and double
acting reciprocating pump, Multi-cylinder pump, Indicator diagram, Slip and Air vessels.
Special Pumps – Jet, Compressible and Submersible pumps.
Text Book
Machines” Standard Book House” New Delhi, 20 th Edition 2015.
Reference Books
1. Bansal R.K, “ Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines” Laxmi Publications,

New Delhi, 2015.
2. Rajput. R.K, “ A Text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”,
S.Chand and Company, New Delhi,2011.
3. Subramanya K, “Flow in open channels”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company, 2009.
4. Ramamrutham S and Narayanan R “Hydraulics, Fluid Mechanics and Fluid
Machines”, DhanpatRai Publishing Co (P) Ltd, New Delhi 2006.
5. Robert W.Fox and Alan T. Mc Donald, “Introduction to Fluid Mechanics”
Seventh Edition, John Willey & sons, New York, 2009.

Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1 Open Channel Flow
1.1 Introduction to open channel flow, Definition of open channel flow, 1
uniform flow,steady flow, unsteady flow, GVF,RVF
1.2 Chezy’s equation & Manning’s equation, 1
1.3 Problems on rectangular and trapezoidal channel section 2
1.4 Circular channel section and Problems 1
1.5 Definition for Most economical section, Most economical section 1

condition for rectangular section and Problems.
1.6 Most economical section condition for trapezoidal section and 1

Problems.
1.7 Most economical section condition for circular section 1
1.8 Definition of Froude’s number and Reynold’s number , Definition of 1

specific energy, specific energy diagram, critical depth, and critical
velocity
1.9 Expression for depth of hydraulic jump,& Expression for loss of energy 1
due to hydraulic jump, Problems on hydraulic jumps
1.10 Flow measurement by notches and weirs & problems 1
1.11 Venturiflume& Standing wave flume 1
2 Dimensional Analysis
2.1 Introduction to dimensional analysis, fundamental dimensions, derived 1
quantity, dimensional homogeneity and problems.
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
2.2 Rayleigh’s method and problems 2
2.3 Buckingham’s Pi theorem and problems 2
2.4 Similitude and model testing 1
2.5 Dimensionless numbers and its application 2
3 Impact of Jets
3.1 Definition of impact of jet and stationary flat vanes 1
3.2 Problems on Stationary symmetrical & unsymmetrical curved vanes 2
4 Hydraulic Turbines
4.1 Introduction to water turbine and its classification, Pelton wheel & 2
problems
4.2 Francis turbine working principle and problems 2
4.3 Kaplan turbine working principle and problems 1
4.4 Specific speed and cavitation in turbines 1
5 Pumps
5.1 Introduction to centrifugal pump, & Description of working principles 1
5.2 Troubles and remedies in centrifugal pumps 1
5.3 Performance characteristics, specific speed of centrifugal pumps, and 1

Similarity and selection of centrifugal pumps
5.4 Introduction to reciprocating pump, single acting and double acting 1

pump and slip
5.5 Indicator diagrams 1
5.6 Air vessels and acceleration head and power required 1
5.7 Jet, Compressor and Submersible pumps 1
Total Hours 36
Course Designers
1. M.Ramasamy mrciv@tce.edu
2. Dr.T.Baskaran tbciv@tce.edu
14CE450 ENGINEERING DESIGN PC 1 0 2 3
Common for B.E./B.Tech Degree Programmes

(Course Codes: 14ME420, 14EE450, 14EC450, 14IT450, 14CS340, 14MT420)
Preamble
Engineering design is normally taught, not as a unified course in India. The courses like Product
design, Machine design, Electrical machine design and transformer design, Control system design
and Communication system design are tailored to specific topics there were many new approaches
developed over a period of time. There is a need to discuss a unified approach of design in a course.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Level In % (grade)
CO1: Explain engineering an the Understand 95 S
qualities required in a engineering
solution and in a engineer
CO2. Identify the need and define the Apply 95 S
problem statement.
CO3: Apply engineering design process for the Apply 95 S

identified problem.
CO4: Develop design specification for Analyse 95 S

the identified problem.
Mapping with
Programme Outcomes CO5: Develop working structure and Analyse
S- Strong; M- concepts for the identified problem
Medium; L- CO6: Provide embodiment and detail Analyse
Low
design for the identified problem
1
CO1 M L - - - S M S - - - S L -
CO2 S M L - - S M S M M - S M L
CO3 S M L - L S M S M M L S L L
CO4 S S M L M M M S S M L S L L
CO5 S S M L M - S S S M L S M M
CO6 S S M L M S S S S S M S M M
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category
CAT 1 Review 1 Review 2
Remember 20 0 0
Understand 40 0 0
Apply 40 100 50
Analyse 0 0 50
Evaluate 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0
• Milestones:
1. Problem description ( 3 weeks)
2. Framework (4 weeks)
i. Functional requirements
ii. User requirements
iii. Performance requirements
iv. Specifications
3. Preliminary design (conceptual) (3 weeks)
i. Cost estimates
4. Final design (conceptual document) (2 weeks)
Review 1 for milestones1 & 2 and Review 2 for milestones 3 & 4

29. Define Engineering Design

30. State different activities involved in Product Engineering Life Cycle
31. List different design considerations that are required for a good design
32. Explain different types of design
33. List the characteristics of environmentally responsible design
1. List different modes to collect user requirements.

2. Briefly explain the classification of different types of User requirement
3. Define Benchmarking or Reverse Engineering or Product Dissection
4. List two categories of Redesign
5. Explain different activities involved in Design process
6. Explain different steps involved in Conceptual Design process
1. Write product design specifications for any of the following product - Desktop
Computer or Bicycle or Pencil or Computer Table or mobile.
2. Translate customer requirements into Engineering characteristics of any product like
mobile or computer or bicycle.
1. Prepare conceptual design document for any complex engineering problem related to
societal engineering under specific domain.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Modern Engineering: Introduction, Engineering today, Requirements of engineering, Types of
engineering, Engineering Solutions, Pillars of Engineering, Design Taxonomy, Product, Quality of
product.
Engineering Design Process: Types of Designs, A Simplified Iteration Model, Considerations of a

Good Design, Description of Design Process, Design Review, Societal Considerations in Engineering
Design,
Problem Definition and Need Identification: Identifying Customer Needs, Customer Requirements,
Establishing the Engineering Characteristics, Quality Function Deployment, product Design
Specification
Conceptual Design: Steps, Abstracting to Identify the Essential Problems, Establishing Function
Structures, Developing Working Structures and concepts. Examples
Embodiment and Detail Designs: Steps, Basic Rules and Principles of Embodiment Design, Detail
Design, Design for Quality and minimum Cost. Examples
Reference Books
1. G.Pahl and W.Beitz (Translated by Ken Wallace et al.,) ‘Engineering Design: A
Systematic Approach, Second Edition, Springer, 2005.
2. George E. Dieter and Linda C. Schmidt, “Engineering Design”, Fourth Edition,
McGraw Hill Higher Education, 2009.
3. Power Point Presentation material by Prof.D.K.Subramanian in the Workshop on
Engineering Design at TCE, Madurai.
4. Foundation Skills in Integrated Product Development, NASSCOM, Edition 2015
Module
No.
1 Modern Engineering
1.1 Introduction - Engineering today
1
1.2 Requirements of engineering
1.3 Types of engineering
1.4 Engineering Solutions 1
1.5 Pillars of Engineering
1.6 Design Taxonomy
1
1.7 Product and Quality of product
2 Engineering Design Process
2.1 Types of Designs
2.2 A Simplified Iteration Model 1
2.3 Considerations of a Good Design
2.4 Description of Design Process
1
2.5 Design Review
2.6 Societal Considerations in Engineering Design 1
3 Problem Definition and Need Identification
3.1 Identifying Customer Needs
3.2 Customer Requirements 1
3.3 Establishing the Engineering Characteristics
3.4 Quality Function Deployment
1
3.5 Product Design Specification
4 Conceptual Design
4.1 Steps, Abstracting to Identify the Essential Problems
2
4.2 Establishing Function Structures
4.3 Developing Working Structures and concepts - Examples
5 Embodiment and Detail Design
5.1 Steps, Basic Rules and Principles of Embodiment Design
2
5.2 Detail Design – Examples
5.3 Design for Quality and minimum Cost
Total Lectures 12
Course Designers:
1. Dr.S.J.Thi sjtece
ruvengad @tce.e
am du
2. Dr.S.Bask sbeee
ar @tce.e
du
14CE470 PROFESSIONAL Cate L T P Cr
COMMUNICATION gory edi
t
PC 1 0 2 2
Preamble
This course provides opportunities to students to develop and demonstrate
basic communication skills in technical, professional and social contexts
effectively.
Prerequisite
 14EG141: English
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Level in % Level in
grade
CO1: Plan, organise, write, and
present project reports, Apply
CO2: and technical papers in
the frame of the scientific
Apply
method
Establish themselves
through communication
skills in corporate
environment
CO3: Solve verbal aptitude

questions related to Apply
placement and higher
studies
CO4: Apply their interpersonal

skills in technical, Apply
professional and social
contexts

C P P P P P P P P P P P P PSO P
O O O O O O O O O O O O O 1 S
s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O
2
CO17.
- - - - - - - - M M - -
CO18.
- - - - - - - - M M - -
CO19.
- - - - - - - - M M - -
CO20.- - - - - - - - M M - -
Assessment Pattern
Internal
No Continuous Assessment Test (CAT) will be
conducted.
Students’ performance will be continuously assessed in
various classroom activities in Listening, Speaking,
Reading and Writing for 50 marks as detailed below
Project Report Preparation and

Technical Presentation through PPT
- 15
Listening Test
- 10
Spoken Task – Group Discussion / Mock Job
Interview - 10
Writing – Verbal Aptitude for Placement and Higher
studies - 15
(The test will be conducted for 50 marks and reduced
to 15)
External (Practical)
Listening Test
- 20
Group Discussion
- 25
Personal Interview / Situational Conversation
- 25
Technical Presentation
- 20
Resume
- 10
List of Experiments
SI. No. of Hours
Topic
No. Theory Practical
Literature Survey / Project Title
1 1
Selection
Characteristics of Technical Paper and
2 1
Project Report
3 Abstract / Data Presentation 1
4 Common Errors in Technical Writing 1
5 Bibliography and References 1
6 Vocabulary Development 1
7 Sentence Completion 1
8 Error Spotting 1
9 Interpretation of Verbal Analogy 1
Interpretation of Reading
10 1
(Comprehension - Conception)
Interpretation of Reading
11 1
(Comprehension - Reasoning)
12 Practice for writing E-mails 1
PPT Preparation /Demonstration of
13 4
Technical Presentation
14 Preparation of Resume 2
15 Preparation for Job Interviews 4
Demonstration of Group Discussion
16 4
Skills
Developing Listening Skill
17 3
(Comprehension)
Practice for Short Speeches /
18 4
Situational Conversation
19 Development of Employability Skills 2
20 Non-Verbal Communication 1
Total Hours 12 24
Reference Books:
1. Courseware on “Technical Communication for Scientists and
Engineers”, IIT Bombay, 2015.
2. Cappel, Annette and Sharp, Wendy, Cambridge English:
Objective First, 4th Ed., CUP, New Delhi, 2013.
3. Sue Prince, Emma, The Advantage: The 7 Soft Skills You Need
to Stay One Step Ahead, Pearson; 1 Edition, 2013.
4. Cusack, Barry. Improve Your IELTS Listening and Speaking
Skills (With CD) Paperback, Macmillan, 2007.
5. Bates, Susan TOEFL iBT Exam Paperback – oxford, 2012 .
6. Hart, Guy Brook. Cambridge English Business Benchmark: 2
Ed., CUP 2014
Course Designers:
1. Dr. T.Sadasivan sadasivan@tce.edu
2. Dr. S.Rajaram sreng@tce.edu
3. Dr. A.Tamilselvi tamilselvi@tce.edu
4. Mr. R.Vinoth vino@tce.edu
5. Dr.R.K.Jaishree Karthiga jai@tce.edu
14CE480 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING Category L T P Credit
LAB PC 0 0 2 1
Preamble
This laboratory course is intended to provide students with opportunities to get hands on
training to solve general and Civil Engineering problems using C programming language
Prerequisite
14CE360 -Problem solving using Computer
Course Outcomes
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Expected Expected
level in % Level in grade
Write programme in C for solving
CO1 Apply 95 S
mathematical problems
Write programme in C using array of
CO2 strcutures and string manipulation Apply 95 S
concept
Write programme in C using pointers to
CO3 Apply 95 S
functions
Write programme in C for solving civil
CO4 Apply 95 S
survey problems
Write programme in C for solving
CO5 Apply 95 S
strength of material problems
Write programme in C for solving fluid
CO6 Apply 95 S
mechanics problems

COs PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O 1 2
CO23. S M - L S - - - - L S - M L
CO24. S M - L S - - - - L S - M L
CO25. S M - L S - - - - L S - M L
CO26. S M - L S - - - - L S - M L
CO27. S M - L S - - - - L S - M L
CO28. S M - L S - - - - L S - M L
List of Experiments
1. Simple Programs
a. Fibonacci Series
b. Sum of set of numbers
c. Generation of prime numbers
d. Roots of Quadratic Equation
2. Sum of Series
3. Matrix Addition, Subtraction and Multiplication
4. Arrays of Structures
5. Pointers to functions
6. a)Determination of area and volume of given objects
b) Determination of area of irregular boundaries
7. Determination of Centre of Gravity and Moment of Inertia of symmetrical
sections
8. Determination of Centre of Gravity and Moment of Inertia of unsymmetrical
sections
9. Determination of Shear force and Bending moment of Determinate structures
with various load conditions
10. Determination of Slope and Deflection for Determinate structures with various
loading conditions
11. Determination of Crippling load for columns with various end conditions
12. Determination of head loss due to friction in pipes
13. Determination of unknown area of cross section of a varying pipe line using the
Bernoulli’s Theorem and continuity equation
14. Determination of shortest route between cities
Reference Books
1. Byron S.Gottfried, Schaum’s Outline series, “Programming w ith C”, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Pvt Ltd, Third Edition, 2010
2. Yashavant Kanetkar, “Let us C”, Bpb Publishers, 13th Edition, 2012.
3. Al Kelley and Ira Pohl, “A Book On C”, Addison-Wesley , Fourth Edition, 1998
Course Designers
2. Dr. D. Brindha dbciv@tce.edu
Preamble
This laboratory is used in
FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY conjunction with fluid
14CE490
LAB mechanics course in
reinforcing the fundamentals of fluid mechanics and Category L T P Credit
machinery by hands on experiment.
PC 0 0 2 1
Prerequisite
Engineering Mathematics, Physics and Fluid Mechanics.
Course Outcomes
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
Expected Expected
Attainment level Proficiency level
in % in grade
Measure the flow in pipe section using
CO1 Apply 95 S
orificemeter and venturimeter
Measure the flow in the open channels using
CO2 Apply 95 S
notches
Measure and compute the major and minor
CO3 Apply 95 S
losses in pipes
CO4 Verify the Bernoulli’s theorem Apply 95 S
Study the performance of different types of
CO5 Apply 95 S
hydraulic turbines
Study the performance of different types of
CO6 Apply 95 S
pumps

CO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO10 PO11 PO1 PS PSO 2
s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 O1
CO29. M L - - - - - - - L - - L L
CO30. M L - - - - - - - L - - L L
CO31. S S M M - - - - - L - - L L
CO32. S S - - - - - - - L - - L L
CO33. S M M M - - - - - L - - M L
CO34. S M M M - - - - - L - - M L

List of Experiments
1. Determination of coefficient of discharge of orifice.
2. Flow measurement in pipe using orificemeter
3. Flow measurement in pipe using venturimeter
4. Flow measurement in open channel using notches
5. Determination of frictional loss in pipes
6. Determination of minor losses in pipes
7. Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem
8. Determination of laminar-turbulent flow in pipes using Reynold’s apparatus
9. Determination of metecentric height of a floating body
10. Performance test on Pelton wheel turbine
11. Performance test on Francis turbine
12. Study of impact of jet on vanes
13. Performance test on multi-stage centrifugal pump
14. Performance test on reciprocating pump
15. Performance test on submersible pump.
Reference Books
Machines” Standard Book House” New Delhi, 20 th Edition 2015.
2. Bansal R.K, “ Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines” Laxmi Publications, New
Delhi, 2015.
3. Rajput. R.K, “ A Text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, S.Chand
and Company, New Delhi,2011.
Course Designers
3. Dr.S.Chandran schandran@tce.edu
4. M.Ramasamy mrciv@tce.edu
14CE440 WASTEWATER ENGINEERING PC 2 2 0 3
Preamble
This course work aims at imparting the basic knowledge on various stages of works
involved in planning, designing and execution of underground drainage system for a town/
city. This involves characteristics study on wastewater, estimation of wastewater and storm
drainage generation, collection of wastewater, evolving a suitable treatment system to bring
down the pollution level to acceptable limit and disposal of the treated wastewater on to land/
water bodies without endangering the environment.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of Chemistry, Fluid mechanics and Water supply Engineering.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
level in % Level in
grade
CO1. Characterize the wastewater generated Apply 70 A
from a town/ city
CO2. Estimate the quantity of wastewater and Apply 70 A
storm run-off generated from the town/ city
CO3. Design a suitable collection system for Apply 70 A
the generated wastewater
CO4. Identify the sewer appurtenances needed Understand 70 A
for the smooth functioning of the sewerage and
to perform the necessary maintenance
operations involved in the system
CO5. Design the necessary treatment units for Apply 70 A
the wastewater collected from the town/city
CO6. Identify the suitable mode of disposal for Apply 70 A
the treated wastewater without endangering the
environment.
COS PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO PS
1 O2
CO21. S S M M - M S - - - - - M L
CO22. S S M S - M - - M M - - M L
CO3. S S S S - S S M - - - - M L
CO4. M M S S - S M - S S - - M M
CO5. S S S S - S S - - M - - M L
CO6. S S S S - S S S S S - - M M
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Continuous Terminal
Category Assessment Tests Examination
1 2 3
Apply 40 50 50 50
Analyse -- -- -- --
Create -- -- -- --
1. What is Population equivalent
2. The 7 days 20˚C BOD of a sample of sewage is 300mg/L and its 3days 20˚C BOD is
210mg/L. find out the value of de-oxygenation constant k and then estimate its 5 days
30˚C BOD.
3. The sewage discharge of a city is 85m3/s in the river having a minimum discharge of
930 l/s with a velocity of 0.12m/s. the BOD at 20˚C of the sewage is 325mg/L. the BOD
of the river is zero. Determine the quantity and point of critical DO deficit.

4. A district consists of 20% of area with runoff coefficient 0.9,20% of area with runoff
coefficient 0.85,5% of area with 0.80,15% of area with 0.40 runoff coefficient, 35% of
area with runoff coefficient 0.10 and remaining area with runoff efficient 0.05; determine
the co-efficient of runoff for the area. If the total area of the district is 36 hectares and
the maximum rain intensity is taken as 5cm/hr; what is the total runoff for the district? If
the density of population is 250 per hectare and the rate of water supply is
200lit/day/capita. Calculate the quantity of sewage for which the sewer of a separate
system is to be designed.
5. A 30cm dia sewer having an invert slope of 1 in 150 was flowing full. What would be the
velocity of flow and discharge. N=0.013. Is the velocity self cleansing? What would be
the velocity and discharge when the same is flowing at 0.20 and 0.80 of the full depth.
6. Suggest a suitable sewage collection system for a town with a population of 5.0 Lakhs.
This town is very old with narrow layout of roads and streets.
7. With a help of a neat sketch, propose a wastewater collection system for a house with 2
bed rooms, 1 Hall, 1 sit-out, 1 kitchen etc.

1. Discuss the role of velocity of flow in hydraulic design of sewers
2. Justify the usage of various sewer appurtenances for the efficient performance of
sewerage.
3. Justify the usage of circular shaped sewers than other sections.
4. Design a grit chamber system for a town with a population of 1.0 Lakh. Assume
necessary design parameters appropriately.

4. Design a standard rate trickling filter for the following:
Average incoming flow=350m3/hr
BOD of primary effluent=210mg/L
No of units=4
Make suitable assumptions for any missing data.
5. A sedimentation tank treating 4.5 million liters of sewage per day containing 275mg/L of
suspended solids. The tank removes 50% suspended solids. Calculate the quantity of
sludge produced per day in volume basis & weight basis, if (i) moisture content is 98%
(ii) moisture content is 96%
6. Why do we go for anaerobic treatment of sewage? Analyze the performance of different

anaerobic treatment system?
7. A city with a population of 2.0 Lakhs is to be provided with a secondary treatment
facility. Suggest a treatment system and make a complete design.
4. Design a septic tank for the following data:
No of people=100
Sewage/capita/day=120L
Desludging period=1yr
L:B=4:1
5. Design a septic tank unit for a housing colony with 100 persons. Also design the
suitable effluent percolation unit.
6. Suggest a disposal system for a town where the water scarcity is very high.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Characteristics of sewage, decomposition – aerobic and anaerobic decomposition-
physical and chemical quality of sewage – BOD and their testing– BOD equation –
problems – population equivalent. Systems of sanitation– Estimating quantity of sewage –
dry weather flow – estimating storm run-off by rational formula – Sewerage – separate,
combined and partially separate system – hydraulic design of sewers. Sewer materials -
laying and testing of sewer sewer appurtenances, cleaning and ventilation of sewers-
pumping of sewage. Physico - chemical treatment of sewage. Biological treatment of
sewage – aerobic treatment - activated sludge process – process mechanism, design
parameters, design – modifications in ASP. Trickling filters – process mechanism, types,
design parameters and design. Hybrid system – SBR, MBR , MBBR ( basics only). Natural
systems - Ponds and Lagoons. Anaerobic systems – UASB, anaerobic filters and natural
systems. Sludge digestion – characteristics- digestion tanks, design - disposal of digested
sludge. Impact of disposal of treated sewage – Impact on river – self purification – oxygen
sag curve – streeter phelps equation – Impact on lakes – Eutrophication – Impact on sea.
Land irrigation – sewage farming, sewage sickness. Recycling of treated sewage. Disposal
of sewage in isolated buildings, plumbing system – types; Sanitary practices in rural areas.
ECOSAN, Introduction to DEWATS.
Text Book
1. Garg S.K.: “Sewage Disposal and Air Pollution Engineering”, Khanna Publishers New
Delhi 2015.
2. Metcalf & Eddy :”Wastewater Engineering Treatment and Reuse” , Tata McGraw Hill
Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.
Reference Books
1. Peavy, Rowe, Tchobanoglous, “Environmental Engineering”, McGraw Hill Publishers,
New Delhi, 2013.
2. Punmia B.C, Ashok Jain, “Wastewater Engineering”, Laxmi publications, New Delhi,
1998.
3. Mark J.Hammer, Mark J.Hammer,Jr, “Water and Wastewater Technology”,Prentice
Hall of India Pvt.Ltd.,New Delhi,2011.
4. Manual on sewerage and sewage treatment, CPHEEO, Ministry of urban affairs &
employment, Govt.of India, New Delhi,2013.

Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1.0 Characterization of sewage
1.1 Aerobic and anaerobic decomposition of sewage 1
1.2 Physical quality of sewage
1.3 Chemical quality of sewage
1.3.1 BOD , testing procedure and BOD equation 1
1.3.2 Problems in BOD and population equivalent – Tutorial 2
1.4 Biological quality of sewage 1
2.0 Collection of sewage
2.1 Generation of sewage 1
2.2 Quantification of sewage- estimation
2.2.1 Estimation of storm runoff 1
2.3 System of sanitation 1
Estimation of storm runoff – Tutorial 2
3.0 Transportation of wastewater
3.1 Hydraulic design of sewer- principle 1
3.1.1 Problems in Hydraulic design of sewer –Tutorial 4
3.2 Sewer appurtenances 1
3.3 Maintenance of sewer
1
3.4 Pumping of sewage
3.5 Sewer material, laying and testing of sewer
4.0 Treatment of wastewater
4.1 Objectives of treatment – Physico - chemical treatment 1
4.2 Aerobic treatment – activated sludge process- process mechanism 1
4.2.1 Methods of aeration 1
4.2.2 Design consideration and design - Tutorial 4
4.2.3 Modification in ASP 1
4.2.4 Trickling filters- process mechanism, types
4.2.5 Design consideration – standard rate trickling filter 1
4.2.6 Design of standard rate trickling filter - Tutorial 2
4.2.7 High rate trickling filter- design – Tutorial 2
4.2.8 Hybrid system- SBR, MBR, MBBR 1
4.2.9 Natural systems – ponds and lagoons 1
4.3 Anaerobic system- UASB
4.3.1 Anaerobic filter, natural system 1
4.4 Sludge digestion- characteristics of sludge, digestion tanks 1
4.4.1 Design of digestion tank and disposal of digested sludge
Sludge digestion tanks and Sludge Characteristics - Tutorial 2
5.0 Impact of disposal of sewage
5.1 Impact of disposal of treated sewage – Impact on river 1
5.1.1 Self purification of streams
5.1.2 Oxygen sag curve for streams 1
5.1.3 Streeter phelps equation- problems – Tutorial 4
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
5.1.4 Impact on lakes- eutrophication 1
5.1.5 Impact on sea
5.2 Land irrigation- sewage farming 1
5.2.1 Sewage sickness
5.3 Drainage system in isolated buildings- septic tanks – Tutorial 2
5.3.1 Plumbing system- types 1
5.3.2 Sanitary practices in rural areas, ECOSAN 1
5.4 Introduction to DEWATS
Total hours (24 +24) 48
Course Designers:
2. Mr. V. Ravi sankar environmentengr@tce.edu
14CE510 MATHEMATICS V
BS 2 2 0 3
Preamble
Numerical methods in civil engineering can be used to solve mathematical models of civil
engineering problems. Mathematical models are many and cover every discipline encompassed by
civil engineering. Given the mathematical description of a problem a numerical method lays down,
the broad approach to be adopted to solve the problem numerically.
Prerequisite
 14MA110 Engineering Mathematics
 14CE310 Fourier Series and Partial Differential Equations
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
Expected Expected
At the end of the course the student will be able to: Attainment Proficiency
Organize the system of linear algebraic

CO1: Apply 75 A
equations and single non linear equations
arising in the field of Civil Engineering
Interpolate discrete data by means of continuous
CO2: Apply 75 A
function.
Evaluate the integration of one and two variable

CO3: functions using numerical tools and calculate Apply 75 A
derivatives using interpolation polynomial.
Identify the solution for the IVPs in ODE using

CO4: single step and multistep methods and BVPs in Apply 75 A
PDE using finite difference methods.
CO1 S S S L S S
CO2 S L L L L S L
CO3. S L L S L L
CO4. S L L S S
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 70 70 70 70
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -
1. A civil engineer involved in construction requires 4800, 5800, and 5700 m3 of sand, fine
gravel, and coarse gravel, respectively, for a building project. There are three pits from
which these materials can be obtained. The composition of these pits is
Sand Fine Gravel Coarse Gravel
% % %
Pit 1 52 30 18
Pit 2 20 50 30
Pit 3 25 20 55
How many cubic meters must be hauled from each pit in order to meet the engineer’s
needs?
2. The upward velocity of a rocket is given at three different times in the following table
Velocity vs. time data.
Time, t(s) Velocity, v (m/s)
5 106.8
8 177.2
12 279.2
The velocity data is approximated by a polynomial as v(t )  a1t 2  a2 t  a3 5  t  12 .Find
the values of a1,a2 and a3 using the Gauss-Seidel method. Assume an initial guess of the
 a1  1
   
solution as a2  2 and conduct two iterations.
   
a3  5
3. A loan of A dollars is repaid by making n equal monthly payments of M dollars, starting a

month after the loan is made. It can be shown that if the monthly interest rate is r, then Ar =
1
M (1  ) . A car loan of $10000 was repaid in 60 monthly payments of $250. Use the
(1  r ) n
Newton Method to find the monthly interest rate correct to 4 significant figures.
1. Write the recurrence formula used in cubic spline interpolation.

2. Use Newton’s interpolating polynomial to determine y at x =3.5 to the best possible accuracy.
Compute the finite divided differences and order your points to attain optimal accuracy and
convergence.
x 0 1 2.5 3 4.5 5 6
y 2 5.4375 7.3516 7.5625 8.4453 9.1875 12
3. The following data defines the sea-level concentration of dissolved oxygen for fresh water as a
function of temperature:
T°C 0 8 16 24 32 40
O,mg/L 14.621 11.843 9.870 8.418 7.305 6.413
Estimate o(27) using (a) linear interpolation, (b) Newton’s interpolating polynomial, and (c)
cubic splines. Note that the exact result is 7.986 mg/L.
34. Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Mention the formula for computing the first two derivatives using Newton’s forward
difference formula.
2. Stream cross-sectional areas (A) are required for a number of tasks in water resources
engineering, including flood forecasting and reservoir designing. Unless electronic
sounding devices are available to obtain continuous profiles of the channel bottom, the
engineer must rely on discrete depth measurements to compute A.An example of a
typical stream cross section is shown in Fig. The data points represent locations where a
boat was anchored and depth readings taken. Use two trapezoidal rule applications (h =
4 and 2 m) and Simpson’s 1/3 rule (h = 2 m) to estimate the cross sectional area from
this data.
3. Wind force distributed against the side of a skyscraper is measured as:
Height, l, m 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Force, F(l), N/m 0 340 1200 1600 2700 3100 3200 3500 3800
Compute the net force and the line of action due to this distributed wind.
35.
36. Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Differentiate between single step and multistep method in solving ordinary differential
equations.
2. The following equation can be used to model the deflection of a sailboat mast subject to
d2y f
a wind force: 2
 ( L  z ) 2 where f = wind force, E = modulus of elasticity, L = mast
dz 2 EI
length, and I = moment of inertia. Calculate the deflection if y = 0 and dy/dz = 0 at z = 0.
Use parameter values of f = 60, L = 30, E = 1.25 × 108,and I = 0.05 for your computation.
3. Solve the following initial value problem over the interval from t = 0 to 2 where y(0) = 1.
dy 3
yt  1.5 y dy=0.
dt
(a) Analytically.
(b) Euler’s method with h = 0.5 and 0.25.
(c) Midpoint method with h = 0.5.
(d) Fourth-order RK method with h = 0.5.

Concept Map
Syllabus
Methods for Numerical solution of Single Nonlinear Equations: Bisection Method - The Secant
Method - The method of Tangents (Newton-Raphson), convergence - Fixed Point Iteration method,
convergence. Methods for Numerical solution of Several Linear Equations: Gauss, Jordan
elimination methods - LU Matrix Decomposition Method, Method of Inverse of a Matrix using Jordan
method - Jacobi, Seidal Iterative Methods, convergence Methods for the Interpolation and
Approximation of Single Variable Function: Lagrange Interpolation Polynomial - Newton Gregory
Interpolating Polynomial - Cubic Spline Interpolation Polynomial - Curve Fitting with sinusoidal
functions. Methods for Numerical Integration and Differentiation: Newton Cote’s methods of
Integration, Trapezoidal, Simpson rule - Gauss Quadrature method - Simpson’s cubature formula for
Integration of Two variable Functions - Numerical differentiation by using Newton-Gregory
polynomial. Methods for Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential Equations and Finite
Difference Methods for Partial Differential Equations: The Euler, Modified Euler methods - Runge
Kutta Method RK4, Finite difference method - Adam - Bashforth method - Solution of Elliptic
equation for Laplace and Poisson equation - Parabolic equation by Bender Schmidt Method, Crank-
Nicolson Scheme - Hyperbolic equation by finite difference.
Text Books
1. Steven C. Chapra, Raymond P. Canale, “Numerical Methods for Engineers”, MC
Graw Hill Higher Education, 6 thEdition 2012.
2. S. R. K. Iyengar, R. K. Jain, Mahinder Kumar Jain, “Numerical methods for Scientific
and Engineering Computations”, New Age International publishers , 6th Edition,
2012.
Reference Books
1. S.K Gupta, “Numerical Methods for Engineers”, New Age International Pvt Ltd
Publishers, 2015.
2. Joe D. Hoffman , Steven Frankel, “Numerical Methods for Engineers and Scientists”,
Third Edition, 2015.
Module Topic No.of

No Lectures
1 Methods for Numerical solution of Single Nonlinear Equations
and Several Linear Equations
1.1 Introduction to Numerical Methods, Bisection Method 1
Tutorial 1
1.2 The Secant Method 1
Tutorial 1
1.3 The method of Tangents (Newton-Raphson), convergence 1
Tutorial 1
1.4 Fixed Point Iteration method, convergence 1
Tutorial 1
1.5 Gauss, Jordan elimination methods 1
Tutorial 1
1.6 LU Matrix Decomposition Method 1
Tutorial 1
1.7 Method of Inverse of a Matrix using Jordan method 1
Tutorial 1
1.8 Jacobi , Seidal Iterative Methods, , convergence 1
Tutorial 1
2 Methods for the Interpolation and Approximation of Single
Variable Function
2.1 Lagrange Interpolation Polynomial 1
Tutorial 1
2.2 Newton Gregory Interpolating Polynomial 1
Tutorial 1
2.3 Cubic Spline Interpolation Polynomial 1
Tutorial 1
2.4 Curve Fitting with sinusoidal functions. 1
Tutorial 1
3 Methods for Numerical Integration and Differentiation
3.1 Newton Cote’s methods of Integration,Trapezoidal, Simpson rule 1
Tutorial 1
3.2 Gauss Quadrature method 1
Tutorial 1
3.3 Simpson’s cubature formula for Integration of Two variable Functions 1
Tutorial 1
3.4 Numerical differentiation by using Newton-Gregory polynomial. 1
Tutorial 1
4 Methods for Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential
Equations and Finite Difference Methods for Partial Differential
Equations
Module Topic No.of
No Lectures
4.1 The Euler, Modified Euler methods 1
Tutorial 1
4.2 Runge Kutta Method order 4 1
Tutorial 1
4.3 Finite Difference 1
Tutorial 1
4.4 Milne's Method. 1
Tutorial 1
4.5 Adam - Bashforth Method 1
Tutorial 1
4.6 Solution Elliptic equation for Laplace and Poisson equation 2
Tutorial 1
4.7 Parabolic equation by Bender Schmidt Method, Crank-Nicolson Scheme 1
Tutorial 1
4.8 Hyperbolic equation by finite difference 1
Total 48
* Tutorials problems are to be solved using MatLab/Maple Software.
Course Designers:
1.Prof. P.subramanian psmat@tce.edu

2. Dr.M.Sivanandha Saraswathy sivanandha@tce.edu
3. Dr.N.Chitra ncmat@tce.edu
14CE520 ENGINEERING HYDROLOGY PC 2 0 0 2
Preamble
It is the science that deals with the waters of the earth, their occurrence, circulation,
distribution and their reaction with environment including their relation to living things.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
level in % Level in
grade
(CO1) Explain the importance of Understand 75 A
Hydrological cycle and the measurement
and analysis of rainfall data.
(CO2) Estimate the losses viz evaporation, Apply 75 A
evapotranspiration and infiltration for a
catchment area
(CO3) Compute the quantity of runoff Apply 75 A
generated from a catchment
(CO4) Develop hydrographs to measure Apply 75 A
the stream flow
(CO5) Estimate floods and propose suitable Apply 75 A
control measures
(CO6) Suggest methods of conserving Apply 75 A
surface and groundwater storage

COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO PSO
1 2
CO23. L M - - - L S L - - - --- L L
CO24. M M - L - -- S - --- - --- --- L L
CO3. S M L L - - S - --- - --- --- L L
CO4. S M L L - - M - --- - - - L L
CO5. S M - L - - S - - --- --- - L L
CO6. L - L - - L M L L L - - L L
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 40 50 50 50
Analyse --- --- --- ---
Evaluate --- --- --- ---
Create --- --- --- ---

1. Describe the principle of working of a tipping bucket type recording rain gauge with a
neat sketch. What are its advantages and disadvantages?
2. How is the double mass curve techniques used to check the consistency and adjust
the rainfall record at a suspicious station?
3. A catchment has six rain gauge station. In a year, the annual rainfall recorded by the
gauges are given below. For a 10% error in the estimation of the mean rainfall,
calculate the optimum number of stations in the catchment.
Station A B C D E F
Rainfall (cm) 120.2 118.6 119.3 125.2 100.2 119.9
4. For a drainage basin of 700 km2, isohyetals drawn for a storm gave the following
data. Estimate the average depth of precipitation over the catchment.
Isohyetals (Interval) (cm) 15-12 12-9 9-6 6-3 3-1
Inter-isohyetal area (km2) 92 128 120 175 85
1. Describe how infiltration capacity rate can be measured using double ring
infiltrometer. How is it better than a tube infiltrometer?
2. A 6h storm produced rainfall intensities of 7, 18, 25, 12, 10, and 3mm/h in successive
one hour intervals over a basin of 800 sq.km. The resulting runoff is observed to be
2640 hectare-metres. Determine Ф-index for the basin.
3. Write down the most common empirical formula used to calculate evaporation from a
water body also explain the factors influencing evaporation.
4. Estimate the daily evaporation from a small reservoir using Horton and Mayer
equations from the following data:
Water surface temperature=24 0C, Air temperature=260C, Atmospheric pressure=752
mm of mercury, Relative humidity=46%, Wind speed at 0.5m above ground=25.3
km/h, Saturation vapour pressure (water)=22.43mm of mercury, Saturation vapour
pressure (air)=25.27mm of mercury.
1. Distinguish between runoff and base flow with the factors affecting runoff.
2. Draw the typical hydrograph and mention its components. Explain the methods of
base flow separation.
3. The ordinates of 4 hour unit hydrograph are given below. Determine the ordinates of
12 hr unit hydrograph.
Time (hr) 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Ordinates in m3/s 0 13 21 24 18 15 12 10 8.3 6.5 5 4 3 1 0
4. Describe the step by step procedure of the derivation of a unit hydrograph from an
isolated storm.
1. What is a design flood?

2. Define MPF.
3. What are the different types flood control methods? Explain
4. Explain the different methods of estimating design floods with their limitation?
1. Distinguish natural and artificial recharge of groundwater. Enumerate different

methods adopted for recharging the groundwater.
2. Enumerate the methods which are used for determining the yield of a well. Discuss
briefly.
3. List the different types of aquifers and also explain their properties.
4. Distinguish between surface runoff and subsurface runoff
Concept Map
Syllabus
Hydrologic processes: Introduction, definition and scope, hydrologic cycle,
Hydrometeorology, Indian Monsoon system, Types and forms of precipitation, Adequacy of
rain gauges, Recording and Non-recording rain gauges, Estimation of missing rainfall data,
Mean precipitation over an area, Frequency analysis, Rainfall hyetograph, Rainfall mass
curve, Double mass curve techniques. Estimation and measurement of Evaporation,
Evapotranspiration and Infiltration. Surface runoff: Definition of runoff, factors affecting
runoff and its components, Hydrograph analysis, Components of hydrograph, Methods of
base flow separation, Unit hydrograph and Stream flow measurements using latest
techniques. Floods: Definition, Flood estimation and its control. Ground water: Definition,
Properties and types of aquifer, Aquifer parameters, Methods of artificial recharge.
Introduction to Climate Change and its effects on Hydrological process. Application of
software in hydrology.
Text Book
1. Subramanya.K.,Engineering Hydrology, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2013
2. JayaramiReddy.P. Hydrology, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
3. Ragunath.H.,Hydrology, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 2010.
Reference Books
1. VenTe. Chow, Maidment D.R. and Mays L.W. Applied Hydrology, McGraw Hill
International Book Company New York, 1995.
2. VenTe Chow, Hand book of Applied Hydrology, McGraw Hill Book Co., Inc., New
York, 1964.
3. www.nptel.ac.in
4. http://www.unece.org/fileadmin/DAM/env/water/publications/documents/Guidance_w
ater_climate.pdf
5. http://www.cwc.nic.in/main/downloads/Combined%20Final_HDD_09042012.pdf
6. http://www.unep.org/pdf/IEA_climate_change.pdf
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1 Hydrologic processes
1.1 Introduction, definition and scope, hydrologic cycle, 1
1.2 Hydrometeorology, Indian Monsoon system 1
1.3 Types and forms of precipitation, Adequacy of rain gauges, 1
1.4 Recording and Non-recording rain gauges, Estimation of missing 2

rainfall data,
1.5 Mean precipitation over an area, Frequency analysis 2
1.6 Rainfall hyetograph, Rainfall mass curve, Double mass curve 1

techniques.
1.7 Estimation and measurement of Evaporation 1
1.8 Estimation and measurement of Evapotranspiration 1

PC 2 2 0 3
1.9 Estimation and measurement of Infiltration 1
2 Surface runoff
2.1 Definition of runoff, factors affecting runoff and its components 1
2.2 Hydrograph analysis, Components of hydrograph, Methods of base 1

flow separation,
2.3 Unit hydrograph theory 2
2.4 Stream flow measurements using latest techniques 1
3 Floods
3.1 Definition, Flood estimation 2
3.2 Flood control measures 1
4 Ground water
4.1 Definition, Properties and types of aquifer, Aquifer parameters 1
4.2 Methods of artificial recharge. 2
4.3 Introduction to Climate Change and its effects on Hydrological 1

process
4.4 Application of software in hydrology. 1
Total Hours 24
Course Designers:
1. Dr.S.Chandran scciv@tce.edu
2. Mr.M.Ramasamy mrciv@tce.edu
14CE530 SOIL MECHANICS
Preamble
This course is a branch of Civil Engineering which deals with the application of laws of
Mechanics and Hydraulics to Engineering problems related with soils like Permeability, stresses
within soils, Shear strength and compressibility of soils. These form the basis for the computation of
discharge through earthen dams, shear strength parameters required for determining the bearing
capacity of soils and calculating settlement of structures.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of Mathematics, knowledge of geology and earth science.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Level in % Level in
grade
CO1 Compute the basic properties of soils and Understand 70 A

classify the Soil according to AASHTO, USCS
and IS Soil classification system
CO2 Determine the Permeability of Cohesive and Apply 70 A

Cohesionless soils
CO3 Calculate Effective stress within soils and Apply 70 A

CO4 Compute
stress duethe Shear Strength
to external loads. of soils based Apply 70 A
on the parameters obtained from shear
CO5 Estimate
tests. consolidation parameters and Apply 70 A
compute consolidation
settlement of foundation
CO6 Apply 70 A
Illustrate the significance of soil compaction
and analyse stability of earth slopes
PO PSO PSO
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11
12 1 2
CO25. L - - L - - - - - L M - L -
CO26. M L - L L L - - - L M - M -
CO3. S S - M M L - - - L M - S -
CO4. M M - S - L - - - L M - M -
CO5. S S - S M L - - - L M - S -
CO6. S L - S M M - - - L M - S -

Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Terminal
Bloom’s Category Assessment Tests
Examination
1 2 3
Apply 70 80 80 80
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -
CO1 Explain the basic properties of soils and classify the Soil
1. Distinguish between Index and Engineering properties.
2. The following data relate to 5 fine grained soil samples.
L.L (%) 25 45 50 60 80
P.L (%) 15 23 25 35 36
Plot these on a Casagrande’s A-line chart and classify the soils.
3. An imaginary soil mass is contained in a container measuring 10cm x 10cm x 10cm. The soil
consists of spherical grains of size 1cm in diameter. Determine the maximum possible void
ratio and percentage solids.
CO2 Determine the Permeability of Cohesive and Cohesionless soils
1. A constant head permeability test was carried out on a cylindrical sample of sand 10cm
diameter and 15cm height. 200 cc of water is collected in 2 mins under a head of 30cm.
Compute the coefficient of permeability in m/year. Also calculate the discharge velocity and
seepage velocity if void ratio of the sample is 0.75.
2. A falling head permeability test is to be performed on a soil ample whose permeability is
estimated to be 3 x 10-5cm/s. What diameter of the stand pipe should be used if the head is
to drop from 27.5cm to 20.0 cm in 5 minutes and if the cross sectional area and length of the
sample are respectively 15cm2 and 8.5cm? Will it take same time for the head to drop from
37.7cm to 30.0cm?
3. List out the factors affecting permeability of soil.
CO3 Calculate Effective stress within soils and stress due to external loads
1. Water table is lowered from a depth of 3m to a depth of 6m in a deposit of silt. The silt
deposit has a water content of 20%. Its degree of saturation above water table is
65%.Estimate the increase in effective stress at a depth of 10m due to lowering of the water
table. Assume G=2.7.
2. Explain Quick sand condition in soil.
3. Explain the step by step procedure of constructing the Newmark’s influence chart.
4. A square footing 2m x 2m resting on the surface of a soil exerts a pressure of 150kN/m2.
Determine the stress at a point which is at a depth of 5m below the center of the footing
using Boussinesq’s theory.
CO4 Compute the Shear Strength of soils based on the parameters obtained from shear tests
1. Consolidated Undrained triaxial tests are performed on two identical specimens of

saturated, remoulded clay with pore pressure measurements. The observations are
recorded in the table below
Deviator stress at Pore pressure
Cell pressure at failure
Test No. failure at failure
(kN/m2)
(kN/m2) (kN/m2)
1. 250 179 101
2. 350 242 145
Determine the values of the shear strength parameters in terms of total and effective
stresses. If in the consolidated undrained test, an identical specimen is first consolidated
under a cell pressure of 400 kN/m2, what would be the deviator stress at failure?
2. Borings at a site show the following subsurface condition:

Depths Material Properties
0 to 2m Silt ρ = 1.44 gm/cc
2m to 12m Sand ρsat = 1.9 gm/cc
12m to 18m clay ρsat = 1.78 gm/cc,
C = 20kN/m2, Ø= 180
Ground water table is at a depth of 2m below the ground surface. Estimate the shear
strength along a plane at a depth of 16m below the ground surface.
3. Explain Mohr-Coulomb failure criterion.

CO5 Compute the consolidation settlement of foundations and explain the
Significance of soil compaction and slope stability analysis
1. A 3m thick clay layer beneath a building is overlain by a permeable stratum and is underlain
by an impervious rock. The coefficient of consolidation of the clay was found to be
0.028cm2/min. The final expected settlement for the layer is 8cm.
i) How much time will it take for 60% of total settlement to take place?
ii) Determine the time required for a settlement of 3.5cm.
iii) What will be the settlement in 8 months?

2. Describe method of slices of slope stability analysis.
3. Calculate the compaction energy in Light and Heavy compaction tests.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Origin and types of soils: Geological cycle - commonly used soil designations. Physical Properties of
soils: Basic soil properties - 3 Phase Diagram – interrelationships - Laboratory tests for determining
basic soil properties - Sieve Analysis including hydrometer Analysis - Field identification of soils.
Consistency limits: Determination of consistency limits and their significance to the field behavior of
soil. Soil Classification: AASHTO - Unified Soil Classification System - IS Soil classification system.
Permeability: Darcy’s law and its validity - Determination of permeability in laboratory - Factors
affecting permeability - Permeability of layered soil deposits - Seepage Analysis – Laplace’s equation
– Flow Net. Geostatic Stress: Concept of Total and Effective Stress in saturated soils deposits - Quick
sand condition - Critical hydraulic gradient – Liquefaction. Stress due to applied loads: Boussinesq’s
theory for point load - circular load area and square loaded area - Westergaard’s theory for point
load - Concept of pressure bulb - Approximate methods - Newmark’s influence chart. Shear
Strength: Shear and normal stress at a point - Mohr’s circle of stresses - Mohr’s Strength Theory -
Mohr-Coulomb failure criterion - Classification of shear test based on drainage conditions - Direct
shear test - Unconfined compression test - Triaxial test and Vane Shear test. Compressibility:
Terzaghi’s theory of one dimensional consolidation - Concept of consolidation - Determination of
coefficient of consolidation by square root of time method and log time method - Calculation of
consolidation settlement. Soil Compaction: Concept of Compaction - Standard Proctor and Modified
Proctor Compaction Tests - Factors affecting Compaction - Zero air voids curve - Field Compaction
control – Compaction methods and Machineries. Stability of Slopes: Types of slope failures -
Different Factors of safety - Stability Analysis of Infinite and Finite slopes - Taylor’s stability number -
Stability Analysis by method of slices and “Øu=0” Analysis.
Text Books
1. Dr. Arora. K.R, “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering (Geotechnical Engineering)”,
Standard Publishers Distributors, Nai Sarak, Delhi, 2011.
2. Gopalranjan and Rao. A.S.R, “Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics”, New Age International
Publishers, New Delhi, 2014.
Reference Books
1. Braja M. Das, “Fundamentals of Geotechnical Engineering”, Cengage; 4th edition,
December 2013.
2. Murthy. V.N.S, “Textbook of Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering:
Geotechnical Engineering ”, CBS Publishers and distributors, New Delhi, 2009.
3. Venkatramaiah. C, “Geotechnical Engineering”, New Age International (P) Ltd., Publishers,
Daryaganj, New Delhi, 2009.
4. Donald P. Coduto, “Geotechnical Engineering – Principles and Practices”, Prentice Hall of
India (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
IS Codes
IS: 2720 – Part 1 to Part 40
Course Content and Lecture Schedule

No. of
S.No Topic
Lectures
1. Origin and types of soils
1.1 Geological cycle

1
1.2 Commonly used soil designations
2. Physical Properties of soils
2.1 Basic soil properties

1
2.2 3 Phase Diagram and interrelationships
2.3 Laboratory tests for determining basic soil properties 1
2.4 Sieve Analysis including hydrometer Analysis

1
2.5 Field identification of soils
Tutorial 3
3. Consistency Limits
3.1 Determination of consistency limits and their significance to the field

1
behavior of soil
4. Soil Classification
4.1 AASHTO system, USCS and IS Soil Classification system 1
Tutorial 3
5. Permeability
5.1 Darcy’s law and its validity
5.2 Determination of permeability in laboratory for cohesive and 1
cohesionless soils
5.3 Factors affecting permeability

1
5.4 Permeability of layered soil deposits
5.5 Seepage Analysis, Flow Nets 1
Tutorial 3
6. Geostatic Stress
6.1 Concept of Total and Effective Stress in saturated soils deposits 1
6.2 Quick sand condition, Critical Hydraulic Gradient and Liquefaction 1
Tutorial 3
7. Stress due to applied loads
7.1 Boussinesq’s theory for point load, circular load area and square loaded
1
area
7.2 Concept of pressure bulb, Westergaard’s theory for point load
7.3 Approximate methods 1
7.4 Newmark’s influence chart
Tutorial 3
8. Shear Strength
8.1 Shear and normal stress at a point

1
8.2 Mohr’s circle of stresses
8.3 Mohr’s Strength Theory
8.4 Mohr-Coulomb failure criterion 1
8.5 Classification of shear test based on drainage conditions
8.6 Direct shear test, Unconfined compression test 1
8.7 Triaxial test and Vane Shear test 1
Tutorial 3
9. Compressibility
9.1 Terzaghi’s theory of one dimensional consolidation

1
9.2 concept of consolidation
9.3 Determination of coefficient of consolidation by square root of time

method and log time method 1
9.4 Calculation of consolidation settlement
3
Tutorial
10. Soil Compaction
10.1 Concept of Compaction
10.2 Standard Proctor and Modified Proctor Compaction Tests 1
10.3 Factors affecting Compaction
10.4 Zero air voids curve

1
10.5 Field Compaction control, Compaction methods and Machineries
11. Stability of Slopes

11.1 Types of slope failures
1
11.2 Different Factors of safety
11.3 Stability Analysis of Infinite and Finite slopes 1
11.4 Taylor’s stability number
11.5 Stability Analysis by method of slices 1
11.6 “Øu=0” Analysis
Tutorial 3
Total Hours (24+24) 48
Course Designer:
R. Sanjay Kumar sanjaykumar@tce.edu

14CE540 HIGHWAYS AND PAVEMENT ENGINEERING
Preamble
The course aims to make the
students learn the principles of highways, their components and Category L T P Credit
design of flexible and rigid pavements. Further, students will get PC 2 2 0 3
acquainted with treatment for failures and remedial measures during maintenance of pavements.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Level in % Level in
grade
CO1: Infer concepts of highway planning and cross Understand 80 A
sectional elements of pavement
CO2: Compute sight distance requirements and 80 A
design of geometric elements, horizontal profile and Apply
vertical profile of a road Apply 80 A
CO3: Design of flexible pavement components and Apply 80 A
CO4: Design rigid pavement structure Understand 80 A
CO5: Describe components of traffic engineering Apply 80 A
CO6: Infer material properties and procedure for
construction of highways and explain appropriate
maintenance for the distress
Mapping with Program Outcomes
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 P012 PSO1 PSO 2
CO1 L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L ---
CO2 S S M M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- M ---
CO3 S S S L --- L --- S --- --- --- --- M L
CO4 S S --- L --- L --- S --- --- --- --- L L
CO5 M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L ---
CO6 M --- L --- --- L --- M M --- M --- L M
Correlation: S-Strong; M-Medium; - L- Low
Assessment Pattern
1 2 3
Apply 60 60 60 60
Analyse 0 0 0 0
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0

1. State the role of Indian Roads congress in Highway planning.

2. List the obligatory points of highway alignment
3. What are the objectives of central road fund.
4. Explain various cross sectional elements of a rural road.
1. State PIEV theory.
2. Define lag distance and braking distance.
3. Derive the expression for superelevation on curves
4. Calculate OSD required on a two way highway, if the speed of overtaking vehicle are 80 Kmph.
Assume average rate of acceleration of 2.1 Kmph/sec. Assume all other data as per IRC.
Draw a neat sketch of overtaking zone and show the position of sign post.
4. What is rigidity factor in design of highway pavement? Differentiate between correlation and
regression of variables
5. Differentiate Flexible pavements and rigid pavements.
6. Design the flexible pavement for a NH having the following data:
CBR of subgrade soil = 12%, CBR of aggregate mix = 25%, CBR of WBM coarse = 85%.
The minimum thickness of bituminous macadam surfacing may be taken as 5cm. The last
traffic count is 1600 commercial vehicles/day. The growth rate is 8%. The pavement
Construction is to be completed in three years after the last traffic count.
7. Design a cement concrete pavement using the following data and chart.
Wheel load p=5100kg. Modules of elasticity of cement concrete E= 3×105kg/cm 2 .Poisson’s
ratio (µ) =0.15. Radius of contact area (a) =15 cm. modules of sub grade reaction K= 15
kg/cm3.Concrete flexural strength fr =40kg/cm 2. Co-efficient of thermal expansion α
=10×10-6◦C. Temperature variation Δt= 16.4 ◦C. contraction joint spacing L = 4.5m.

1. State the desirable properties of aggregates used in pavements.
2. Explain various failures in rigid pavement and discuss suitable maintenance for failures.
3. Describe the different types of failures in flexible pavements.
4. Discuss the construction procedure for WBM roads.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Highway planning and Alignment - History of road development in India, Engineering Surveys for
Alignment – conventional and modern methods Geometric Elements - Geometric Standards -
Highway cross sectional elements, Sight Distance, Sight Distance at Intersection, horizontal
alignment, transition curves, vertical alignment, Problems in Geometric elements. Traffic
Engineering – components of traffic engineering, intersections Highway materials - Desirable
properties of Highway materials Design of pavements - pavement components and their functions,
Design principles of Flexible and Rigid Pavements, factors affecting design of pavements, Design
practice for Flexible Pavements – Problems, Design practice for Rigid Pavements – Problems,
Joints in Rigid pavements. Highway Construction practice - Water Bound Macadam and Wet mix
Macadam road, Bituminous and Cement Concrete roads, construction on soil stabilized subgrade,
Highway drainage, Principles of Highway Financing, PPP concepts for Highway constructions.
Highway Maintenance - Defects in flexible pavements - symptoms, causes and treatments,
Failures in rigid pavements – special repairs, Pavement Evaluation – surface and structural
Evaluation and strengthening.
Text Books
1. S.K Khanna, and C E G.Justo and A. Veeraragavan, “Highway Engineering”, New Chand
and Bros, Roorkee, 10th edition, 2015.
Reference Books
1. Kadiyali, L.R., “Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering”, Khanna Publishers Ltd.
New Delhi, 2011.
2. Venkatappa Rao,G, “Principles of Transportation and Highway Engineering”, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Co, Ltd, New Delhi, 2000.
3. Nptel.ac.in/courses/105101087/Lec-12pdf
IS Codes
1. IRC Standards ( IRC 37-2012, and IRC 58 – 1998)

2. IRC 73 – 1983 Geometric Design Standards for Rural Roads
3. IRC 86 – 1983 Geometric Design Standards for Urban Roads
4. Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) Publications on Highway Materials
5. Specifications for Road and Bridges, MORTH (India, 2004)

S. Topics No. of
Lectures
No.
1 Highway planning and Alignment
1.1 History of road development in India – Jayakar committee 1

recommendations, Vision 2021, NHAI and NHDP policies, PMGSY
1.2 Engineering Surveys for Alignment – conventional and modern methods 1

(Remote sensing, GIS and GPS techniques), IRC Classification
2 Geometric Elements
2.1 Geometric Standards - Highway cross sectional elements – 1

carriageway, ROW, camber, kerbs, shoulders, footpath, drains
2.2 Sight Distance – Factors affecting Sight Distance – PIEV Theory – 1

Stopping Sight Distance (SSD)
Tutorials – problems in SD 3
2.3 Overtaking Sight Distance (OSD) – Sight Distance at Intersection 1
Tutorials– problems in OSD 3

2.4 horizontal alignment – horizontal curves, Super elevation – derivation, 1
problems, camber – methods of attainment
2.5 Widening on curves, transition curves - types 1
Tutorial – problems in horizontal curves, widening, transition curves 4
2.6 Vertical alignment - Ruling, Limiting, Exceptional and Minimum 1

Gradients
2.7 Vertical Curves – types, design, shift in curves
Tutorial – problems in vertical curve design 4
3 Traffic Engineering
3.1 Components of traffic engineering 1
3.2 Traffic volume – PCU concept, Intersections – types, at grade and 1

grade separated structures- flow concepts
Tutorial 2
4 Highway materials
4.1 Desirable properties of Highway materials – subgrade soil, CBR 1
4.2 Aggregates, bitumen – types and properties 1
5 Design of pavements
5.1 Pavement components and their functions 1
5.2 Design principles of Flexible and Rigid Pavements, factors affecting 1

design of pavements – ESWL
5.3 Sub grade soil and traffic, Design practice for Flexible Pavements 1
Tutorial – problems in flexible pavement design (CBR method, US 4

corps method)
5.4 Design practice for Rigid Pavements 1
5.5 Joints in Rigid pavements - types 1
Tutorial - problems in rigid pavement design (IRC method) 4
6 Highway Construction practice
6.1 Construction practice - Water Bound Macadam and Wet mix Macadam 1
road
6.2 Bituminous and Cement Concrete roads 1
6.3 Highway drainage – importance of drainage systems, types, surface 1

and sub surface drainage systems
6.4 Principle of Highway Financing, PPP projects - BOT and BOLT 1
concepts
7 Highway Maintenance
7.1 Highway Maintenance - Defects in flexible pavements – surface 1

defects, disintegration – symptoms, causes and treatments
7.2 Failures in rigid pavements – special repairs 1
7.3 Pavement Evaluation - Pavement surface conditions 1
7.4 Strengthening of pavement – Benkelman Beam Method
Total Hours (24+24) 48
Course Designers
1. Dr. R. Velkennedy rvkciv@tce.edu

DESIGN OF MASONRY, TIMBER AND STEEL Category L T P Credit
14CE570 ELEMENTS PC 2 0 2 3
Preamble
The primary concern of an engineer is design. Structural design consists conceptualization,
idealization, analysis, design, construction and maintenance. Conceptualization is required to arrive
at the final shape and size of the structure. Idealization involves reducing the conceived structure
into primary elements. By analysis internal forces like bending moments, shear, torsion, compression
and tension in each and every element is determined. Design assigns every element a particular
material and size. Construction involves putting all the elements together to perform like the
originally conceived structure. Maintenance is needed to keep the performance of the structure
without deterioration.
In this course, designs of structural elements, like beam, walls and columns, made of specific
materials like timber, masonry and steel are dealt with. Further the elements are designed for
internal forces like tension, compression, bending moment and shear.
Prerequisite
Knowledge of Strength of Materials, Mechanics of Solids and Structural Analysis
Course Outcomes
COs for Theory cum practice part:
Expected Expected
level in % Level in
grade
CO1 Classify the types & behaviour, arriving the Apply 70 A

dimensions and detailing of brick masonry
wall & column and also its foundation
CO2 Design and detail the timber joists and Apply 70 A

columns.
CO3 Summarize the codal provisions in IS800:2007 Apply 70 A

for tension members, compression members
and connections.
CO4 Explain the force transferring mechanism, Apply 70 A

design and detail the connections as bolted
and welded connections.
CO5 Design and detail of steel tension members, Create 70 A
compression members and flexure members.
CO6 Design and detail column base. Create 70 A

COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO 1 PSO 2
CO27. S - M - L M - S M L - - M L
CO28. S - M - L M - S M L - - M L
CO3 M - M - L M - S M L L - M M
CO4 M - M - L M - S M L M - M M
CO5 M - M - L M - S M L L - M L
CO6 M - M - L M - S M L L - M L
Assessment Pattern: Theory cum Practice Part:

Assessment Test-1 Test-2 Test-3 End semester
Theory Practice Theory Practice Theory Practice Theory Practice
Remember 10 - 10 - 10 - 10 -
Understand 10 - 10 - 10 - 10 -
Apply 50 30 50 30 50 30 50 30
Analysis - - - - - - - -
Evaluate - - - - - - - -
Create - - - - - - - -
Total 70 30 70 30 70 30 70 30
Duration of
Two hours Two hours Two hours Four hours
Exam

1. Estimate the dimension of an interior cross wall of a two storeyed building shown in figure-1
to carry 100mm thick RCC slab with 3.0m ceiling height. The wall is unstiffened and it supports
a 2.5m wide slab.
3000mm
3000mm
Figure-1
2. Design and detail of an exterior wall of a workshop building 3.5m high carrying steel trusses at
the top at 4.5m spacing. The wall is securely tied at the roof and floor level. The loading shall
be assumed as following:
Concentrated reaction from the roof trusses – 25kN acting at the centre of the wall
Roof loading – 7kN/m. Ignore wind load
3. Under what circumstances the cavity walls are preferred?
1. A solid timber beam, 75 mm wide × 250 mm deep, in strength class C16, 3.4 m simply
supported, supports uniformly distributed permanent (including self-weight of beam) and
variable actions of respectively 0.2 kN/m and 2 kN/m. Assuming the beam is torsionally
restrained at supports and the exposure is service class 2 check its bending capacity.
2. A mechanically graded timber column of strength class C16 consists of a 100 mm square
section which is restrained at both ends in position but not in direction. Assuming that the
service conditions comply with Service Class 2 and the actual height of the column is 3.75m,
calculate the design axial long term load that the column can support.
3. A timber tension member of size 80mm x 160mm is spliced by two 40mm x 160mm fish plates
and 4 nos. of 20mm dia. bolts. Determine the maximum load that can be carried by the spliced
member. The members are composed of class A timber.for which fcp = 12N/mm2 and ft
=18.2 N/mm2
1. A bolted shell is made up of 14mm thick plates. The joint is double bolted lap joint with M22
bolt of grade 4.6 at a pitch of 75mm. Determine in what way the joint will fail? Also calculate
the efficiency of the joint.
2. A tie bar in a bridge consists of flat bar of steel Fe410 grade, 200mm wide 10mm thick. It is
to be spliced by a double cover butt joint using M20 bolt of 4.6 grade. Design the joint and
sketch the arrangement of bolts.
3. A bracket plate is welded to the flange of a column as shown below. Calculate the
size of the weld required to support a factored load of 100kN.
180kN
150 150
305
300
1. A single unequal angle 100x75x6mm is connected to 8mm thick gusset plate at the ends
with 6 numbers of 16mm bolts of grade 4.6 to transfer tension. Estimate the design strength
of the angle assuming that the yield and the ultimate stress of steel used are 250Mpa and
410Mpa,
if the gusset plate is connected to the 100mm leg
if the gusset plate is connected to the 75mm leg
2. A double angle discontinuous strut ISA 125 mm x 95 x mm x10 mm longlegs back to back is
connected to both sides of a gusset plate 10 mm thickwith 2 rivets. The length of strut
between centre-to-centre of intersections is 4m. Determine the safe load carrying capacity
of the section.
3. Design rolled steel I- sections for a simply supported beam with a clear span of 6m .it carries
a UDL of 50 KN per metre exclusive of self-weight of the girder The beam is laterally
unsupported.
1. A built up column consists ISHB 400@ 77.40 kg/m with one 300mm x 12mmflange plate on
each side. The column carries an axial load of 2600kN. Design a gusseted base, if the column
is supported on concrete pedestal with a bearing pressure of 5N/mm2.
2. A column of ISMB 400 is subjected to an axial force of 750kn. Design suitable base plate.
Assume necessary data required.
3. What are the functions of providing column bases?
Concept Map
Syllabus
Brick masonry: Design - solid masonry walls, cavity walls - piers / columns - under axial loads -
masonry wall footings - column footings. Design of Timber Structures: Groups of timber - Design -
rectangular beams - tension members - compression members - solid, box and spaced. Design
Philosophy of steel structures: Introduction – Working stress method – Limit state method –
IS800:2007 related provisions. Bolted connection in steel structures: Connection types -
Introduction to riveted connections - Force transfer mechanism of bearing type & HSFG bolts- failure
mechanism - Design - direct tension - compression - moment in plane of the bolt - moment
perpendicular to the bolt. Welded connection in steel structures: Type of welds, joints - strength of
welds - Design -direct tension – compression - moment in plane of the weld - moment perpendicular
to the weld. Steel tension members: Behaviour - Design – Rods – Plate – Single and double angle.
Steel compression members: Type of Column sections - Design - rolled steel section - built up
section - laced and battened columns - Angle struts Steel flexure members: Behaviour - Design -
simple and compound beams - Laterally restrained – Laterally unrestrained - Factors affecting lateral
stability - built-up beams. Column base: Slab base - and gusseted base.
Text Book
1. Duggal S.K., “Limit state design of steel structures” McGraw Hill Co., New Delhi, 2014
2. Dayaratnam. P., (1987) “Brick and Reinforced Brick Structures”, Oxford IBH publishing Co .Pvt
Ltd,New Delhi.
3. Arya.A.S & Ajmani.J.L.”Design of Steel Structures”, New Chand & Bros.Roorkee.
Reference Books
1. Teaching Resource for Structural Steel Design, Vol. 1,2,3 (2000), INSDAG- Institute for Steel
Development and Growth, Kolkatta.
2. Subramanian, N., (2008), Design of Steel Structures, oxford university press, USA,.
3. Negi L.S. “Design of steel structures” McGraw Hill Co., New Delhi, 2014
4. www.nptel.ac.in
Indian Standard Codes

1. IS:1905-1987, Code of Practice for Structural Use of Unreinforced Masonry.
2. IS:2212-1991, Code of Practice for brick work.
3. IS:883-1994, Code of Practice for Design of Structural Timber in Building.
4. IS: 800 – 2007, Code of Practice for general construction in steel, BIS, New Delhi
5. IS: 800 – 1984, Code of Practice for general construction in steel, BIS, New Delhi
6. SP 6 (1) – Structural steel sections
7. IS: 816 - 1969, Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction in mild
steel-
8. IS:808 – 1989 Dimensions For Hot Rolled Steel Beam, Column, Channel and Angle Sections.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule (Theory Part)
Module Topic No. of

No. Lectures
1.0 Brick masonry
1.1 Permissible stresses 1
1.2 Design of solid walls - axial loads 1
1.3 Design of solid pier walls – axial loads 1
1.4 Design of cavity walls - axial loads 1
1.5 Design of cavity walls with piers - axial loads 1
1.6 Design of masonry columns - axial loads 1
1.7 Design of masonry footings and wall footings 1
2.0 Design of Timber Structures
2.1 Different groups of timber, allowable stresses in tension, compression and

flexure
1
2.2 Design of rectangular beams.
2.3 Design of tension members, design of compression members-solid, box and 1

spaced.
3.0 Design Philosophy of steel structures:
3.1 Introduction – Working stress method, Limit state method& IS 800: 2007
related provisions.
Bolted connection in steel Structures :
3.2 Introduction to riveted connections and its limitations. Type of connections,

Force transfer mechanism, failure mechanism
3.3 Design of connection – direct tension and compression

1
3.4 Design of connection - Moment in plane of the bolt 1
3.5 Design of connection - Moment perpendicular to the bolt 1
4.0 Welded connection in steel structures:
4.1 Type of welds, accepted criteria for welded joints, strength of weld 1
4.2 Design of connection – direct tension and compression
4.3 Design of connection - moment in plane of the weld 1
4.4 Design of connection - moment perpendicular to the weld 1
5.0 Steel tension members:
5.1 Behaviour of tension member, Design strength of tension member –single 1

angle, double angle
6.0 Steel compression members:
6.1 Type of Column sections, Effective length, maximum slenderness ratio
6.2 Design of compression member – rolled steel section – simple and built up
section.
1
6.3 Design of compression member - laced columns
6.4 Design of compression member – battened columns 1
6.5 Angle struts, loaded along its C.G, loaded along one leg 1
7.0 Steel flexure members:
7.1 Behaviour of steel beams, Limit state of serviceability, Design of simple

beams fully restrained along compression flange
7.2 Design of compound beams fully restrained along compression flange

1
7.3 Lateral torsional buckling of beams, Factors affecting lateral stability 1
Design of simple beams unrestrained along compression flange
7.4 Design of compound beams unrestrained along compression flange, built- 1

up beams.
8.0 Column base

8.1 Design of Slab base 1
8.2 Design of Gusseted base. 1
Total Hours 24
List of Exercises for Practical Part

Module Exercise No. No. of
No. practical
hours
1. Detailing of Masonry wall and wall footing 2
2. Detailing of Masonry pier and footing 2
3. Detailing of Timber Joist and timber column 2
4. Detailing of Bolted Connections – Lap and Butt Joint 2
5. Detailing of Bolted Connections – Eccentric Connections ( In plane 2
and Out of plane)
6. Detailing of Welded Connections – Lap and Butt Joint 2
7. Detailing of Welded Connections – Eccentric Connections ( In plane 2
and Out of plane)
. Detailing of Tension Members – Plate and Angle 2
9. Detailing of Compression Members – Double symmetry sections 2
10. Detailing of Compression Members – Angle struts 2
11. Detailing of slab base and gusetted base 2
12. Detailing of Flexural Members – Main member / Mezzanine Platform 2
Total Hours 24
Note: Detailing may be done using modern drafting tools / manually
Course Designers:
1. Dr. S. Arulmary samciv@tce.edu
2. Ms. G.Celine Reena celinereena@tce.edu
14CE580 MATERIALS TESTING LAB
Preamble
This laboratory course work is intended to provide Category L T P Credit
students with opportunities to acquire knowledge and to
develop skills in testing different materials used for the PC 0 0 2 1
construction of building under the action of various forces and determining their
characteristics experimentally. The experimental work involved in this laboratory will make
the student to determine the mechanical and physical properties of materials like steel,
wood, aluminium, cement, fine and coarse aggregate, etc. The students will be able to infer
the suitability of these materials for construction. They can design the mix, make the
specimens and test the same for the strength for comparison with design strength. This
laboratory course will help the students to understand the theoretical concepts learned in the
courses strength of materials and concrete technology.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of Mathematics, strength of materials and concrete technology
Course Outcomes
Expected
Expected
Proficiency
Attainment
Level in
level in %
grade
CO1 Determine the behavior of structural
elements, such as bars, beams and
springs subjected to tension, Apply 95 S
compression, shear, bending, and
torsion by means of experiments
Determine the physical properties of
CO2 Apply 95 S
constituent materials of concrete
Determine the properties of fresh
CO3 Apply 95 S
concrete
Determine the properties of hardened
CO4 Apply 95 S
concrete
Design concrete mixes and apply
CO5 statistical quality control techniques to Apply 95 S
concrete quality
CO6 Determine durability of concrete Apply 95 S

CO35. M S S L -- L -- M L M M L M --
CO36. M S S L -- L -- M L M M L M --
CO37. M S S L -- L -- M L M M L M --
CO38. M S S M -- L -- M L M M L M --
CO39. M S S M -- L -- M L M M L M --
CO40. M S S M -- L -- M L M M L M --
List of Experiments
1. Determination of Young’s Modulus by conducting Tension Test (mild steel)
2. Determination of Young’s Modulus by conducting Deflection Test on wooden/steel/
aluminium members
3. Determination of Rigidity Modulus by conducting Torsion Test on cast iron
4. Determination of Young’s Modulus by conducting Bending Test I (verification of
Maxwell’s Reciprocal Theorem) and Bending Test II (using Huggenberger
Tensometer)
5. Determination of Rigidity Modulus by conducting Spring Test (tension and
compression spring)
6. Determination of Shear strength and Hardness Number (mild steel, aluminium and
copper)
7. Determination of consistency and setting time of cement
8. Determination of bulk density, specific gravity, void ratio, fineness modulus of fine
and coarse aggregates
9. Determination of maximum bulk of fine aggregate
10. Determination of workability of concrete by slump test and casting of specimens
11. Determination of workability of concrete by compaction factor test and casting of
specimens
12. Design of concrete mix by IS method and casting of specimens
Demonstration
1. Determination of Energy Absorption by conducting Impact Test
2. Test on hardened concrete (cube compressive strength, split cylinder test, flexure
test, rebound hammer test and ultrasonic pulse velocity test)
3. Determination of elastic modulus of concrete
4. Durability Tests of concrete
Reference Books
7. Bansal, R.K., “A Text Book of Strength of Materials”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd. New
Delhi 2010
8. James M. Gere and Stephen P. Timoshenko, “Mechanics of Materials” (3rd edition),
McGraw Hill Book Company, Singapore, 2002.
9. Varghese.P.C, "Building Materials", PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.
10. Shetty, M.S., "Concrete Technology (Theory and Practice)", S. Chand and Company
Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
11. Gambhir, M.L., "Concrete Technology", 3 rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2004
12. Nevile, “Properties of Concrete”, Longman Publishers, 2004.
IS Codes
13. IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals - Tensile Testing
14. IS 4031 : Part 4 : 1988 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement: Part 4
Determination of consistency of standard cement paste
Determination of initial and final setting times
Determination of density
17. IS: 383 – 1970, Specification for Coarse and Fine aggregates from natural sources
for concrete
18. IS: 2386 (III) : 1997, Methods of Test for aggregates for concrete
19. IS: 2386 (IV) : 1997, Methods of Test for aggregates for concrete
20. IS 5816 : 1999, Splitting Tensile Strength of concrete – Method of Test
21. IS: 456 : 2000, Plain and Reinforced concrete – code of practice
22. IS: 10262 : 2009, Recommended guidelines for Concrete Mix Design
23. IS: 516 – 1959, Methods of tests for strength of concrete
Course Designers
Dr. K. Sudalaimani ksudalaimani@tce.edu
ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING
14CE590
LAB
Preamble
This laboratory course work is intended to impart Category L T P Credit
hands on training in evaluating the water quality parameters,
wastewater characteristics and ambient air quality status PC 0 0 2 1
measurements. This will form the basic input data for arriving at a solution/treatment for
upkeep of the environment and promoting public health.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of Mathematics, Water supply Engineering, Wastewater Engineering
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
CO1 Conduct experiments to find optimum coagulant
dosage for turbidity removal from surface water Apply 95 S
samples
Fix the chlorine dosage needed for the effective
CO2
disinfection of water
Apply 95 S
Obtain the correct dosage of lime and soda
CO3
needed for the removal of hardness from water.
Apply 95 S
Fix the chemical characteristics of Water from
CO4
different sources.
Apply 95 S
Fix the chemical characteristics of Wastewater of
CO5
different sources.
Apply 95 S
Measure the ambient air quality parameters such as

CO6
Particulate Matter, NOx and SO 2 Apply 95 S

CO PO1 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
s 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO41. S S M S - S M -- M M - - M L
CO42. S S M S - S M -- M M - - M L
CO43. S S M S - S M -- M M - - M L
CO44. S S S S - S S - M M -- -- M L
CO45. S S S S - S S - M M -- -- M L
CO46. S S M S - S S - M M - - M L

List of Experiments
13. Determination of Hardness, Alkalinity and Chlorides in water sample.

14. Determination of Fluorides in drinking water – Spectro photometric analysis.
15. Determination of Sulphate in water sample – Turbiditymetric analysis.
16. Determination of Dissolved oxygen in drinking water.
17. Heavy metal measurement using AAS.
18. Optimum coagulant dosage for removal of turbidity in water.
19. Estimation of chlorine dosage for disinfection of water.
20. Determination of Total solids, suspended solids, Dissolved solids, Organic solids,
Inorganic solids in water and wastewater samples.
21. Determination of Nitrates in water and wastewater – Spectro photometric analysis.
22. Determination of COD of wastewater samples.
23. Determination of Oil and greasy matters in wastewater samples.
24. Determination of Ammonia nitrogen in wastewater samples.
25. Determination of Phosphate in wastewater samples.
26. Measurement of Ambient air quality parameters – Particulate Matter, SO2, NOx
Demonstration
5. Determination of pH of water and wastewater.
6. Determination of BOD of wastewater.
7. Characterization of municipal solid waste and volatile component Estimation.
Reference Books
1. American Public Health Association (APHA) 2005, Standard methods for the
examination of water & wastewater. 21st edition, Eaton, A.D., Clesceri, L.S., Rice,
E.W., Greenberg, A.E., Franson, M.A.H. APHA, Washington.
IS Codes
24. IS 3025 : Part 21 : 2009 Methods of sampling and test (Physical and Chemical) for
water and wastewater : Hardness
water and wastewater : Alkalinity
water and wastewater : Chloride
water and wastewater : Nitrate
water and wastewater : Sulphate
water and wastewater : Fluoride
water and wastewater : Turbidity
water and wastewater : FILTERABLE RESIDUE (TOTAL DISSOLVED SOLIDS)
water and wastewater : pH VALUE
water and wastewater : BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND (BOD)
water and wastewater : Oil and Grease
water and wastewater : CHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND (COD)
water and wastewater : Phosphorous
37. IS 5182 : Part 2 : 2001 Methods for Measurement of Air Pollution : Sulphur dioxide
38. IS 5182 : Part 6 : 2006 Methods for Measurement of Air Pollution : Oxides of Nirogen
39. IS 5182 : Part 23 : 2001 Methods for measurement of air pollution : Respirable
Suspended Particulate Matter (PM10) cyclonic flow technique
Course Designers
Dr. T. VelRajan tvciv@tce.edu

Dr. D.P. Vijayalakshmi dpviji@tce.edu
14CE610 DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE Category L T P Credit
ELEMENTS
PC 2 2 0 3
Preamble
The design of modern reinforced concrete structures may appear to be highly complex.
However, most of these structures are the assembly of several basic structural elements
such as beams, columns, slabs, walls and foundations. Accordingly, the designer has to
learn the design of these basic reinforced concrete elements. This course offers the design
of reinforced concrete elements such as beams, slabs, columns and footings using Limit
State Method. This course follows the recommendations of IS 456:2000. It aims at
determination of safe as well as economical sections and their reinforcements under various
types of load combinations. At the end of this course, students will be able to identify and
apply the design codes relevant to the design of reinforced concrete members and also they
will be familiar with professional and ethical issues and the importance of lifelong learning in
structural engineering.
Prerequisite
Knowledge of Mathematics, Strength of Materials 14CE220 and Structural Analysis
14CE420
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
On the successful completion of the course,
attainment proficiency
students will be able to
level (%) level (grade)
CO1 Explain the design concepts of RC structural 80 S
elements under various forces and interpret IS Apply
codal provisions
Design the beam and slab elements under 80 S
CO2 Apply
flexure, and draw the reinforcement details
Design the beam and slab elements under 80 S
CO3 shear and torsion, anchorage and development Apply
length and draw the reinforcement details
Design the column element under compression 80 S
CO4 Apply
and draw the reinforcement details
Check the serviceability requirements for RC 80 S
CO5 Apply
elements under deflection and cracking
80 S
Design the footing and draw the reinforcement
CO6 Apply
details

PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
Cos PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2 1 2
CO1. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO2. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO3. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO4. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO5. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO6. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -

Assessment Pattern:
End
Assessment Test – I Test – II Test – III
Semester
Remember 5 5 10 10
Apply 40 40 80 80
Analysis -- -- -- --
Create -- -- -- --
Total 50 50 100 100

CO1: Explain the design concepts of structural elements under various forces and
interpret IS codal provisions
1. Explain the differences between working stress method and limit state method.
2. What are the limit states?
3. Define the term characteristic strength of materials.
4. What are the advantages of limit state method over other methods?
5. What is partial safety factor?
6. What is the cover for the structural elements as per IS code against durability and fire
resistance.
7. Explain the stress-strain behavior of steel and find the stress and strain at various
stress levels for Fe415 and Fe500 grade steels.
CO2: Design the beam and slab elements under flexure and draw the reinforcement
details
1. Write short notes on balanced, under reinforced and over reinforced sections.
2. Under what circumstances the doubly reinforced section is designed?
3. What is the minimum reinforcement requirement for beam as per IS 456:2000.
4. What is the nominal reinforcement to be used in slab?
5. Compute the position of the neutral axis of a reinforced concrete beam 150mm wide
and 400mm deep (effective). Area of tensile steel is 804mm2. Use M20 and Fe415 as
materials.
6. Predict the neutral axis of a T beam of effective depth 400mm and flange width
1200mm. Assume slab thickness to be 100mm. Tensile steel consists of four 20mm
diameter bars. Take width of web as 200mm. Use M20 grade concrete and Fe415 as
materials.
7. A beam 350 x 1000mm effective is reinforced on tension side with 4445mm 2 of steel.
On the compression side 2665mm2 steel is placed 50mm below the top edge. If
concrete grade M20 and steel Fe415 are used, compute the moment of resistance of
the beam.
8. Calculate the ultimate moment resistance of a T-beam having the following data.
Width of flange = 1550mm; breadth of web = 300mm; effective depth of beam =
620mm; depth of flange = 110mm. Area of tension reinforcement = 4775mm2.
Concrete M20 and steel Fe415.
9. Compute the reinforcement required for the rectangular section of size 230mm x
500mm effective subjected to a factored moment of 250 kNm. The materials used in
the design are M25 and Fe500. Assume d 1=35mm. Draw the cross section and
longitudinal section of the beam showing reinforcement details.
10. Make use of limit state method, design the rectangular beam, which is simply
supported at the ends and subjected to a load of 35kN/m over entire length. The
effective length of beam is 4m. The beam is constructed with M20 and Fe415
materials. Draw the cross section and longitudinal section of the beam showing
reinforcement details.
11. Compute the reinforcement required for a two way slab simply supported on all the
four sides with provision of torsion reinforcement at corners. The clear dimension of
the room is 4m x 4m. It is supported on 230mm thick wall. Live load on slab is 3
kN/m2. Use M20 and Fe415 as materials. Draw the longitudinal section of the slab
showing reinforcement details.
12. Compute the reinforcement required for a four span one way continuous roof slab of
effective span 3.5m subjected to a live load of 3.0 kN/m 2. Consider other dead loads
on the slab. Use M20 and Fe415 as materials. Draw the longitudinal section of the
slab showing reinforcement details.
CO3: Design the beam element under shear and torsion, anchorage and development
length and draw the reinforcement details
1. How the shear stress can be resisted in the beams?
2. How the torsion can be resisted in the case of beams?
3. What is the expression related to beam subjected to combined bending, shear and
torsion?
4. An RC beam 250 x 500mm effective carries a load of 20 kN/m (including self weight),
over a span of 6m. If the tensile steel is 1%, calculate the shear stress in the beam
and shear strength of concrete. Assume concrete M20 is used.
5. Compute the shear reinforcement required for a T-beam having breadth of web as
230mm and effective depth of 500mm subjected to an UDL of 30kN/m. The effective
length of beam is 7m. The tension reinforcement is 5 Nos of 16mm diameter bar. Use
M20 and Fe415 as materials. Draw the cross section and longitudinal section of the
beam showing reinforcement details.
6. Compute the reinforcement required for a circular rectangular beam of size 350mm x
550mm subjected to a bending moment of 140kNm, twisting moment of 18kNm and
a shear force of 90kN under ultimate condition. Use M25 grade concrete and Fe415
as materials. Draw the cross section and longitudinal section of the beam showing
7. An RC beam 230 x 500mm effective has a span of 6m. The beam carries a uniformly
distributed load of 60 kN/m including its self weight. Steel at the end of the beam is
six 20mm diameter bars at bottom and two 20mm diameter bars at the top of the
beam. The beam rests on a support 300mm wide. If M20 and Fe415 are used,
determine the development length required for 20mm diameter bars on tension and
compression sides. Draw section of the beam showing reinforcement details.
CO4: Design the column element under compression and draw the reinforcement
details
1. What is the minimum diameter of longitudinal bar to be used in column?
2. What are short and long columns?
3. What is the IS specification for finding pitch of lateral ties in column?
4. What is the purpose for providing transverse reinforcement to the column?
5. What is the reason for limiting maximum of 4% reinforcement in columns?
6. Make use of limit state method, design a short circular column 6m long to carry a
load of 750kN if both ends of the column are fully restrained, using (i) lateral ties and
(ii) helical steel. Draw the cross section and longitudinal section of the column
7. Make use of limit state method, design a column to carry an axial factored load of
2000kN and a factored moment of 50kNm on both the axes. Assume concrete M20
and steel Fe415. Draw the cross section and longitudinal section of the column
8. Make use of limit state method, design a slender circular column of 350mm diameter
with the following data. Unsupported length=8m; Effective length=5m; Axial
load=500kN; Moment at top=60kNm; Moment at bottom=40kNm. The column bends
in double curvature. Use concrete M25 and steel Fe415. Draw the cross section and
longitudinal section of the column showing reinforcement details.
CO5: Check the serviceability requirements for RC elements under deflection and
cracking
1. What is the IS codal provision for the control of deflection for elements?
2. What is the IS codal equation for determining surface crack width?
3. A simply supported L-beam 5m span has effective flange width of 900mm, thickness
of flange as 100mm, breadth of web as 250mm and effective depth as 450mm. there
are 4 bars of 22mm in tension and 3 bars of 18mm in compression. Experiment the
beam for deflection. Assume M20 grade concrete and Fe415 grade reinforcement.
CO6: Design the footing and draw the reinforcement details

1. What is the IS codal provision for shear in the case of footing?
2. Explain the behavior of rectangular combined footing with reinforcement details.
3. What is the IS codal provision for nominal reinforcement required for footing?
4. Calculate the shear force and bending moment for a rectangular combined footing
connecting two axially loaded columns of size 230mm x 230mm and 300mm x
300mm spaced at 2.90m carrying load of 650kN and 750kN under service state
respectively. The safe bearing capacity of soil is 200 kN/m 2. Use M20 and Fe415 as
materials.
5. Make use of limit state method, design an axially loaded square footing of uniform
thickness for a column of size 300mm x 300mm carrying a load of 500kN under
working stress condition. The allowable bearing capacity of soil is considered as
230kN/m2. Materials: M20 & Fe415. Draw the plan and cross section of the footing
6. Make use of limit state method, design an axially loaded rectangular footing of
uniform thickness for a column of size 230mm x 300mm carrying a load of 800kN
under working condition. The allowable bearing capacity of soil is considered as
250kN/m2. Materials: M20 & Fe415. Draw the plan and cross section of the footing
Concept Map
Syllabus
Design Methods – concept of working stress method, ultimate load method and limit state
method – Limit state philosophy as detailed in IS code - characteristic strength and design
strength of materials, characteristic loads and design loads – partial safety factors for loads
and material strength - cover for durability and fire resistance. Limit state of collapse in
flexure - assumptions – stress-strain curves for concrete and steel – stress block –
maximum strain in concrete – limiting values of neutral axis for different grades of steel –
balanced and under reinforced sections – analysis and design of singly and doubly
reinforced rectangular sections - analysis and design of flanged sections - simply supported
and continuous beams - design of one way and two way slabs – simply supported,
continuous and restrained – using coefficients in IS code – reinforcement detailing -
curtailment of reinforcement. Limit state of collapse in shear and torsion – design of
beams for shear, shear-torsion and bending-torsion – design for development length and
end anchorages – reinforcement detailing. Limit state of collapse in compression –
design of columns for axial load – square, rectangular and circular cross sections with lateral
and spiral ties – design of short and long columns for uniaxial and biaxial eccentricities using
interaction charts – reinforcement detailing. Limit state of serviceability - serviceability
requirements for beams, slabs and columns - Introduction to working stress method –
deflection calculations using IS code coefficients – short term and long term deflection –
crack width calculations. Design of footing – Shallow foundation – Isolated footing – square
and rectangular – combined footing – rectangular and trapezoidal – reinforcement detailing.
Text Books
1. B.C. Punmia. Ashok K. Jain and Arun K. Jain, RCC Designs (Reinforced Concrete
Structures), Lakshmi Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, Ninth Edition, 2012.
2. N. Subramanian, Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures, Oxford University Press,
New Delhi, 2014.
Reference Books
1. Unnikrishna Pillai and Devdas Menon, Reinforced Concrete Design (Third Edition), Tata
Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
2. P.C. Varghese, Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt.
3. M.L. Gambhir, Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete Design, Prentice Hall of India
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2006.
4. N. Krishna Raju and R.N. Pranesh, Reinforced Concrete Design IS 456-2000, Principles
and practice, New Age International (P) Ltd Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.
5. S.N. Sinha, Reinforced Concrete Design, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2002.
6. N.C. Sinha and S.K Roy, Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete, S. Chand & Company
Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
7. Edward G. Nawy, Reinforced Concrete – A fundamental Approach, 6th Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2008.
8. Self learning materials – Online courses - http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/
IS Codes
1. IS 456:2000 Plain and Reinforced Concrete – Code of Practice.
2. IS 875(1-5):1987 Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other than Earthquake) for
Buildings and Structures.
3. SP 16:1980 Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS 456:1978.
4. SP 34:1987 Handbook of concrete reinforcement and detailing.
5. Handbook for Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures – Roorkee.

Module No. of
Topics
No. Lectures
1.0 Design Methods
Concept of working stress method, ultimate load method and limit
1.1 1
state method
Limit state philosophy as detailed in IS code, Characteristic strength
1.2 and design strength of materials, characteristic loads and design 1
loads
Partial safety factors for loads and material strength, cover for
1.3 1
durability and fire resistance
2.0 Limit state of collapse in flexure
Assumptions, stress-strain curves for concrete and steel, stress
2.1 1
block, maximum strain in concrete
Limiting values of neutral axis for different grades of steel -
2.2 1
balanced and under reinforced sections
Analysis and design of singly and doubly reinforced rectangular
2.3 1
sections
2.4 Analysis and design of flanged sections 1
Tutorial – Design Problem 2
2.5 Design of simply supported and continuous beam 1
2.6 Design of one way simply supported and continuous slab 1
2.7 Design of two way simply supported, continuous and restrained 1
slab using coefficients in IS code
Reinforcement detailing and curtailment of reinforcement for beams
2.8 1
and slabs
3. 0 Limit state of collapse in shear and torsion
3.1 Design of beams for shear, shear-torsion and bending-torsion 1
3.2 Design for development length and end anchorages 1
3.3 Reinforcement detailing for shear and torsion 1
4.0 Limit state of collapse in compression
Design of columns for axial load – square, rectangular and circular
4.1 1
cross sections with lateral and spiral ties
Design of short and long columns for uniaxial eccentricities using
4.2 1
interaction charts
Design of short and long columns for biaxial eccentricities using
4.3 1
interaction charts
4.4 Reinforcement detailing of columns 1
5. 0 Limit state of serviceability
Deflection calculations using IS code coefficients – short term and
5.1 1
long term deflection
5.2 Crack width calculations 1
6. 0 Design of footing
Design of shallow foundation – Isolated square and rectangular
6.1 1
footing
6.2 Rectangular combined footing 1
6.3 Trapezoidal combined footing 1
6.4 Reinforcement Detailing of footing 1
TOTAL 48
Course Designers
Dr. K. Arunachalam karcivil@tce.edu
Mr. R. Rajkumar rajkumarcivil@tce.edu

RAILWAYS, AIRWAYS AND
14CE620
WATERWAYS Category L T P Credit
PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course imparts the student’s knowledge of planning, design, construction and maintenance of
railway tracks. The students acquire proficiency in the application of modern techniques such as GIS,
GPS and remote sensing in Railway Engineering. The student develops skills on airport planning and
design with the prime focus on runway and taxiway geometrics. Students become conversant with
the definition, purpose, location and materials of coastal structures such as piers, breakwaters,
wharves, jetties, quays and fenders. The students acquire knowledge on site reconnaissance for
location and planning of harbours.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Attainmen proficiency
t level (%) level
(grade)
CO1: Design various geometric elements of railway track Apply 80 S
CO2: Plan various components of railway system and Understand 80 S
describe construction methods of modern track
system
CO3: Study the wind data and prepare runway orientation Apply 80 S
Apply 80 S
CO4: Design runway and taxiway geometrics for an airport
CO5: Explain the factors required for site selection for a Understand 80 S
harbour
CO6: Apply knowledge on planning of components of docks Apply 80 S
and harbours to suggest a appropriate layout

COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO
0 1 2 2
--- --- ---
CO29. S M M --- --- --- --- L -- M ---
--- --- --- ---
CO30. L --- --- --- L --- --- -- L ---
CO3. --- --- --- --- ---
S L S --- --- --- L --- L
CO4. --- --- --- --- ---
S M S --- --- --- L --- L
CO5. --- --- --- ---
L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L
CO6. --- --- --- ---
M --- L --- --- L --- --- --- L
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 50 50 50 50
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -

1. What is meant by sleeper density? State its importance

2. What is creep? How is it prevented?
3. Write cole’s method to determine the number of crossings?
4. List various types of urban transport systems.
5. If a 60 curve track diverges from a main curve of 30in an opposite direction in the
layout of a B.G. yard, calculate the superelevation and the speed on the branch
line, if the maximum speed permitted on the main line is 40kmph.
1. State the various methods of plate laying and explain the methods of plate laying widely
adopted in India. Mention the interdependence of land use and traffic.
2. Explain the mechanism of interlocking with a help of a neat sketch.
3. Discuss briefly the locations and functions of different types of signals in a layout of
railway station.

1. The wind data obtained from on airport site over a period of 4 years are given below.
Draw windrose diagram (Type I) to a suitable scale on a graph paper. Determine calm
period, the best orientation of runways and the total wind coverage.
Wind
NN N EN SS SS WS WN N NN
directio N E ESE SE S SW W
E E E E W W W W W
n
Total
7. 11. 7. 1. 0. 8. 15.
%age of 3.7 0.8 5.1 12.5 5.8 3.4 0.6 0.5 4.0
6 3 1 5 5 5 3
time
2. A taxiway is to be provided for a supersonic transport which has following characteristics.

Determining the turning radius of the taxiway. Wheel base= 35 m. Tread of main loading
gear =7.1m.Turning speed = 55kmph. Co-efficient of friction between tire and pavement
surface=0.14.
3. Enumerate the various factors to be kept in view in selection of
site for airport.
1. Explain the classification of harbours under different heads bringing out the requirements
of each.
2. State the differences between a transit shed and warehouse with regard to their purpose
and construction.
3. Explain with sketches the various types of breakwater.
4. Classify different types of Repair docks. Explain any one in brief.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Railway Planning and Design Role of Indian Railways in National Development – Railways for Urban
Transportation – LRT & MRTS - Engineering Surveys for Track Alignment –Permanent Way- its
Components and their Functions: Ballastless Tracks - Geometric Design of Railway Tracks. Railway
Track Construction, Maintenance and Operation Points and Crossings - Design of Turnouts,
Working Principle - Signalling, Interlocking and Track Circuiting, Construction & Maintenance –
Conventional, Modern methods Track Drainage, Lay outs of Railway Stations and Yards, Rolling
Stock, Tractive Power, Track Resistance, Level Crossings. Airport Planning and Design - Role of Air
Transport, Components of Airports - Airport Planning, Design of Components, Runway Design -
Orientation, Cross wind Component, Wind rose Diagram, Geometric Design, Taxiway, Airport
Drainage - Airport Zoning, Clearance over Highways and Railways, Airport Layouts – Apron, Terminal
Building, Hangars, Motor Vehicle Parking Area and Circulation Pattern, Case studies of Airport
Layouts - Airport Buildings -Planning Concept, Visual Aids, Air Traffic Control. Docks and Harbour -
Definition of Terms - Harbours, Ports, Docks, Tides and Waves, Littoral Drift, Sounding, Area, Depth,
Satellite Ports, Requirements and Classification of Harbours – Site Selection & Selection Investigation
– Speed of water, Dredging, Range of Tides, Waves and Tidal Currents, Anchoring Grounds,
Geological Characteristics, Shore Considerations - Proximity to Towns/Cities, Utilities, Dry and Wet
Docks, Planning and Layouts, Navigating - Mooring Accessories, Navigational Aids – Coastal
Structures- Breakwaters, Wharves.
Text Books
1. Saxena S.C and Arora S.P, “Railway Engineering”, 6th Edition,
Dhanapat Rai Publications, 2004.
2. Khanna S K, Arora M G and Jain S S, Airport Planning and Design, Nemchand and
Brothers, Roorkee, (6th Edition)1999.
3. Oza.H.P. and Oza.G.H., “A course in Docks & Harbour Engineering”. Anand Chartor
Publishing House Pvt ltd, Gujarat, 2010.
References
1. Rangwala S.C & K.S. “Railway Engineering”, 14th Edition, Charotar Publications, 2005.
2. Rangwala, Airport Engineering, Charotar Publishing House, 1996.
3. S P Bindra, A Course in Docks and Harbour Engineering, Dhanpat Rai and Sons,
New Delhi, 1993.
4. J.S. Mundrey, “A course in Railway Track Engineering”. Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.
5. Agarwal M.M., Railway Engineering, Prabha & Co, New Delhi, 2012.
6. Rao G.V., Airport Engineering, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 1992.
7. Seetharaman, “Dock & Harbour Engineering”, 1st Edition, Umesh Publications, 2008.
Module Topics No. of

No. Lectures
1.0 Railway Planning and Design
1.1 Role of Indian Railways in National Development – Railways for 1
Urban Transportation – LRT & MRTS
1.2 Engineering Surveys for Track Alignment – Obligatory points - 2
Conventional and Modern methods (Remote Sensing, GIS & GPS,
EDM and other equipments)
1.3 Permanent Way, its Components and their Functions: Rails – Types 1
of Rails
1.4 Rail Fastenings, Concept of Gauges, Coning of Wheels, Creeps and 2
kinks, Sleepers – Functions, Materials, Density, Materials, Ballastless
tracks
Geometric Design of Railway Tracks

1.5 Gradients and Grade Compensation, Super-Elevation, 2
1.6 Widening of Gauges in Curves, Transition Curves, Horizontal and 2

Vertical Curves.
2.0 Railway Track Construction, Maintenance and Operation

2.1 Points and Crossings - Design of Turnouts, Working Principle 2
2.2 Signalling, Interlocking and Track Circuiting 1
2.3 Construction & Maintenance – Conventional, Modern methods 2
and Materials, Track Drainage - Track Modernisation – Automated

maintenance and upgrading, Re-laying of Track
2.4 Lay outs of Railway Stations and Yards, Rolling Stock, Tractive 1
Power, Track Resistance, Level Crossings.
3.0 Airport Planning and Design

3.1 Role of Air Transport, Components of Airports 2
3.2 Airport Planning – Air traffic potential, Site Selection, Zoning
3.3 Runway Design- Orientation, Cross wind Component, Wind rose 2
Diagram
3.4 Geometric Design and Corrections for Gradients
3.5 Taxiway Design – Geometric Design Elements, Minimum Separation 2
Distances, Design Speed,
3.6 Airport Drainage - Airport Zoning - Clear Zone, Approach Zone, 2
Buffer Zone, Turning Zone, Clearance over Highways and Railways
4.0 Airport Layouts, Visual Aids, and Air Traffic Control
4.1 Airport Layouts – Apron, Terminal Building, Hangars, Motor Vehicle 1
Parking Area and Circulation Pattern,
4.2 Airport Buildings – Primary functions, Planning Concept, Principles 1
of Passenger Flow, Passenger Facilities
4.3 Visual Aids – Runway and Taxiway Markings, Wind Direction
Indicators, Runway and Taxiway Lightings
4.4 Air Traffic Control – Basic Actions, Air Traffic Control Network 1
4.5 Helipads, Hangars, Service Equipments.
5.0 Docks and Harbour

5.1 Definition of Terms - Harbours, Ports, Docks, Tides and Waves, 2
Littoral Drift, Sounding, Area, Depth
5.2 Satellite Ports - Requirements and Classification of Harbours – Site 2
Selection
5.3 Selection Investigation – Speed of water, Dredging, Range of Tides,
Waves and Tidal Currents, Littoral Transport with Erosion and
Deposition
5.4 Shore Considerations- Proximity to Towns/Cities, Utilities, 2
Construction Materials,
5.5 Dry and Wet Docks, Planning and Layouts - Entrance, Position of
Light Houses,
5.6 Navigating - Mooring Accessories, Navigational Aids – Coastal 2
TOTAL 36
Course Designers:
Dr. R. Velkennedy rvkciv@tce.edu
Ms. D. Srividya dsciv@tce.edu
RAILWAYS, AIRWAYS AND
14CE620 PC 3 0 0 3
WATERWAYS
Preamble
This course imparts the student’s knowledge of planning, design, construction and maintenance of
railway tracks. The students acquire proficiency in the application of modern techniques such as GIS,
GPS and remote sensing in Railway Engineering. The student develops skills on airport planning and
design with the prime focus on runway and taxiway geometrics. Students become conversant with
the definition, purpose, location and materials of coastal structures such as piers, breakwaters,
wharves, jetties, quays and fenders. The students acquire knowledge on site reconnaissance for
location and planning of harbours.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Attainmen proficiency
t level (%) level
(grade)
CO1: Design various geometric elements of railway track Apply 80 S
CO2: Plan various components of railway system and Understand 80 S
describe construction methods of modern track
system
CO3: Study the wind data and prepare runway orientation Apply 80 S
Apply 80 S
CO4: Design runway and taxiway geometrics for an airport
CO5: Explain the factors required for site selection for a Understand 80 S
harbour
CO6: Apply knowledge on planning of components of docks Apply 80 S
and harbours to suggest a appropriate layout

COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO
0 1 2 2
--- --- ---
CO31. S M M --- --- --- --- L -- M ---
--- --- --- ---
CO32. L --- --- --- L --- --- -- L ---
CO3. --- --- --- --- ---
S L S --- --- --- L --- L
CO4. --- --- --- --- ---
S M S --- --- --- L --- L
CO5. --- --- --- ---
L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L
CO6. --- --- --- ---
M --- L --- --- L --- --- --- L
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 50 50 50 50
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -

6. What is meant by sleeper density? State its importance

7. What is creep? How is it prevented?
8. Write cole’s method to determine the number of crossings?
9. List various types of urban transport systems.
10. If a 60 curve track diverges from a main curve of 30in an opposite direction in the
layout of a B.G. yard, calculate the superelevation and the speed on the branch
line, if the maximum speed permitted on the main line is 40kmph.
4. State the various methods of plate laying and explain the methods of plate laying widely
adopted in India. Mention the interdependence of land use and traffic.
5. Explain the mechanism of interlocking with a help of a neat sketch.
6. Discuss briefly the locations and functions of different types of signals in a layout of
railway station.

1. The wind data obtained from on airport site over a period of 4 years are given below.
Draw windrose diagram (Type I) to a suitable scale on a graph paper. Determine calm
period, the best orientation of runways and the total wind coverage.
Wind
NN N EN SS SS WS WN N NN
directio N E ESE SE S SW W
E E E E W W W W W
n
Total
7. 11. 7. 1. 0. 8. 15.
%age of 3.7 0.8 5.1 12.5 5.8 3.4 0.6 0.5 4.0
6 3 1 5 5 5 3
time
2. A taxiway is to be provided for a supersonic transport which has following characteristics.

Determining the turning radius of the taxiway. Wheel base= 35 m. Tread of main loading
gear =7.1m.Turning speed = 55kmph. Co-efficient of friction between tire and pavement
surface=0.14.
3. Enumerate the various factors to be kept in view in selection of
site for airport.
5. Explain the classification of harbours under different heads bringing out the requirements
of each.
6. State the differences between a transit shed and warehouse with regard to their purpose
and construction.
7. Explain with sketches the various types of breakwater.
8. Classify different types of Repair docks. Explain any one in brief.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Railway Planning and Design Role of Indian Railways in National Development – Railways for Urban
Transportation – LRT & MRTS - Engineering Surveys for Track Alignment –Permanent Way- its
Components and their Functions: Ballastless Tracks - Geometric Design of Railway Tracks. Railway
Track Construction, Maintenance and Operation Points and Crossings - Design of Turnouts,
Working Principle - Signalling, Interlocking and Track Circuiting, Construction & Maintenance –
Conventional, Modern methods Track Drainage, Lay outs of Railway Stations and Yards, Rolling
Stock, Tractive Power, Track Resistance, Level Crossings. Airport Planning and Design - Role of Air
Transport, Components of Airports - Airport Planning, Design of Components, Runway Design -
Orientation, Cross wind Component, Wind rose Diagram, Geometric Design, Taxiway, Airport
Drainage - Airport Zoning, Clearance over Highways and Railways, Airport Layouts – Apron, Terminal
Building, Hangars, Motor Vehicle Parking Area and Circulation Pattern, Case studies of Airport
Layouts - Airport Buildings -Planning Concept, Visual Aids, Air Traffic Control. Docks and Harbour -
Definition of Terms - Harbours, Ports, Docks, Tides and Waves, Littoral Drift, Sounding, Area, Depth,
Satellite Ports, Requirements and Classification of Harbours – Site Selection & Selection Investigation
– Speed of water, Dredging, Range of Tides, Waves and Tidal Currents, Anchoring Grounds,
Geological Characteristics, Shore Considerations - Proximity to Towns/Cities, Utilities, Dry and Wet
Docks, Planning and Layouts, Navigating - Mooring Accessories, Navigational Aids – Coastal
Text Books
1. Saxena S.C and Arora S.P, “Railway Engineering”, 6th Edition,
Dhanapat Rai Publications, 2004.
2. Khanna S K, Arora M G and Jain S S, Airport Planning and Design, Nemchand and
Brothers, Roorkee, (6th Edition)1999.
4. Oza.H.P. and Oza.G.H., “A course in Docks & Harbour Engineering”. Anand Chartor
Publishing House Pvt ltd, Gujarat, 2010.
References
2. Rangwala S.C & K.S. “Railway Engineering”, 14th Edition, Charotar Publications, 2005.
2. Rangwala, Airport Engineering, Charotar Publishing House, 1996.
3. S P Bindra, A Course in Docks and Harbour Engineering, Dhanpat Rai and Sons,
New Delhi, 1993.
4. J.S. Mundrey, “A course in Railway Track Engineering”. Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.
5. Agarwal M.M., Railway Engineering, Prabha & Co, New Delhi, 2012.
6. Rao G.V., Airport Engineering, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 1992.
7. Seetharaman, “Dock & Harbour Engineering”, 1st Edition, Umesh Publications, 2008.

No. Lectures
1.0 Railway Planning and Design
1.1 Role of Indian Railways in National Development – Railways for 1
Urban Transportation – LRT & MRTS
1.2 Engineering Surveys for Track Alignment – Obligatory points - 2
Conventional and Modern methods (Remote Sensing, GIS & GPS,
EDM and other equipments)
1.3 Permanent Way, its Components and their Functions: Rails – Types 1
of Rails
1.4 Rail Fastenings, Concept of Gauges, Coning of Wheels, Creeps and 2
kinks, Sleepers – Functions, Materials, Density, Materials, Ballastless
tracks
Geometric Design of Railway Tracks

1.5 Gradients and Grade Compensation, Super-Elevation, 2
1.6 Widening of Gauges in Curves, Transition Curves, Horizontal and 2

Vertical Curves.
2.0 Railway Track Construction, Maintenance and Operation

2.1 Points and Crossings - Design of Turnouts, Working Principle 2
2.2 Signalling, Interlocking and Track Circuiting 1
2.3 Construction & Maintenance – Conventional, Modern methods 2
and Materials, Track Drainage - Track Modernisation – Automated

maintenance and upgrading, Re-laying of Track
2.4 Lay outs of Railway Stations and Yards, Rolling Stock, Tractive 1
Power, Track Resistance, Level Crossings.
3.0 Airport Planning and Design

3.1 Role of Air Transport, Components of Airports 2
3.2 Airport Planning – Air traffic potential, Site Selection, Zoning
3.3 Runway Design- Orientation, Cross wind Component, Wind rose 2
Diagram
3.4 Geometric Design and Corrections for Gradients
3.5 Taxiway Design – Geometric Design Elements, Minimum Separation 2
Distances, Design Speed,
3.6 Airport Drainage - Airport Zoning - Clear Zone, Approach Zone, 2
Buffer Zone, Turning Zone, Clearance over Highways and Railways
4.0 Airport Layouts, Visual Aids, and Air Traffic Control
4.1 Airport Layouts – Apron, Terminal Building, Hangars, Motor Vehicle 1
Parking Area and Circulation Pattern,
4.2 Airport Buildings – Primary functions, Planning Concept, Principles 1
of Passenger Flow, Passenger Facilities
4.3 Visual Aids – Runway and Taxiway Markings, Wind Direction
Indicators, Runway and Taxiway Lightings
4.4 Air Traffic Control – Basic Actions, Air Traffic Control Network 1
4.5 Helipads, Hangars, Service Equipments.
5.0 Docks and Harbour

5.1 Definition of Terms - Harbours, Ports, Docks, Tides and Waves, 2
Littoral Drift, Sounding, Area, Depth
5.2 Satellite Ports - Requirements and Classification of Harbours – Site 2
Selection
5.3 Selection Investigation – Speed of water, Dredging, Range of Tides,
Waves and Tidal Currents, Littoral Transport with Erosion and
Deposition
5.4 Shore Considerations- Proximity to Towns/Cities, Utilities, 2
Construction Materials,
5.5 Dry and Wet Docks, Planning and Layouts - Entrance, Position of
Light Houses,
5.6 Navigating - Mooring Accessories, Navigational Aids – Coastal 2
TOTAL 36
Course Designers:

14CE630 FOUNDATION ENGINEERING PC 2 2 0 3
Preamble
This course deals with the subsurface exploration and sampling techniques for assessing the
soil condition at the construction site. This helps to design an appropriate and economical
foundation for the structure. This course offers the theories and methods of determining the
bearing capacity of shallow foundations, load carrying capacity of pile foundations, settlement
of foundations, earth pressure acting on retaining walls and methods of constructing
foundations. Students are also introduced to the concept of stability analysis of retaining
walls.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of Mathematics and Soil Mechanics (14CE530) , knowledge of geology and
earth science.
Course Outcomes

students will be able to: Attainment Proficiency
Level (%) Level(grade)
CO33. Enumerate methods of Apply 70 A
subsurfaceexploration and site investigation
CO34. Compute the load carrying capacity of Apply 70 A
foundations
CO35. Suggest and design appropriate shallow Apply 70 A
foundation
CO4. Determine the load carrying capacity of pile Apply 70 A
foundations and pile groups.
CO5. Enumerate the various Ground Understand 70 A

Improvement Techniques
CO6. Calculate the lateral earth pressure also Apply 70 A
check the stability of retaining walls.

CO1. M M M L - - - - - - - L L M
CO2. M M M L - - - - - - - - M M
CO3. M M M L - - - L - - - - M M
CO4. M L M L - - - L - - - L M M
CO5. - - M - - - L - - - - M - M
CO6. M M M L - - - - - - - M M M

Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 60 80 80 80
Analyse --- --- --- ---
Evaluate --- --- --- ---
Create --- --- --- ---

1. What is Reconnaissance in Site Investigation?
2. Explain wash boring method of advancing exploratory boreholes.
3. Subsoil at a construction site comprises of coheshionless soil deposit extending for a
large depth. Suggest an appropriate in-situ penetration test for subsurface
exploration and explain its procedure. How the test results are correlated to various
soil properties?
1. Explain Downward Drag Phenomena.
2. Determine the safe load that can be carried by a rectangular footing of 3m x 2m size,
placed at a depth of 1.8m below the G.L. The foundation soil has the following
properties:
γ = 17 kN/m3,c = 13 kN/m2 and Ø = 200. Assume a factor of safety of 2.5 and take
Nc’ = 11.8, Nq’ = 3.8 and Nγ’ = 1.3. Use IS code procedure.
3. Estimate the Immediate Settlement of a rigid concrete footing, 1m x 2m size, founded

at a depth of 1m in a soil with E = 104kN/m2, µ = 0.35. The footing is subjected to a
pressure of 230 kN/m2. Assume Influence coefficient as 1.2.
1. Define efficiency of a Pile Group.

2. A pile of 0.3m diameter is driven through a clayey stratum upto a depth of 10m. It is
observed that the undrained cohesion varies from 12 kN/m 2 at its surface to 65 kN/m2
at a depth of 10 m. Determine the safe load on the pile with a factor of safety of 3.0
3. A 16-pile group has to be arranged in the form of square in soft clay with uniform
spacing. Neglecting end bearing, determine the optimum value of the spacing of the
piles in terms of the pile diameter, assuming shear mobilization factor of 0.5.
1. Recite the need for dewatering.
2. Mention the different ground improvement techniques along with their suitability.
1. Mention the assumptions in Rankine’s theory for Lateral Earth Pressure.
2. Differentiate Active and Passive earth pressures.
3. A masonry retaining wall is 1.0 m wide at top, 2.5 m wide at base and 4 m high. It is
trapezoidal in section and has a vertical face on the earth side. The backfill is inclined
at an angle of 150 with the horizontal. The angle of internal friction of the fill = 30 0 and
the unit weight of the fill is 16 kN/m3. The unit weight of the masonry is 23
kN/m3. Take angle of friction = 25 0 and the allowable bearing capacity of the soil as
400 kN/m2. Check the stability of the retaining wall.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Subsurface Exploration and Site investigation: Objectives of Site Investigation - Stages

and planning – Methods of Site Investigation - Depth of subsurface exploration and Spacing
of bore holes - Geophysical methods – Electrical resistivity Method – Seismic refraction
method – Standard penetration test – Static Cone Penetration test – Pressure meter test -
Soil sampling techniques - sample disturbance - Methods of obtaining undisturbed samples
– Rock sampling – RQD – Core Recovery ratio - Use of Bore logShallow Foundations:
Functions and requisites of foundation - Different types of shallow foundations - Bearing
Capacities of soils - Factors affecting bearing capacity - Terzaghi’s& Meyerhof’s bearing
capacity theories – Bearing capacity failure for shallow foundations - Bearing capacity of
Foundations as per IS Code - Conventional procedure for proportioning of footings for equal
settlement - Floating foundation – Plate load test and its limitations - Types of settlement -
Total and differential settlement in sand and clays - Codal provisions – Calculation of
Bearing capacity and settlement of Foundations based on insitutest results - Contact
Pressure - Methods of constructing shallow foundationsDeep Foundations: Consideration
leading to selection of pile foundation - functions and types of pile foundation – Bearing
capacity failure in piles - Estimating load carrying capacity of piles by Static approach –
Dynamic Formulae – Pile Load Test – Negative skin friction in piles – Use of under-reamed
piles in expansive soils - Pile Group – Efficiency of Pile Group – Settlement of piles and pile
groups - Methods of constructingPile foundations – Deep excavationGround Improvement
Techniques: Drainage and dewatering techniques – Introduction to different ground
improvement techniques and their suitability Lateral earth Pressure and Retaining Walls:
Earth pressure At-rest – Rankine’s Theory for Active and Passive earth pressures for
cohesive and non cohesive soils - Coulomb’s earth pressure theory - Determination of earth
pressures by analytical methods - Different types of retaining walls - Design principles of
Gravity and Cantilever retaining walls.
Reference Books:
3. Dr. Arora. K.R, “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering (Geotechnical
Engineering)”, Standard Publishers Distributors, NaiSarak, Delhi, 2011.
1. Braja M. Das, “Principles of Foundation Engineering”, Eighth Edition, Thomson (India
edition), 2015.
4. Murthy. V.N.S, “Advanced Foundation Engineering”, CBS Publishers & Distributors,

Darya Ganj, New Delhi, 2007.
5. Joseph E. Bowles, “Foundation Analysis and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1982.
6. Varghese P.C, “Foundation Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India (P) Ltd., New Delhi,
2005.
7. Donald P. Coduto, “Foundation Design – Principles and Practices”, Prentice Hall,
New Jersey, 2001.
IS Code of practice :
 IS: 1080(1985) – Design and construction of Shallow Foundations in soils.

 IS: 1888(1982) – Method of load test on soils.
 IS: 1892(1979) – Code of practice for Subsurface investigation for foundations.
 IS: 1904(1986) – Design and construction of Foundations in soils, General
requirements.
 IS: 2131(1981) – Method for Standard Penetration test for soils.
 IS: 6403(1981) – Code of practice for determination of Bearing capacity of Shallow
Foundations.
 IS: 2911 Part 1 Sec. 1(1979) – Design and construction of pile foundations -Drive
cast in-situ concrete piles.
 IS: 2911 Part 1 Sec. 3(1979) – Design and construction of pile foundations -Drive
precast piles.
 IS: 2911 Part 3 (1980) - Code of practice for Design and construction of pile
foundations – Under-Reamed piles.
 IS: 2911 Part 4 (1985) - Load Test on Piles.
 IS: 8009 Part 1 (1976) - Code of practice for Calculation of Settlements of
Foundations – Shallow Foundations subjected to symmetrical static vertical loads.
Module No. of
Topics
No. Lectures
1. Subsurface Exploration and Site investigation
1.1 Objectives of Site Investigation - Stages and planning 1
1.2 Methods of Site Investigation – Open excavation methods –

Exploratory Borings - Depth of subsurface exploration and Spacing 1
of bore holes
Tutorial 2
1.3 Geophysical methods – Electrical resistivity Method – Seismic

1
refraction method
1.4 Standard penetration test - Static Cone penetration test – Pressure

2
meter test
Tutorial 2
1.5 Soil sampling techniques - sample disturbance – Methods of

1
obtaining undisturbed samples
1.6 Rock sampling – RQD – Core Recovery ratio – Use of Bore log 1
Tutorial 2
2. Shallow Foundations and Bearing Capacity of Soils
2.1 Functions and requisites of foundation - Different types of shallow

1
foundations
2.2 Bearing Capacities of soils - Factors affecting bearing capacity 1
Tutorial 2
2.3 Terzaghi’s& Meyerhof’s bearing capacity theories 1
2.4 Bearing capacity failure for shallow foundations - Bearing capacity of

1
Foundations as per IS Code
Tutorial 2
2.5 Conventional procedure for proportioning of footing for equal

1
settlement - Floating foundation – Plate load test and its limitations
2.6 Types of settlement - Total and differential settlement in sand and

1
clays - Codal provisions
Tutorial 2
2.7 Calculation of Bearing capacity and settlement of Foundations based

on insitu test results - Contact Pressure - Methods of constructing 1
shallow foundations
Tutorial 2
3. Deep Foundations
3.1 Consideration leading to selection of pile foundation - functions and

1
types of pile foundation - Bearing capacity failure in piles
3.2 Estimating load carrying capacity of piles by Static approach 1

Tutorial 2
3.3 Estimating load carrying capacity of piles by Dynamic Formulae 1
Tutorial 2
3.4 Pile Load Test – Negative skin friction in piles - Use of under-reamed
1
piles in expansive soils
3.5 Pile Group – Efficiency of Pile Group - Settlement of piles and pile
groups - Methods of constructing Pile Foundations - Deep 1
excavation
Tutorial 2
4. Ground Improvement Techniques
4.1 Drainage and dewatering techniques - Introduction to different

1
ground improvement techniques and their suitability.
5. Lateral earth Pressure and Retaining Walls
5.1 Earth pressure At-rest – Rankine’s Theory for Active and Passive
1
earth pressures for cohesive and non cohesive soils
5.2 Coulomb’s earth pressure theory - Determination of earth pressures

1
by analytical methods
Tutorial 2
5.3 Different types of retaining walls - Design principles of Gravity and

1
Cantilever retaining walls.
Tutorial 2
Total (Hours) 48
Course Designers:
4. Mr. R. Sanjay Kumar sanjaykumar@tce.edu
5. Mr. R.Sankaranarayanan rsciv@tce.edu
IRRIGATION AND WATER RESOURCES Category L T P Credit
14CE640
ENGINEERING PC 2 0 0 2
Preamble
This subject deals with study of irrigations practices and methods adopted in our country. Also to
know the irrigation water requirement in order to design the structures like dams, weirs and canals.
Course Outcomes

students will be able to: attainment proficiency
level (%) level
(grade)
CO1 Describe the importance of National Understand 80 S
Water Policy.
CO2 Determine the storage capacity of Apply 80 S
reservoir for a given demand.
CO3 Explain the different types and Understand 80 S
methods of irrigation practices.
CO4 Illustrate the forces acting on gravity Apply 80 S
dam.
CO5 Compute the dimensions of the Apply 80 S
impervious floor of weir
CO6 Compute the design parameters of Apply 80 S
canal
CO7 Discuss the various concepts of Understand 80 S
irrigation water management and
softwares

CO36. L - L - - L - L - - - - L L
CO37. S M S L - - - - - - - - L -
CO3. L - L - - L - - - - - - - -
CO4. S S S L - - - - - - - - M -
CO5. S S S L - - - - - - - - M -
CO6. S S S L - - - - - - - - M -
CO7 L - - - L - - - - - - - L -
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 40 40 40 40
Analyse --- --- --- ---
Evaluate --- --- --- ---
Create --- --- --- ---

1. Describe National water policy; briefly mention its salient features.

2. Present the status of water resources in India and Tamilnadu.
3. Explain the objectives of water resources development projects in detail.
4. Discuss the problems encountered with our neighbouring states with respect to
sharing of water.
1. As a Civil Engineer, you are entrusted to select site for a reservoir. Discuss criteria
for site selection and survey to be conducted
2. You are entrusted to fix the capacity of a multipurpose reservoir. Explain the
procedure to fix the reservoir capacity.
3. Discuss the various storage zones of reservoir with a neat sketch.
4. Write about the sediment control measures in the reservoir.
1. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of irrigation

2. Compare sprinkler irrigation and drip irrigation methods and illustrate the conditions
of adopting such methods in the field.
3. Classify the irrigation water quality and also explain the irrigation efficiencies in detail.
4. Explain the different methods of irrigation in India with suitable sketches.

1. Explain the step by step approach of design of gravity dam by analytical and
graphical method.
2. Draw the elementary profile of a gravity dam and obtain the base width of dam for the
safety against tension and sliding.
3. List the forces acting on gravity dam and explain the forces to be considered in
extreme load combination of design with sketches.
4. Describe the modes of failure of a gravity dam its remedial measure
1. Discuss the failures of weir founded on pervious soil and state the remedial
measures.
2. Draw the layout of diversion head works and briefly mention their uses.
3. Draw and discuss the silt control devices used in river bed as well as in canal bed.
4. Design an irrigation channel for a discharge of 30 cumecs, Lacey’s silt factor = 1.0,
side slope = 1/2:1. Determine the longitudinal slope also.
1. Define participatory irrigation management.
2. Write the need and necessity for irrigation management transfer.
3. Describe the various softwares in irrigation water resources management.
4. What is the concept of water pricing with respect to irrigation?
Concept Map
Syllabus
Importance of Water Resources: Status of water resources in India and Tamilnadu- National water
policy. Reservoir Planning: Site selection for reservoir, classification of reservoirs-Multi-purpose
reservoir-Determination of Storage capacity-Reservoir sedimentation, methods of controlling the
sedimentation-. Irrigation: Advantages and ill effects of irrigation, Duty and Delta, Soil water Plant
relationship- Types and methods of irrigation-Tank irrigation-Irrigation efficiencies, Irrigation water
quality. Dams: Classifications of dams, Forces acting on gravity dam- Failures and remedies of gravity
dam- Elementary profile of gravity dam. Diversion Headwork: Components and its functions-
Failures and remedies of weir- Design of impervious floor of weir by Bligh’s theory, Lanes weighted
creep theory and Khosla’s theory-River training works. Cross drainage works: Canal outlets- Design
of canal by Lacey’s theory, Kennedy’s theory- Water logging causes and effects- Canal lining and
Canal maintenance. Irrigation water Management: Software’s-Participatory irrigation management-
water pricing-water conservation.
Text Books:
1. Santhosh Kumar Garg, “Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures” Khanna

Publishres-New Delhi. 2012
2. Punmia, B.C and Pande B.B Lal, “Irrigation and Water Power Engineering”, Lakshmi
Publications (P) Ltd, New Delhi. 2016
Reference Books:
1. Sharma R.K and Sharma T.K’ “Irrigation Engineering (Including Hydrology)”,
S.Chand & Co Ltd, New Delhi. 2009
2. Dilip Kumar Mujumdar, “Irrigation Water Management-Principles & Practice”,
Prantice Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi. 2014
3. P.N.Modi, “Irrigation Water Resources and Water Power Engineering” Standard Book
House, New Delhi, 2014
4. National water Policy 2012, MOWR,GOI

Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1 Importance of Water Resources
1.1 Status of water resources in India and Tamilnadu 1
1.2 National water policy 1
2 Reservoir Planning
2.1 Site selection for reservoir, classification of reservoirs 1
2.2 Determination of Storage capacity 1
2.3 Reservoir sedimentation, methods of controlling the sedimentation, 1
3 Irrigation
3.1 Advantages and ill effects of irrigation, Duty and Delta, Soil water Plant 1
relationship
3.2 Types of irrigation and methods of irrigation 1
3.3 Irrigation efficiencies, Irrigation water quality 1
4 Dams
4.1 Classifications of dams, Forces acting on gravity dam 2
4.2 Failures and remedies of gravity dam 1
4.3 Elementary profile of gravity dam, Drainage galleries in dams 1
5 Diversion Headworks
5.1 Diversion headworks Components and its functions 1
5.2 Failures and remedies of weir 1
5.3 Design of impervious floor of weir by Bligh’s theory, Lanes weighted creep 2
theory and Khosla’s theory
5.4 River training works 1
6 Cross drainage works

6.1 Functions of Aqueduct, Syphon aqueduct, Level crossing, inlet and outlet, 1
Canal outlets
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
6.2 Design of canal by Lacey’s theory, Kennedy’s theory 2
6.3 Water logging causes and effects 1
6.4 Canal lining and Canal maintenance 1
7 Irrigation Water Management

7.1 Softwares and Participatory irrigation management 1
7.2 Water pricing and water conservation. 1
Total Hours 24
Course Designers:
1. Dr. S. Chandran schandran@tce.edu
3. Mr. M.Ramasamy mrciv@tce.edu
DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES
14CE670 PC 2 2 0 3
Preamble
This course offers the design of steel structures as per limit state method. This course follows the
recommendation of IS: 800 – 2007. It aims at determination of safe as well as economical steel
section for various industrial and framed structures.
Prerequisite
Knowledge of Strength of Materials 14CE220, Mechanics of Solids 14CE321 and Structural Analysis
14CE420
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of Expected Expected

the course, students will be able Attainment Proficiency
to level (%) level (grade)
CO1 Summarize the codal provisions Create 80 S

for design of plate girders,Beam
columns and truss.
CO2 Design a Plate girder using the Apply 80 S

IS800-2007 Provisions.
CO3 Determine the maximum load Apply 80 S

effects and fatigue effects on a
gantry girder and also design the
cross – section.
CO4 Determine the capacity of Apply 80 S

column subjected to combined
axial compression and moment.
CO5 Design a roof truss using rolled Create 80 S

steel sections
CO6 Design a light loaded roof truss Create 80 S

using tubular sections.

1 2
CO38. S M M L L M L S M L L - S -
CO39. M L M - L M L S M L L - S -
CO3 M L M - L M L S M L L - S -
CO4 M M M L L M L S M L M L S -
CO5 M M M - L M L S M L L L S -
CO66 M M M - L M L S M L L L S -
Assessment Pattern: Theory cum Practice Part:

Bloom’s Continuous Assessment Tests Terminal
Category 1 2 3 Examination
Apply 40 40 40 40
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create 40 40 40 40

1. What is the difference between plate girder and beam?

2. Determine the buckling resistance moment for a welded plate girder consisting of 500 x 25 mm
flange plates and a 1250 x 12 mm web plate in grade 410 steel. Assume a laterally unbraced
span of 5.5 m.
3. Design a welded plate girder for a simply supported bridge deck beam with clear span of 20 m
subjected to the following:
i. Dead load including self weight = 20 KN/m
ii. Imposed load = 10 KN/m
iii. Two moving loads = 150 KN each spaced 2 m apart
Assume that the top compression flange of the plate girder is restrained laterally and prevented
from rotating. Use mild steel with fy=250 MPa. Design as an unstiffened plate girder with thick
webs and also redesign same with intermediate stiffeners utilizing tension field action.
1. Design a gantry girder without lateral restraint along its span, to be used in an Industrial building
carrying over head travelling crane for the following data:
i. Centre to centre distance between columns = 6 m (span of the gantry girder)
ii. Crane capacity = 50 KN
iii. Self weight of the crane girder excluding trolley = 40 KN
iv. Self weight of the trolley, electric motor, hook etc., = 10 KN
v. Minimum hook approach = 1 m
vi. Wheel centres = 3 m
vii. Centre to centre distance between gantry rails = 12 m ( span of crane)
viii. Self weight of rail section = 100N/m
ix. Yield stress of steel = 250 MPa.
2. Why are simply supported girders preferred to two span gantry girders?
3. List the loads that should be consider while designing a gantry girder.
1. How can load deflection effects be considered in the design of beam columns?
2. A beam column of length 5 m is subjected to a compression of 800 KN and a major axis moment
of 4.5 KNM. The weaker plane of the column is strengthened by bracing. If the effective length
factor is 0.8, design the beam column, assuming Fe 410 grade steel.
3. A beam column of length 4.5m is subjected to a compression of 850kN and a major axis moment
40kN-m. The weaker plane of the column is strengthened by bracing. If the effective length
factor is 0.8, design the beam column, assuming Fe-410 grade steel. Use two channels welded
together to form a box section. No need to design for the welding of the two channels.
1. An industrial building is shown in fig. the frames are at 5m centres and the length of the building
is 40m. The purlin spacing of the roof is as shown in figure-1. The Building is situated in Delhi.
Assume live and wind loads as per IS875 (part 2 and Part 3) and the roof is covered with GI
sheeting. Design the roof truss using angle members and gusseted joints. The truss is to be
fabricated using welded joints in two parts for transport and assembled at site using bolted
joints at A,B and C as shown in figure-1(b).
2. List out various elements of the roof truss and mark all its significance.
3. An industrial roof shed of size 20 m* 30 m is proposed to be constructed at Mangalore
near a hillock of 160 m and slope is 1 in 2.8. The roof shed is to be built at a height of
120 m from the base of the hill. Determine the design wind pressure on the slope. The
height of roof shed shall be 12m.
1. How the tubes are designated?

2. Estimate the capacity of the tubular principal rafter subjected to a compression of 125kN
and a tensile force of 80 kN under the reversal effect. The member also subjected to a
bending effect of 15kN-m under DL+LL and 9kN-m under DL+WL. Use Yst240 (Yst25)
grade, medium class section of 90mm dia. The total length of the principal rafter is
12.25m, which is divided into 6 panels.
Design a tubular section purlin for the following data:
Spacing of trusses =4.2m
Spacing of purlin= 2m
Live load on galvanized iron roofing sheets = 0.6 kN/m2
Wind load = 1.4 kN/m2
Slope of main rafter = 310
3. Design a tubular fink roof truss of pitch 1/4 for a span of 16m.The configuration of the
girder is given in figure.
The truss is supported on a RCC column of size 450 x 450 mm of M30 grade concrete.
Design the ridge connection. Use Fe 410 grade steel. 80mm nominal bore purlins are
placed only on the nodes.
The following are the critical loads.
Members Critical Forces in kN
Compression Tension
Principal Rafter 60.7 44.2
Tie Member 33.4 54.1
Main Sling & Main Strut 21.3 33.2
Minor sling & Minor Strut 7.8 6.4
Concept Map
Syllabus
Plate girder- Introduction to Plate girder – Difference between beam and plate girder – Design of
welded plate girder – Proportioning of web and flange plates – Design of mid section – Curtailment
of flange plates – shear behaviour of transversely unstiffened and stiffened web –web subjected to
co-existent bending and shear - transverse web stiffener – Bearing stiffener –end bearing stiffener
and load bearing stiffener –Longitudinal web stiffener –Flange plate to web connection – Splices -
Flange and web Gantry girder - Introduction - load considerations - max load effects - Fatigue effects
–Determination of maximum bending moment and shear force due vertical component of crane
wheel load - horizontal component of crane wheel load - longitudinal effect of wheel load -Design of
gantry girder - Connection in gantry girder - Beam – Column - Introduction - behaviour of beam-
column - second order moment in beam-column – Elastic torsional buckling of beam columns -
Nominal strength in beam column in uniaxial bending - Biaxial bending. Design of Truss –
Introduction - Evaluation of design dead load, live load - wind load. Analysis of trusses. Design of
Truss using Rolled steel sections – Purlins – truss members – Supports. Design of Truss using
tubular sections – Purlins – truss members – supports. Design of Connection - Introduction – web
angle connection – Beam to Beam Connection - clip and seat Connection – Concept of semi rigid
Connection.
Text Book
5. Teaching Resource for Structural Steel Design, Vol. 1,2,3 (2000), INSDAG- Institute for Steel
Development and Growth, Kolkatta.
6. Subramanian, N., (2008), Design of Steel Structures, oxford university press, USA,.
7. Negi L.S. “Design of steel structures” McGraw Hill Co., New Delhi, 2014
8. Duggal S.K., “Limit state design of steel structures” McGraw Hill Co., New Delhi, 2014
9. www.nptel.ac.in
Indian Standard Codes

1. IS 800-2007 – Code of practice for general Construction in steel
2. SP6 (1) – Hand book for Structural Engineers – Part I :Structural Steel Sections, BIS
3. IS 875 (1-5) - 1987 Code of practice for Design Loads (Other than Earthquake) for Buildings and
Structures, BIS
4. IS 816 :1969 - Code of practice for Metal Arc Welding for general Construction in Mild Steel, BIS
5. IS 1161 :1998 – Steel tubes for structural purposes – specifications, BIS.
IS 806 : 1968 – Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building construction, BIS
Web site
www.steel-insdag.org

Module Topic No. of
No. Lectures
Plate girder (according to IS 800 :2007 provision)
Introduction to Plate girder – Difference between beam and plate girder

1.0 1
& IS 800-2007.
1.1 Design of welded plate girder
1.2 Proportioning of web and flange plates – Design of mid section 1
1.2.1 Curtailment of flange plates
Tutorial 2
1.3 shear behaviour of transversely unstiffened and stiffened web 1
1.4 web subjected to co-existent bending and shear 1
1.4.1 transverse web stiffener – Bearing stiffener
1.4.2 end bearing stiffener and load bearing stiffener – 1
1.4.3 Longitudinal web stiffener
Tutorial 2
1.5 Flange plate to web connection

1
1.5.1 Splices - Flange and web
2 Gantry girder(according to IS 800 :2007 provision)
2.0 Introduction and load considerations

1
2.1 Maximum load effects and Fatigue effects
Determination of maximum bending moment and shear force due
2.1.1 1
vertical component of crane wheel load
Determination of maximum bending moment and shear force due

2.1.2 horizontal component of crane wheel load and longitudinal effect of 1
wheel load
2.2 Design of gantry girder

1
2.2.1 Connection in gantry girder
Tutorial 2
Beam – Column(according to IS 800 :2007 provision)
3.0 Introduction to the behaviour of Beam-column and IS 800:2007 1
3.1 second order moment in beam-column

1
3.2 Elastic torsional buckling of beam columns
3.3 Nominal strength in beam column in uniaxial bending 1
3.4 Nominal strength in beam column in biaxial bending 1
Tutorial 2
Design of Truss
Introduction and evaluation of design dead load, live load as per IS875
4.0 1
(1,2)
4.1 Calculation of wind load as per IS875 (3) 1
4.2 Analysis of trusses 1
Tutorial 2
Design of Truss using Rolled steel sections
4.3 Design of purlins 1
4.3.1 Design of members of Truss using Rolled steel sections 2
Tutorial 2
4.3.2 Design of supports 1
Tutorial 2
Design of Truss using tubular sections
4.4 Design of tubular purlins 2
4.4.1 Design of members of Truss using Rolled steel sections 1

Tutorial 2
4.4.2 Design of supports 1
Tutorial 2
Design of Connection
5.0 Introduction to connection behaviour
5.1 web angle connection 1
5.2 Beam to Beam Connection
5.3 clip and seat Connection

1
5.4 Concept of semi rigid Connection
Tutorial 2
Total Hours 48
Course Designers:
1. Dr.S.Arulmary samciv@tce.edu
2. Ms. G.Celine Reena celinereena@tce.edu

SOIL AND HIGHWAY
14CE680
ENGINNEERING LABORATORY Category L T P Credit
PC 0 0 2 1
Preamble
This laboratory course deals with the determination of various index and engineering properties of
soil namely, moisture content, particle size distribution. Atterberg's limits, permeability, shear
strength parameters and compaction characteristics. With the knowledge of these properties,
students will able to identify, classify and appreciate the use of soil as a suitable construction
material and design appropriate foundation for the structure. This course also imparts knowledge on
testing of coarse aggregates thus enabling students to identify the coarse aggregates as an
appropriate material for pavements.
Prerequisite
14CE530 - Soil Mechanics
14CE540 - Highways and Pavement Engineering
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Attainmen Proficienc
t level (%) y level
(grade)
CO1: Perform tests to determine index properties of Apply 95 S
soil such as natural moisture content, specific
gravity and Atterberg's limits
CO2: Perform tests to determine field density, particle Apply 95 S
size distribution along with compaction
characteristics
CO3: Perform tests to determine engineering Apply 95 S
properties of soil such as, permeability and
shear strength parameters
CO4: Perform tests to determine the Strength parameter Apply 95 S
for subgrade soil and suggest its suitability for
different works
Understand 95 S
CO5: Demonstrate the procedure for determining
consolidation parameters of soil, hydrometer
analysis and
95 S
CO6: Demonstrate the procedure for determining Los Understand
Angeles abrasion value of aggregates, ductility and
viscosity tests on bitumen
CO40. S S L L --- --- --- --- --- M --- --- M L
CO41. S S L L --- --- --- --- --- M --- --- M L

CO3. S S L L --- --- --- --- --- M --- --- M L
CO4. S S L L --- --- --- --- --- M --- --- M L
CO5. L --- L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L ---
CO6. L --- L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L ---
List of Experiments
1. (a) Determination of Specific Gravity of soil using Pycnometer and Density Bottle
(b) Determination of Water Absorption and Specific Gravity of Aggregates (size > 40 mm).
2. (a) Determination of Moisture Content of soil by Oven Drying method and by using
Volumetric Flask.
(b) Determination of Shrinkage Factors of soil.
3. Determination of Liquid and Plastic Limits of soil.
4. Grain size Distribution Analysis for soil.
5. Determination of Field Density of soil by sand Replacement Method.
6. Determination of Coefficient of Permeability of soil by Constant Head Permeability Test.
7. Determination of Coefficient of Permeability of soil by Variable Head Permeability Test.
8. Determination of Shear Strength parameters of soil by Direct Shear Test.
9. Determination of Unconfined Compressive Strength of clay.
10.Determination of Dry Density - Moisture Content relation using Light Compaction (Standard
Proctor Compaction Test).
11.Determination of California Bearing Ratio value of subgrade soil.
12. (a) Determination of Impact Value of aggregates.

(b) Determination of Flakiness and Elongation Indices of aggregates.
Demonstration Experiments:
13. Determination of Consolidation Properties of soil.
14. Determination of Los Angeles Abrasion value of aggregates.
15. Grain Size Distribution - Hydrometer Analysis
16. Determination of Penetration Value and Softening Point of Bitumen
17. Ductility and Viscosity test on bitumen
References
 IS: 2720 - Part-2 (1973), "Determination of water content"
 IS: 2720 - Part-3 Sect.1 -1980, "Determination of Specific gravity - Fine- grained soils".
 IS: 2720 - Part-3 Sect. 2 -1981, "Determination of Specific gravity - Fine, Medium, and coarse
- grained soils".
 IS: 2720 - Part 4 -1975, "Grain size analysis".
 IS: 2720 - Part 5-1970, "Determination of Liquid and Plastic Limits".
 IS: 2720 - Part 6 -1972, "Determination of Shrinkage Factors".
 IS: 2720 - Part 7 -1983, "Determination of Water content- Dry density Relation using light
compaction".
 IS: 2720 - Part 10 -1973, "Determination of Unconfined Compressive strength".
 IS: 2720 - Part 13 -1972, "Direct Shear Test".
 IS: 2720 - Part 15 -1986, "Determination Consolidation Properties".
 IS: 2720 - Part 28 -1974, "Determination of dry Density of Soil in- place-by the sand-
replacement method".
 IS: 2720 - Part 36 -1975, "Laboratory Determination of Permeability of Granular soils
(Constant Head)".
 IS:2386 Part 1- 1963, "Methods of Test for Aggregates for Concrete" (Part I -Particle Size And
Shape)
 IS:2386 Part 2 -1963, "Methods of Test for Aggregates for Concrete" (Part II Estimation of
Deleterious Materials And Organic Impurities)
 IS: 2386 Part 3 -1963, " Methods of Test for Aggregates for Concrete" (Part III-Specific
Gravity, Density, Voids, Absorption And Bulking)
 IS:2386 Part 4 -1963, " Methods of Test for Aggregates for Concrete" (Part IV-Mechanical
Properties)
 IS 73 (2013) Paving Bitumen
Course Designers:
Mr. R. Sanjay Kumar rskciv@tce.edu
14CE710 ACCOUNTING AND FINANCE
HSS 3 0 0 3
Preamble
Engineering profession involves lots of decision making. The decisions may range
from operation to non-operation. For taking decisions of these kinds, an engineer
needs among other data about the organization routine operations and non-routine
operations. Accounting is a science which provides all the data by recording,
classifying, summarizing and interpreting the various transactions taking place in an
organization and thereby helps an engineer in taking vital decisions in an effective
manner. Finance is an allied but a separate field relying on accounting and enables
engineers in taking useful financial and cost related decisions by providing well defined
concepts, tools and techniques.
Course Outcomes
CO Course Outcome Blooms Expected Expected

Taxonomy Attainment Proficiency
Level Grade
CO1 Explain the basic concepts and process of Understand 80 B
accounting and finance.
CO2 Develop trail balance and financial statements Apply 80 B
like Trading, Profit and Loss accounts, Balance
sheet and Cost sheet
CO3 Demonstrate the concepts and operations of Understand 80 B

budgetary control
CO4 Apply techniques like breakeven analysis and Apply 80 B

Capital budgeting for an organization.
CO5 Select the right sources of finance and mobilize Apply 80 B

the right quantum of finance and make use of
them in most profitable investment avenues.
CO1. M
CO2. S M M M M M S L L L
CO3. M M M L L
CO4. S M M S M M L S L L L
CO5. S M M M S L L
S-Strong; M-Medium; L-Low
Assessment Pattern
1 2 3
Apply 50 50 50 50
Analyze 0 0 0 0
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0
1. Describe the term Accounting.

2. List the concepts of accounting.
3. Recall the methods of depreciation.
4. Name the factors causing depreciation.
5. Write the classification of cost.
6. Define the term capital budgeting.

1. Prepare trading account from the information given below and calculate the net
profit. Gross profit.....Rs.10,000; Office and administrative expenses
.....Rs.1000; selling and distribution expenses ....Rs.500; Interest on
investment received...Rs.500; commission received....Rs.200
2. Compare Trading and profit and loss account. Compute depreciation for an
asset worth Rs.10,000 and having a scrap value of Rs.2,000 and a life time of
4 years under straight line method.
3. Outline the cost classification based on the nature of cost.
4. Apply the net present value method of evaluating investment decision and
say whether the following project could be selected for investment.
Year Cash inflows in Rs.
0 10,000
1 3,000
2 4,000
3 4,000
4 2,000
5 2,000

1. Construct journal entries for the following business transactions.
• X brings in cash Rs.10,000 as capital
• Purchases land worth Rs.2000
• He purchases goods worth Rs.5,000
• He sells goods for Rs.10,000
• He incurs travelling expenses of Rs.200.
2. Estimate Gross profit and Net profit and the financial position from the following
trial balance extracted from the books of Mr.Kumar as on 31.12.2010.
Debit Balances Amount in Credit Balances Amount in
Rs. RS.
Buildings 30,000 Capital 40,000
Machinery 31,400 Purchase returns 2,000
Furniture 2,000 Sales 2,80,000
Motor car 16,000 Sundry creditors 9,600
Purchases 1,88,000 Discounts received 1,000
Sales return 1,000 Provision for bad debts 6,00
Sundry debtors 30,000
General expenses 1,6000
Cash at bank 9,400
Rates and taxes 1,200
Bad debts 4,00
Insurance premium 8,00
Discount allowed 1,400
Opening stock 20,000
Total 3,33,200 Total 3,33,200
3. Calculate depreciation for a machinery purchased by senthil for Rs.4,00,000 on

1st April 2010.He also adds an additional machinery for Rs.40,000 on 1st
April 2011.Depriciation is to be provided at 10% per annum using straight line
method. The firm closes its books on 31st March every year.
4. A factory is currently working at 50% capacity and the product cost is Rs.180
per unit as below:
Material .......Rs.100; Labour.....Rs.30 Factory overheads....Rs.30 (40% fixed)

Administration overhead .Rs.20 (50% fixed)
The product is sold at Rs.200 per unit and the factory produces 10,000 units at
50% capacity. Estimate profit if the factory works to 60% capacity. At 60%
working raw material increases by 20% and selling price falls by 20%.

1. From the following information calculate the Breakeven point in terms of units
and breakeven point in terms of sales.
Sales....Rs.10,000; Variable costs Rs.6,000,fixed costs Rs.2000:profit Rs.2,000;No. Of
units produced 1,000 units
2. Describe the term ‘ Breakeven analysis’

3. Calculate the breakeven point and margin of safety from the following information
Fixed cost ...Rs.10,000, sales in Rs.25,000,selling price per unit Rs.30; variable
cost per unit Rs.10
1. Write the meaning of Owner’s capital

2. What is dividend?
3. Distinguish commercial bank and cooperative bank.
4. Bring out the various sources of short term, medium term and long term sources
of finance
Concept Map
Syllabus
Accounting: Introduction and Definition- Accounting concepts and conventions-Final
Accounts-Preparation of Trading, Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet.
Depreciation - Meaning-Need and objectives-Basic factors-Methods of providing
depreciation.
Cost Accounting: Meaning and Importance-Cost-Elements of cost- Cost classification-
Preparation of cost sheet. Break even analysis-Managerial applications. Budget and budgetary
control. Meaning- Objectives of budgetary control-Preliminaries for operation of budgetary
control-Budgets-Types of budgets and their preparation. Capital budgeting- Meaning-
Importance-steps in capital budgeting-Information needed-Methods of evaluating capital
budgeting decisions.
Finance: Introduction-Definition-objectives-functions of finance-sources of finance-

Short- term, Medium term, and Long-term-Role of special financial institutions in
financing-Venture capital.
Text Books
1. M.C.Shukla,T.S.Grewal,“AdvancedAccounts-Volume-I,2010 Reprint, S. Chand
& company Ltd.,2010.
2. Prasanna Chandra, “Financial Management-Theory and practice” seventh
Reprint, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company Limited,2010.
Reference Books
1. A.Ramachandra Aryasri, V.V Ramana Murthy, “Engineering Economics and
Financial Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. Dr.V.R.Palanivelu, “Accounting for Management” Third Edition, 2013, University
Science Press New Delhi.
Module Topic No. of Lectures

No.
1. Financial accounting
1.1 Introduction and Definition 1
1.2 Accounting concepts and conventions 2
1.3 Final accounts-Preparation of Trading profit and Loss 4
account and Balance sheet.
1.4 Depreciation- Meaning, Need and Objectives 2
1.5 Basic factors-Methods of providing depreciation 3
2. Cost Accounting
2.1 Meaning and Importance 1

2.2 Cost-Elements of cost-Cost classification 2
2.3 Preparation of cost sheet 2
2.4 Break even analysis-Managerial applications 2
2.5 Budget and budgetary control. Meaning- Objectives 1
of budgetary control
2.6 Preliminaries for operation of budgetary control 1
2.7 Types of budgets and their preparation 3
2.8 Capital budgeting-Meaning-Importance 1
2.9 Steps in capital budgeting-Information needed 1
2.10 Methods of evaluating capital budgeting decisions. Payback 3
period-Rate of Return-Net present value-Internal Rate of
return method
3 Finance
3.1 Introduction-Definition-objectives-functions of finance 2
3.2 sources of finance-Short-term, Medium term, and Long-term 2
3.3 Role of special financial institutions in financing- 3
Venture capital.
Total 36
Course Designers:
1 Dr.S.Muralidharan murali@tce.edu
2 Dr.R.Muruganandham rmmech@tce.edu
PC 2 2 0 3
14CE720 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Preamble
This course gives an exposure to the basic concepts involved in the formulation of a project, project
management principles, importance and need for network techniques and its applications to a
project.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes

be able to: attainment proficiency
level (%) level(grade)
(CO1) Explain project, project management, life cycle Understand 70 A

and project formulation
(CO2) Analyze and Manage time in projects through Gantt Apply 70 A
charts, And network techniques.
(CO3) Analyse and manage time in projects through CPM Apply 70 A

and PERT, update and monitor projects
Analyze 70 A
(CO4) Manage resources of project using resource
smoothing and levelling techniques Apply
70 A
(CO5) Optimize resources of projects using scheduling, fast
tracking and re-estimation techniques
(CO6) Identify the need for communication and risk Apply 70 A

Mapping with management in projects with emerging trends in project
Programme Outcomes management
CO42. L L L L - M L L M M L M L -
CO43. S M M M M - - L M L S M S M
CO3 S M M M M - - L M L S M S M
CO4 S M M M - M L - L M - S S S
CO5 S M M S - M L - L M - S S S
CO6 L L L L L - M - S M M L L M
Assessment Pattern
1 2 3
Apply 60 60 60 60
Analyze 0 0 20 20
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0
37. Define project and project management. Mention its need

38. Discuss the functions of project management
39. Discuss the life cycle of projects with influencing factors
40. Differentiate between CPM and PERT

41. A project consists of six activities with the following logical relationships.
Draw a network for the project and determine the critical path using traditional
method
- A and B are initial activities and can be performed concurrently
- C follows A but cannot start until B is over
- D and E succeed B
- C and D precede F
- E and F are terminal activities
Activity A B C D E F
Duration (Days) 7 8 3 2 7 4
Find the status of the project on the 10th day of its commencement.
42. Conduct Event oriented network analysis for the following project and
determine:
- Earliest and latest allowable occurrence times for the events
- Expected time and standard deviations for activities
- Project completion time and its degree of variability
- What is the probability of completing the project 2 days ahead of schedule?
- What is the probability of not completing the project 1 day behind schedule?
- Find the due date that has 75% chance of being met?
Activity (i-j) 1-2 1-3 2-4 3-4 3-5 4-5 5-6
t0 days 2 3 4 0 7 2 4
tm days 3 3 10 0 12 7 6
tpdays 5 3 12 0 15 9 8
43. Write the need for balancing of resources in project? Mention its significance
44. For an automobile industry project you as a project manager is vested with the
responsibility of balancing manpower requirement, which method would you
adopt for this process. Justify your answer with suitable reasons.
45. Balance the resource demand for the following project so as to meet the
availability of only 7 men/day
Activity (i-j) 0-1 0-3 0-6 1-2 3-4 3-7 6-7 2-5 4-5 7-8 5-8
Duration (days) 2 2 1 4 5 8 3 1 4 5 3
Manpower 3 6 4 2 2 4 5 4 2 2 5
1. Define the term direct cost in projects with examples
2. Write the need and meaning of fast tracking and estimation of projects
3. A project consists of 7 activities with costs and times gives as shown in table. Crash the project
and determine the optimum time and minimum cost relationship for the project. Assume the
indirect cost to vary at Rs.500/- per day.
Activity (i-j) 1-2 1-3 2-4 3-4 3-5 4-5 5-6
Normal time days 5 7 4 2 5 3 4
Crash time days 3 4 2 1 3 2 1
Normal cost Rs. 500 100 200 400 350 380 50
Crash cost Rs. 800 300 500 750 800 900 150
1. List the benefits and limitations of latest tools in project management

2. Discuss why effective communication is needed for the success of any
projects taking an example
3. Take of project of your choice in a mechanical industry and list and discuss
the risks in the project along with possible methods of its mitigation.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Project and its process- Define project and process, boundaries of project, Objectives and functions
of Project management, characteristics and types of projects, organization structure / styles, roles of
project management group, project management office and its role, project knowledge area, project
integration- process group interaction. Project flow, project life cycle- influencing factors. - Case
study. Project Formulation: Generation and Screening of PM ideas- Triple Constraint – Time, Cost
and Scope. TOR/ Project Charter/ SOW (Statement of Work)- Creation of project Charter. Preliminary
planning and estimate- Types of estimate- Ball park, Parametric and Bottom up estimates. Project
Presentation & Approval – Detailed Project Report & Approval (Technical and Budget Sanction),
Project finance- sources of finance. Technology transfer- PPP Concepts,BOT, BOLT, BOOT.
Stakeholder Management - Case study. Time Management: Project Scope Management - Work
break down structure- Activity/ Task- Events- Case study. Project planning tools- Rolling wave
planning. Gantt Charts, Milestone chart, Program Progress chart- Creating milestone plan. Project
Network- Fulkerson’s rules – Activity-On-Arrow and Activity- On -Node networks. Analyze project
time- Critical path method (deterministic approach- activity oriented network analysis- 80-20 rule-
Case study, type of time estimates & Square network diagram. Project updating and monitoring-
Case study. Estimate time- Program Evaluation & Review Technique (Probabilistic Approach)- Event
oriented network analysis- Optimistic, Pessimistic and Most likely time, Degree of variability in
average time, Probabilistic estimate, % utilization of resources. Resource Management: Types of
resource- Time, Men, Material, Machinery, Money, Space. Balancing of resource- Resource
Smoothing technique- Time constraint. Resource levelling technique- Resource constraint- Case
study. Resource optimization: Types of cost – Direct, Indirect and Total Cost. Variation of Cost with
time. Schedule Compression Techniques- Crashing, Fast Tracking & Re-estimation- Crash time and
crash cost. Optimize project cost for time and resource.CPM Cost model. Communication
Management: Communication Management- meaning and process, communication matrix,
Management information system, Guidelines of meeting- Case study. Risk Management: Risk
management – meaning and process, Risk identification and analysis techniques- FMEA and SWOT
analysis- Risk reporting and monitoring- Case study. Emerging trends in project Management:
Introduction to Theory of Constraints, Agile Project management - Case study. Stakeholder
Management – brief idea.
Text Book
1. Punmia B. C. and Khandelwal K.K., “Project Planning and Control with PERT/CPM”,
Laxmi publications, New Delhi, 1989.
2. "A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide) - Fifth Edition, An
American National Standard, ANSI/PMI 990001-2008"
References
1. Jerome D. Wiest and Ferdinand K. Levy, “A Management Guide to PERT/CPM”, Prentice Hall
of India Publishers Ltd., New Delhi, 1994.
2. Srinath L.S., “PERT & CPM- Principles and Applications”, Affiliated East West Press Pvt., Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2008
3. A Risk Management Standard, AIRMIC Publishers, ALARM, IRM: 2002
4. Gene Dixon, “Service Learning and Integrated Collaborative Project Management”, Project
Management Journal, DOI:10.1002/pmi, February 2011, pp.42-58
5. NPTEL videos at nptel.ac.in/courses/112102106 by Prof. Arun Kanda, Dept of
Mechanical Engineering, IIT, Delhi

Module No. of
Topics
No. Lectures
1.0 Project and its process
1.1 Define project and process, boundaries of project 1
1.2 Objectives and functions of Project management, characteristics of 1

projects, Organization structure / styles of project
1.3 Roles of project management group, project management office and its 1
role
1.4 Project knowledge area, project integration- process group interaction 1
1.5 Project flow, project life cycle- influencing factors, Case study 1
2.0 Project Formulation
2.1 Generation and Screening of PM ideas, Triple Constraint – Time, Cost and 1
Scope
2.2 TOR/ Project Charter/ SOW (Statement of Work)- Creation of project 2

Charter
2.3 Preliminary planning and estimate- Types of estimate- Ball park, 1

Parametric and Bottom up estimates
2.4 Project Presentation and Approval- Detailed Project Report and Approval 1
(Technical and Budget Sanction)
2.5 Project Finance - sources 1
2.6 Technology Transfer – PPP (BOT,BOLT, BOOT), Stakeholder Management 2
2.7 Case study - Tutorial 2
3.0 Time Management
3.1 Project Scope Management, Work break down structure -Activity/ Task- 2
Events- Case study. Project planning tools- Rolling wave planning
3.2 Gantt Charts, Milestone chart, Program Progress chart- Creating 2

milestone plan
3.3 Project Network- Fulkerson’s rules – A-O-A and A-O-N networks 2
Introduction to project management software
3.4 Analyze project time- Critical path method (deterministic approach- 2

activity oriented network analysis- Square network diagram
3.5 80-20 rule, type of time estimates - Case study 1
3.6 Project updating and monitoring- Case study 1
3.7 Estimate time- Program Evaluation & Review Technique (Probabilistic 2

Approach)- Event oriented network analysis- Optimistic, Pessimistic and
Most likely time, Degree of variability in average time, Probabilistic
estimate, % utilization of resources.
Tutorial 2
4.0 Resource Management
4.1 Types of resource- Time, Men, Material, Machinery, Money, Space. 1

Balancing of resource- need and purpose- Case study
4.2 Resource Smoothing technique- Time constraint 2
4.3 Resource levelling technique- Resource constraint 2
Tutorial 2
5.0 Resource optimization
5.1 Types of cost – Direct, Indirect and Total Cost. Variation of Cost with time. 2
Schedule Compression Techniques- Crashing, Fast Tracking & Re-
estimation Crash time and crash cost
5.2 Optimize project cost for time and resource- CPM Cost model- Case study 2
Tutorials 2
6.0 Communication & Risk Management
6.1 Communication Management- meaning and process, communication 1

matrix
6.2 Management information system, Guidelines of meeting- Case study 1
6.3 Risk management – meaning and process. Risk identification and analysis 1
techniques- FMEA and SWOT analysis
6.4 Risk reporting and monitoring- Case study 1
6.5 Emerging trends in project management: (Brief concept only)- Theory of 1

Constraints, Agile Project Management. Stakeholder management – brief
concept
Total Periods 48
Course Designers:

DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE Category L T P Credit
14CE770
STRUCTURES
PC 2 2 0 3
Preamble
Design of reinforced concrete structures started in the beginning of last century following
purely empirical approach. Thereafter came the so-called rigorous elastic theory where the
levels of stresses in concrete and steel are limited so that stress-deformations are taken to
be linear. However, the limit state method, though semi-empirical approach, has been found
to be the best for the design of reinforced concrete structures. This course offers analysis
and design of reinforced concrete structures. The course will focus on explaining the
background of current design specifications for reinforced concrete structures. It aims at
determination of safe as well as economical sections and their reinforcement under various
types of load combinations. At the end of the course, student has a comprehensive design
knowledge related to structures and systems that are likely to be encountered in professional
practice.
Prerequisites
Knowledge of Mathematics, Strength of Materials14CE220 , Structural Analysis 14CE420
and Design of reinforced concrete elements 14CE610
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
On the successful completion of the course, Attainment Proficiency
students will be able to level (%) level
(grade)
Analyse and design the slabs based on Yield 80 S
CO1 line theory and other flat and grid floor slab Apply
systems and draw the reinforcement details
Analyse and design the building frames by 80 S
CO2 approximate method and draw the Apply
reinforcement details
Design the foundation and draw the 80 S
CO3 Apply
Design the staircases and draw the 80 S
CO4 Apply
Design the retaining walls and draw the 80 S
CO5 Apply
Design the water tanks and draw the 80 S
CO6 Apply

CO47. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO48. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO49. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO50. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO51. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO52. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
Assessment Pattern:
Assessment Test – I Test – II Test – III End Semester
Apply 80 80 80 80
Create -- -- -- --
Total 100 100 100 100
CO1: Analyse and design the slabs based on Yield line theory and other flat and grid floor
slab systems and draw the reinforcement details
1. Explain virtual work method.
2. Draw the yield line pattern for a triangular slab supported on adjacent edges and also
for a trapezoidal slab with three edges fixed and one edge free.
3. Find the bending moment for simply circular slab subjected to uniformly distributed
load using yield line theory.
4. Define the terms: Column and Middle strips.
5. What are the IS codal provisions for finding area and spacing of reinforcement for the
flat slab.
6. Make use of yield line theory and analyse a one way continuous slab and determine
the collapse load for the square slab by using virtual work method and also
equilibrium method.
7. Make use of yield line theory, analyse yield line pattern of a rectangular slab using
both virtual work and equilibrium methods and determine that the yield pattern
condition has to be satisfied.
8. Make of IS codal provisions, design the flat slab for an office building having the
interior panel of size 6.5m x 6.5m. The size of the column is 300mm diameter. Super
imposed load is 5 kN/m2. Floor finishes = 1.5 kN/m2. Partition walls = 2 kN/m2. Use
M20 & Fe415 as materials. Draw the reinforcement details.
9. Make use of theory of grid floor slab system, analyse and determine the
reinforcement required for the slab of area 15m x 21m and the ribs are spaced at
1.5m on both directions and subjected to a live load of 6 kN/m 2, floor finish of 1.5
kN/m2, partition wall of 2 kN/m2. Use M20 & Fe415 as materials. Draw the
CO2: Analyse and design the building frames by approximate method and draw the
1. What are the assumptions made in portal method of analysis of frames?
2. Define the terms: Substitute Frame
3. What are the differences between portal and substitute frame methods of analysis?
4. How to find the axial load on columns in cantilever method?
5. What are the limitations of substitute frame, portal and cantilever methods of analysis
of frames?
6. Make use of portal method and analyse a multistory building frame, which has three
equal bays of 3.5m each and two floors. The height between floors is 4m. The wind
loads acting at roof (top floor) and first floor levels are H1=50kN and H2=25kN
respectively. The columns and beams are having the same cross section. Compute
the forces and moments in columns and beams.
7. A multistory building frame has two bays and two floors. The height between floors is
5m. The lengths of first and second bays are 4m and 6m respectively. The wind
respectively. The columns and beams are having the same cross section. Analyse
the frame and design any one beam in the frame using cantilever method. Draw the
8. A multistory building frame has two bays and two floors. The height between floors is
5m. The lengths of first and second bays are 4m and 6m respectively. The wind
respectively. The columns and beams are having the same cross section. Analyse
the frame and design any one beam in the frame using portal method. Draw the
CO3: Design the foundation and draw the reinforcement details
1. What are the IS codal provisions for the design of longitudinal and lateral
reinforcement for a pile?
2. Find the bending moment for the design of pile cap connecting three piles?
3. Explain the design principles of mat foundation.
4. Make of IS codal provisions, design a pile under a column subjected to an axial load
of 900 kN. The pile is to be driven to a hard stratum available at a depth of 6.5m. Use
M20 grade concrete and Fe415 grade steel reinforcement. Draw the reinforcement
details also.
5. Make of IS codal provisions, design a pile cap connecting three piles of size 300mm
in diameter used to support a column at the CG of the section subjected to a load of
700 kN. The centre-to-centre distance between the piles is 1.60m. Use M20 and
Fe415 as materials. Draw the reinforcement details.
CO4: Design the staircases and draw the reinforcement details
1. Define the terms: rise and tread
2. Explain the different types staircase with neat sketches.
3. Draw the plan and cross section of dog-legged staircase showing reinforcement
details.
4. Make use of limit state method, design a dog-legged staircase required for an
institutional building having a clear roof height of 3.60m. The thickness of roof is
125mm. The live load on the staircase is 3kN/m2. Consider other dead loads also.
Use M20 and Fe415 as materials. Draw the reinforcement details also.
CO5: Design the retaining walls and draw the reinforcement details
1. Explain the different types of retaining walls with neat ketches.
2. What is the purpose of providing shear key to the retaining wall?
3. What are the difference between counterfort and buttressed walls?
4. Draw the cross section of cantilever retaining wall showing reinforcement details.
5. Make use of limit state method, design the stem of the retaining wall using the
following data and also check the stability of the wall against overturning and sliding.
Height of earth to be retained above the GL: 4.5m; Density of earth: 18 kN/m 3; Angle
of internal friction: 300; SBC of soil: 260 kN/m2; Coeff. of friction between soil and
concrete: 0.5; Surcharge load: 10 kN/m2; Materials: M20 & Fe415. Draw the
6. Make use of limit state method, design the base slab of the counterfort retaining wall
using the following data and also check the stability of the wall against overturning
and sliding. Height of earth to be retained above the GL: 6.0m; Density of earth: 18
kN/m3; Angle of internal friction: 30 0; SBC of soil: 275 kN/m2; Coeff. of friction
between soil and concrete: 0.5; Surcharge load: 10 kN/m2; Materials: M20 & Fe415.
Draw the reinforcement details.
CO6: Design the water tanks and draw the reinforcement details
1. What are the IS codal provisions for the design of reinforcement in walls and floor of
water tank?
2. Define the term: Meridional thrust.
3. Draw the cross section of water tank resting on ground having flexible joint showing
4. Make use of IS codal provisions, explain the design principles of underground water
tank.
5. Design a circular water tank resting on ground with flexible joint at base storing water
of capacity of 300000 litres. The depth of water tank including a free board of 200mm
is 3.5m. Use M20 and Fe415 as materials. Draw the reinforcement details also.
6. Design the sidewalls and ring beam at the junction of sidewalls & top dome of an
elevated circular water tank for a capacity of 250,000 litres. Use M25 and Fe500
grade materials. Draw the reinforcement details also.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Slabs - Yield line theory - Equilibrium and virtual work method - Analysis and design of
square, rectangular and circular slabs - flat slab - grid floor system – Reinforcement
detailing of slabs. Building frames - Substitute frame method - Portal and Cantilever
methods of analysis - Design of frame components – Beam and Column – Reinforcement
detailing of frames. Foundation – Design principles of mat foundation - Design of piles
and pile caps – Reinforcement detailing of foundation. Staircases – Single flight and
dog-legged staircases – Stairs with stringer beams – Reinforcement detailing of
staircases. Retaining walls – Reinforced concrete walls – Cantilever and counterfort
retaining walls – Reinforcement detailing of walls. Water tanks - Tank resting on
ground and underground water tanks - Elevated circular water tank – Reinforcement
detailing of water tanks.
Text Books
1. N. Krishna Raju Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design IS 456-2000, CBS
Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 2010.
2. P.C. Varghese, Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt.
Reference Books
1. M.L. Gambhir, Design of Reinforced Concrete structures, Prentice Hall of India

Private limited, New Delhi, 2012.
New Delhi, 2014.
3. B.C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, RCC Designs (Reinforced
Concrete Structures), Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2015.
5. I.C.Syal and A.K.Goel, “Reinforced Concrete Structures”, S.Chand and Company
6. Self learning materials – online courses - http://nptel.ac.in/courses/ 105105104/20
IS Codes
2. IS 875(1-5): 1987 Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other than Earthquake) for
3. IS 2911(1): 2010 Design and construction of pile foundations – Code of practice –
Concrete piles
4. IS 3370(Part 1-4): 1965 Code of Practice for Concrete Structures for the Storage of
Liquids.
Module No of
TOPICS
No. Lectures
1. Slabs
1.1 Yield line theory - Analysis and design of square slab 1
1.2 Yield line theory - Analysis and design of rectangular slab 1
1.3 Yield line theory - Analysis and design of circular slab 1
Tutorial – Design problem 2
1.4 Design of flat slab 1
1.5 Design of grid floor system 1
Tutorial – Reinforcement Detailing of slabs 1
2. Building Frames
2.1 Analysis and design of a frame using substitute frame method 2
2.2 Analysis and design of a frame using Portal method 1
2.3 Analysis and design of a frame using cantilever method 1
Tutorial – Reinforcement Detailing of frames 1
3. Foundation
3.1 Design of principles of mat foundation 1
3.2 Design of pile 1
3.3 Design of pile cap 1
Tutorial – Reinforcement Detailing of foundation 1
4. Staircases
4.1 Design of single flight staircase 1
4.2 Design of dog-legged staircase 1
4.3 Design of stair with stringer beam 1
Tutorial - Reinforcement Detailing of staircases 1
5. Retaining walls
5.1 Design of cantilever retaining wall 2
5.2 Design of counterfort retaining wall 2
Tutorial – Reinforcement Detailing of walls 1
6. Water tanks
6.1 Design of tank resting on ground 2
6.2 Design of underground water tank 1
6.3 Design of elevated water tank 2
Tutorial – Reinforcement Detailing of water tank 1
Total (Theory = 24; Tutorial = 24) 48
Course Designers
Dr. M.C. Sundarraja
mcsciv@tce.edu
Mr. D. Rajkumar rajkumarcivil@tce.edu
14CE780 ESTIMATION AND COSTING LAB
Preamble
This lab course focuses on students acquiring knowledge on Category L T P Credit
arriving at quantities of items of works for buildings and road
PC 0 0 2 1
projects. It also gives an exposure to rate analysis for
different types of works knowing its specifications.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of Mathematics, Building materials and technology
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
On successful completion of the course,
the students will be able to:
Explain the general and detailed 95 S

CO1 specifications of different types of Understand
construction works
Estimate quantities of items of works for 95 S

residential buildings with similar
CO2 Apply
foundations for walls -Individual wall
method
residential buildings with differential
CO3 Apply
foundations for walls -Individual wall
method
CO4 residential buildings - Centre line Apply
method
CO5 roads Apply
Conduct rate analysis for different types 95 S

Apply
CO6 of works

CO53. - L L L - M L M L - M L L L
CO54. S - - L L - - - L L M S M L
CO55. S - - L L - - - L L M S M L
CO56. S - - L L - - - L L M S M L
CO57. S - - L L - - - L L M S M L
CO58. S M L L - L L S L - M S M L
List of Experiments
1. Writing general specifications for different types of construction works
2. Writing details specifications for different types of construction works
3. Arriving at quantities of items of buildings with similar foundation throughout with

flat/sloped roofs using Individual wall method
4. Arriving at quantities of items of buildings with differential foundation details with
flat/sloped roofs using Individual wall method using spread sheets
5. Arriving at quantities of items of buildings with similar foundation throughout with
flat/sloped roofs using Centre line method
6. Arriving at quantities of items of buildings with differential foundation details with
flat/sloped roofs using Centre line method spread sheets
7. Estimation of quantities of items of road works
8. Rate analysis – concept and terminologies, CPWD/ PWD Schedule of rates
9. Arriving at rate per unit of items of plain concrete in different types of foundation, floor
and weathering course work
10. Arriving at rate per unit of items of different types of RCC works in structural
elements
– Beams, Columns, slabs etc.
11. Arriving at rate per unit of items of different types of Masonry works (Stone, Brick
etc.),
reinforced brick work
12. Arriving at rate per unit of items of different types of finishing works – plastering,
flooring, DPC, pointing, painting etc.
Text Books
1. Dutta B.N., “Estimating and Costing in Civil Engineering: Theory and Practice,
Including Specifications and Valuation”, UBS Publishers' Distributors, 24 th edition,
1998.
2. Chakraborti. M, “Estimating, Costing, Specification & Valuation In Civil Engineering, Vikas
Book House, Pune, 2006
Reference Books
1. Robert Peurifoy and Gerold Oberlender “Estimating Construction Costs”, Kindle
Edition, 2011
2. Govt of Tamil Nadu PWD – “Standard Schedule of Rates”, 2016-17
Course Designers
Dr. G. Chitra gcciv@tce.edu
14EC7C0 CAPSTONE II PC 0 0 2 2
Preamble
The purpose of this course is to apply the concept of mathematics, science and engineering
fundamentals and an engineering specialization to solve complex engineering problems.
Course Outcomes

students will be able to Attainment Proficiency Level in
level in % grade
CO1 Explain the basic concepts of core engineering Understand 70 A

courses in the programme
CO2
Solve complex problems in core engineering 70 A
courses of the programme Apply
CO3 Identify and formulate a complex engineering Analyze 70 A

problem
CO4 Develop solution methodology for the chosen Analyze 70 A

engineering problem
CO5 Provide solution for the chosen engineering Analyze 70 A

problem
CO6 Analyse the performance of the proposed Analyze

methodology and prepare a technical report
1
CO1 M L - - - - - - - - - S L -
CO2 S M L - - S - - M M - S M M
CO3 S S M L L S M S M M L S S M
CO4 S S M L L M M S S M L S S M
CO5 S S M L L - S S S M L S S M

CO6 S S M L S S S S S M S S M
Syllabus
Engineering Group1
Structural Analysis: ILD for indeterminate beams- Strain Energy Method- Theorem of Three
Moments- Slope Deflection Method- Moment Distribution Method- Matrix Stiffness Method
Hydraulics and Hydraulic Machinery: Open channel flow- Dimensional Analysis- Impact of jets-
Water turbines and Pumps
Wastewater Engineering: Characterization of sewage- Collection of sewage- Transportation of

wastewater- Treatment of wastewater- Disposal of sewage.
Engineering Hydrology: Hydrologic processes- Surface runoff- Floods- Groundwater
Soil Mechanics: Physical Properties of soils- Consistency limits- Soil Classification- Permeability-
Geostatic Stress- Stress due to applied loads- Shear Strength- Compressibility- Soil Compaction-
Stability of Slopes
Highways and Pavement Engineering: Highway planning and Alignment- Geometric Elements-
Traffic Engineering- Highway materials- Design of pavements- Highway Construction practice-
Highway Maintenance
Engineering Group 2
Design of Masonry, Timber and Steel Elements: Brick masonry- Design of Timber Structures- Bolted
connection in steel Structures- Welded connection in steel structures- Steel tension members- Steel
compression members- Steel flexure members- Column base
Irrigation and Water Resources Engineering: Water Resources Planning- Irrigation- Dams- Diversion
Head works- Cross Drainage works
Design of RC Elements: concept of working stress method, Limit state philosophy as detailed in IS
code, Limit state of collapse in flexure, Limit state of collapse in shear and torsion, Limit state of
collapse in compression, Limit state of serviceability, Design of footing
Airports, Railways, Docks and Harbour: Permanent Way - its Components and their Functions,
Geometric Design of Railway Tracks, Points and Crossings - Design of Turnouts, Working Principle -
Signalling, Interlocking and Track Circuiting, Components of Airports, Runway Design - Orientation,
Cross wind Component, Wind rose Diagram(Problems), Geometric Design, Requirements of Harbour
components
Foundation Engineering: Methods of Site Investigation - Depth of subsurface exploration and

Spacing of bore holes - Geophysical methods, Methods of obtaining undisturbed samples, - Bearing
Capacities of soils, Types of settlement, functions and types of pile foundation – Bearing capacity
failure in piles - Estimating load carrying capacity of piles by Static approach, Efficiency of Pile Group,
Drainage and dewatering techniques, Lateral earth Pressure and Retaining Walls.
Design of Steel Structures: Design of welded plate girder, Gantry girder- Determination of maximum
bending moment and shear force due vertical component of crane wheel load, Design of gantry
girder, Beam – Column -behaviour of beam-column - second order moment in beam-column, Design
of Truss using Rolled steel sections – Purlins – truss members – Supports. Design of Truss using
tubular sections, web angle connection – Beam to Beam Connection - clip and seat Connection –
Concept of semi rigid Connection.
Assessment Pattern
(Common to B.E./B.Tech Programmes)
Comprehensive Test ( 30 Marks)
Test 1: Engineering Group 1 (60 Marks) Duration: 90 Minutes
Objective Type Questions : 30
Fill up the blanks : 30
Test 2: Engineering Group 2 (60 Marks) Duration: 90 Minutes
Objective Type Questions : 30
Fill up the blanks : 30
Test Marks Obtained Converted to
Test1 60 Marks (Max) 15 Marks (Max)
30 Marks (Max)
No re-test will be conducted at any circumstances
Complex Engineering Problem Solving (70 Marks):
 Selection of a complex engineering problem ( Batch size: 2-4) : 5 Marks

 Literature Survey : 5 Marks
 Problem Formulation : 10 Marks
 Solution Methodology : 15 Marks
 Results and Discussion : 15 Marks
 Technical Report : 10 Marks
 Viva Voce : 10 Marks
Course Designers:
Dr. T. Baskaran tbciv@tce.edu
Dr. D. Brindha dbciv@tce.edu
Mr. R. Sanjaykumar ravirajsanjay@gmail.com

MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE
14CEPA0 PE 3 0 0 3
MANAGEMENT
Preamble
This course provides an in-depth understanding of solid waste characteristics and
management. The students acquire proficiency in processing and safe disposal of municipal solid
waste generated by a community.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expect
Attainment Proficie
Level (%) Level(g
Mapping with CO1 Analyze the composition of solid waste Apply 70 A
Programme Outcomes generated from the community
CO2 Understand the functional elements of Apply 70 A
municipal solid waste management system
CO3 Analyze the collection methods and transport Apply 70 A
modes of generated solid waste
CO4 Evaluate the various processing technologies Apply 70 A
for Municipal solid waste management
CO5 Analyze the options to recover energy from Apply 70 A
waste generated
CO6 Suggest appropriate disposal methods for Apply 70 A
environmental safety
CO44. M - - M - M L - - M - - L L
CO45. M M - - - M M - - L - - L L
CO3 L M S M - M M M - M - - M M
CO4 M M S M - - S - - - - - M L
CO5 M M S M - M S - M M - M M M
CO6 M M S M - M S M M M - M M M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 40 40 40 40
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -

46. List the chemical characteristics of Municipal Solid Waste.

47. List the essential functional elements in MSW.
48. Explain the concept of Integrated Solid Waste Management?
1. State the factors to be considered while finalizing the collection route.

2. Write down the factors influencing the selection of location for transfer station.
3. List and discuss the types of containers and collection vehicles used for solid
waste management.
49. Assess the techno-economic viability of various processing techniques.

50. Compare the environmental effects of composting and bio-gasification.
51. Assess the energy generation potential of MSW.
1. Suggest the best disposal option for the municipal solid waste generated from your
locality.
2. Discuss the various issues faced by municipal authorities in identifying the disposal
site.
3. Do you think a sanitary landfill is possible to manage wastes in your locality? List at
least three reasons to support your answer.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Overview of Solid Waste Management Sources and types; Present scenario in India; Elements of
Solid Waste Management; Legal framework in India; Integrated Solid Waste Management.
Generation, Source reduction & Storage of MSW Waste generation rates and factors affecting
generation; Composition, Method of sampling and characteristics; Source reduction and 3 R’s
concept; On-site storage methods and materials used; Handling and segregation at source; Public
health and economic aspects of open storage; Case studies on Indian conditions. Collection and
Transfer of MSW Methods of collection; Collection vehicles and manpower; Collection routes and
their optimization; Analysis of collection systems; Need for transfer and transport of MSW; Transfer
station. Processing of MSW Objectives of MSW Objectives & overview; Physical processing
techniques and equipments; Thermal processing technologies; Biological conversion technologies;
Resource recovery from solid waste. Disposal of processed MSW Dumping of solid waste and its
effects; Sanitary Landfills; Design and Operation of Landfill liner; Management of leachate and
landfill gas; Landfill closure and environmental monitoring; Landfill bioreactor; Dumpsite
rehabilitation; Case studies on developed and developing countries.
Text Book
1. George Tchobanoglous, Hilary Thiesen and Samuel A Vigil, “Integrated Solid Waste
Management: Engineering Principles and Management Issues”, McGraw Hill
Publishers, New York, 1993.
Reference Books
40. “Manual on Municipal Solid Waste Management”, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban
Development, Government of India, New Delhi, 2000.
41. Bhide, A. D. and Sundaresan, B. B. “Solid Waste Management Collection,
Processing and Disposal”, ISBN 81-7525-282-0, 2001.
42. Paul T Williams, “Waste Treatment and Disposal”, John Wiley and Sons, England,
2005.

S. No Topics Periods
1.0 Overview of Solid Waste Management
1.1 Sources and types of solid waste 2
1.2 Present scenario of Solid Waste Management in India 1
1.3 Effects of improper Solid Waste Management 1
1.4 Elements of Solid Waste Management 1
1.5 Legal framework for Solid Waste Management in India 1
1.6 Integrated Solid Waste Management- Public Awareness and Role of NGO’s 1
2.0 Generation, Source reduction & Storage of MSW
2.1 Waste generation rates and factors affecting generation 1
2.2 Composition, Method of sampling and characteristics of MSW 2
2.3 Source reduction of waste and 3 R’s concept for waste reduction 1
2.4 On-site storage methods and materials used for containers 1
2.5 Handling and segregation of waste at source 1
2.6 Public health and economic aspects of open storage 1
2.7 Case studies on Indian conditions 1
3.0 Collection and Transfer of MSW

3.1 Methods of collection of waste 1
3.2 Collection vehicles, manpower and collection routes & their optimization 1
3.3 Analysis of collection systems 1
3.4 Need for transfer and transport of MSW 1
3.5 Transfer station- Selection of location, operation and maintenance 1
4.0 Processing of MSW
4.1 Objectives of MSW processing and overview of processing technologies 1
4.2 Physical processing techniques and equipments 1
4.3 Thermal processing technologies 2
4.4 Biological conversion technologies- Biomethanation and Composting 2
4.5 Resource recovery from solid waste- Case studies on Indian conditions 1
5.0 Disposal of processed MSW
5.1 Dumping of solid waste and its effects on environment 1
5.2 Sanitary Landfills- site selection 1
5.3 Design and Operation- Landfill liner 2
5.4 Management of leachate and landfill gas 1
5.5 Landfill closure and environmental monitoring 1
5.6 Landfill bioreactor 1
5.7 Dumpsite rehabilitation 1
5.8 Case studies on developed and developing countries 1
TOTAL 36
Course Designers:
2. Mr. V. Ravi Sankar environmentengr@tce.edu
3. Ms. N. Brinda Lakshmi brinda.nlakshmi@gmail.com
AIR AND NOISE POLLUTION
14CEPB1 PE 3 0 0 3
MANAGEMENT
Preamble
The course work offers the basic knowledge on various sources of air pollutants and their possible
effects on local, regional and global environment. It provides various techniques for sampling and
analyzingthe pollutants. Also, it deals with the principles and design of control of particulate/gaseous air
pollutants and its emerging trends to fulfil the legal aspects of air pollution to have a sustainable
environment for future generation. In addition, this course imparts knowledge about the fundamental
theory of sound, noise pollution sources with its effects and control techniques.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
level(%) level(grade)
CO1 Identify the sources of air pollution, Understand
impacts of air pollutants and their 70 A
measurements
CO2 Identify the significance of Apply 70 A
meteorological factors in pollutants
dispersion and to predict the pollutant
concentration
CO3 Suggest preventive and control Apply 70 A
measures for air pollution.
CO4 Suggest locations for industries and Apply 70 A
appropriate city planning tips for the
effective air pollution management of a
city.
CO5 Identify the sources of noise and its Understand 70 A
impacts on human beings
CO6 Suggest different noise control Apply 70 A
measures.

PO PSO PSO
COs PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 1 2
CO1. M M L L - M M - M - - - M L
CO2. S S M S - M M - - - - - M L
CO3 S S S S - - S - - - - - M L
CO4 L S S S - S S S S S - S M M
CO5 M L L L - M M - M - - - L L
CO6 S M S S - - S - - - - - M L
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply - 40 40 40
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -

1. Define Air Pollution.
2. Name some Green House Gases.
3. Explain the classification of Air Pollutants.
4. Explain the sources of Air Pollutants.
5. Explain Global Warming.
6. Illustrate a plan for an ambient air quality sampling in your city.

1. Define Plume.
2. Demonstrate, how prevailing lapse rate affect the plume behaviour from a stack.
3. Summarize various meteorological factors that affect the transport process of air
pollutants.
4. Explain the mechanism of dispersion of air pollutants.
5. Construct the Gaussian dispersion model for the pollutants from a point source.
6. Identify the maximum NOx concentration at ground level and also at 50m above
ground for a dumpsite fire which emits 3g/s of NOx, Determine the NOx concentration
at 2km downwind if the wind speed U10=5 m/s and the stability is class D.
7. Solve for the maximum ground level concentration of SO 2 at 10km from the plant for
a 915 MW power plant with a load factor of 72.5% and efficiency of 40% uses coal as
a fuel source. The coal has 1% sulphur content and a calorific value of 30 MJ/kg. The
stack tip is 200m high with a diameter of 7m. If neutral condition prevails and take
U10=4 m/s, TS=150°C Ta=20°C and VS=15 m/s.

1. Explain the working principle of an ESP and state the factors governing its
performances.
2. Explain the control strategies in automotive pollution.
3. Identifythe various possible source reduction methods in the control of air pollution.
4. Develop the size of a cyclone that will remove a 15µm particle with 50% efficiency
from an air stream of 6.0 m3/min. The temperature of the air is 75°C and the specific
gravity of the particle is 1.50. Assume five turns.
5. Solve for the new collection efficiency of a cross flow scrubber with a new spray
nozzle system installed that make all the water drops to 200µm in diameter which
earlier collects 90% of the 3µm particle having the water drops of diameter, 400µm..
The flow is same.

1. Explain the properties and characteristics of sound.
2. Define noise pollution. What are the sources for noise pollution?
3. Explain the impacts of noise on human beings. How could it be controlled?
4. Identify the Lequ of an air conditioner which generates a noise level of 75 dB for five
minutes every hour and the background noise level is 55 dB.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction to Air pollution– Particulates and Gaseous pollutants - sources, classification
and types of air pollutants, Effects and Impacts of Air pollution on environment; Sampling
and Analysis techniques.Meteorological factors – Dispersion,Factors affecting dispersion,
Plume rise & behaviour and Modelling techniques; Reduction and control methods –
source reduction and by equipment control; Automotive pollutions control; Air pollution
management - Air quality standards,emission standards, indices, industrial plant locations,
city planning, air pollution legislation and regulations – air pollution survey; Noise
pollution– Properties& Characteristics of sound waves; Noise sources,effects; Hearing -
mechanism, impairment, speech interference, sleep interference; Noise rating system;
Standards for ambient and workspace noise levels, Noise control techniques at source,
transmission path &at receiver end.
Text Book
1. Rao M.N and Rao H.V.N, “Air pollution”, Tata McGraw Publishers, 2006.
2. Mahajan, S. P., “Air Pollution Control”, TERI Press, New Delhi, 2009.
Reference Books
1. Noel de Nevers, “Air pollution control engineering”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2000.
2. Lawrence K.Wang, Norman C Pererla, Yung – Tse Hung, “Air pollution Control
Engineering”, Tokyo, 2004
3. David H.F Liu, BelaG.Liptak “Air pollution”, Lewis publishers, 2000.
4. Anjaneyalu Y, “Air pollution and control technologies”, Allied Publishers (P) Ltd. India,
2002.
5. Mackenzie L Davis and David A Cornwell, “Introduction of Environmental
Engineering” McGraw Hill Publishers, 1998.
No Lectures
1.0 Introduction to Air pollution
1.1 History of air pollution- Sources of air pollution 1
1.2 Types of pollutants 1
2.0 Effects of air pollutants
2.1 Effects of air pollutants on human beings 2
2.2 Effects of air pollutants on animals and plants 1
2.3 Effects of air pollutants on materials 1
2.4 Effects of air pollutants on global environment – Global 1
warming
2.5 Ozone layer depletion, acid rain 1
3.0 Sampling and analysis
3.1 Sampling and measurement of particulate matters 1
3.2 Sampling and measurement of gaseous matters 1
3.3 Ambient air sampling, analysis of air pollutants- chemical 1
and instrumental methods
3.4 Stack sampling 1
4.0 Meteorological conditions
4.1 Temperature lapse rate, stability 1
4.2 Adiabatic lapse rate, wind velocity and turbulence 1
4.3 Plume behaviour 1
4.4 Dispersion of air pollutants- maximum mixing depth, 2
dispersion model
4.5 Gaussian plume model and plume rise- problems 2
5.0 Reduction and control methods
5.1 Source reduction methods 1
5.2 Dilution by stack 1
5.3 Control by equipments- Particulate control methods 3
5.4 Control of gaseous emissions 3
5.5 Control of automotive pollution 1
6.0 Air pollution management
6.1 Zoning/City planning, Industrial plant location 1
6.2 Air quality and emission standards 1
6.3 Legal provision 1
7.0 Noise pollution
7.1 Sound wave properties 1
7.2 Characteristics, sources & types of noise 1
7.3 Effects of noise 1

7.4 Noise rating system 1
7.5 Legal standards and noise control techniques 1
TOTAL 36
Course designers
1. Dr. T. VelRajan tvciv@tce.edu
2. Mr. R. K. C. Jeykumar rkcjey@tce.edu
3. Ms. N. Brinda Lakshmi brinda.nlakshmi@gmail.com
14CEPC0 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course provides an introduction to the finite element analysis, from engineering rather
than a purely mathematical point of view.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of Mathematics, knowledge of forces and resolution and equilibrium
concepts.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Attainment proficiency
level(grade)
Level (%)
A
70
CO1 Analyze the potential energy functions of equilibrium Apply
and weak formulation
CO2 Compute the stresses and reaction forces in 1D Bar Apply 70 A

Element
CO3 Calculate the stresses and reaction forces in Truss Apply 70 A

Element
CO4 Analyze the constant strain triangle and iso Apply 70 A

parametric elements
CO5 Analyze Gaussian quadrature of one and two Apply 70 A

dimensional problems
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
COs PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
- L L
CO3. S S S S - - - - - - S
- L L
CO4. S S S S - - - - - - S
- L L
CO3 S S S S - - - - - - S
- L L
CO4 S S S S - - - - - - S
- L L
CO5 S S S S - - - - - - S

Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Assessment Terminal
Category Tests Examination
1 2 3
Apply 70 70 70 70
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -
CO1: Analyze the potential energy functions of equilibrium and weak formulation
1. Compare internal and external forces with examples.

2. Compute the deflection at the centre of a simply supported beam subjected to uniformly
distributed load over the entire span, Using Rayleigh Ritz method.
3. Discuss weighted integral and weak formulation with examples.
4. Compute the deflection of cantilever beam subjected to uniformly distributed load over the
entire span, Using Rayleigh Ritz method.
5. State theorem of minimum potential energy.
6. Discuss weighted integral and weak formulation with examples.
CO2: Compute the stresses and reaction forces in 1D Bar Element
1. Calculate the nodal displacement, stresses in each element and reaction

forces.(E=2x105 N/mm2). Axial force P=20N is applied as shown in Fig.
2. Show the nodal displacements, element stresses and reaction force for the bar shown in
A1 = 20 mm2 A2= 10 mm2

P
100 mm 100 mm
Fig.
Fig. P = 30kN
P
300mm
100mm
250 mm 250 mm
Thickness = 25mm
E = 2x105 N/mm2
Fig.
 = 78.5 kN/m3
3. Deduce the element stiffness matrix and shape function for one dimensional bar element.
CO3: Calculate the stresses and reaction forces in Truss Element
1. Evaluate the forces in the members of the truss shown in Fig by finite element method. Take
E = 200 GPa.
C B A
120° 30°
(3)
cm² 1m
(2) (2)
cm² cm²
O
50 kN
E = 200 GPa.
E = 200 GPa.
CO4: Analyze the constant strain triangle and Isoparametric elements
1. Calculate the displacements of nodes 1 and 2 and the element stresses using plane stress
conditions. Body force may be neglected in comparison with the external forces.
2. Differentiate plane stress and plane strain problem with examples.
3. Deduce the expression for shape function, strain displacement matrices and stiffness matrix
for a CST element .
4. Deduce the expression for the jacobian of transformation matrix of a triangular element
5. Calculate the displacements of nodes 1 and 2 and the element stresses using plane stress
conditions. Body force may be neglected in comparison with the external forces
CO5 Analyze Gaussian quadrature of one and two dimensional problems
1
1. Solve the integral  3e x  x 2  dx using one point and two point Gauss
x2
quadrature formula
2. Compute the direct strain at x and y and shear strain at the point x = 1, y=0. If a
displacement field is described by
u = (-x2 +2y2 + 6xy ) 10-4
v = (3x + 6y – y2) 10-4
1 1
  (x  y 2  2 xy)dxdy using Gauss numerical integration.

2
3. Solve
1 1
Concept Map
Syllabus
Fundamental Concepts: Stresses and equilibrium – Boundary conditions – strain-displacement
relations – stress-strain relations – potential energy and equilibrium – weighted integral and weak
formulation – variational approach One dimensional formulation: Finite element modeling –
coordinates and shapes functions – Assembly of global stiffness matrix and global load vector –
properties of K – finite element equations – treatment of boundary conditions – quadratic shape
functions – temperature effects. Trusses: Plane trusses – local –global transformation - stiffness
matrix – stress calculations.Two dimensional formulation: Finite element modeling – constant strain
triangle – problem modeling and boundary conditions - stress calculations –Isoparametric elements
– four node quadrilateral and nine node quadrilateral elements-Numerical Integration-One point
formula and two point formula – two dimensional integrals.
Text Books
1. Tirupathi R. Chandrupatla, Ashok D. Belegundu, “Introduction to finite elements in
engineering” Fourth Edition , Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Krishnamoorthy,C.S, “Finite Element Analysis Theory and Programming” Second Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.Ltd. New Delhi 2004.
3. P. Seshu, “Textbook Of Finite Element Analysis “ Prentice Hall of India Learning Pvt. Ltd.
2003
References
1. David V. Hutton “Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis 1st Edition” Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co.Ltd. New Delhi 2003.
2. Moaveni,S., Finite Element Analysis : Theory and Application with ANSYS, Prentice Hall Inc.,
1999.
3. G. Ramamurty, “Applied Finite Element Analysis” I. K. International publishing house Pvt
Ltd. 2010.
4. Zienkiewicz, O.C, and Taylor, R.L., The Finite Elements Methods , Mc Graw Hill , 6th edition
1987.
5. Singiresu S. Rao, Singiresu S. RAO “The Finite Element Method in Engineering” Elsevier
Butterworth-Heinemann 2005
6. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104116/

S.NO TOPICS NO. OF
HOURS
1 Fundamental Concepts
1.1 Introduction- Stresses and equilibrium 1
1.2 Boundary conditions 1
1.3 strain-displacement relations, Stress – strain relations – potential energy and 1

equilibrium
1.4 Weighted Integral and Weak formulation 1
1.5 Variational Approach- Rayleigh Ritz method- Galerkin method 1
Tutorial- Variational Approach and Weak formulation 2
2 One dimensional formulation
2.1 Introduction – Finite Element Modelling, coordinates and shape functions 1
2.2 Assembly of Global Stiffness Matrix and Load Vector- Properties of K, finite 2
element equations and treatment of boundary conditions
2.3 Quadratic shape functions, temperature effects 1
Tutorial - One dimensional problems 3
3 Trusses
3.1 Introduction – Plane trusses 1
3.2 Local and global coordinate systems 1
3.3 Element stiffness matrix 1
3.4 stress calculations for truss elements 1
Tutorial - Truss problems 3
4 Two dimensional formulation
4.1 Introduction of two dimensional problems- Constant strain triangle 1
4.2 Constant strain triangle- Element stiffness matrix 1
4.3 Constant strain triangle- force matrix 1
4.4 Constant strain triangle- stress calculation 1
Tutorial – two dimensional problems 3
4.5 Four node and Nine node quadrilateral elements-Higher order elements 2
5 Numerical Integration
5.1 Gauss Qudrature- One point formula 1
Tutorial -- One point formula 1
5.2 Gauss Qudrature -two point formula 1
Tutorial-- Two point formula 1
5.3 Two dimensional integrals 1
Tutorial – Two dimensional integrals 1
Total Hours 36
Course Designer
1. Dr.S.Nagan nagan_civil@tce.edu
14CEPD0 BASICS OF REMOTE SENSING PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble
Remote sensing is the science and art of obtaining information about an object, area or
phenomenon, by the use of either recording or real time sensing devices that are not in physical
contact with the object. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-based navigation system
made up of a network of 24 satellites placed into orbit by the U.S. Department of Defense. These
GPS satellites circle the earth twice a day in a very precise orbit and transmit signal information to
earth. Remote sensing and GPS data are further used in numerous applications, including GIS data
collection, surveying, and mapping.
Prerequisite
Fundamental of Physics, Mathematics, Geography, Geology and Surveying
Course Outcomes
Mapping with Expected Expected

Programme Outcomes Attainment Proficien
Level(%) Level(gra
CO1 Recollect the fundamentals of Remember 70 A
physics of Remote sensing and
concepts.
CO2 Outline the various data acquisition Understand 70 A
systems and collection methods for remote
sensing data information and storage.
Apply 70 A
CO3 Apply knowledge of satellites on
various Civil Engineering applications.
CO4 Utilize the various data input Apply 70 A
methods for mapping
CO5 Creation of data models using Apply 70 A
remote sensing techniques and GPS
CO1 S - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 S - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CO3 S - - - - - - - - - - - L -
CO4 S L - - L - - - L L L - L L
CO5 S L - - L - - - L L L - L L

Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 0 40 40 40
Analyse 0 0 0 0
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0

52. Define Plank’s law.

53. List the types of scattering.
54. Define EMR.
55. What is black body radiation?
56. How absorption affects remote sensing data quality?
57. Define GPS.
58. What is data?
59. List the important types of GPS.
60. List the various remote sensing platforms.
61. Discuss how remote sensing data quality is affected by energy interaction with
atmosphere.
62. Discuss how remote sensing data quality is affected by energy interaction with
earth surface materials.
63. Describe the importance of sensors resolutions in data interpretation.
64. Summarize atmospheric windows and its significance.
65. Describe various sensors resolutions.
66. Discuss CARTOSAT and RESOURSESATsatellites sensor characteristics.
67. Write various segments of GPS and its importance.
68. Discuss the radiation principles and its application in remote sensing data
capturing.
69. Write spectral reflectance of various objects and discuss how image
interpretation is done with respect to different wave length of EMR.
70. Explain in detail the development in the IRS series with respect to spatial
resolution.
71. Describe GPS structure and also discuss its merits and demerits.
72. Describe GPS surveying methods and accuracy.
73. Discuss about GPS positioning and its importance.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction and Basic Conceptsof Remote Sensing–Sources - EMR spectrum - Radiation Principles
Remote Sensingsystems- Scattering – Reflection – Absorption - Atmospheric windows and its
significance – Interaction of energy with atmosphere – Interaction of energy with terrain. Spectral
Reflectance – Spectral Signature curve. Remote Sensing Data Scanning Systems-Satellites platforms
and orbits -Data Capture - Photographic Cameras - Digital Cameras –Scanners. Sensor Resolutionsof
Satellites– IRS series – IKONOS, CARTOSAT – RESOURCESAT, Quickbird, OrbView, GeoEye,
WorldView.Global Positioning System– Introduction– Concept - Segment - Positioning – Methods –
Accuracy- GPS integration.
Text Book
Lillesand, Thomas, Ralph W. Kiefer, and Jonathan Chipman. Remote sensing and image
interpretation, John Wiley & Sons, 2014.
Hofmann-Wellenhof, B., Lichtenegger, H., & Collins, J. Global positioning system: theory
and practice, Springer Science & Business Media, 2012.
Reference Books
Jensen, John R. Remote sensing of the environment: An earth resource perspective 2 nd
edition, Pearson Education India, 2009.
Campbell, James B., and Randolph H. Wynne. Introduction to remote sensing. Guilford
Press, 2011.
El-Rabbany, A. Introduction to GPS: the global positioning system, Artech House, 2002.
Gopi, S. Global positioning System: Principles and applications, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education, 2005.
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1. Introduction and basic concepts of Remote Sensing
1.1 Definitions and Energy sources 1
EMR spectrum –wavelength and frequency, regions and its
1.2 1
properties
Radiation laws – Plank’s, Stefen, Kirchhoff’s law and
1.3 1
Boltzman law, radiant and kinetic temperature
1.4 Black body radiation 1
2. Remote Sensing systems
2.1 Scattering – Raleigh, Mie and Non-selective scattering 1
Reflection and absorption – types of reflecting surfaces and
2.2 variations in absoption level by various objects and its 1
controlling facotrs
2.3 Atmospheric windows and its significance 1
Interaction of energy with atmosphere - Scattering, absorption,
2.4 transmission, atmospheric windows 1
Interaction of energy with terrain – water,ice, vegetation,

2.5 1
soils, minerals and rocks.
2.6 Spectral reflectance and concept of signature 1
2.7 Spectral signature and curve 1
3. Remote Sensing Data Scanning Systems
Platforms - Ground, Airborne and Space borne
3.1 1
Orbital Characteristics – Coverage, Passes, Pointing Accuracy,
3.2 Geostationary, sun synchronous, shuttle orbit. Semisynchronous orbit 1

(Molniya orbit) and Quasi - zenith satellite orbit
Whiskbroom scanners, Pushbroom scanners, Side looking

3.3 1
scanners, Multi and Hyperspectral scanners.
Types and Characteristics of Sensors - Imaging and non - imaging
3.4 sensors, Active and passive sensors 1
4. Sensor Resolutions of Satellites

Spectral, Spatial, Radiometric & Temporal resolutions
4.1 2
4.2 IRS series – IRS – 1A and IRS – 1B sensors resolutions 1
4.3 IRS series – IRS – 1C and IRS – 1D sensors resolutions 1
OCEANSAT – CARTOSAT – RESOURCESAT sensors
4.4 1
resolutions
Sensors resolutions of IKONOS, Quickbird, OrbView, GeoEye,
4.5 1
WorldView
Other important earth and space imaging satellite sensors
4.6 1
resolutions
5. Global Positioning System
Introduction to GPS, Reference Systems and Coordinate systems:
Geodetic coordinate systems, Datum transformations, Height systems,
5.1 2
Time systems
Satellite Navigations constellations and Geopositioning

5.2 2
5.3 Basic Concepts - NAVSTAR, GLONASS, Indian Regional navigational 2
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
Satellite System (IRNSS)
5.4 Control Segment, Space Segments, User Segment 2

GPS Positioning Types-Absolute Positioning,Differential positioning.
5.5 2
GPS Surveying Methods and Accuracy - Static & Rapid Static, Kinematic-
5.6 Real Time Kinematic Survey –DGPS-GPS Data Processing and Accuracy 2
GPS integration- GPSLRF, GPSINS, GPS pseudolite, cellular integration.

5.7 2
Total Periods
36
Course Designers:
1. Dr.S.Palanivel spciv@tce.edu
2. Dr.D.P.Vijayalakshmi dpviji@tce.edu
14CEPE0 DYNAMICS OF STRUCTURES PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course deals with the dynamic analysis of various degrees of freedom system. The dynamic
response of single degree of freedom system with damping subjected to harmonic excitation. This
course deals with the response of linear two and multi degree of freedom systems with regard to
natural frequencies and mode shapes. This course also deals with base isolation technique and
dynamic analysis of machine foundation.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of Mathematics, knowledge of basic Sciences.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
CO1 Explain the concepts of single degree of Analyse 70 A

freedom with free vibration.
CO2 Analyse the single degree of freedom forced Analyse 70 A

vibration with harmonic excitation.
CO3 Interpret the two degree of freedom under Analyse 70 A

free vibration with built structures.
CO4 Analyse the two degree of freedom for forced Analyse 70 A

vibration with harmonic excitation.
CO5 Analyse the Multi degree of freedom with free Analyse 70 A

and forced vibration.
CO6 Perform dynamic analysis of RC structures Apply 70 A

CO5. S M - - - - - - - L - - M L
CO6. M S - - - - - - - L - - M L
CO3. M S - - - - - - - L - - M L
CO4. M S - - - - - - - L - - M L
CO5. M S - - - - - - - L - - M L
CO6. M S - - - - - - - L - - M L
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Terminal
Tests
1 2 3
Apply 10 10 10 10
Analyse 40 40 40 40
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -
1. Deduce the expression for viscous damping and criticize various damping system.
CO1: Analyse the single degree of freedom with free vibration.
2. Calculate the natural frequency of the system shown in fig1. The mass of the beam is
negligible in comparison to the suspended mass. E =2x 105 N / mm2 .
3. Deduce the expression for Logarithmic decrement and prove that δ = 2Πξ for damped free
3000mm
150mm
20N
6000mm 100mm
Fig 1
vibration.
4. A single degree of freedom system having a mass of 2.5 kg is set into motion with
viscous damping and allowed to oscillate freely. The frequency of oscillation is found
to be 20Hz and measurement of the amplitude of vibration shows two successive
amplitudes to be 6mm and 5.5mm. Calculate the viscous damping coefficient.
1. An SDOF system consists of a mass of 20 kg, a spring of stiffness 2200N/m and a
CO2: Analyse the single degree of freedom forced vibration with harmonic excitation.
dashpot with a damping coefficient of 60N-s/m is subjected to harmonic excitation of
F=200 sin 5t. write the complete solution of the equation of motion.
2. Deduce the expression for damped harmonic excitation.
3. Write a steady state response of undamped harmonic excitation with transient
vibration
Calculate the natural frequency and amplitude ratio of the system for two degree of
CO3: Analyse the two degree of freedom with free vibration.
freedom system of your choice by using Lagrange’s equation.
Deduce the expression response spectra for two degree of freedom undamped free
vibration.
Calculate the natural frequencies and normal mode of this mode for a cantilever bar is to
be modelled by a massless uniform bar to which are attached with two lumped masses
representing the mass of original system as K=2AE/L and m=αAL.
1. Explain coordinate coupling of two degree of freedom system and derive amplitude
CO4: Analyse the two degree of freedom forced vibration with harmonic excitation.
ratio and frequencies.
2. Examine measurement of damping using half-power bandwidth method.
3. Deduce the expression for damped forced vibration with harmonic excitation.
1. Deduce the expression for the response of Multi degree of freedom system for free
CO5: Analyse the Multi degree of freedom with free and forced vibration.
undamped vibration.
2. Deduce the expression for the response of Multi degree of freedom system for forced
damped vibration.
3. Calculate the natural frequency and mode shape as shown in fig
4. Calculate the vertical deflection of cantilever beam is subjected to free end mass(m) using
Rayleigh method. Using function of x= 3y/L3 (Lx2/2 –x3/6).
5. Investigate in detail Dunkerleys method and Stodola’s method of modal analysis.
6. Calculate the lateral force with subjected to static and dynamic condensation.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction to vibration and Damping: Simple Harmonic motion-Longitudinal Vibrations
Equation of motion- SDOF analysis-Undamped SDOFs- dynamic equation of motion-
D’Alemberts principle- equivalent stiffness-Springs connected in series and parallel-
frequency and period Amplitude of motion- Energy method for the equation of motion-
Damped SDOFs- underdamped and overdamped –Damped SDOFs- critically damped
Logarithmic decrement ,method of determining damping. Forced vibration of single
degree of freedom system: Undamped harmonic excitation. Damped harmonic excitation-
Evaluation of damping at resonance-Response to support motion Torsional vibration-
Dynamic Magnification Factor. Two degrees of freedom for free vibration: Principle
modes of vibration and equation of motion for two degree of freedom-Two degrees of
freedom for torsional system-Vibrations of undamped Two degrees of freedom. Two
degrees of freedom for forced vibration: Forced Vibrations-Undamped forced vibration for
two degrees of freedom –Orthogonality Principle. Eigen values and Eigenvectors( Natural
frequencies and mode shapes) for two degree of freedom system. Multi degree of freedom
system: Equation of motion of multi degree of freedom-Stiffness, mass and damping
matrices. Influence Coefficient- problems-Modal co-ordinates. Introduction of modal
analysis-Matrix Method –Rayleigh Method and Stodala’s method-Natural frequencies and
mode shapes-Modal analysis – damped undamped free vibration.
Reference Books
1. Anil K.Chopra, “Dynamics of Structures: Theory and Applications to Earthquake
Engineering”, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersy, Second Edition, 2001.
2. Berg. Glen v., “Elements of Structure Dynamics” ‘Prentice Hall Englewood Cliffs, New
Jersy.1989.
3. Cheng, F.Y., “Matrix Analysis of Structure Dynamics”, Marcel Dekker, New York, 2001.
4. Clough, R.W.and Penzien,J., “ Dynamics of Structure”,McGraw-Hill,inc.,New York,1993.
5. Grover.G.K, “Mechanical vibrations, “New Chand and Bros., Roorkee.
6. Hurty.W.C, Rubinstein.M.F,”Dynamic of Structure”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd.New Delhi.
7. Manicka Selvam K., “Elementary Structural Dynamics”, Dhanpatrai and sons, New
Delhi,2001.
8. Mario Paz, “Structural Dynamics: Theory and Computation”, CBS Publications, New Delhi,
1994.
9. William Thomson, “Theory of Vibration and its applications”, George Allen Pub.

Module Topics No.of
No. Lectures
1. Introduction to vibration and Damping
1.1 Free vibration of single degree of freedom systems, Simple 1
Harmonic motion
1.2 Longitudinal Vibrations Equation of motion, SDOF analysis 1
1.3 Undamped SDOFs- dynamic equation of motion with electrical equivalent 1
1.4 Newtons law of motion, D’Alemberts principle- equivalent stiffness 1

1.5 Springs are connected in series and parallel, frequency and period, 1
problems
1.6 Amplitude of motion, Energy method for the equation of motion 1
1.7 Damped SDOFs- underdamped, overdamped and critically damped 1
1.8 Logarithmic decrement ,method of determining damping 2
2. Forced Vibration of Single Degree of Freedom
2.1 Forced vibration of single degree of freedom system 1
2.2 Undamped harmonic excitation 1
2.3 Damped harmonic excitation with electrical equivalent 1
2.4 Response to support motion Torsional vibration and Dynamic 2
Magnification Factor
2.5 Impulsive loading problems using Fourier series 2
2.6 Numerical evaluation of Duhamel’s integral for damped system 1
3. Two Degree of Freedom (free vibrations)
3.1 Two degrees of freedom 1

3.2 Principle modes of vibration and equation of motion for two degree of 1
freedom
3.3 Two degrees of freedom for torsional system 2
3.4 Vibrations of undamped Two degrees of freedom 2

4. Two Degree of Freedom (Forced vibrations)
4.1 Forced Vibrations and Undamped forced vibration for two degrees of 1
freedom
4.2 Orthogonality principles 1
4.3 Eigen values and Eigen vectors 1
4.4 Calculation of Natural frequencies and mode shapes in two degree of 2

freedom systems
5. Multi Degree of Freedom
5.1 Stiffness, mass, damping matrices and Influence Coefficient 1
5.2 Modal analysis – damped undamped free vibration 1
5.3 Matrix Method and Matrix Iteration Method 1
5.4 Stodola’s method 2
5.5 Rayleigh’s Method 1
5.6 Dynamic analysis method to evaluate lateral forces, Static and dynamic 2
condensation
Total Hours 36
Course Designers:
Dr.B.Sivagurunathan bsciv@tce.edu
Dr.D.Brindha dbciv@tce.edu
14CEPF0 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE Category L T P Credit
PE 2 2 0 3
Preamble
Prestressed concrete is used extensively in bridges, multistorey buildings and many other
important parts of today's modern infrastructure. The inherent weakness of concrete in
tension is offset by introducing a pre-compression in a prestressed member, which improves
its service load behaviour such as reduced deflections and cracking. An advanced
understanding of its behaviour is essential before safe and economical designs can be
produced. This course will provide a detailed coverage of the behaviour of prestressed
concrete, analysis and design for strength and serviceability of prestressed concrete
members, such as beams and slabs including continuous members, and anchorage design
and losses in prestress under IS codal provisions.
Prerequisites
Knowledge of Mathematics, Strength of Materials (14CE220) and Design of Reinforced
Concrete Elements (14CE610)
Course Outcomes
Expected
Expected
Proficiency
Attainment
level
level (%)
(grade)
Describe the systems and methods of
prestressing and suggest suitable method of
CO1 Apply 70 A
prestressing for the given condition and its
analysis
CO2 Determine the losses of prestress Apply 70 A
Determine the deflection of prestressed concrete
CO3 Apply 70 A
members
Analyse and design the prestressed concrete members
CO4 Apply 70 A
under various forces
CO5 Analyse the prestressed concrete continuous members Apply 70 A
Analyse and design the circular prestressed concrete
CO6 Apply 70 A
members
CO7 Analyse the composite prestressed concrete members Apply 70 A
CO59. S M S - - S M M M S - - M -
CO60. S M S - - S M M M S - - M -
CO61. S M S - - S M M M S - - M -
CO62. S M S - - S M M M S - - M -
CO63. S M S - - S M M M S - - M -
CO64. S M S - - S M M M S - - M -
CO65. S M S - - S M M M S - - M -
Assessment Pattern:
Assessment Test – I Test – II Test – III End Semester
Apply 80 80 80 80
Create -- -- -- --
Total 100 100 100 100
CO1: Describe the systems and methods of prestressing and suggest suitable
method of prestressing for the given condition and its analysis
10. What do you mean by prestressed concrete?
11. What are the reasons for using high tensile steel wires in prestressed concrete
structures?
12. Differentiate between pretensioning and post tensioning systems.
13. Define the term: Tendon
14. Explain Fressinet system of post tensioning method with neat sketches
15. What do you mean by pressure and thrust line?
16. Explain load-balancing concept.
CO2: Determine the losses of prestress
1. Explain the losses of prestress in pretensioning and post tensioning system.
2. A prestressed concrete beam 250mm wide and 400mm deep is prestressed by 14
wires each of 7mm diameter initially stressed to 1300 N/mm 2 with their centroids
located 120mm from the soffit. The span of the beam is 11m. Determine the
percentage loss of stress in wires if (a) the beam is pretensioned and (b) the beam is
post-tensioned using the following data: relaxation of steel stress = 5% of initial
stress, Es=210 kN/mm2, Ec=35 kN/mm2, creep coefficient=1.6 and residual
shrinkage strain = 3x10-4 for pretensioning and 2x10-4 for post-tensioning, slip at
anchorage=1mm, Frictional coefficient for wave effect=0.0020 per m.
CO3: Determine the deflection of prestressed concrete members
1. What is the Lin’s formula to find out long term deflection of prestressed concrete
beam?
2. Explain Mohr’s Theorem in deflection of prestressed concrete members.
3. What are the factors influencing the deflection of prestressed concrete members?
4. A prestressed concrete beam spanning over 10m is of rectangular section, 230mm
wide and 500mm deep. The beam is prestressed by a parabolic cable having an
eccentricity of 150mm below the centroidal axis at the centre of span and an
eccentricity of 75mm above the centriodal axis at the support sections. The initial
force in the cable is 450 kN. The beam supports an UDL of 15 kN/m. Ec = 38
kN/mm2. Neglecting losses of prestress, calculate the short term deflection due to
prestress and self weight; b) Allowing for 20 percent loss in prestress, calculate the
long term deflection under prestress, self weight and live load, assuming the creep
coefficient as 1.80.
CO4: Analyse and design the prestressed concrete members under various forces
5. What is the formula to find out the ultimate shear resistance of a section uncracked in
flexure.
6. Give the maximum spacing of shear reinforcement in PSC beam as per IS code.
7. Give the ultimate shear resistance of a prestressed concrete section cracked in
flexure.
8. Give the maximum spacing of shear reinforcement in PSC beam as per IS code.
9. Give the ultimate shear resistance of a prestressed concrete section cracked in
flexure.
10. A pretensioned T-section is having flange width of 1300mm and thickness 125mm.
the width and depth of rib is 230mm and 1500mm respectively. The area of high
tensile steel is 5000mm2 located at an effective depth of 1550mm. If the
characteristic strength of concrete and steel are 40 N/mm 2 and 1600 N/mm2,
calculate the flexural strength of T-beam.
11. A pretensioned T-section is having overall depth of 1500mm and thickness of web is
200mm. The beam is subjected to an ultimate moment of 2000 kNm and shear force
of 240 kN. The effective depth is 1250mm and cube strength of concrete is 50
N/mm2. Effective prestress at the extreme tensile face of the beam is 20 N/mm 2. Area
of steel Ap = 2400 mm2. Tensile strength of tendons is 1600 N/mm2. Effective stress
in tendons after all losses is 900 N/mm2. Calculate flexure resistance of the section
using IS: 1343.
12. A prestressed concrete beam of rectangular section 150mm x 300mm is prestressed
by a straight cable placed at an eccentricity 50mm below the neutral axis carrying an
effective prestress of 180 Kn. The beam supports an udl of 18 Kn/m including self-
weight. Determine shear resistance of uncracked section at supports and design the
shear reinforcement. Take fck=40 Mpa and span=8m.
13. A prestressed concrete beam of rectangular section 150mm x 300mm is prestressed
by a straight cable placed at an eccentricity 50mm below the neutral axis carrying an
effective prestress of 180 kN. The beam supports an UDL of 18 kN/m including self-
weight. Compute shear resistance of uncracked section at supports and design the
shear reinforcement. Take fck = 40 Mpa, fy = 250 N/mm2 and span = 8m.
14. Design a simply supported prestressed concrete slab for the following conditions.
Span of the slab is 13m. Safe stress in concrete is 14N/mm 2. Safe stress in steel is
1200N/mm2. Super imposed load is 23 kN/m2.
15. A prestressed concrete beam 250mm wide and 600mm deep is subjected to a total
prestressing force of 1500kN. This force is transmitted by two symmetrically arranged
cables each transmitting a force of 750kN. Two anchor plates 200mm wide and
240mm deep are provided one for each cable. Design the reinforcement required in
the transmission alone.
CO5: Analyse the prestressed concrete continuous members
1. State Mohr’s second theorem
2. What is concordant cable profile?
3. Define the terms: Primary moment and secondary moment.
4. In two equal span prestressed concrete continuous beam ABC, the tendon has an
eccentricity of 0.05m at support A and is bent sharply at a distance of 4m from A
having an eccentricity of 0.12m in the span AB below the centre of the beam. And
the tendon has an eccentricity of 0.15m at the support B above the centre of the
beam. Then the tendon has a parabolic profile for the span BC having mid point
eccentricity of 0.15m below the centre of the beam and zero at the support C. Locate
the line of pressure (C-line) due to prestress alone. The prestressing force is 1200
kN. Calculate the extreme stresses in concrete at the section over the middle
support. The size of the beam is 300mm x 600mm.
CO6: Analyse and design the circular prestressed concrete members
1. Draw the location of P-line and C-line in the prestressed concrete circular water tank.
2. Explain: Circular prestressing.
3. A prestressed concrete tank of diameter 10m has to resist an internal pressure head
of 4m of water. Design the reinforcement required per metre height and the thickness
of concrete required. Take Fc=Ultimate strength of concrete = 40 N/mm2, fc=safe
stress in concrete=0.5Fc at transfer, fs=1300 N/mm2, loss of prestress=20%, m=8.0
4. Design a non-cylinder prestressed pipe of 600mm diameter to withstand a working
pressure of 1 N/mm2 and calculate the test pressure required to produce a tensile
stress of 0.7 N/mm2 in the concrete when applied immediately after tensioning.
Fet=14 N/mm2 and k=0.80.
5. Design a cylindrical prestressed water tank of internal diameter 32m and height 8m.
Compressive stress in concrete is not to exceed 12.5 N/mm 2 at transfer. Minimum
compressive stress at working loads is to be 1 N/mm 2. The prestress is to be
provided by a circumferential winding of 6m diameter wire and vertical cables of 12,
5mm dia wires in which the stress at transfer is 900 N/mm 2 and k=0.75.
CO7: Analyse the composite prestressed concrete members
1. What do you mean by unpropped method of composite construction?
2. Explain the principles of erection of precast structural member.
3. What are the advantages of having prestressed concrete structures in composite
construction?
4. Explain the analysis of stresses in composite construction with neat sketches.
5. Calculate the resultant stress developed in the precast and insitu cast concrete when
the beam is propped during the casting of slab. The size of the beam is 150mm x
300mm. Assume the same modulus of elasticity for concrete in precast beam and
insitu cast slab. The beam with an effective span of 4.5m is prestressed by tendons
with their centroids coinciding with the bottom kern. The initial force in the tendons is
150 kN. The loss of prestress may be assumed to be 18%. The beam is incorporated
in a composite T-beam by casting a top flange of breadth 450mm and thickness
50mm. The composite beam supports a live load of 4.5 kN/m 2.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Systems of prestressing and its analysis - Basic concepts of prestressing - Need for high
strength steel and concrete – Advantages - Pre-tensioning system – Post-tensioning
systems - Principles of partial prestressing – Applications - Analysis of prestress and
bending stresses - Resultant stress at a section – concentric tendon, eccentric tendon, bent
tendon, parabolic tendon - Pressure line or Thrust line - Concept of load balancing –
Cracking moment. Losses of prestress – loss due to elastic deformation of concrete -
shrinkage of concrete - creep of concrete - relaxation of stress in steel - friction – anchorage.
Deflection of prestressed concrete members - Factors influencing deflection and its
importance - Short term deflection – tendons of various profile – self weight and imposed
loads - Prediction of long term deflections. Flexural and shear strength of PSC members -
IS codal provisions - Flexural strength –Shear resistance – web shear crack – flexure-shear
cracks - Design of sections for flexure – Shear - Design of slabs - Design of sleepers and
Poles - Design of Anchorage zone – IS method. Continuous beams – Advantages -
Primary moment – secondary moment – resultant moment – pressure or thrust line – line of
prestress – concordant cable profile - Analysis of two span continuous beams. Circular
prestressing - Analysis & design of prestressed concrete pipes - Analysis & design of water
tanks (Tanks with hinged bottom). Composite Construction - Types and Analysis of
composite members - Deflection of composite members – PT slab-site inspection.
Text Books
3. N. Krishna Raju, Prestressed Concrete, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd, New
Delhi, 2012
4. N. Rajagopalan, Prestressed Concrete, Alpha Science International Ltd, New Delhi,
2005
Reference Books
1. T.Y. Lin, & Ned. H. Burns, Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures, John Wiley &
Sons, New York, 2010.
2. Arthur H.Nilson, Design of Prestressed Concrete, John Wiley & Sons, New York,
2007.
3. P. Dayaratnam, Prestressed Concrete Structures, Oxford and IBH, New Delhi, 2003.
4. M.C. Sinha & S.K. Roy, Fundamentals of Prestressed Concrete, S.Chand &
Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2013.
5. Ramaswamy G.S., Modern pre-stressed concrete design, Arnold Heinimen, New
Delhi, 2005.
6. Self learning materials – NPTEL - http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/105106117/
IS Codes
7. IS 1343:1980 Code of Practice for Pre Stressed Concrete
8. IS 3370 (Part 3):1965 Code of Practice for Concrete Structures for the Storage of
Liquids-Part 3 Pre stressed Concrete
9. IS 3370 (Part 4):1965 Code of Practice for Concrete Structures for the Storage –Part-
4 Design Tables
10. IS 784:2001 Prestressed concrete pipes (including specials) - Specification.
No. Lectures
1. Systems of prestressing and its analysis
Basic concepts of prestressing - Need for high strength steel
1.1 1
and concrete – Advantages
1.2 Pre-tensioning system – Hoyar’s method 1
Post-tensioning systems – Freyssinet, Gifford-Udall, Magnel-
1.3 1
Blaton, Lee-McCall systems
1.4 Principles of partial prestressing – Applications 1
Resultant stress at a section – concentric tendon, eccentric
1.5 tendon, bent tendon, parabolic tendon, Pressure line or Thrust 1
line - Concept of load balancing
Tutorial – Problems on analysis of prestress 4
2. Losses of prestress
2.1 Due to elastic deformation of concrete and shrinkage of concrete 1

2.2 Due to creep of concrete and relaxation of stress in steel 1
2.3 Due to friction and anchorage 1
Tutorial – Problems on losses of prestress 4
3. Deflection of prestressed concrete members
3.1 Factors influencing deflection and its importance 1

Short term deflection – tendons of various profile – self weight
3.2 1
and imposed loads
3.3 Prediction of long term deflections 1
Tutorial – Problems on deflection calculations 2
4. Flexural and shear strength of PSC members
4.1 IS codal provisions - Flexural strength 1

4.2 Shear resistance – web shear crack – flexure-shear cracks 1
4.3 Design of sections for flexure 1
4.4 Design of section for shear 1
4.5 Design of slabs 1
4.6 Design of sleepers and poles 1
4.7 Design of Anchorage zone reinforcement - IS code method 1
Tutorial – Problems on design of prestressed concrete members 4
5. Continuous beams
Advantages - Primary moment – secondary moment – resultant

5.1 moment – pressure or thrust line – line of prestress – concordant 1
cable profile
5.2 Analysis of two span continuous beams 1
Tutorial – Problems on continuous members 4
6. Circular prestressing
6.1 Analysis & design of prestressed concrete pipes 1

Tutorial – Problems on design of pipes 2
6.2 Analysis & design of water tanks (Tanks with hinged bottom) 1
Tutorial – Problems on design of tanks 2
7. Composite Construction
7.1 Types and Analysis of composite members 1

7.2 Deflection of composite members 1
Tutorial – Problems on composite members 2
Total (Theory = 24; Tutorial = 24) 48
Course Designers
Dr. K. Sudalaimani ksudalaimani@tce.edu
REPAIR AND REHABILITATION OF
14CEPG0 PE 3 0 0 3
STRUCTURES
Preamble
To impart knowledge on understanding the properties of concrete, causes of its failure, effects and
measures to repair and rehabilitate it.
Course Outcomes
On the
successful
completion of
the course,
students will be
able to:
Expected Expected
level (%) level (grad
(CO1) Explain the factors affecting the durability of Understand 70 A
concrete structures
(CO2) Identify the causes and effects of distress in Understand 70 A
concrete structures
(CO3) Diagnose distress in concrete structures and Apply 70 A
suggest suitable maintenance and repair
strategies
Apply 70 A
(CO4) Enumerate the concept of quality assurance in
structures, basic mechanisms by which quality
assurance schemes are developed and operated Apply 70 A
with case studies
Apply
(CO5) Suggest suitable materials of repair related to the 70 A
distress with case studies
(CO6) Suggest suitable techniques of repair to distress

strcutures with case studies

CO7. - L - L - - - - - - M - - L
CO8. M M L M - L - - - - M - - M
CO3 L M M M - M L - L - S - L S
CO4 M M M M - S L L - - S - L S
CO5 L M M M - S M L M M M - M M
CO6 L M M M - S M L M M M - M M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 20 40 40 40
Analyse 0 0 0 0
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0
1. Discuss the phenomenon of sulphate attack on concrete mentioning the methods to

minimize the same
2. Differentiate between the terms Repair, Rehabilitation and Retrofitting
3. Define the term permeability. List the factors affecting permeability of concrete
(CO2):
1. Discuss the mechanism of corrosion in rebars and discuss the influencing factors
2. Mention if cover thickness is related to corrosion of rebars? if so how?
3. List the types of distress that are likely to affect a break water structure discussing the
causes and effects
(CO3):
1. Name two NDT tests of assessing quality of concrete

2. By means of a flow chart discuss the method of diagnosing distress in concrete structures
3. Which special concrete you would recommend for a concrete structure to be constructed in
freezing climatic conditions and why? Also discuss the properties of such a concrete
(CO4):
1. Discuss the various methods of corrosion protection of rebars

2. Define the term quality assurance and mention its need
3. As a quality assurance engineer identify and discuss the components you would include in
devising a new quality assurance scheme for a new organization.
(CO5):
1. How do you make concrete buried under polluted ground resistant to corrosion? Discuss the
various methods
2. Discuss a method of strengthening of a concrete beam. Discuss the properties of the
materials used in the strengthening method
3. Which is the special concrete you would recommend for a concrete water tank and why?
Give suitable reasoning discussing its features
4. What is the concreting technique you would recommend for a marine bridge pier
construction? Justify and discuss its salient features
Concept Map
Syllabus
Durability of Concrete Structures - Permeability of concrete- Sulphate attack – methods of control –
durability of concrete in sea water- action of sewage – thermal properties of concrete – fire
resistance – resistance to freezing and thawing – resistance to abrasion, erosion and cavitation.
Distress in concrete structures- causes, effects and remedial measures- effects due to climate,
temperature, chemicals, wear and erosion, design and construction errors, corrosion mechanism,
effects of cover thickness and cracking, methods of corrosion protection, inhibitors, resistant steels,
coatings, cathodic protection. Maintenance and Repair Strategies - Inspection, structural appraisal,
economic appraisal- Diagnosis of distress – Procedure. Quality assurance – need- components-
conceptual bases of quality assurance schemes. Materials for Repair – Special concretes and
mortars, special cements for accelerated strength gain, expansive cement, polymer concrete,
sulphur infiltrated concrete, ferro-cement, fibre reinforced concrete, self healing concrete, formed
concrete, Fibre reinforced Polymers. Techniques of Repair – Rust eliminators and polymer coating
for rebars during repair, foamed concrete, mortar and dry pack, prepack, vacuum concrete, gunite
and shotcrete, epoxy injection, mortar repair for cracks – case studies on distress concrete
structures and type of treatment done.
Text Book
1. Dension Campbell, Allen and, Harold Roper, “ Concrete Structures, Materials, Maintenance
and Repair”, Longman Scientific and Technical Publications UK, 1991
Reference Books
1. Shetty. M.S., “Concrete Technology – Theory and Practice”, S.Chand Company, New Delhi,
2010
2. Gambhir. M.L. “ Concrete Technology”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1998.
3. ACCE(I), Madurai Centre, “Workshop on cracks, corrosion and leaks”, July 2003
4. Allen R.T. and Edwards. S.C., “Repairs of Concrete Structures”, Blakie and Sons, UK, 1997.
5. Raikar R.N., “ Learning from failures”, Structwel Designers & Consultants, New Delhi, 1987.
6. Lecture notes on “Workshop on Repairs & Rehabilitation of Structures”, Organized by Dept.
of Civil Engg., Anna University, Chennai 29-30 October, 1999
No. Lectures
1. Durability of Concrete Structures
1.1 Permeability of concrete- factors influencing, methods of improving 1

impermeable characteristics
1.2 Sulphate attack – influencing factors & methods of control 1
1.3 Durability of concrete in sea water- action of sewage – influencing factors 1
1.4 Thermal properties of concrete – fire resistance - factors influencing 1
1.5 Resistance to freezing and thawing- influencing factors 1
1.6 Resistance to abrasion, erosion and cavitation – influencing factors 1
2. Distress in concrete structures- causes, effects and remedial measures
2.1 Effects due to climate, temperature, chemicals - causes, effects and 1

remedial measure
2.2 Wear and erosion- causes, effects and remedial measure 1
2.3 Design and construction errors –causes, effects and remedial measure 2
2.4 Corrosion mechanism, types of corrosion, effects of cover thickness and 2

cracking- influencing factors. Methods of corrosion protection, inhibitors,
resistant steels, coatings, cathodic protection
3.0 Quality of Concrete Structures
3.1 Maintenance and Repair Strategies
3.1.1 Inspection, types of maintenance, structural appraisal, economic appraisal 1

Diagnosis of distress – Procedure
3.1.2 Methods of assessing the quality of concrete – NDT and DT tests 1
3.1.3 Structural Appraisal & Economic Appraisal 1

3.2 Quality assurance
3.2.1 Need and Objectives- people benefited by QAS 1
3.2.2 Components, Conceptual bases of quality assurance schemes 2
3.2.3 Basic methods of development and operation of QAS 2
4. Materials for Repair
4.1 Special concretes and mortars, special cements for accelerated strength 2
gain, expansive cement – properties, methods of manufacture and
applications
4.2 Polymer concrete, sulphur infiltrated concrete- properties, methods of 2

manufacture and applications
4.3 Ferro-cement, fibre reinforced concrete- properties, methods of 2

manufacture and applications
4.4 Self healing concrete, formed concrete, Fibre reinforced Polymers - 2

properties, methods of manufacture and applications
5. Techniques of Repair
5.1 Rust eliminators and polymer coating for rebars during repair 2
5.2 Foamed concrete, mortar and dry pack, epoxy injection, mortar repair for 2
cracks
5.3 Prepack, vacuum concrete, gunite and shotcrete – procedure and 2

applications
5.4 Case studies on distress concrete structures and type of treatment done 2
Forensic investigations – case studies
Total Periods 36
Course Designers:
G.Chitra gcciv@tce.edu
14CEPH0 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course deals with the different ground improvement methods adopted for improving the
properties of remoulded and in-situ soils by adopting different techniques such as in- situ
densification, consolidation and dewatering methods. This course enables the students to
understand how reinforced earth walls can obviate the problems associated with
conventional retaining walls. Also the students would be exposed to the concepts of
grouting, soil stabilization and the use of geotextiles to improve the engineering performance
of soils.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of Mathematics, Soil Mechanics (14CE530) and Foundation Engineering
(14CE630), knowledge of geology and earth science.
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to: Expected Expected
Level (%) Level (grade)
CO1 Enumerate the role of ground
improvement and select appropriate Apply
70 A
ground improvement technique for the
given subsoil condition.
CO2 Suggest appropriate dewatering Apply 70 A
technique for lowering the ground water
table
CO3 Recommend suitable techniques for Apply 70 A
densifyingcohesionless soil deposit
A
CO4 Suggest appropriate techniques for Apply 70 80
consolidating cohesive deposits
CO5 Perform simple design of reinforced earth Apply 70 A
walls and illustrate the role of geo-textile
in ground improvement.
CO6 Explain the concept of grouting and soil Understand 70 A
stabilization to improve the engineering
performance of soils.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO9. S M L - - L - L - - M L M M
CO10. S M L - L M - L - - M L M L
CO3. S M M - L M - L - - M L M M
CO4. S M M - L - - L - - M L L L
CO5. S M M - L - - M - - M L M L
CO6. M L L - - - - M - - M L M M

Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply --- 20 20 20
Analyse --- --- --- ---
Evaluate --- --- --- ---
Create --- --- --- ---

4. Explain in detail the role of ground improvement in foundation engineering.

5. Define challenging soil.
6. Explain in brief the various methods of ground improvement.
7. Name the various soil deposits found in India.
1. Define dewatering.
2. Explain in detail with a neat sketch the method of dewatering using sumps and
ditches stating its advantages and disadvantages.
3. Explain in brief the principle, equipment used, installation and operation and
precaution adopted in electro-osmotic dewatering.
4. Compare the various dewatering systems suitability, uses, merits and demerits.
1. Differentiate vibro-displacement from vibro-replacement stone columns.

2. Compare and contrast the various methods of in-situ densification techniques
3. Differentiate lime pile from sand compaction pile.
4. Explain in detail the method of dynamic compaction of cohesion less and dynamic
consolidation of cohesive soil.
5. Explain in detail about the method of pre-loading. How do vertical drains improve the
functioning of pre-loading technique.
3. Name any four applications of soil reinforcement for ground improvement.

4. Define geosynthetics.
5. Explain with the help of a flow chart the various classifications of geosynthetics in
detail.
6. Geosynthetics can be used as soil reinforcement – Jusify in detail with supporting
sketches.
1. Describe in detail about the various methods of grouting with neat sketches.
2. Enumerate with a neat sketch the grouting plant and equipment necessary and the
procedure for carrying out grouting operations.
3. Describe in detail the various applications of grouting.
4. Explain in detail how an expansive soil is stabilized.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Problematic Soil and Improvement Techniques: Role of ground improvement in
foundation engineering – methods of ground improvement – Geotechnical problems in
alluvial, lateritic and black cotton soils – Selection of suitable ground improvement
techniques based on soil conditions. Dewatering:Necessity of dewatering – sumps and
interceptor ditches – single and multi stage well points – deep well - vacuum well points –
electro osmosis – drains – criteria for choice of filler material around drains.Insitu Treatment
of Cohesionless and Cohesive Soils: In-situ densification of cohesion-less soils: Dynamic
Compaction - vibroflotation, sand compaction piles - deep compaction. Consolidation:
Preloading with sand drains - fabric drains, stone columns - Lime piles - installation
techniques – relative merits of above methods and their limitations.Earth Reinforcement
And Geotextiles: Concept of reinforcement – types of reinforcement material – Reinforced
earth wall – Mechanism – simple design – applications of reinforced earth - Role of
Geotextiles in filtration - drainage - separation - road works and containment.Grout
Techniques and Soil Stabilization: Objectives of grouting - types of grouts – grouting
equipments and machinery – injection methods – grout monitoring – stabilization with
cement, lime and chemicals – stabilization of expansive soil.
Text Books
1. Purushothama Raj. P, “Ground Improvement Techniques”, Laxmi Publications (P)

Ltd, New delhi, 2007.
2. Koerner, R.M. “Construction and Geotechnical Methods in Foundation Engineering”,
McGraw Hill, 1994.
3. Mittal.S, “An Introduction to Ground Improvement Engineering”, Medtech Publisher,
2013.
Reference
1. Moseley, M.P., “Ground Improvement”, Blackie Academic and Professional,

Chapman and Hall, Glasgow, 1998.
2. Jones J.E.P. “Earth Reinforcement and Soil Structure”, Butterworths, London, 1985.
3. Coduto, D.P. “Geotechnical Engineering – Principles and Practices”, Prentice Hall of
India Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi, 2011.
4. Koerner, R.M. “Designing with Geosynthetics” 4th Edition,Prentice Hall, Jersey,
1999.
5. IS9759 : 1981 “Guidelines for Dewatering During Construction”, Bureau of Indian
Standards, New Delhi, Reaffirmed 1999.
6. IS15284 (Part 1) : 2003 “Design and Construction for Ground Improvement –
Guidelines” (Stone Column), Bureau of Indian Standards, New Delhi, 2003.

Module No. of
Topics
No. Lectures
1. Problematic Soil and Improvement Techniques
1.1 Role of ground improvement in foundation engineering 2
1.2 methods of ground improvement – Geotechnical problems in alluvial,

2
lateritic and black cotton soils
1.3 Selection of suitable ground improvement techniques based on soil 2

conditions
2. Dewatering
2.1 Necessity of dewatering – sumps and interceptor ditches. 1
2.2 Single and multi stage well points 2
2.3 Deep well – vacuum well points – electro osmosis – drains 2
2.4 Criteria for choice of filler material around drains 2
3. Insitu Treatment of Cohesionless and Cohesive Soils

3.1 In-situ densification of cohesion-less soils: Dynamic Compaction –
2
vibroflotation.
3.2 Sand compaction piles – deep compaction. 2
3.3 Consolidation: Preloading with sand drains – fabric drains, stone

2
columns – Lime piles – installation techniques
3.4 Relative merits of above methods and their limitations. 2
4. Earth Reinforcement And Geotextiles

4.1 Concept of reinforcement – types of reinforcement material 2
4.2 Reinforced earth wall – Mechanism – simple design – applications of 2
reinforced earth
4.3 Role of Geotextiles in filtration - drainage– separation – road works 2
and containment.
5. Grout Techniques And Soil Stabilization
5.1 Objectives of grouting – types of grouts 2
5.2 Grouting equipments and machinery – injection methods – grout

2
monitoring
5.3 Stabilization with cement, lime and chemicals 2
5.4 Stabilization of expansive soil. 2
Total (Hours) 36
Course Designers
Mr. R. Sanjay kumar sanjaykumar@tce.edu
Mr. R.Sankaranarayanan rsciv@tce.edu

TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
14CEPJ0
AND SAFETY Category L T P Credit
PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
Students will acquire comprehensive knowledge of traffic surveys and studies such as volume count,
Speed and delay, origin and destination, Parking, pedestrian and accident surveys. They will achieve
knowledge on design of at- grade and grade separated intersections. Students will become familiar
with various traffic control and traffic management measures.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
CO1: Explain road user and vehicular Understand 75 A
characteristics
CO2: Bring out speed and volume Understand 75 A
studies and their relationships
CO3: Design geometrics of intersections, Apply 75 A
Understand 75 A
CO4: Enumerate the various road safety
requirements
Apply 75 A
CO5: Design the signal phasing and design a
rotary Apply 75 A
CO6: Identify various traffic control measures

1 2
CO11. S M L L - - - - - - - - M -
CO12. S L - - - - - - - - - - L -
CO3. S S S S - - - L - - - - M -
CO4. L L L L - - - - - - - - L -
CO5. S S M - - - - L - - - - M -
CO6. S - - - - - - - - - - - L -

Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 40 40 40 40
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -

11. List the various human factors which are of importance to driver.
12. List out the different types of resistance offered by the vehicle while it is in motion.
13. Mention the various driver characteristics affecting traffic behaviour on roads
1. Explain the significance and scope of traffic engineering.

2. Describe the different methods of conducting Speed and Delay studies.
3. Mention the principle and application of Traffic Volume Studies.
1. The following data were obtained from the spot speed studies.
Suggest i) Speed limit for regulation ii) Speed to check geometric design elements
iii) Lower speed group causing congestion iv) Dispersion.
Speed 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90 90-100
range
kmph
No. of 20 45 75 95 290 420 210 155 85 40

vehicles
observed
2. Traffic flow in an urban section at the intersection of two highways in the design year is
given below. The highways intersect at right angles and have a carriage way width of
16m.Design the rotary intersection using PCU value of car =1, commercial vehicle (com.v)
=2.8 and scooter (SC)=0.75.
Approach Left turning Straight Ahead Right Turning
Car Com.V SC Car Com.V SC Car Com.V SC

N 200 50 100 250 40 160 150 50 80
E 175 60 80 210 60 120 150 60 120
S 245 70 100 120 50 80 160 55 80
W 210 40 120 190 45 100 180 75 100
3. Draw neatly a rotary intersection where four roads meet and indicate the directions of
traffic flow.
1. Mention the classification of road signs.

2. State the objectives in providing road markings and describe its effectiveness
in traffic regulation.
3. List the benefits of providing street furnitures.
4. Explain roadside hazard management with suitable illustrations.
5. Recall various methods of traffic control in urban roads.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction. Significance and scope, Characteristics of Driver, the pedestrian, the vehicle and road,
skid resistance and braking efficiency. Components of traffic engineering – road, traffic and land use
characteristics. Traffic Surveys and Analysis -volume, capacity speed and delay studies, origin and
destination, parking studies, pedestrian and Accident studies. Geometric Design of intersection-
conflict points at intersections, principles and elements of intersection design, rotary design,
Interchanges – Warrant for interchanges, design principles of interchange –level of service.Traffic
Control- Traffic signs, road markings, design of traffic signal and signal coordination. Traffic Control
aids - street furnitures, street lighting Road safety- Road safety engineering, importance of good
crash data, treating hazardous road locations (blackspots), intersection safety, delineation of rural
roads, roadside hazard management, road safety at road works, Traffic management plan (TMP.
Traffic management systems - methods and techniques for traffic management - role of ITS in traffic
management.
Text Book
Kadiyali L.R, “Traffic Engineering and Transportation Planning” Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2005.
Reference Books
1. Khanna SK and Justo CEG, “Highway Engineering”, Nem Chand & Bros, Roorkee, 2010.
2. Brase/Brase “Understandable Statistics 3rd edition”,D C Health and Company, Lexington,
Massachusetts,Toronko,1987.
3. Jason C.yu, Transportation Engineering: Introduction to Planning, Design and Operations,

Elsevier,1992.
4. Taylor M.A.P and Young W,Traffic Analysis-New Technology and New solutions, Hargreen
Publishing Company,1998.
5. Nicholas J. Garben and Lester A Hoel,”Traffic and Highway Engineering”, PWS Publication,1999.
6. Partha Chakroborty and Animesh Das,” Principle of Traffic Engineering”,Prentice Hall of India,New
Delhi,2003.
7. Flaherty,”Transportation Planning and Traffic Engineering”, Elesevier India Pvt Ltd.,2006.
8. Mike Slinn, Peter Guest and Paul Matthews “Traffic Engineering Design Principles and
Practice”,Elesevier, 2006.
9. http://www.nptel.ac.in/downloads/105101008/

Module No. Topic No.of
Lectures
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Significance and scope, Characteristics of Driver, the pedestrian, 2
the vehicle and road, skid resistance and braking efficiency
1.3 Components of traffic engineering – road, traffic and land use 2
characteristics
2.0 Traffic Surveys and Analysis
2.1 Surveys for Traffic Engineering, Speed studies 2
2.2 Volume and capacity Studies 1
2.3 Travel time and Delay Studies 1
2.4 Parking and pedestrian Studies 1
2.5 Accident Studies(concepts and problems) 1
3.0 Geometric Design of intersection
3.1 Conflict points at intersections 1
3.2 Principles and elements of intersection design 2
3.3 Classification of intersection – concepts of flow in at grade and 1
grade separated intersections
3.4 Rotary design 2
3.5 Warrant for interchanges, design principles of interchange – 2
capacity analysis level of service (concepts)
4.0 Traffic Control
4.1 Traffic signs, road markings – significance, classification and 2
purpose
4.2 Design of traffic signal and signal coordination. 2
4.4 Design for parking facilities, (concepts and problems). 2
4.5 Traffic control aids -Types of street furnitures 2
4.6 Street lighting – Purpose, importance 1
5.0 Road safety
5.1 Road safety engineering, crash data 2
5.2 Treating hazardous road locations 1
5.3 Intersection safety, delineation of rural roads, roadside hazard 2
management, road safety at road works
6.0 Traffic Management
6.1 Methods of traffic management 2
6.2 Role of ITS in traffic management 2
TOTAL HOURS 36
Course Designers:
1. Dr. R. Velkennedy rvkciv@tce.edu
14CEPK0 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
To impart the knowledge on the preparation of Environmental Management Plan and
to expose the students to the need, methodology, documentation and preparation of

Environmental Impact Assessment report .
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to,
Expected Expected
CO1. To understand the EIA process as it is Understand 70 A
used for planning, project evaluation
and regulatory enforcement
CO2. Assess the impacts and risks that will Apply 70 A

be caused by projects or industries and
the methods to overcome these
impacts
CO3. Adopt the methods and tools to predict Apply 70 A

the impact on Environment .
CO4. Prepare terms of reference for Apply 70 A

environmental impact and socio-
economic impact for any developmental
project
CO5. Prepare environmental management Apply 70 A

plan by considering environmental
aspects and impacts
CO6. Prepare Risk Mitigation plan by Apply 70 A

assessing the potential hazards for any
project

CO1 M - - - - M M - - - - - L L
CO2 S S M M - M S - - - - - M L
CO3 L L M M - L S - - - - - M L
CO4 M M L M - M S M S S - - L M
CO5 S S S S - S S M S S - M M M
CO6 S S S S - S S M S S - M M M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 40 40 40 40
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -

1. Discuss the role of Public Participation in Environmental Decision Making.

2. EIA is an effective management tool : comment
3. Explain the various methodologies adapted for prediction of impacts for
EIA report
1. Explain the legal framework for getting environment clearance for new projects.
2. Describe the procedure for conducting the public hearing as per EIA notification
2006.
3. Explain the legal framework for handling hazardous waste generated from any
industry
1. Prepare terms of reference for coal based Thermal Power Plant having a
capacity of 2x330 MW which is located at Nagapattinam district.
2. In Madurai it is propose to develop a CETP for 20 Electroplating units. Identify the
potential impacts of the project and prescribe suitable terms of reference for the
project.
3. It is proposed to construct a large hydro-electric power project at the foot hills of
Varusanaadu. Prepare terms of reference for the socio-economic impacts.
1. Pudur is a town located along the OMR road. It is proposed to construct 6000 No.
of residential houses in that area. Identify the potential impacts of the project and
suggest a management plan to mitigate them.
2. Sabarimalai is a pilgrimage town located in Kerala state. It is proposed to develop
a Greenfield airport project for the capacity to handle six new generation large
aircraft. Identify the potential impacts of the project and suggest a management
plan to mitigate them.
3. Prepare risk assessment report for a stand-alone distillery unit having a capacity
of 50 klpd. The raw material is sugarcane based molasses. Identify the potential
impacts and prepare mitigation plan for the same.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Basic fundamentals: Historical Development of Environmental Impact Assessment-EIA in
Project Cycle-Legal and Regulatory Aspects in India-Types and Limitations of EIA-Cross
Sectoral Issues and terms of references in EIA. Components of EIA environmental risk
assessment: EIA Process-Screening and Scoping-Public Participation in EIA-Mitigation.
Methodology : Methods for Environmental assessment-Matrices &Networks-Checklists-
Cost benefit analysis-Analysis of Alternative-Software Packages for EIA and Expert Systems
in EIA. Prediction and Assessment: Prediction tools for EIA-Mathematical modeling for
impact prediction-Assessment of Impacts on Air and Water-Assessment of Impacts on Soil
and Noise -Assessment of Impacts on Biological Community-Cumulative Impact
Assessment-Documentation of EIA Findings &Report Preparation. Socio-economic impact
assessment: Definition of Social Impact Assessment-Social Impact Assessment model and
the --planning process-Relationship between social impacts and change in community and
institutional arrangements-Individual and family level impacts -Communities in transition
environmental risk assessment framework. Environmental Management Plan:
Environmental Management Plan – Preparation and implementation and Rehabilitation
plans-Policy and guidelines for planning and monitoring programmes-Post Project Audit-
Ethical and Quality aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment. Case studies.
Text Books
1. Canter, L.W., Environmental Impact Assessment, McGraw Hill, New York, 1996.
Reference Books
2. Lawrence, D.P., Environmental Impact Assessment – Practical Solutions to
recurrent problems, Wiley-Interscience, New Jersey, 2003.
3. Petts, J., Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment, Vol., I and II,
Blackwell science, London, 1999.
4. World Bank – Source Book on EIA.
Lectures
No.
1.Basic Fundamentals
1.1 Historical Development of Environmental Impact 1

Assessment
1.2 EIA in Project Cycle 1
1.3 Legal and Regulatory Aspects in India –Recent 2

Amendments.
1.4 Types and Limitations of EIA 1
1.5 Cumulative impact assessment and strategic environmental 1

assessment.
2.Components of EIA
2.1 EIA Process 1
2.2 Screening and Scoping 1

2.3 Public Participation in EIA 2
2.4 Mitigation 1
3.Methodology
3.1 Methods for Environmental assessment 1
3.2 Matrices &Networks 1
3.3 Checklists 1
3.4 Cost benefit analysis and Analysis of Alternative 1
4. Prediction and Assessment

4.1 Prediction tools for EIA-RIAM 1
4.2 Mathematical modeling for impact prediction 1
4.3 Assessment of Impacts on Air and Water 1
4.4 Assessment of Impacts on Soil and Noise 1
4.5 Assessment of Impacts on Biological Community 1
4.6 Cumulative Impact Assessment 1
4.7 Documentation of EIA Findings &Report Preparation 1
5.Socio-Economic Impact Assessment and Risk Assessment

5.1 Definition of Social Impact Assessment 1
5.2 Social Impact Assessment model and the planning process 2
5.3 Environmental risk assessment framework 1
5.4 Design of risk management programs 1
6.Environmental Management Plan
6.1 Environmental Management Plan – Preparation and 1

implementation
6.2 Mitigation and Rehabilitation plans 1
6.3 Policy and guidelines for planning and monitoring 1

programmes
6.4 Post Project Audit and Environmental audit. 1
6.5 Ethical and Quality aspects of Environmental Impact 1

Assessment—case studies
7.Case studies
7.1 Case studies on Building construction projects and area 2

development project
7.2 Case studies on infrastructure project 2
TOTAL 36
Course Designers
Dr. S. Chandran schandran@tce.edu
Mr. V. Ravi Sankar environmentengr@tce.edu

14CEPL0 BRIDGE ENGINEERING
PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
Bridge is a structure built to span physical obstacles without closing the way underneath
such as a body of water, valley, or road, for the purpose of providing passage over the
obstacle. There are many different designs that each serve a particular purpose and apply to
different situations. Designs of bridges vary depending on the function of the bridge, the
nature of the terrain where the bridge is constructed and anchored, the material used to
make it, and the funds available to build it. This course offers the design of bridges such as
RCC bridges, design principles of steel and prestressed concrete bridges, design principles
of substructure and design of different types of bearings as per IRC loadings standards,
Indian Railway standards bridge rules and MOST codes. It aims at determination of safe as
well as economical section using different kinds of material used in construction and
maintenance.
Prerequisite
Strength of Materials 14CE220 Mechanics of Solids 14CE321, Structural Analysis 14CE420,
Design of RCC 14CE610, Design of Steel Structures 14CE670 and Prestressed Concrete
14CEPF0
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Attainment
Level(%) Proficiency
Level
(grade)
Identify the type of bridge and its basic

CO1 Understand
requirements for particular location
Design the culverts and deck slab

CO2 Create
bridges
CO3 Design the long span bridges Create
Demonstrate the design principles of

CO4 Apply
steel bridges
Explain the design principles of

CO5 Apply
prestressed concrete bridges
CO6 Design the bridge bearings and piers Create

CO13. L L L L L L L L L L L L
CO14. S S S S M S S S S S S S
CO4. S M M M S S S S S S S S
CO5. S M M M S S S S S S S S
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 40 40 40 40
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create 40 40 40 40

1. Define linear waterway.

2. State the minimum width of carriage way for single lane traffic?
3. Explain in detail the points to be considered while selecting an ideal bridge site?
1. Draw a neat sketch of a bridge and mark all its components, also explain the
importance of each component.
2. List out the various components of slab culvert.
3. Design a deck slab bridge for the following data:
Clear distance between abutments: 7m
Road : NH (Two Lane)
Foot path : 1m on either side
Width of bearing : 400 mm
Wearing coat : 80mm average
Loading : IRC Class AA (Tracked)
Materials : M30 concrete and Fe 415 Steel
1. Draw the position of IRC class ‘AA’ Tracked vehicle wheel load for getting maximum
bending moment.
2. Design the articulation of balanced cantilever bridge of span 70 m, carriage way two
lanes, loading class 70R tracked vehicle, Materials: M25 grade concrete and Fe415
steels are used.
3. List any two advantages of balanced cantilever bridge.
1. Draw the neat of truss bridge.

2. Explain the loads considered in Railway bridges.
3. What are the factors to be considered in selecting paint for steel bridge?
1. Give the advantages of prestressed concrete bridges.

2. Define the terms: Maximum and Minimum prestressing forces.
3. Explain in detail in finding the eccentricity of cables in prestressed concrete bridges.
1. Write the equation for calculating the scour depth for natural streams in alluvial soil.
2. List out the various classification of a fixed bearings.
3. Design a R.C rocker bearing to transmit a support reaction of 1000 kN.permissible
bearing stress in concrete is 8 Mpa. Use M30 grade concrete and Fe 415 grade steel.
4. Draw typical sketch of different types of pier.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction: Classification of bridges, investigations and planning, linear water way,
economic span length- IRC specifications for road bridges -standard live loads, other forces
acting on bridges - Indian Railway codal provisions for broad gauge single line and double
line, general design considerations Design of culverts and deck slab bridges: General
aspects - design of slab culvert - design of pipe culvert- slab design as effective width
analysis - design of deck slab bridges for IRC loadings Long Span Girder Bridges: Design
principles of box girder bridges- design of balanced cantilever bridges- cantilever portion –
articulation - simply supported portion Steel bridges: Types of steel bridges - design
principles of lattice girder bridges - cable stayed bridge - components of suspension bridge -
design of bridge bracings Prestressed concrete bridges: Concept, analysis and systems -
analysis and design principles of I girders - analysis and design principles of box type girder
- launching and erection details with case studies - segmental construction principles
Bearings and substructures for bridges: Types of bearings, forces on bearings, basis for
selection of bearings - design of steel rocker bearing - design of roller bearing - Types of
bridge foundation - design of piers - design principles of abutments and wing walls - piles
and wells - general features - maintenance and inspection of bridges.
Text Book
1. Krishna Raju. N. “Design of Bridges”, 4th Edition, Oxford & IBH, New Delhi 2010.
2. Johnson Victor.D, “Essentials of Bridge Engineering”, 6th Edition, Oxford & IBH
Publishers Co. Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi 1999.
3. Ponnuswamy.S., “Bridge Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New
Delhi, India 2007
Reference Books
1. Aswanin.Mc, Vazarani.V.N and Ratwani.MM, “Design of Concrete Bridges”, 2nd Edition,
Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, India, 2004.
2. Jagadeesh.F.R., Jay Ram.M.A, “Design of Bridge Structures”, 2nd Edition, Eastern
Economy Edition, New Delhi, India, 2009.
3. Raina,Concrete.V. K. “Bridge Design and Practice”, 3rd Edition, Shroff Publishers, India
2010
4. Rowe, R. E.,” Concrete Bridge Design”, C.R. Books Ltd. London 2002.
List of National and International Standards

1. IRC: 78, “Standard specifications & Code of practice for Road Bridges”.
a. Section VII-Foundation and Substructures.
2. IRC: 6-2000, “ Standard specifications & Code of practice for Road Bridges”.
a. Section II-Loads and Stresses.
3. IRC: 21-2000, “ Standard specifications & Code of practice for Road Bridges”.
a. Section III-Cement Concrete (Plain and Reinforced).
4. IRC: 83 Part II-1987, “Standard specifications & Code of practice for Road Bridges”.
a. Section : 9 Bearing, Part II – Elastomeric Bearings.
5. IRC: 45-1972, “ Recommendations for Estimating the resistance of soil below the
maximum scour level in the Design of Well foundations of Bridges.
6. IRC: 24-2000 “Standard specifications & code of practice for steel bridges”.
7. IRC: 87-1984, “Guidelines for the Design and Erection of False work for Road
Bridges.
8. IS 1343:1980 Code of Practice for Pre Stressed Concrete
9. IRS: 1 1977, Bridge rules.
10. IRS: 2, “Code of practice for plain, reinforced and prestressed concrete for general
bridge construction.
11. MOST standard plans for 3.0m to 10m span reinforced cement concrete solid slab
superstructure with and without foot paths for highways, (1991).
12. MOST standard plans for highways bridges RCC.T-Beams and slab superstructure –
span from 10m to 24m width.
13. MOST standard plans for highway bridges PSC girder and RC slab composite
superstructure for 30m span with and without foot paths, 35m span with footpaths,
40m span without foot paths, 1992.
14. MOST standard drawings for road bridges- RCC solid slab superstructure (15 and
30 SKEW) span 4m to 10m (with and without foot paths), 1992.
15. MOST standard drawing for road bridges-RCC solid slab superstructure
(22.5SKEW) span 4m to 10m (with and without foot paths), 1996.
16. IS 2911, 1980 code of practice for pile foundation.

No. Lectures
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Classification of bridges, investigations and planning, linear water 1

way, economic span length
1.2 IRC specifications for road bridges - standard live loads, other forces 1
acting on bridges
1.3 Indian Railway codal provisions for broad gauge single line and 1
double line, general design considerations
2.0 Design of culverts and deck slab bridges

2.1 General aspects 1
2.2 Design of slab culvert 2
2.3 Design of pipe culvert 2
Design of deck slab bridges
2.4 Slab design as Effective width analysis 2
2.5 Design of deck slab bridges for IRC loadings 2
3.0 Long Span Girder Bridges
3.1 Design principles of box girder bridges 1
3.2 Design of balanced cantilever bridges
3.2.1 Design of cantilever portion 2
3.2.2 Design of articulation 2
3.2.3 Design of simply supported portion 1
4.0 Steel bridges
4.1 Types of steel bridges 1
4.2 Design principles of Lattice girder bridges 1
4.3 Design principles of cable stayed bridge 1
4.4 Components of suspension bridge 1
4.5 Design principles of bridge bracings 2
5.0 Prestressed concrete bridges
5.1 Concept, analysis and systems 1
5.2 Analysis and design principles of I girders 1
5.3 Analysis and design principles of box type girder 1
5.4 Launching and erection details with case studies 1
5.5 Segmental construction principles 1
6.0 Bearings and Substructures for bridges
6.1 General features - Types of bearings, Forces on bearings, Basis for 1

selection of bearings
6.2 Design of steel rocker bearing 1
6.3 Design of roller bearing 1
Substructures for bridges

6.4 Types of bridge foundation 1
6.5 Design of piers 2
6.6 Design principles of abutments and wing walls 1
6.7 Design principles of piles and wells 1
6.8 Maintenance and inspection of bridges 1
TOTAL 36
Course Designers:
1. Dr. K.Sudalaimani ksudalaimani@tce.edu
2. Ms.M.Vigneshwari mvigneshwari@tce.edu
14CEPM0 EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
One of the major destructive forces that damage the Infra structure is earthquake.
Therefore the structures in earthquake prone areas need to be designed to resist this
unpredictable natural force. Earthquake-resistant design of structures has grown into a true
multi disciplinary field of engineering wherein many exciting developments are possible in
the near future. This subject introduces the concepts of seismic-resistant design and
provides minimum standards for use in building design to maintain public safety in an
extreme earthquake. Further methods of analysis and determinant internal forces in
structural members due to earthquake the approximate design, detailing are introduced
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Expected Expected
CO1 Explain the seismicity in the world, both Understand 70 A
inter-plate and intra-plate.
CO2 Identify hazards to buildings caused by Apply 70 A
earthquakes.
CO3 Interpret response spectra presented in Apply 70 A
different formats, including the
Acceleration-Displacement Response
Spectrum (ADRS) diagram
CO4 Explain the principle of seismic Understand 70 A
measuring instruments
CO5 Apply the principle of vibration to build Apply 70 A
structures
CO6 Compute the detailing of reinforcement Apply 70 A
in beams, columns and beam column
joints
CO15. - - - - - L - - - L L - - L
CO16. - - - - - S - - - L - - - M
CO3. - M - - - L - - - L - - L L
CO4. L L - - - - - - - L - - L L
CO5. L M - - - M - - - L L - L L
CO6. L L - - - M - - - L L - L L
Assessment Pattern
S.No. Bloom’s Test 1 Test 2 End semester

1 Remember 20 20 20
2 Understand 20 20 20
3 Apply 60 60 60
4 Analyse 0 0 0
5 Evaluate 0 0 0
6 Create 0 0 0
Course Level Learning Objectives
Course Outcome (CO1)
1. Define centre of mass and Centre of rigidity.

2. What is meant by ‘torsional effect’ on buildings?
3. What is meant by Soil friction?
4. Write short notes on passive earth pressure.
5. Define modal mass and modal participation factor.
1. Differentiate foreshocks and aftershocks.

2. Define liquefaction.
3. Write short notes on soil-structure interaction
4. What are the types of bands normally used for masonry structures?
5. Define ductility.
1. An industrial multi-storeyed building 25m high is to be designed in Assam.

Compute the a. Seismic force by static method b. Modal mass and modal
participation factors for the following details. (T=0.820)
 Live load 250kg/m2
 Beam size 25 x 35 mm
 Column size 30 x 40mm
 Slab thickness 18mm
 Wall thickness 15mm
1. Analyze a three storied RC building by static method and also determine modal
mass and modal participation factor as per IS 1893 (PART 1): 2002 for the
following data.
Seismic zone = IV
Floor height = 4.0m
Length of building = 10m
Infill wall = 250mm thick in longitudinal and 150mmmm in transverse direction.
Imposed load = 3.5 kN/m2
Size of columns = 250mm x 400mm.
Size of beams = 300mm x 400mm in longitudinal and 300mm x 350mm in

transverse direction
Depth of slab = 120mm .
2. Design for lintel and Roof band of a single room building of size 6.m x 4m. The
walls are 200mm thick in modular bricks built in 1:5 cement sand mortar. The
height of building up to lintel level is 3m and the vertical distance between the
roof band and lintel band is 1.5m.The roof band weighs 750 kg/ m 2. The bands
are required for a design earthquake coefficient of 0.12. Weight of wall is 450 kg/
m2 .Weight of masonry is 1900 kg/ m2.
Concept Map
S.NO TOPICS PERIODS
1 Earthquake Causes and basics of vibration
1.1 Earthquake causes and its effect on built structures 1

1.2 EQ resistant provisions in masonry building 1
1.3 Single degree freedom system 1
1.4 Free and forced vibration (Damped and Undamped). 1
1.5 Forced vibration due to periodic loading 1
1.6 Forced vibration using duhamel integral and laplace transform 1
1.7 Multi degree of freedom system 1
2 Response spectrum and dynamic analysis
2.1 Response of structure subjected to Random vibrations 1
2.2 Problems on Tripartite response spectrum 1
2.3 Seismic coefficient method and Dynamic analysis 3
2.4 Problems on Stresses in masonry 2
2.5 Ductile detailing of reinforced concrete beams , Columns & shear wall 1
2.6 Design problems on ductile detailing 1
2.7 Design of non structural members 1
2.8 Problems on Torsionl Provisions, Seismic forces on Cantilever 2
3 Earthquake Hazard Assessment Procedure
3.1 Seismic failure of RC and masonry failure 1
3.2 DSHA - Case studies PSHA - completeness analysis (step method), 1
3.3 seismic hazard curves,UHRS,GRA, 1
3.4 Rapid Visual Screening method ,Push Over Analysis 1
3.5 Estimation of Dynamic soil properties 2
3.6 Field Testing -Seismic cross hole ,refraction,MASW test 2
3.7 Problems on Liquefaction evaluation cyclic stress approach 1
3.8 Seed and Idriss method 1
4 Seismic measuring instruments
4.1 Principle of seismic instruments 1
4.2 Transducers for velocity and acceleration measurements 1
4.3 Inductive Transducer LVDT 1
4.4 Cathode Ray Oscilloscope,frequency measuring instruments 2

4.5 XY Plotter- Strip Chart recorder 1
4.6 Seismic rosette analysis 1
Total 36
Syllabus
Earthquake Causes and basics of vibration-Earthquake causes and its effect on built
structures-EQ resistant provisions in masonry building-Single degree freedom system-Free
and forced vibration-Forced vibration using duhamel integral and laplace transform-Multi
degree of freedom systemResponse spectrum and dynamic analysis-Response of
structure subjected to Random vibrations-Problems on Tripartite response spectrum-Seismic
coefficient method and Dynamic analysis-Ductile detailing of reinforced concrete beams ,
Columns & shear wall-Design problems on ductile detailing-Design of non structural
members-Problems on Torsionl Provisions, Seismic forces on CantileverEarthquake
Hazard Assessment Procedure-Seismic failure of RC and masonry failure-DSHA - Case
studies PSHA - completeness analysis-Rapid Visual Screening method ,Push Over
Analysis-Estimation of Dynamic soil properties-Field Testing -Seismic cross hole
,refraction,MASW test-Seed and Idriss methodSeismic measuring instruments-Principle of
seismic instruments-Transducers for velocity and acceleration measurements-Inductive
Transducer LVDT-Cathode Ray Oscilloscope,frequency measuring instruments-XY Plotter-
Strip Chart recorder
Reference Books:
1. PankajAgarwal, Manish Shrikhande , “Earthquake resistant design of structures”,

Prentice Hall, India, 2006.
2. James Ambrose and DemitryVergun, “Earthquake retaining structures”, Johnwilley&
sons 2001.
3. Hemant Kumar Sharma, &GiridharilalAgarwal, “Earthquake Resistant Building
construction”, Vedha publications New Delhi. 2001.
4. Polyahov S., “Design of Earthquake Resistant Structures”, John willey& sons, 1993.
5. Green, “Earthquake Resistant Building Design”,Johnwilley& sons
6. Alan Williams, Ph.D. Williams Alan, “Siesmic Design of Buildings and Bridges: For
Civil and Structural Engineers”.
7. Website- www.nicee.org
IS Codes:
1. IS: 13920:1993, “Code of Practice for ductile detailing of Reinforce Concrete-

Structures subjected to Seismic forces”,
2. IS 4326:1993 Code of Practice for “Earthquake Resistant Design and
Construction of Buildings.
3. IS: 1893: 2000 – Indian Standard Criteria for Earthquake Resistant Design of
Structures, Bureau of Indian Standards, New Delhi.
4. IS: 13828: 1993 – Improving Earthquake Resistance of Low Strength Masonry
Buildings.
5. IS: 13827: 1993. - Improving Earthquake Resistance of Earthen Buildings,1993.
Course Designers:
Dr.R.Ponnudurai rpdciv@tce.edu
14CEPN0 DISASTER MITIGATION AND Category L T P Credit
PE 3 0 0 3
MANAGEMENT
Preamble
This course deals with the various disasters and to expose the students about the measures,
its effect against built structures, and Hazard Assessment procedure in India. This course
also deals with the methods of mitigating various hazards such that their impact on
communities is reduced.
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Expected Expected
level (%) level
(grade)
CO1 Understand the various types of Understand 70 A

disaster viz Hydrological, Coastal and
Marine Disasters, Atmospheric
Disasters, Geological, Mass
Movement and Land Disasters, Wind
and Water Driven Disasters
CO2 Identify the potential deficiencies of Understand 70 A

existing buildings for Earthquake
disaster and suggest suitable remedial
measures.
CO3 Derive the guide lines for the Apply 70 A

precautionary measures and
rehabilitation measures for Earthquake
disaster.
CO4 Derive the protection measures Apply 70 A

against floods, cyclone, land slides
CO5 Understand the effects of disasters on Understand 70 A

built structures
CO6 Understand the hazard Assessment Understand 70 A

procedure

CO1 M - - L - - - - - - - - L -
CO2 M M L L - M - - - - - - L -
CO3 S M S M - L - M - - - - M L
CO4 S M S M - L - M - - - - M L
CO5 L L - L - - - - - - - - L -
CO6 L - - - - - - - - - - - L -
Assessment Pattern

1 Remember 20 20 20
3 Apply 0 20 20
4 Analyse 0 0 0
5 Evaluate 0 0 0
6 Create 0 0 0
1. What is Richter Magnitude?

2. What is Peak ground Acceleration?
3. What is meant by hazard mitigation?
4. What is a Local Hazard Mitigation Plan?
1. List the different types of droughts and highlight its various causes.
2. Define community Contingency Plan
3. How does the site soil affect the EQ response of structures?
4. Explain the classification and causes of landslides indicating the places where they
could occur in India.
1. Explain the plan, Mass and Geometric irregularities in the RC buildings. How these
irregularities adversely affect the performance of the RC buildings during Earthquake
2. Discuss the various types of natural disasters and highlight the specific efforts to
mitigate disasters in India
1. Describe various types of hazards and impacts associated with earthquakes and
highlight the lessons learnt
2. Briefly explain the components of follow-up activities in psychological rehabilitation of
disaster affected people.
1. If you were the relief commissioner of the state of Assam which is affected by floods
every year list out five departments that you need to contact.
2. Identify four different task forces and list out two responsibilities of each of the task
forces
3. Do you think disaster risk can be reduced through community participation? Discuss
1. Which areas are more prone to heat and cold waves in India? Discuss the preventive
and preparedness measures that are mostly adopted for protection from heat and
cold waves
2. Explain the role of central Government in responding to disasters
3. Describe suitable mitigation and preparedness measures that the community should
take in advance to guard a EQ disaster occurring again.
Concept Map
Module No. of
Topics
No. Lectures
1 Introduction - Disaster
1.1 Over view of Disaster Management 1
2 Land slide
2.1 Introduction ,Causes,types,preparation of hazard zonation map 1
2.2 Liquefaction -remedial options 1
2.3 Liquefaction related phenomena 1
2.4 Evaluation of Liquefaction hazards and Liquefaction resistance 1
2.5 Slope failures 1
3 Floods
3.1 Introduction- Causes -Rescue and relief Management 1
Effects on buildings, protection measures from damage to

3.2 buildings 1
3.3 Case studies 1

4 Earthquake Disaster
4.1 Causes of Earthquakes ,Earthquake Size Seismic waves 1
4.2 Earthquake resistant measures in RC and Masonry buildings 1
4.3 Seismic response of free and forced damped vibration 1
5 Tropical cyclones
5.1 Introduction , Effects on buildings, Warning systems in India 1
5.2 Damaging effects of cyclone 1
5.3 Design procedure for wind resistant buildings 1
6 Tsunami
6.1 Tsunami causes ,Warning systems DART floating bouys 1
Tsunami impact on coastal lines Effects of Tsunami on built

6.2 structures 1
7 Man made Disaster - Industrial accident case study 1
7.1 NBC,Radioactivity,Alpha ,Beta , Gamma decay,fission and fusion 1
Chemical warfare agents,universal classification of hazard

substances and explosives,decontamination procedure - BW
7.2 agents -Emergency Medical responder,Vital signs (RPSPBP) 2
7.3 Classification of Hazardous chemicals 1
8 CSSR -Collapsed Structure & Rescue operations
8.1 Search and rescue and evacuation methods 1
8.2 Fire safety technique classification Extiguishers 1
Life saving skills - Body mechanics - CPR - Burn and its

8.3 classification 1
9 Role and responsibility of NDRF 1
9.1 Skill variety of NDRF Battalions-MFR-FRRM,CBRN disasters 1
9.2 START system,TRIAGE,FBAO(Foreign body airway Obstruction 1
9.3 Community training 1
10 Hazard Assessment Procedure
10.1 DSHA - Case studies 1
10.2 PSHA - completeness analysis (step method), 1

10.4 RVS,Push Over Analysis 1
10.5 Policy and procedures 1
10.6 Role of Local and state bodies,Alternate communication systems 1
10.7 Community planning Community Contingency plan 1
TOTAL 36
Syllabus
Introduction -Introduction-Difference between hazards and disaster –Types of disasters-

Phases of disaster Management -Hazards -Classification of Hazards - Hazards affecting
buildings - Building safety against hazards –Floods – Cyclone – Landslides –Tsunami Fire
hazards Earthquake Disaster - Earthquake Hazard Map -Causes of Earthquakes -
Classification of Earthquakes - -Seismic waves -Energy release - Inertia forces, Natural
period -Resonance, Damping -Seismic response of free vibration -Seismic response of
damped vibration -Performance of ground and buildings in past Earthquakes-Earthquake
resistant measures in RC and Masonry buildings -Potential deficiencies of RC and Masonry
buildings Landslides – Landslide zoning map - Causes –Protection measures Floods –
Flood zone map - Effects on buildings – protection measures from damage to buildings –
Mitigation Strategies
Tropical cyclones - Effects on buildings – protection measures from damage to buildings

Tsunami - Tsunami magnitude and intensity -Tsunami wave characteristics -Peculiarities of
tsunami deposits -Tsunami impact on coastal lines -Effects of Tsunami on built structures –
Mitigation Management Nuclear disaster – chemical and industrial accidents - Mitigation
strategies Hazard Assessment - Vulnerability Assessment and seismic strengthening of
buildings -Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings procedure -Hazard Assessment-Visual
Inspection and Study of Available Documents-Detailed In - situ Investigation Planning and
Interpretation of Results-Foundation Capability -Non- structural Components -Seismic
Strengthening of Buildings-Repairs Restoration Strengthening of Existing Buildings
Strengthening Materials-Retrofitting of Load Bearing Wall Buildings Retrofitting of RC
Buildings- Alternative communication systems during disaster- Modes of emergency
communications-Satellite based communication systems -Radio communications Role of
local and state bodiesNatioanallevel,State level , district level -Community contingency
plan –Risk Management - Vulnerabilty mapping.
Reference Books:
1. Ray.N.Glough, Joseph Penzein, (1996), “Dynamics of Structures”, McGraw Hill

International Ltd.
2. Jaikrishna & A.R.Chandrasekaran, (1996) “Elements of Earthquake Engineering”,
SaritaPrakashan, Meerut.
3. Berg.GV (1982), “Seismic Design codes and procedures”, EERI, CA.
4. Booth, Edmund (1994), “Concrete Structures in earthquake regions; Design and
Analysis”, Longman.
5. Dowrick. D.J (1987), “Earthquake resistant design for Engineers and Architects”,John
Wiley & Sons, Second Edition.
6. G.K. Ghosh(1993) “Disaster Management” A.P.H. Publishing Corporation,New Delhi
7. R.B. Singh (1992)“Disaster Management” Rawat Publications,New Delhi
8. Ayaz Ahmad(1990) Disaster Management: Through the New Millennium By
Anmol Publications, New Delhi
9. Goel, S. L.(1991) “Encyclopaedia of Disaster Management” Deep & Deep
Publications Pvt Ltd,New Delhi
IS Codes:
1. IS: 4326-1984, “Indian Std Code of practice for Earthquake Resistant Design and
Construction of Buildings”.
2. IS: 1893 (Part I)-2002 “Code of practice for Earthquake Resistant Design of
Structures
Course Designers:
BUILDING PLANNING AND Category L T P Credit
14CEPP0 SERVICES PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course work imparts knowledge required for understanding the general
principles of building planning and services with the help of relevant codes, manuals
and guidelines.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
CO1 Understand the general planning and Apply 70 A
development control rules for different
types of buildings
CO2 Apply the relevant codes and manuals for Apply 70 A
the design of building services
CO3 Apply the principles of electrical and Apply 70 A
lighting services for different uses in
buildings
CO4 Apply the principles of planning ser vices Apply 70 A
for domestic and industrial needs
CO5 Plan and design the requirements for Apply 70 A
HVAC system ,firefighting and other
necessary services for various types of
buildings
CO6 Incorporate the integrated planning and Apply 70 A
designing of necessary building services
for better usage of building
CO17. L L - - - M M S L L - - L M
CO18. L L - - - M M M M L - L L M
CO3 M M S L - M M M L M - L M M
CO6 M S S S - M M M M M - M M M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 30 30 30 40
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -

1. List the types of land use according to Building Development Control Rules
2. Discuss the regulations with respect to fire safety in buildings
3. Discuss the planning considerations to be made in buildings based on codal
provisions on fire safety

1. Explain the need and details of earthing to a building as per IS specifications
2. Specify the minimum levels of illumination for different buildings as per NBC
3. Discuss the various water conservation measures applied to an Educational
Institute with hostel facility?

1. Assume an IT building is to be constructed in a metropolitan area of 20,000
sq.m. The width of road in front is 15 m. Plan the building according to F.S.I
and height restrictions. Justify your recommendations
2. Select a suitable wiring system for a building having a connected load of
500kW. Make suitable assumptions. Justify your selection
3. Suggest suitable fire fighting installations needed for a commercial complex
building of 4 floors

3. Plan and draw an electrical layout for a residential building considering the
essential electrical points in various rooms
Concept Map
Syllabus
General Planning:– classifications of buildings, Planning permissions, permitted
activity, Area and height limitations, Community open spaces and amenities .- Green
buildings- Intelligent buildings Electrical Systems and Installations: Basics of
electricity – Single and three phase supply- Protective devices in electrical
installation – types of earthing , Planning electrical wiring for building- Electrical
layout for residential buildings Lighting services: Classification of Lighting, -Energy
conservation in lighting- Minimum level of illumination required for different types of
buildings. HVAC - Behavior of Heat Propagation, General methods of Thermal
Insulation- Basic principles of Ventilation-Systems of ventilation, Basic principles and
essentials of Air Conditioning Firefighting services: Classification of buildings
based on occupancy- fire fighting protection and fire resistance rating ,planning
considerations in building for Fire protection-fire detection and fire fighting
installation in buildings.. Miscellaneous: Building safety and security systems -
Elevators and Escalators their standards and uses - Acoustic services - Necessity of
integrated planning and designing of different services in buildings.
Text Book
1. National Building Code of India -2005
Reference Book
1. Development Control Rules by Chennai Metropolitan Development Agency -
2006
2. Energy Conservation Building Code – 2007
3. CPHEEO Manual on Sewerage and sewage treatment systems – 2013
4. Manual for environmental clearance for large construction projects – by
Ministry of environment , forest and climate change.

Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1.0 General Planning
1.1 Classification of buildings, importance of building services 1
1.2 Planning Permission- Development Control Rules, land use 2
classifications and permitted activity
1.3 Area, height limitations and parking requirements 1
1.4 Community open spaces and amenities - Provisions for 2
physically challenged people
1.5 Green buildings –Necessity and Green Rating systems 1
1.6 Intelligent buildings concepts and Building management 1
systems.
2.0 Electrical Systems and Installations
2.1 Basics of electricity - Single and three phase supply 1
2.2 Protective devices in electrical installation 2
2.3 Types of earthing - ISI specifications and NBC 2
recommendations
2.4 Wiring systems and their choice 1
2.5 Planning electrical wiring for building - Main and Distribution 1
boards and energy ratings for appliances.
2.6 Electrical layout for residential buildings 1
3.0 Lighting services
3.1 Classification of Lighting, Need for artificial Lighting 1
3.2 Energy conservation in lighting - Energy efficient luminaries 1
and light sources
3.3 Minimum level of illumination required for different types of 2
building- lighting design
4.0 Heat, Ventilation and Air Conditioning services
4.1 Behavior of Heat Propagation – Thermal Insulating materials 1
and Coefficient of Thermal Conductivity
4.2 General methods of Thermal Insulation – Roofs, exposed 1
walls
4.3 Basic principles of Ventilation – Definition and Necessity 1
4.4 Systems of Ventilation 1
4.5 Basic principles of Air Conditioning – Types and Systems of 1
ducting
4.6 Essentials of Air conditioning systems 1
5.0 Firefighting services
5.1 Classification of Building based on occupancy - Causes of 1
Fire
5.2 Fire fighting protection and Fire resistance rating 1
5.3 Planning considerations in building for fire protection 1
5.4 Fire detection and fire fighting installations in buildings. 2
6.0 Miscellaneous
6.1 Building safety and security systems 1
6.2 Elevators and Escalators their standards and uses. 1
6.3 Acoustic services and 1
6.4 Necessity of integrated planning and designing of different 2
services in buildings.
TOTAL 36
Course designers
1. V. Ravisankar environmentengr@tce.edu
2. D. Rajkumar rajkumarcivil@tce.edu
14CEPQ0 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course imparts knowledge on Construction Management principles needed for execution of
projects effectively and efficiently.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
CO1 Enumerate the importance for management in Apply 75 A
construction industry with knowledge in sanctioning and
planning of resources in projects
CO2 Apply knowledge of management principles in Understand 75 A
planning of resources
CO3 Enumerate the procedures involved in execution of Understand 75 A
construction works with various tendering and
contracting systems
CO4 Identify and explain the process involved in Understand 75 A
measurement of construction works and maintenance of
accounts
CO5 Identify and specify the process involved in Apply 75 A
maintenance and management of stores in construction
projects
CO6 Apply the concepts of Gantt charts and network Apply 75 A
techniques in analyzing projects
CO19. L L - - - M M S - - - S L L
CO20. L M - - - M - S - - - M L M
CO3. M L - - - - - S - - - S L M
CO4. L L - - - - - M - - - M M M
CO5. S M M M M - - S - - - L L M
CO6. S M M M M - - S - - L M M M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 30 40 40 50
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -
74. Write the need and importance of managing projects in construction sector
75. Discuss the stages involved in execution of projects
76. As a project manager of a construction industry identify and discuss the
functions you would exercise for successful completion of projects
77. Differentiate between the terms tenders and contracts

78. A mega project is proposed to be constructed worth Rs.100 crores. Suggest a
suitable method of contracting of the same discussing its salient features.
Justify your selection
79. Discuss the various deposits collected from a contractor while entering into
agreement
80. Enumerate the various methods of measurement of works

81. Write the meaning of M- book discussing its salient features
82. List the types of bills used for payment of works done
1. Identify the mode of classification of stores

2. Discuss the procedure for maintenance of tools and plants
3. During verification of stock in departments, discuss the cases likely to be
encountered mentioning handling procedure
1. A project consists of 12 activities. The time required for each activity is given in the table
below. Use the following logical relationships and draw a network diagram for the project
and determine the critical path and duration required for completion of the project.
- Activity A,D and H can be performed concurrently and represent the start of the project
- B succeeds A; C and G follow H; D,C and B precede F; L follows A; M comes after G
- K is preceded by L; X cannot start until K, F and M are completed
- Z succeeds G; X and Z are last operations
Activity A B C D F G H K L M X Z
Duration (days) 4 6 4 4 6 3 3 4 8 3 2 2
2. Write the meaning of bar charts? Discuss its limitations and methods to overcome the same
3. Conduct CPM analysis for the project using the given data and determine:
i) ES, EF, LS & LF for the activities

ii) Critical path and critical activities
iii) Total and free floats for the activities
iv) Draw the square network
Act 10- 10- 20- 20- 30- 30- 40- 50- 50- 60- 70-
20 30 50 70 40 60 50 60 70 70 80
(i-j)
Duration 20 24 16 24 12 10 16 16 20 12 14
(days)
Concept Map
Syllabus
Construction Management – General Principles – need, importance, objectives & functions,
Classification & stages involved in construction projects – Administrative approval – Technical and
budget sanctions. – Construction team- preliminary planning of schemes – preliminary estimate-
Construction planning- Materials, equipments and labour management. Execution of works:
Methods -Departmental labour- Muster Roll system and Casual Labour system – Tender & tender
document, e-tendering and contractual procedures- definition of contracts –Types of Contract, legal
implications –Deposits – Earnest Money Deposit and Security Deposit – Penalties and Arbitration.
Concept of Public Private Partnership - BOT, BOO, BOOT, BOLT. Measurement of Works – M-book,
Types of measurements – original, pre and check measurement. Maintenance of Accounts – Spread
sheets-Types of bills and payment – completion reports and completion certificates. Stores:
Classification and Codification systems - Materials, tool & plants – indenting, hiring procedures,
inspection and maintenance – Stock verification procedures. Analysis of projects: Work Breakdown
Structure, Bar-chart – concept and procedure- limitations – advantages of network analysis – CPM
and PERT- concepts and procedure. Introduction to management software.
Text Book
3. S. Sangareddi and P.L. Meiyappan, “Construction Management”, Kumaran Publications,
Coimbatore, 2000
Reference Books
1. B.C. Punmia and K.K. Khandelwal, “Project Planning and Control with PERT/CPM”, Laxmi
publications, New Delhi, 2000
2. B.L. Gupta and Amit Gupta, “Construction Planning and Accounts”, Standard Publishers
Distributors, Delhi, 1997
3. P.S. Gahlot and B.M. Dhir, “Construction Planning and Management”, New Age International
Limited, Publishers, 1996
4. V.N. Vazirani and S.P. Chandola, “Construction Management and Accounts”, Khanna
Publishers, New Delhi, 1986

Lectures
No.
1.0 Construction Management
1.1 Need, Scope and Objectives of Construction Management- Construction 2

resources - Construction Team
1.2 Functions of construction management, Types and Stages in Construction 2
1.3 Conditions for execution of works - Administrative Approval, Technical 2

Sanction and Budget sanctions of projects
2.0 Planning
2.1 Definition, need. Factors in Preliminary planning of schemes, preliminary 2

estimate
2.2 Planning for Materials, Equipments and Labour in projects 2
3.0 Execution of works
3.1 Departmental System - Muster Roll system and Casual Labour Roll system – 2
situations of use
3.2 Contractual System - need 2
3.3 Tenders & Tender documents – e-tendering process 2
3.4 Contract - contract types and contractual procedures- legal implications. 2

Concept of Public Private Partnership - BOT, BOO, BOOT, BOLT
3.5 Deposits – Earnest Money Deposit and Security Deposit – Penalties and 2
Arbitration
4.0 Measurement of Works
4.1 Measurement of Works- M-book, Types of measurements – original, pre 2

and check measurement – Spread sheets
4.2 Types of Bills and payments– completion reports and certificates 2
5.0 Stores
5.1 Classification and Codification systems - Materials, tool & plants –inspection 2
and maintenance.
5.2 Indenting, hiring procedures- Stock verification procedures 2
6.0 Methods of Analyzing Projects
6.1 Origin, concept and procedure- limitations, Work breakdown Structure of 2

projects -Problems in bar charts
6.2 CPM analysis of projects - Drawing of network diagrams using Fulkerson’s 3

rules- Problems in drawing of network diagrams and CPM
6.3 Advantages of network analysis, Comparison between PERT and CPM PERT– 3
concept and procedure, associated probability – problems. Introduction to
software
Total Hours 36
Course Designers:
1. Dr.G.Chitra gcciv@tce.edu
2. Mr. R. Jegan rjnciv@tce.edu
14CEPR0 FRACTURE MECHANICS PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
The conventional design of a structure does not take in to account flaws or cracks in the materials,
which largely affect the residual strength of a structure. The aim of this course is to predict the crack
front growth and instability under elastic and elasto plastic conditions and to compute the stress
intensity factors and stain energy release rate .This course is designed to show how these concepts
can be integrated and applied to practical engineering problems using modern computational
mechanics techniques.
Prerequisite
Structural mechanics, Material Science and Theory of plasticity and elasticity
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
level (%) level
(grade)
CO1 Explain the various theories of failures of Understand 70 A
structural materials with pre existing
cracks
CO2 Apply the principles of Linear Elastic Apply 70 A

Fracture Mechanic in solving body with pre-
existing cracks
CO3 Enumerate the physical concepts of Apply 70 A
Elastic Plastic Fracture Mechanics
CO4 Predict the Fatigue Crack Growth Apply 70 A

behaviour subjected to cyclic load
CO5 Suggest the techniques to arrest the crack Apply 70 A
propagation
CO6 Perform the numerical methods in evaluating Apply 70 A
fracture parameters
CO21. L - - - - - - - - - - - L -
CO22. S M - - - - - - - - - - M -
CO3. S M - - - - - - - - - - L -
CO4. S M - - - - - - - - - - M -
CO5. S M S - - M - L - - - - L L
CO6. S M - - - - - - - M - - L L
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 50 50 50 50
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -
1. What is fracture toughness of a material?

2. What are the modes of fracture?
3. Draw the standard test specimen for KIC testing
1. What is critical stress intensity factor?

2. What is j integral?
3. What is crack tip plastic zone?
1. Discuss the situation under which “K” approach becomes inapplicable.

2. Discuss the Stresses due to elliptical hole in a plate.
3. Explain Brittle to ductile transition in steel
4. Explain Load interaction and retardation in fatigue crack growth.
1. Determine the energy release rate for an edge crack loaded as shown in fig.1
B
h
M
Figure 1
2. By using Westergaard approach evaluate the stresses in the vicinity of crack tip.
3. Explain how is the small scale yielding at the crack tip is taken care by Irwin. Illustrate its
physical significance.
1. What are the requirements for the crack to advance by R curve concept?
2. Explain J integral and Crack growth Resistance curves for ductile and brittle materials
3. Why does the Compliance of the component increases with the growth of a crack?

1. Determine the energy release rate of DCB specimen through the change in strain energy
approach for constant load.
2. Discuss elastic and Visco elastic behavior of steel and explain plastic deformation process of
steel.
3. Draw a neat sketch of CT and SENB specimen as per ASTM Standard and explain the method
of precracking in these specimens.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction-Review of Engineering Failure Analysis-Brittle fracture-Ductile fracture Modes of
fracture failure, The Griffith energy Balance Approach-Crack tip Plasticity-Fracture toughness Linear
elastic fracture Mechanics-Elastic crack tip stress field Stress and displacement fields in isotropic
elastic materials-Westergaard’s approach (opening mode)-Plane Strain Fracture toughness (KIC)
testing-Feddersen approach, Determination of R curve, Energy released rate for DCB specimen-An
elastic deformation at crack tip-K1c Test techniques, Various test specimens-Critical energy release
rate Elastic Plastic Fracture Mechanics-Limitation of K approach -Approximate shape and size of the
plastic zone-Effective crack length-Effect of plate thickness-Elastic plastic fracture concept-Crack tip
opening displacement-Dugdale approach-Path independence, Critical J integral-Evaluation of CTOD-
Relationship between CTOD, K1 and G1 for small scale yielding Fatigue Crack Growth-Fatigue crack
growth to sharpen the tip, SN curve-methods to determine J1cMechanism of Fatigue, Fatigue crack
propagation-Paris law-Crack closure mechanism-Residual stresses at crack tip-Retardation effect
fatigue crack growth test, stress intensity factor, factors affecting stress intensity factor-Variable
amplitude service loading, Interaction effects Crack Arrest & Numerical methods Principles of crack
arrest, crack arrest in practice-R Curves, Crack resistance curve, Eutectic process Numerical Methods
and Approaches in Fracture Mechanics, Direct methods to determine fracture parameters Indirect
methods to determine fracture parameters
Reference Books
1. John M. Barson&Stanely T. Rolfe, “Fracture and Fatigue Control in Structure,”
Prentice Hall Inc, USA,1987.
2. David Broek, “Elementary Engineering Fracture Mechanics, “ MartinusNijhoff
Publishers, The Hague, 1982.
3. Jean Lemative& Jean Louis Chboche, “Mechanics of Solid Materials,” Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge,1987.
4. Gdoutos E. E., “ Fracture Mechanics – An introduction,” Kluwer Academic
publishers, Dordrecht, 1993.
5. Knott J. F., “Fundamentals of Fracture Mechanics,” John Wiley & Sons, New York
1973.
6. Suresh S., “Fatigue of Materials,” Cambridge University Press, Cambridge 1991.
7. Bhushan L. Karihaloo, “Fracture Mechanics and Structural Concrete,” Longman
Scientific Publishers, USA, 1972.
8. Simha K. R. Y ., “Fracture Mechanics for Modern Engineering Design,” University
Press (India) Ltd, Hyderabad, 2001.

1.0 Introduction
1.1 Review of Engineering Failure Analysis 1
1.2 Brittle fracture-Ductile fracture 1
1.3 Modes of fracture failure, The Griffith energy Balance Approach 1
1.4 Crack tip Plasticity,Fracture toughness 1
2.0 Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics
2.1 Elastic crack tip stress field 1

2.2 Stress and displacement fields in isotropic elastic materials 1
2.3 Westergaard’s approach (opening mode) 1
2.4 Plane Strain Fracture toughness (KIC) testing 1
2.5 Feddersenapproach,Determination of R curve. 1
2.6 Energy released rate for DCB specimen 1
2.7 Anelastic deformation at crack tip 1
2.8 K1c Test techniques, Various test specimens 1
2.9 Critical energy release rate 1
3.0 Elastic Plastic Fracture Mechanics
3.1 limitation of K approach 1
3.2 Approximate shape and size of the plastic zone 1
3.3 Effective crack length 1
3.4 Effect of plate thickness 1
3.5 Elastic plastic fracture concept 1
3.6 Crack tip opening displacement 1
3.7 Dugdale approach 1
3.8 Path independence ,Critical J integral 1
3.9 Evaluation of CTOD 1
3.10 Relationship between CTOD, K1 and G1 for small scale yielding 1
4.0 Fatigue Crack Growth
4.1 Fatigue crack growth to sharpen the tip 1
4.2 Load displacement test 1
4.3 Test methods to determine J1c 1
4.4 Mechanism of Fatigue ,Fatigue crack propagation 1
4.5 Paris law, crack closure mechanism 1
4.6 Residual stresses at crack tip,Retardation effect 1
Fatigue crack growth test, stress intensity factor, factors affecting stress
4.7
intensity factor 1
4.8 variable amplitude service loading, Interaction effects. 1

5.0 Crack Arrest & Numerical methods
5.1 Principles of crack arrest, crack arrest in practice 1
5.2 K-R Curves, Crack resistance curve 1
5.3 Numerical Methods and Approaches in Fracture Mechanics 1
5.4 Direct methods to determine fracture parameters 1
5.5 Indirect methods to determine fracture parameters 1
Total 36
Course Designers:
R.Ponnudurai rpciv@tce.edu
INTRUMENTATION IN CIVIL
14CEPS0 PE 3 0 0 3
ENGINEERING
Preamble
This course deals with the various instruments that are used in civil engineering and to
expose the students about the significance of measurements and applications. At the end of the
course the students will be able to acquire knowledge on various types of measuring instruments
used in civil Engineering, understand the principle of operation of measuring instruments, explain
the operation of instruments related to static and dynamic measurements, understand the principle
of operation of structural measuring instruments.
Prerequisite
Engineering Physics, Engineering mathematics, Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics 14CE330,
14CE430
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
level (%) level
(grade)
CO1 Identify the basic forces for indicating Understand 70 A
instruments
CO2 Apply the instrument techniques for Apply 70 A

structural related problem in civil
engineering
CO3 Apply seismic instruments for Apply 70 A
measuring the vibration motion in
structures
CO4 Quantity the environmental related Understand 70 A
problems by using the various
measuring instruments
CO5 Explain the principle and usage of Apply 70 A
flow meters in flow measurements
CO6 Visualize the stress variation in a body Understand 70 A
under photoelastic principles
CO23. L - - - - - - - - - - - L -
CO24. S M - - - - - - - - - - M -
CO3. S M - - S - - - - - - - M -
CO4. L - - - - S S - - M M - L M
CO5. S S - - - - - - - - - - M -
CO6. L - - - - - - - - - - - L -
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 30 30 30 30
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create 50 50 50 50

1. Differentiate between Active and Passive types of instrument with examples?

2. Define Range of an instrument.
3. What do you mean by calibration? And why it is necessary.
4. Distinguish between accuracy and precession.
5. What is resolution of an instrument?
6. Explain any five types of Instruments with examples?
7. Explain any five static characteristics of an Instrument?
8. Write down the different errors?
1. What do you understand by the term transducer, how are they classified?
2. Why electrical transducers are more popular as secondary transducers over the
mechanical type?
3. Explain the principle of operation of piezoelectric transducers. Why their use is
limited to the measurement of dynamic quantities only?
4. Explain with a neat sketch the principle of working of a LVDT and sketch the input
output graph. Discuss its merits and demerits.
5. Explain the physical principles involved in the operation of various tyes of inductive
transducers?
1. Explain with a neat sketch the principle of working of a pneumatic or hydraulic load
cell for the measurement of force.
2. How are the elastic transducers used for the measurement of force? What secondary
transducers are generally employed with elastic transducer?
3. What is a proving ring and why is it named so? How can it be used to measure force.
4. Explain the principle of working of load cells using strain gauges.
5. Discuss the principle of working of a seismic instrument explaining how it can be
used to measure displacement velocity and acceleration
6. Explain the principle of working of a seismic instrument as an accelometer.
7. What secondary transducers are employed in these instrument?

1. Enumerate and explain the various methods for the measurement of velocity of flow
at a point.
2. Sketch and explain the principle of working of,
(i) Turbine flow meter
(ii) Electromagnetic flow meter.
3. Discuss the constant current and constant temperature mode of operation.
4. How the anemometer measuring the flow of liquids differs from that used for gases.
5. Sketch and explain the principle of working of a hot wire anemometer.
1. Discuss the constant current and constant temperature mode of operation.

2. How the anemometer measuring the flow of liquids differs from that used for gases.
3. Sketch and explain the principle of working of a hot wire anemometer.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Basic forces for indicating instruments-Introduction - Permanent moving coil instrument- Shunts
and Multipliers - Moving iron instruments, Errors in measurements - Construction and operating
principles of attraction and repulsion types - Wheat stone bridge Kelvin’s double bridge - Maxwell’s
bridge, Hay’s bridge, Wein bridge - Structural Instrumentation - Classification of transducers -
Capacitive, inductive, photo electric transducer - LVDT ,velocity transducer - Load cell, Hydraulic load
cell - Pneumatic load cell, Torque meter - Load cells using strain gauges - Elastic force transducers,
Elcometer - Cathode ray tube, Principle of operation - X-Y recorder, Strip chart recorder,
Galvanometric type strip chart recorder - Motion Measurements - Relative motion measuring
devices - Vibration measurements - Principle of seismic instruments - Displacement measurements,
Acceleration measurement - Velocity measurement Time and frequency measurement - Angular
motion measurement, Eddy current drag cup tachometer - Optical methods Pneumatic gauges -
Surface roughness measurements - Stylus method ,Photo electric type tachometer- Environmental
pollution- Orsat apparatus ,Gas chromatograph - Measurement of automobile emission, stack
emission - Viscosity measurement ,Capillary tube viscometer - Liquid level measurement, Rotameter
type viscometer - Efflux viscometer, Slight glass method - Capacitance type liquid gauge - Ultrasonic
liquid level gauge- Flow measurements- Primary methods - Ultrasonic flow meter, Electromagnetic
flow meter - Turbine flow meter - Lobed impeller meter, Rotary vane flow meter.
Reference Books
1. Keith Cheatle, “Fundamentals of Test Measurement Instrumentation”, ISA publishers, 2004.
2. Michael D. Whitt, “Successful Instrumentation and Control systems design with CD”, ISA
publishers, 2004.
3. Jim Strothman, “ISA Handbook of Measurement Equations and Tables”, 2 nd Edition, ISA
publishers, 2006.
4. Gregory K. McMillan and Robert A. Cameron, “Advanced pH Measurement and Control”, 3rd
Edition, ISA publishers, 2005.

Sl No Topics Periods
1 Basic forces for indicating instruments
1.1 Introduction 1
1.2 Permanent moving coil instrument 1
1.3 Shunts and Multipliers 1
1.4 Moving iron instruments, Errors in measurements 1
1.5 Construction and operating principles of attraction and repulsion types 1
1.6 Wheat stone bridge Kelvin’s double bridge 1
1.7 Maxwell’s bridge, Hay’s bridge,Wein bridge 1
2 Structural Instrumentation
2.1 Classification of transducers 1
2.2 Capacitive, inductive, photo electric transducer 1
2.3 LVDT ,velocity transducer 1
2.4 Load cell, Hydraulic load cell 1
2.5 Pneumatic load cell, Torque meter 1
2.6 Load cells using strain gauges 1
2.7 Elastic force transducers, Elcometer 1

2.8 Cathode ray tube, Principle of operation 1
2.9 X-Y recorder,Strip chart recorder,Galvanometric type strip chart recorder 1
3 Motion Measurements
3.1 Relative motion measuring devices 1
3.2 Vibration measurements 1
3.3 Principle of seismic instruments 1
3.4 Displacement measurements, Acceleration measurement 1
3.5 Velocity measurement Time and frequency measurement 1
3.6 Angular motion measurement, Eddy current drag cup tachometer 1
3.7 Optical methods Pneumatic gauges 1
3.8 Surface roughness measurements 1
3.9 Stylus method ,Photo electric type tachometer 1
4 Environmental pollution
4.1 Orsat apparatus ,Gas chromatograph 1
4.2 Measurement of automobile emission, stack emission 1
4.3 Viscosity measurement ,Capillary tube viscometer 1
4.4 Liquid level measurement,Rotameter type viscometer 1
4.5 Efflux viscometer,Slight glass method 1
4.6 Capacitance type liquid gauge 1
4.7 Ultrasonic liquid level gauge 1
5 Flow measurements
5.1 Primary methods 1
5.2 Ultrasonic flow meter,Electromagnetic flow meter 1
5.3 Turbine flow meter 1
5.4 Lobed impeller meter,Rotary vane flowmeter 1
Total 36
Course Designers:
Dr. R.Ponnudurai rpdciv@tce.edu
14CEPT0 REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN Category L T P Credit
PC 2 2 0 3
Preamble
The extensive use of reinforced concrete for a variety of structural members has
necessitated a proper understanding of the design in structural concrete members by the
structural engineers. This course offers analysis and design of reinforced concrete structures
like deep beams, corbels, curved beams, shear wall, bunkers and silos, virendeel girders,
poles, pipes, formworks and concrete trusses as per IS specifications. It also aims at
determination of safe as well as economical sections and their reinforcement under various
types of loading. At the end of the course, student has a comprehensive design knowledge
related to structures and systems that are likely to be encountered in professional practice.
Prerequisites
Knowledge of Mathematics, Strength of Materials 14CE220, Structural Analysis 14CE420,
and Design of reinforced concrete elements 14CE610
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
CO1 Design special elements such as deep Apply 70 A

beams, corbels and curved beams
CO2 Design special elements such as shear Apply 70 A
wall and bunkers and silos
CO3 Design special elements such as Virender Apply 70 A
girders and poles
Design reinforced concrete pipes under
CO4 Apply 70 A
various types of loading
Design formworks for column, beam and
CO5 Apply 70 A
floor slab
CO6 Analyse and design the concrete trusses Apply 70 A
CO PO PSO PSO
PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
s 1 1 2
CO66. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO67. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO68. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO69. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO70. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
CO71. S M S - - - M M M S - - M -
Assessment Pattern:
End
Assessment Test – I Test – II Test – III
Semester
Apply 80 80 80 80
Create -- -- -- --
Total 100 100 100 100

CO1: Design special elements such as deep beams, corbels, curved beams, shear
wall, bunkers and silos, virendeel girders and poles
1. Define the term: Deep beam.
2. Draw the reinforcement detailing of corbel.
3. What are the differences between bunkers and silos?
4. What are the different methods adopted for the analysis of virendeel girders?
5. Compute reinforcement required for a beam of size 350mm x 550mm circular in plan
subjected to a bending moment of 140kNm, twisting moment of 18kNm and a shear
force of 90kN under ultimate condition. Use M25 grade concrete and Fe415 as
materials. Draw the reinforcement details also.
6. A plain traced concrete wall of dimensions 8 m high, 6 m long and 200 mm thick is
restrained against rotation at its base and unrestrained at the ends. If it has to carry a
factored total gravity load of 200 kN and a factored horizontal load of 8 kN at top.
Check the safety of the wall. Assume M25 and Fe500. Draw the reinforcement
details.
7. Analyse and Design a corbel for a 350mm square column to support an ultimate
vertical load of 600kN with its Line of action 200mm from the face of the column. Use
M20 grade concrete and Fe 415 grade steel. Sketch the reinforcement details.
8. Make use of limit state method; design a circular cylindrical bunker to store 20 tonnes
of coal. Density of coal is 9 kN/m3. Angle of repose is 30 degrees. Use M20 and
Fe415 as materials. Sketch the reinforcement details of bunker.
9. A virendeel girder of 9m has 3 bays of 3m each. The height of the verticals is 3m.
The girder supports concentrated loads of 100 kN and 50 kN at the interior node
points of the top dome. Assuming constant stiffness for the members, compute the
moments forces in the girder.
10. A reinforced concrete pole 10m long is required to carry 4 conductors of 7mm
diameter each spaced at 500mm intervals in a cross arm fixed at 600mm from the
top. The depth of embedment is 1.8m, below ground level. Spacing of poles is 50m.
Wind pressure is 1.5 kN/m2. Load factor is 2.5. Tension in conduction is 3 kN. Make
use of M20 and Fe415 as materials design suitable pole for the transmission line.
CO2: Design reinforced concrete pipes under various types of loading

1. What are the classifications of pipes?
2. Explain the design principles of pipes.
3. A reinforced concrete pressure pipe is to be designed to with stand a working
pressure of 0.2 kN/m2. The internal diameter of the pipe is 1000mm and the length of
the pipe is 3m. Make use of M20 and hard drawn steel wire conforming to IS 432 as
materials design the pipe and sketch the details of reinforcements.
4. A RCC pipe is required to withstand 15m head of water. Make use of M20 and hard
drawn steel wire conforming to IS 432 as materials design the pipe and sketch the
details of reinforcements.
CO3: Design formworks for column, beam and floor slab
1. Draw the cross section and sectional elevation of formworks for column and beam
and slab and its shuttering details.
2. Make use of IS codal provisions, design the formwork for the slab floor only for the
following data: Thickness of floor = 125mm; Centre to centre spacing of beams =
3.5m; Width of beam = 250mm; Take a live load on sheathing = 3 kN/m 2; weight of
wet concrete as 28.5 kN/m3.
3. Make use of IS codal provisions, design the formwork for a column 230mm x 230mm,
having a height of 1.2. It is proposed to pour the entire concrete in one stage.
4. Make use of IS codal provisions, design the formwork for the beam and slab floor for
the following data: Thickness of floor = 125mm; Centre to centre spacing of
beams=3.0m; Width of beam = 230mm and depth of beam is 450mm below slab;
Height of ceiling of the roof is 4m above the floor; Take a live load on sheathing = 4
kN/m2; Weight of wet concrete as 28.5 kN/m3.
CO4: Analyse and design concrete trusses

1. Draw the cross section of various types of concrete trusses.
2. Explain the analysis of trusses.
3. Make use of M20 and Fe415 as materials; design a reinforced concrete fink type
truss to suit the following data. Span of truss: 25m. Spacing of trusses: 5m. Central
rise of truss: 4.13m. It is used to support concrete purlins at intervals of 1.35m and
asbestos sheets cover roof. Sketch the details of reinforcement details of members of
truss.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Special Elements - Design of deep beams – Design of corbels - Design of curved beams -
Design of shear wall - Design of bunkers – square, rectangular and circular bunkers –
Design of silos - Design of Virendeel girders - Design of poles. Design of reinforced
concrete pipes - Loads – Hydrostatic pressure – self weight – weight of water – earth fill
over haunches – UDL on top – uniform pressure from sides – triangularly distributed load –
Point load on crown – Overburden and external loads. Design of form works – Loads –
shuttering for columns, beams and floor slabs. Design of concrete trusses –
Constructional features – Analysis of trusses – Design of FINK truss (Precast)
Text Books
1. N. Krishna Raju Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design IS 456-2000, CBS
Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 2010.
2. P.C. Varghese, Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt.
Reference Books
1. M.L. Gambhir, Design of Reinforced Concrete structures, Prentice Hall of India
Private limited, New Delhi, 2012.
New Delhi, 2014.
3. B.C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, RCC Designs (Reinforced
Concrete Structures), Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2015.
5. I.C.Syal and A.K.Goel, “Reinforced Concrete Structures”, S.Chand and Company
6. Self learning materials – online courses - http://nptel.ac.in/courses/ 105105104/20
IS Codes
2. IS 875(1-5): 1987 Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other than Earthquake) for
3. IS 485: 2003 Precast concrete pipes (with and without reinforcement) – Specification
4. IS 783: 1985 Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes
5. IS 3201: 1988 Criteria for design and construction of precast concrete trusses and
purlins
6. IS 4995: 1974 Criteria for design of reinforced concrete bins for the storage of
granular and powdery materials
a. Part I: General requirements and assessment of bin loads
b. Part II: Design Criteria
7. IS 785: 1998 Reinforced concrete poles for overhead tower and telecommunication
lines – Specification.

Module No of
Topics
No. Lectures
1.0 Special Elements
1.1 Design of deep beams 2
1.2 Design of corbels 2
Tutorial – Reinforcement Detailing of deep beam and corbel 1
1.3 Design of curved beams 1
1.4 Design of shear wall 1
Tutorial – Reinforcement Detailing of curved beam and shear
1
wall
1.5 Design of bunkers – square, rectangular and circular bunkers 2
1.6 Design of silos 2
Tutorial – Reinforcement Detailing of bunkers and silo 1
1.7 Design of Virendeel girders 2
1.8 Design of poles 2
Tutorial – Reinforcement Detailing of virendeel girder and pole 1
2.0 Design of reinforced concrete pipes
2.1 Loads – Hydrostatic pressure – self weight – weight of water 1
Tutorial – Reinforcement Detailing of pipes 1
Loads - Earth fill over haunches – UDL on top – uniform
2.2 1
pressure from sides
Loads - triangularly distributed load – Point load on crown –
2.3 1
Overburden and external loads
3.0 Design of form works
3.1 Loads – shuttering for columns 1
3.2 Loads – shuttering for beams 1
3.3 Loads – shuttering floor slabs 1
Tutorial – Detailing of shuttering for column, beam and slab 1
4.0 Design of concrete trusses
4.1 Constructional features – Analysis of trusses 1
4.2 Design of FINK truss (Precast) 2
Tutorial - Reinforcement Detailing of truss 1
TOTAL 48
Course Designers
Mr. D. Rajkumar rajkumarcivil@tce.edu
GROUND WATER MANAGEMENT Category L T P Credit
14CEPU0 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
An objective is to develop an overall comprehension of principles, methods and practices of well
hydraulics and concept of ground water management. Need for protecting ground water resource
from contamination. Planning of groundwater development under various conditions and
constraints.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
CO1 Explain the origin and occurrence of ground water Understand 70 A
CO2 Explain the properties and types of aquifers Understand

70 A
CO3 Plan and develop ground water resources Apply
70 A
CO4 Develop control techniques for ground water pollution Apply
70 A
hazards
CO5 Calculate the yield from pumping test data Apply
CO6 Practice artificial Recharge of ground water Apply
70 A
70 A

COS PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
PSO1 PSO2
CO1 M L L - - L S - S - - - L L
CO2 M M L - - L L - M - - - L M
CO3 S M L - - M M M L - - - M M
CO4 S M L - - M L - - - - M L
CO5 S L L - - M S S M - - - L M
CO6 S L M - - M S S M - - L M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 60 60 60 40
Analyze -- -- -- --
Create -- -- -- --

CO1: Understand the origin occurrence of ground water
1. Define aquifer.
2. Derive an expression for the steady state discharge of well fully penetrating into a confined
aquifer.
3. In a water table aquifer of 50m thickness, a 20cm diameter well is pumped at a uniform rate
of 0.05m3/s. If the steady state drawdown measured in the observation wells located at 10m
and 100m distances from the well are 6.5m and 0.25m respectively, determine the hydraulic
conductivity of the aquifer.
CO2: Plan and development of the ground water resources
1. Explain the term utilizable recharge.

2. Explain the various practices followed in india for the development of ground water
resources.
3. A Sample has a hydraulic conductivity of 15m per day what would be its intrinsic
permeability. Estimate its hydraulic conductivity at 30o C.
CO3: Control of Ground Water Pollution Hazards
1. Define the term pollution hazard in ground water.

2. List out the advantages of ground water compared to surface water?
3. How do you apply the various methods to control pollution hazards in ground water?
CO4: Analysis of Pumping Test Data
1. List out the advantages of pumping test?

2. A 20cm diameter well penetrates fully a confined aquifer of thickness 25m. When the well is
pumped at a rate of 200litres per minute the steady state draw down in the two
observations wells located at 10m and 100m distance from the pumping well are found to
be 3.5m and 0.05m respectively. Calculate the permeability and transmissivity of the aquifer.
3. Determine the yield from a 30cm diameter well under a draw down of 10m in the well, if the
radius of influence and hydraulic conductivity are 150m and 5m per day respectively. The
aquifer is unconfined with a thickness of 60m.
CO5: Artificial Recharge of Ground Water
1. List out the advantages of artificial recharge?

2. Explain the various methods of Artificial Recharge of Ground water.
3. How do apply Remote sensing and GIS for augmentation of ground water storage.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Ground water Occurrence: Origin of ground water, hydrologic cycle, rock properties effecting
ground water, vertical distribution of ground water, zone of aeration an zone of saturation, geologic
formation as Aquifers, types of aquifers, porosity, Specific yield and Specific retention. Planning of
Ground water Development: Water balance, assessment of recharge, utilizable recharge, Indian
practices, constraints on ground water development, feasibility check, optimal ground water
developments, planning of ground water development in canal command areas, planning of ground
water development in coastal aquifers. Control of Ground Water Pollution Hazards: Evaluation of
pollution hazard and water supply pollution hazards. Strategies for control of ground water
pollution. Mounting Ground Water Quality Protection Programs. Analysis of Pumping Test Data:
Steady ground water flow towards a well in confined and unconfined aquifers, Dupit’s and Theism’s
equations, Cooper and Jacob Method. Artificial Recharge of Ground Water: Concept of artificial
recharge, Recharge methods, Relative merits, Application of GIS and Remote sensing in Artificial
Recharge of Ground Water.
Text Book
1. Ground water Hydrology by David Keith Todd,John Wiley &son, New York,Third revised
edition(2005)
2. Groundwater by H.M.Raghunath,Wiley Eastern Ltd.(1 December 2007)
Reference Books
1. Groundwater by Bawvwr, John Wiley & sons.
2. Groundwater system planning & management- R.Willies & W.W.G.Yeh,Printice Hall.
3. Apply hydrogeology by C.W.Fetta, CBS Publishers & Distributers
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1.0 Ground water Occurrence
1.1 Origin of ground water 1
1.2 hydrologic cycle 1
1.3 Rock properties effecting ground water 1
1.4 Vertical distribution of ground water, zone of aeration an zone of 1
saturation
1.5 Geologic formation as Aquifers, types of aquifers, porosity, Specific 2
yield and Specific retention.
2.0 Planning of Ground water Development
2.1 Water balance 1
2.2 assessment of recharge 1
2.3 utilizable recharge 1
2.4 Indian practices, constraints on ground water development 1
2.5 Feasibility check, optimal ground water developments 1
2.6 Planning of ground water development in canal command areas 2
2.7 Planning of ground water development in coastal aquifers 1
3.0 Control of Ground Water Pollution Hazards
3.1 Evaluation of pollution hazard 2
3.2 water supply pollution hazards 1
3.3 Strategies for control of ground water pollution 1
3.4 Mounting Ground Water Quality Protection Programs 1
4.0 Analysis of Pumping Test Data
4.1 Steady ground water flow towards a well in confined aquifers 2
4.2 Steady ground water flow towards a well in unconfined aquifers 2
4.3 Dupit’s and Theism’s equations 2
4.4 Cooper and Jacob Method 2
5.0 Artificial Recharge of Ground Water
5.1 Concept of artificial recharge 1
5.2 Recharge methods 1
5.3 Relative merits of artificial recharge methods 1
5.4 Application of GIS in artificial recharge of Ground Water 3
5.5 Remote sensing in Artificial Recharge of Ground Water. 3
TOTAL 36
Course Designers:
Mr.M.Ramasamy mrciv@tce.edu
Dr. S.Chandran schandran@tce.edu
14CEPV0 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES
PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
Prefabricated construction is a building process in which elements or modules of the
structure are prefabricated at plants, and then transported to the construction site for
installation. Using this method it reduces the time of building also saves construction cost.
Prefabricated construction is now widely applied for new houses or other building structures
like bridge, tunnels, culverts, water supply system. These structures are easy to erect as it is
light material. These types of prefabricated buildings were constructed in earthquake prone
areas. This course imparts knowledge on modular construction, industrialized construction
and design of prefabricated elements and construction methods.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Enumerate the details of production, transportation 70 A

CO1 Understand
and erection of prefabrication systems
Demonstrate the behaviour and construction

CO2 Apply
sequence of prefabricated slabs, walls and columns
Design the economical cross section of prefabricated 70 A

CO3 Apply
structures
Discuss the joints in precast buildings with 70 A

CO4 Apply
construction sequence
70 A
Explain the progressive collapse and its codal
Apply
CO5 provisions in prefabricated system
70 A

CO25. S M L L - - L L L M - L L
CO26. S S M L - - L L L M - L L
CO3. S S S S - L L L L M - L L
CO4. S S M M - - L L L M - L L
CO5. S M M M - - L L L M - L L
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 60 60 60 60
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -

83. Mention the need and advantages of using precast technology.

84. Define the term modular co-ordination mentioning its purpose.
85. Discuss the precautions to be taken while erection of precast elements.
4. Give dimensional tolerance details for cross sectional dimension.

5. Explain the various types of roof and floor panels.
6. Explain the term lift-slab construction.
7. What are the loads acting of wall panels?
1. How does the material used in construction affect the design of the element?
2. Distinguish between rigid joint and hinged joint with reference to prefabricated
construction?
3. Explain the problems involved in design because of joint flexibility. Discuss with
regard to various locations.
4. What are the precautions taken during disuniting of structures?

1. What is the importance of joints in precast structures when compared to cast- in-situ
structures?
2. Mention the need for expansion joint in precast structures.
3. Explain in detail the different structural connection adopted in a framed precast
building with sketches.
4. Give the guidelines recommended for expansion joint design and location.
1. What are the approaches to avoid progressive collapse?

2. What are provisions made in a Prefabricated R C floors in a cyclone prone zone?
3. When a progressive collapse does occur? Why is it very critical to avoid progressive
collapse of structures?
4. Explain the procedure for calculating equivalent design loads when the structure is
subjected to earthquake loading
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction: Need for prefabrication – Principles - advantages and disadvantages-
comparison of precast construction method and in-situ method – Materials – Modular
coordination – Standardization - Systems – Production – Transportation – Erection
Prefabricated Components: Behaviour of structural components – Large panel
constructions – Construction of roof and floor slabs – Wall panels – Columns – Shear walls
Design Principles: Disuniting of structures - Design of cross section based on efficiency of
material used – Problems in design because of joint flexibility – Allowance for joint
deformation Joint in Structural Members: Joints for different structural connections –
Dimensions and detailing – Design of expansion joints Design for Abnormal Loads:
Progressive collapse – Code provisions – Equivalent design loads for considering abnormal
effects such as earthquakes, cyclones, etc., - Importance of avoidance of progressive
collapse.
Text Books
1. CBRI, Building materials and components, India, 1990
2. Gerostiza C.Z., Hendrikson C. and Rehat D.R., "Knowledge based process planning for
construction and manufacturing", Academic Press Inc., 1994
Reference Books
5. Koncz T., "Manual of precast concrete construction", Vol. I, II and III, Bauverlag, GMBH,
1976.
6. "Structural design manual", Precast concrete connection details, Society for the studies
in the use of precast concrete, Netherland Betor Verlag, 2009.
List of National and International Standards

1. IS: 15916 -2011, Building Design and Erection using Prefabricated Concrete – Code of
Practice
2. IS 11447:1985 - Code of practice for construction with large panel prefabricates
3. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, V “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures,2002 edition” ASCE 7-02, 2002.
4. ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary, ACI
318-02” American Concrete Institute.
5. General Services Administration “Progressive Collapse Analysis and Design Guidelines
for New Federal Office” GSA 2003b

S.NO TOPICS No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction
1.1 Need for prefabrication, principles, process and uses of prefabrication 1
1.2 Advantages and disadvantages of prefabrication, comparison of precast 1

construction method and in situ method
1.3 Materials used and its characteristics 1
1.4 Modular coordination and Standardization 2
1.5 Prefabrication systems 2
1.6 Production 1
1.7 Transportation and Erection 2
2 Prefabricated Components
2.1 Behaviour of structural components 2
2.2 Large panel constructions 1
2.3 Construction of roof and floor slabs 2
2.4 Wall panels 2
2.5 Columns 1
2.6 Shear walls 1
3 Design Principles
3.1 Disuniting of structures 2
3.2 Design of cross section based on efficiency of material used 2
3.3 Problems in design because of joint flexibility 1
3.4 Allowance for joint deformation 1
4 Joint in Structural Members
4.1 Joints for different structural connections 2
4.2 Dimensions and detailing 2
4.3 Design of expansion joints 1
5 Design for Abnormal Loads:
5.1 Progressive collapse 2
5.2 Codal provisions in ASCE, ACI and GSA 2
5.3 Equivalent design loads for considering abnormal effects such as 1

earthquakes, cyclones, etc.,
5.4 Importance of avoidance of progressive collapse 1
Total Hours 36
Course Designers:
1. Dr.B.Sivagurunathan sivagurunathan@tce.edu
2. Ms.M.Vigneshwari mvigneshwari@tce.edu
14CEPW0 WASTE MANAGEMENT PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course provides an in-depth knowledge of various types of waste, its characteristics, technology
and management for the safe disposal of waste generated by a community.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Level (%) Level
(grade)
CO1 Illustrate the status ,environmental challanges Apply 70 A
in Waste Management .
CO2 Apply the various processing technologies for Apply 70 A
various types of wastes.
CO3 Analyze the economical aspects of waste Apply 70 A
management
CO4 Adopt the suitable approach for effective Apply 70 A
waste management
CO5 Evaluate the best practices in waste Apply 70 A
management
CO6 Suggest appropriate options for the safe Apply 70 A
disposal of waste

CO27. M M - - - L M L - L - - L L
CO28. S M S M - M M - - - - - M L
CO3 M M M - - M M - - M - S L M
CO4 L M M M - L S - - L - - M L
CO5 M M L S - S S - S M - M M M
CO6 M M S S - S S S S M - S M M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 40 40 40 40
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -
86. List the characteristics of Hazardous Waste.

87. List the essential functional elements in Municipal Solid Waste Management.
88. Explain the economical aspects of Waste Management?
89. Assess the techno-economic viability of various processing techniques for

plastic waste .
90. Compare the environmental effects of composting and bio-gasification.
91. Assess the energy generation potential of Municipal Solid Waste.
4. Discuss the benefits of Environmental Auditing

5. Environmental management system is a step towards effective management-Justify this
statement.
6. Explore any three possible ways to reduce the waste at source in daily life .
4. Suggest the best disposal option for the hazardous waste generated from your
locality.
5. Discuss the various issues faced by municipal authorities in identifying the disposal
site.
6. Do you think a sanitary landfill is possible to manage wastes in your locality? List at
least three reasons to support your answer.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Overview of Waste Management : Sources and types of waste; Status of waste management;
Environmental and challenges of Waste Management; Role of informal sector Legislative framework;
Governing bodies and organizational structure of responsible authorities.
Technology for waste management: processing technologies,;; Biological and thermal conversion
technologies; Energy recovery from conversion products; Hazardous waste Biomedical waste and
plastic waste treatment; Disposal of nuclear waste.
Understanding finance for waste management: Decentralized waste management concept;

Economic aspects of waste management; Finance plan for waste management- PPP model-case
studies.
Waste management approach: Preventing environmental management; Environmental auditing;

Environmental management system- ISO14001; Life cycle assessment; Waste minimization and 3R
concept.
Best practices in waste management: Challenges and approaches in plastic waste management;
Concept of zero waste management; Case studies.
Text Book
3. George Tchobanoglous, Hilary Thiesen and Samuel A Vigil, “Integrated Solid Waste
Management: Engineering Principles and Management Issues”, McGraw Hill
Publishers, New York, 1993.
Reference Books
43. “Manual on Municipal Solid Waste Management”, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban
Development, Government of India, New Delhi, 2016.
44. Bhide, A. D. and Sundaresan, B. B. “Solid Waste Management Collection,
Processing and Disposal”, ISBN 81-7525-282-0, 2001.
45. Paul T Williams, “Waste Treatment and Disposal”, John Wiley and Sons, England,
2005.

S. No Topics Periods
1.0 Overview of Waste Management
1.1 Sources and types of waste 2
1.2 Status of waste management-an overview. 1
1.3 Environmental and Social challenges of Waste Management - case studies 2
1.4 Role of informal sector in Waste Management 1
1.5 Legislative framework and status of compliance for waste management 2
1.6 Governing bodies and organizational structure of responsible authorities 1
2.0 Technology for waste management
2.1 Purpose of processing and processing technologies – an overview 1
2.2 Waste processing technologies for municipal solid waste 1
2.3 Biological conversion technologies 2
2.4 Thermal conversion technologies 1
2.5 Energy recovery from conversion products 2
2.6 Hazardous waste technologies options 1
2.7 Biomedical waste treatment 1
2.8 Technological options for plastic waste 1
2.9 Disposal of nuclear waste 1
2.10 Future of waste energy plans in developing countries 1
2.11 Operational model for effective waste management 1
3.0 Financial aspects for waste management
3.1 Economic aspects of waste management 1

3.2 Finance model for waste management- 1
3.3 PPP mode- Case studies 1
4.0 Waste management approach
4.1 Preventing environmental management 1
4.2 Environmental auditing 1
4.3 Environmental management system- ISO14001 1
4.4 Life cycle assessment 1
4.5 Waste minimization and 3R concept 1
5.0 Best practices in waste management
5.1 Decentralized waste management concept 1
5.2 Challenges and approaches in plastic waste management 1
5.3 Concept of zero waste – Case studies. 1
5.4 Case studies in different engineering disciplines 1
TOTAL 36
Course Designers:
4. Dr. S.Chandran schandran@tce.edu
5. Mr. V. Ravi Sankar environmentengr@tce.edu
14CERA0 ASEISMIC DESIGN OF STRUCTURES PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course offers design of structures subjected seismic forces. This also includes Design concepts of
seismic analysis and application using ETABS.
Prerequisite
Knowledge on Structural Dynamics and Design of RC Elements 14CE610 and Design of Steel
Structures 14CE670, Design of RC Structures 14CE770
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
level(%) level(grade
)
CO1 Able to determine the seismic hazard parameters Understand 70 A
CO2 Able to calculate the effect and response on the Apply

structure
70 A
CO3 Able to compresence the Indian codal provisions and Understand
interpret the suitable application of codal provisions.
CO4 Able to do capacity design of RC structures Apply
CO5 Able to identify suitable configuration, Loads and do Apply 70 A

push over analysis for Steel structures.
CO6 Able to do analysis and design using ETABS Apply
70 A
70 A
70 A

CO29. S M S M - L - - - - - - M M
CO30. S S S M - L - - - - - - M M
CO3. S M S M - L - L - - - - L L
CO4. S S S M - L - L - - - - L M
CO5. M S S M - L - L - - - - M L
CO6. M S S M S L - L - - - - M M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 30 30 30 30
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create 50 50 50 50

1. Distinguish the magnitude and intensity of earthquake

2. Describe the two approaches followed for the prediction of earthquakes.
3. Name the major plates of the earth.
1. Define storey drift.

2. Define ‘torsional effect’ on buildings?
3. Define modal mass and modal participation factor.
1. Explain the concepts and types of Response spectrum. Write step by step procedure of
constructing response spectrum diagrams with neat sketch.
2. Design fig 1.a & 1.b by using Response spectrum method. The Free Vibration
Properties of the building for vibration in the X-Direction is shown below
3 x 3@6.5m
Beam size 25 x 35 mm
Column size 30 x 40mm

Slab thickness 18mm 5@25m
Wall thickness 15mm
Fig.1.a PLAN
Fig.1.b ELEVATION
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3
Natural Period (sec) T 0.765 0.321 0.135
Mode Shape
Roof 1.000 1.000 1.000
3rd Floor 0.924 0.185 -0.731
2nd Floor 0.786 -0.608 -0.528
1st Floor 0.441 -0.921 1.016
1. Explain the factors affecting ductility of RCC members.

2. Analyse a three storied RC building by static method and also determine modal mass and
modal participation factor as per IS 1893 (PART 1): 2002 for the following data.
Seismic zone = IV
Floor height = 4.0m
Infill wall = 250mm thick in longitudinal and 150mmmm in transverse direction.
Size of beams = 300mm x 400mm in longitudinal and 300mm x 350mm in transverse

direction
Depth of slab = 120mm .
3. Design for lintel and Roof band of a single room building of size 6.m x 4m. The walls are
200mm thick in modular bricks built in 1:5 cement sand mortar. The height of building up to
lintel level is 3m and the vertical distance between the roof band and lintel band is 1.5m.The
roof band weighs 750 kg/ m2. The bands are required for a design earthquake coefficient of
0.12. Weight of wall is 450 kg/ m2 .Weight of masonry is 1900 kg/ m2.
1. Analyse a three storied steel frame by static method and also determine modal mass and
modal participation factor as per IS 1893 (PART 1): 2002 for the following data.
Seismic zone = IV
Floor height = 4.0m
Size of columns = ISMB 600.
Size of beams = ISMB 300
Chequered type of flooring of thickness 6mm.
2. Explain the impact of bracings in steel frame subjected to seismic forces

3. Discuss the behaviour of beam column connections in seismic forces.
1. Analyse and design using ETABS a three storied RC building by static method and also
determine modal mass and modal participation factor as per IS 1893 (PART 1): 2002 for the
following data.
Seismic zone = IV
Floor height = 4.0m
Infill wall = 250mm thick in longitudinal and 150mm in transverse direction.
Size of beams = 300mm x 400mm in longitudinal and 300mm x 350mm in transverse

direction: Depth of slab = 120mm.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction: Indian Seismology – Earth Quake History –Deterministic Seismic hazard Analysis
(DSHA) – PSHA -completeness Analysis – Seismic Hazard curves ,UHRS,GRA and– lessons learnt in
past Earth Quakes –Review of structural dynamics - Forced Vibration: Response spectrum method -
modal analysis – ground motion parameters – lumped mass system – shear building – symmetrical
and unsymmetrical buildings – Response by Duhamel integral and Laplace transform method -
Response of the structure to random vibrations and repeated loading – Tripartite response spectra
problems -.Strong Ground Motion parameters –One dimensional Ground response analysis –
Transfer function Response of layer over the half space - Estimation of frequency content
parameters -Fourier Analysis to seismic signals -Selection of ground motion prediction relationships
– Dynamic Soil properties –Field and Lab tests-– soil structure interaction –Liquefaction –
mechanism –Problems on Liquefaction evaluation –Cyclic stress approach –Seed and Idriss method –
Measures to overcome Liquefaction Behaviour of RC structures: IS Code Provisions:– lateral load
analysis - IS codal provisions on Earthquake resistant design – Analysis of stresses in masonry piers -
Behaviour and design of masonry structures -Capacity design – detailing as per IS 13920 - Behaviour
of RC structures –Design of non structural member - lateral load analysis of un reinforced brick
masonry building -cyclic load – shear wall frame system – Khan and Saboronis method – Coupled
shear wall system – Rosman’s method – ductility requirements in concrete structures -Design of
foundation for EQ forces - MSD Model - EHS theory –Tschebotarioff’s reduced natural frequency
method Behaviour of steel structures: Lateral load analysis of steel structure - different bracing
systems – design of bracing – cyclic load behaviour – Effect of over load – Residual life estimation of
structure-Push over analysis -base isolation Computer Aided Analysis and Design (Only for Internal
Assessment) Computer Analysis and design of Building systems to Earthquake Loads – Hands on
session using packages like ETABS.
Reference Books
4. Anil.K.Chopra,“Dynamics of Structures” (Theory and Applications to Earthquake Engineering),
Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, 2nd Edition, New Delhi, 2003.
5. Clough R W and Penzien J, “Dynamics of structures”, McGraw Hill
6. Jaykrishna, “Elements of earthquake engineering” , Saritha Prakasan, Naunchandi, Meerut.
7. Mukhopadhyay, M., "Structural Dynamics", Ane Books, India, 2006
8. Pankaj Agarwal and Manish Shrikandhe, “Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures”, PHI.
9. Park & Paulay, “Reinforced concrete”, McGraw-Hill.
List of national and international Standard Codes

1. IS:1893 - (Part I), Criteria for Earthquake Resistant structures-General Provisions and Buildings
2. IS:13935 – Repair and Seismic strengthening of buildings
3. IS:4326 - Earthquake Resistant Design and Constructions of buildings
4. IS:13827 – Improving Earthquake Resistance of Earthen buildings
5. IS: 13828 - Improving Earthquake Resistance of Low strength Masonry buildings.
6. IS: 13920 – Ductile detailing of RC Structures subject to Seismic forces.

Module No. of
Topics
No. Lectures
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Indian Seismology – Earth Quake History 1
1.2 Deterministic Seismic hazard Analysis (DSHA)
1.3 PSHA -completeness Analysis – Seismic Hazard curves 1
1.4 UHRS,GRA
1.5 lessons learnt in past Earth Quakes 1
2.0 Review of structural and soil dynamics
2.1 Response by Duhamel integral and Laplace transform method 2
2.2 Response of the structure to random vibrations and repeated loading 2
2.3 Tripartite response spectra problems 1
2.4 Strong Ground Motion parameters 1
2.5 One dimensional Ground response analysis 2
2.6 Transfer function Response of layer over the half space 1
2.7 Estimation of frequency content parameters
2.8 Fourier Analysis to seismic signals 1
2.9 Selection of ground motion prediction relationships

2.10 Dynamic Soil properties Field and Lab tests 2
2.11 soil structure interaction 1
2.12 Liquefaction Problems on Liquefaction evaluation 2
Cyclic stress approach –Seed and Idriss method – Measures to

2.13 overcome Liquefaction 2
3.0 Behaviour of RC structures
3.1 IS codal provisions on Earthquake resistant design 1
3.2 Seismic coefficient and Response spectrum method 2
3.3 Analysis of stresses in masonry piers 2
3.4 Capacity design problems 1
3.5 Design of non structural member 1
3.6 lateral load analysis of un reinforced brick masonry building 2
3.7 Design of shear wall – Khan and Saboronis method 1
3.8 Coupled shear wall system – Rosman’s method
3.9 Design of foundation for EQ forces - 1
3.10 MSD Model - EHS theory 1
3.11 Tschebotarioff’s reduced natural frequency method
4.0 Behaviour of steel structures: Lateral load analysis of steel structure
4.1 different bracing systems 1
4.2 design of bracing ,cyclic load
4.3 Effect of over load – 1
4.4 Residual life estimation of structure-
4.5 Push over analysis 1
4.6 base isolation 1
Computer Aided Analysis and Design Hands on session using

5.0 packages like ETABS. 1
Total Hours 36
Course Designers:
Dr.R.Ponnudurai
EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUE AND
14CERB0 PE 3 0 0 3
INSTRUMENTATIONS
Preamble
This course offers various experimental techniques and measurements needed for analyse
and design of structures. The course covers the basic aspects of experimental stress
analysis that includes exhaustive treatment of the most versatile techniques like photo
elasticity and strain gauges.
Prerequisite
Engineering Physics, Structural Analysis 14CE420 strength of materials 14CE220
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
CO1 Able to remember the various strain gauges Understand 70 A

and understand the principle of operation
CO2 Able to apply the principle to operation of the Apply

strain gauges into various practical problems
70 A
CO3 Able to apply the photo elasticity theory to Apply
stress analysis.
CO4 Able to do understand various NDT technique Understand 70 A

and its principle of operation
CO5 Able to apply the principle model analysis to Apply

prototype structure.
CO6 Able to do understand the various Understand 70 A

instrumentation involved in the measurement
of structural parameters
70 A
70 A

CO31. L L L L - L - - - - - - L L
CO32. S M M M - L - - - - - - L L
CO3. S M M M - L - - - - - - L L
CO4. L L L L - L - - - - - - L L
CO5. S M M M - L M - - - - - L L
CO6. L L L L - L - - - - - - L L
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 30 30 30 30
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create 50 50 50 50

1. Define cross sensitivity

2. List the types of strain gauges
3. Brief the principle of operation mechanical strain gauge
4. Explain the principle of Strain gauge Rosettes. Compare the available
Rosettes and
their applications.
1. Four strain gauges,each of 100Ω resistance and gauge factor 2.0 ,are mounted on a steel
cantilever and connected to Wheatstone bridge circuit as shown in fig. The bridge supply
voltage is 6V.Find bridge output voltage,when a force of 100N is applied at the free end of
the cantilever. E=20X1010 N/m2.
2. What do you understand by temperature compensation in connection with the electrical
resistance strain gauge? Explain clearly the terms, selected melt gauges,dual element gauges
and adjacent arm compensation
1. Explain the elements of a plane polariscope.What are the difference between

isoclinic and isochromatic fringes?
2. Explain the effect of a stressed model in a standard circular polaiscope using jones calculus
3. Derive the condition for extinction of light in crossed-crossed circular polariscope
arrangement with monochromatic light source and stressed model, placed in the
middle.
1. Explain the principle of operation of Impact Echo method

2. Brief how Ground penetrating Radar helps to investigate the failures
3. Explain how cracks are determined by using Radiographic testing
1. Differentiate direct and indirect model analysis

2. Elaborate how moment deformater provides ILD for BM at internal sections of a model
1. Derive a general expression for the output voltage of Wheatstone Bridge circuit for
different strain gauge combinations
2. Explain the principle of Strain gauge Transducers. With the help of neat sketch,
3. Explain the application of strain gauges in Load cells and Torque Transducers.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Strain Gauge - Mechanical strain gauge- Optical strain gauge- Electrical resistance strain gauge -
Inductance and capacitance strain gauges - Strain rosettes- Measurement of static and dynamic
strain- Use of strain recorders and load cells ,calibration of testing machines Theory of Photo
Elasticity - Birefringence, stress optic law, components of Polaris cope - Isochromatic and Isoclinic -
Axial loading on tensile specimen, diametrically loaded disc- Four point bending,Plane polariscope-
Circular polariscope- Three dimensional photo elasticity NDT Methods - Load testing on bridges ,
towers- Brittle coating method- Moire fringe method - Rebound hammer method ,Ultra sonic pulse
velocity technique- X-ray method, Gamma ray method- Corrosion measurements - linear
polarization resistance- Rapid chloride ion penetration test- Open circuit potential measurements -
Electrical impedance spectroscopy Model Analysis Structural similitude- Structural similitude -
Structural and dimensional analysis - Buckingham pi theorem ,Muller Breslau’s principle - Direct and
indirect analysis , Begg Eny’s deformeter .- Moment indicators Instrumentation- LVDT(linear variable
differential transducer) –transducers for velocity and acceleration measurement- Vibration meter -
Seismographs- Cathode ray oscillograph - XY plotter ,chart plotter - Digital acquisition systems
Reference Books
1. Dalley .J.W and Riley.W.F, “Experimental Stress Analysis”, McGraw Hill Book Company,
N.Y.1991.
2. K.K.Ramesh, Digital Photoelasticity – Advanced Techniques and Applications, Springer, 2000.
3. W.N.Sharpe (Ed), Springer Handbook of Experimental Solid Mechanics, Springer, 2008.
4. L.S. Srinath, M.R. Raghavan, K. Lingaiah, G. Gargesa, B. Pant, and K. Ramachandra,
Experimental Stress Analysis, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 1984.
5. Ganesan.T.P, “Model Analysis of Structures”, University Press, India, 2000.
6. Ravisankar.K and Chellappan.A., “Advanced Course on Non-Destructive Testing and
Evaluation of Concrete Structures”, SERC, Chennai, 2007.
7. Sadhu Singh, “Experimental Stress Analysis”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.
8. Sirohi.R.S., Radhakrishna.H.C, “Mechanical Measurements”, New Age International (P) Ltd.
1997.

Module No. of
Topics
No. Lectures
1 Strain Gauges
1.1 Mechanical strain gauge 1
1.2 Optical strain gauge 1
1.3 Electrical resistance strain gauge 1
1.4 Inductance and capacitance strain gauges 1
1.5 Strain rosettes 1

1.6 Measurement of static and dynamic strain 1
1.7 Use of strain recorders and load cells ,calibration of testing machines 1
2 Theory of Photo Elasticity
2.1 Birefringence, stress optic law, components of Polaris cope 1
2.2 Isochromatic and Isoclinic 1
2.3 Axial loading on tensile specimen, diametrically loaded disc 1
2.4 Four point bending, Plane Polariscope 1
2.5 Circular Polariscope 1
2.6 Stress freezing technique 1
2.7 Three dimensional photo elasticity 1
3 NDT Methods
3.1 Load testing on bridges , towers 1
3.2 Brittle coating method 1
3.3 Moire fringe method 1
3.4 Rebound hammer method ,Ultra sonic pulse velocity technique 1
3.5 X-ray method, Gamma ray method 1
3.6 Corrosion measurements - linear polarization resistance 1
3.7 Rapid chloride ion penetration test- 1
3.8 Open circuit potential measurements 1
3.9 Electrical impedance spectroscopy 1
4 Model Analysis 1
4.1 Structural similitude 1
4.2 Structural and dimensional analysis 1
4.3 Buckingham pi theorem ,Muller Breslau’s principle 1
4.4 Direct and indirect analysis, Begg Eny’s deformeter . 1
4.5 Moment indicators 1
5 Instrumentation 1
LVDT(linear variable differential transducer) –transducers for velocity

5.1 1
and acceleration measurement
5.2 Vibration meter 1
5.3 Seismographs 1
5.4 Cathode ray oscillograph 1
5.5 XY plotter ,chart plotter 1
5.6 Digital acquisition systems 1
Total Hours 36
Course Designers:
1. Dr.R.Ponnudurai
14CERC0 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
The syllabus of subject "Computer Aided Design" of structures includes the main concepts of
informatics, computer hardware and software, principles for design and types of operational
systems (Windows), work with interpreter, compilers and linkage editors. The main aspects of
programming with MS Visual C++ considered are: variables and types of data, arithmetical, logical
and relational operations, main operators, functions, objects, classes, input-output operators, etc.
This course provides the essentials of performing computer-aided design, from engineering rather
than a purely mathematical point of view.
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of Mathematics, knowledge of Design of RCC 14CE610, prestressed
concrete 14CEPF0 and steel structures 14CE670 and also algorithm and program
development
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
CO1: Formulate algorithm for solving equations by matrix Apply 70 A
method and construct algorithm for computer aided design
of truss problems
CO2: Construct algoritham for computer aided design of Apply
truss problem
CO3: Construct algorithm for computer aided design of Apply
reinforced concrete members
CO4: Construct algorithm for computer aided design of Apply 70 A
steel and light gauge steel members
CO5: Construct algorithm for analysis of prestressed Apply
concrete members
CO6: Develop computer aided analysis and design
softwares
70 A
70 A
70 A
70 A

CO33. S S S - S - M S S S - - M M
CO34. S S S - S - M S S S - - M M
CO3. S S S - S - M S S S - - M M
CO4. S S S - S - M S S S - - M M
CO5. S S S - S - M S S S - - M M
CO6 S S S - S - M S S S - - M M
Assessment Pattern
1 2 3
10 10 10 10
Remember
10 10 10 10
Understand
30 30 30 30
Apply
- - - -
Analyse
50 50 50 50
Evaluate
- - - -
Create

4. Write the equation for obtaining structure stiffness matrix.
CO1: Formulate algorithm for solving equations by matrix method and construct algorithm
for computer aided design of truss problems List the methods of solving simultaneous
equations.
5. Explain Gauss Elimination method of solving simultaneous equations.
6. Illustrate with an example the matrix stiffness method of solving a truss.
7. Determine the forces in the members of the truss shown in Fig.1 by matrix stiffness method.
Take E = 200 GPa.
C B A
120° 30°
(3)
cm² 1m
(2) (2)
cm² cm²
O
50 kN
Fig.1
8. Solve the following system of equations by Gauss elimination method.

3x1 – 4x2 – x4 = 2
x2 + x3 + 4x4 = 3
x1 – 3x2 + 6x3 – 2x4 = -3
x2 + 2x3 + 3x4 = -4
9. Generate the algorithm for solving simultaneous equations by Gauss Elimination Method.
CO2: Construct algorithm for computer aided design of reinforced concrete members
4. Write the algorithm for determination of bending moment coefficients for two way simply
supported slab.
5. Compare the stress-strain relation for mild steel with that of cold formed steel.
6. Write the algorithm for determination of bending moment coefficients for two way simply
supported slab
7. Compute the values of design chart for balanced and under reinforced rectangular sections.
8. Define stiffened elements in light gauge sections.

CO3: Construct algorithm for computer aided design of steel and light gauge steel members
9. Summarise the conditions for providing stiffeners in welded plate girder.

10. Determine the maximum uniformly distributed load inclusive of self weight that can be
supported by the beam which has two light gauge channel sections without bent lips 200mm
x 50mm are connected with webs to act as a beam. The thickness of channel is 4mm. The
effective span of simply supported beam is 3.5m.
11. Determine the web and flange sections, intermediate and end bearing stiffeners required for
a welded plate girder section which will be provided for a hall. The superimposed load
exclusive of self weight is 150kN/m. The span of the girder is 20m.
12. Generate the detailed algorithm for finding load carrying capacity of a light gauge column
section.
13. Write the algorithm for analysis and design of single and built up steel beam sections.
14. Write the algorithm for design of web and flange section of a welded plate girder.
4. Mention the various losses of prestress.

CO4: Construct algorithm for analysis of prestressed concrete members
5. Express the equations for analysis of prestressed concrete members due to self weight and
prestress.
6. Compute the stresses at the central section for the following cases for a prestressed
concrete beam.
a.) Prestress + self weight (density of concrete = 24 kN/m3)
b.) Prestress + self weight + live load.
The concrete beam is of symmetrical I-section spanning 8m has flange width and thickness
of 200 and 60mm respectively. The overall depth of the beam is 400mm. The thickness of
the web is 80mm. The beam is prestressed by a parabolic cable with an eccentricity of 15mm
at the centre and zero at the supports with an effective force of 100kN. The live load on the
beam is 2kN/m.
7. Outline the algorithm for analyzing prestressed concrete members.
5. List the softwares for analysis and design of structural members.

CO5: Develop computer aided analysis and design softwares
6. Describe the different stages of computer aided design softwares.

7. Describe the step by step procedure of analysing and designing a two bay two storeyed
portal frame using any computer aided design software.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Equation solving and Matrix method - algorithm for solving simultaneous equations – gauss
elimination method – banded and semi-banded matrices – local and global coordinate system –
element stiffness matrix – structure stiffness matrix – algorithm for solving trusses by matrix
stiffness method. Reinforced cement concrete design - algorithm for stress-strain relationship in
mild steel – cold formed steel – stress-strain relationship in concrete – algorithm for bending
moment coefficients in slab – algorithm for developing design tables for beams – rectangular and
flanged sections. Steel design - algorithm for analysis and design of compression members –
algorithm for finding load carrying capacity of light gauge steel columns – algorithm for moment
carrying capacity of light gauge steel beams. Prestressed concrete - algorithm for analysis of
prestressed rectangular and i sections in flexure – algorithm for finding losses in prestress.
Miscellaneous - introduction to optimisation – simple genetic algorithm – stages of computer aided
analysis and design softwares – software applications.
Reference Books
1. Krishnamoorthy, C.S and Rajeev, S, “Computer Aided Design”, Narosa Publication House,
New Delhi, 2005.
2. Krishnaraju N, “Prestressed Concrete”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006.
3. Pandit G, Gupta, S, “Structural Analysis – A Matrix Approach”, McGraw-Hill Education, India,
New Delhi, 2008.
4. Peter W, Christensen, A, “An Introduction to Structural Optimisation”, Springer 2009.
5. Punmia B C and Jain,A.K, “Comprehensive Design of Steel Structures”, Laxmi Publications,
2006.
S.NO TOPICS NO. OF PERIODS
1 Equation Solving and Matrix Method
1.1 Introduction 1
1.2 Various methods for solving simultaneous equations 1
1.3 Algorithm for solving simultaneous equations by Gauss Elimination 2

method
1.4 Banded and semi-banded matrices 1
1.5 Element stiffness and structure stiffness matrices 1
1.6 Algorithm for solving truss problems by matrix stiffness method 2
2 Reinforced cement concrete design
2.1 Introduction to interaction curves 1
2.2 Algorithm for developing stress-strain relation in mild steel 1
2.3 Algorithm for developing stress-strain relation in cold formed steel 1
2.4 Algorithm for developing stress-strain relation in concrete 1
2.5 Algorithm for developing bending moment coefficients for slab 1
2.6 Algorithm for developing design tables for balanced rectangular sections 1
2.7 Algorithm for developing design tables for under reinforced rectangular 1
sections and flanged sections
3 Steel Design
3.1 Introduction 1
3.2 Algorithm for design of compression members 2
3.3 Algorithm for finding load carrying capacity of light gauge steel columns 1
3.4 Algorithm for finding moment carrying capacity of light gauge steel 1
beams
4 Prestressed Concrete
4.1 Introduction 1
4.2 Algorithm for analysis of rectangular sections 2
4.3 Algorithm for analysis of I sections 2
4.4 Algorithm for finding losses in prestress 1
5 Miscellaneous
5.1 Introduction to Optimisation 2
5.2 Simple genetic algorithm 2

5.3 Stages of Computer aided analysis and design softwares 2
5.4 Use of softwares – sample structural problems 2
5.5 Use of excel sheets 2
Total Hours 36
Course Designers:
1. Dr. K.Sudalaimani ksciv@tce.edu
2. Dr.S.Nagan nagan_civil@tce.edu
RESOURCES AND ENERGY
14CERD0 PE 3 0 0 3
RECOVERY FROM WASTE
Preamble
Solid waste is generated in tonnes a day throughout the world especially in urban centres.
The disposal of solid waste is becoming much more complex due to toxic materials which
pollute the environment and underground water. This course work is focused to deal with
recovery of resources and energy from the waste for sustainable development particularly
from solid waste which includes sludge sedimented from wastewater. The process of
material recovery from solid waste to recycle is dealt in this course work. The process of
energy recovery in the form of Thermal, Biofuels and green manure product from the solid
waste is covered in detail. The course work also covers several case studies to recycle the
usable materials recovered from solid waste with its socio-economic and legal
considerations.
Prerequisite
 Solid Waste Management and Biological Treatment System
Course Objective
 Understand and apply the recovery process of the recyclable materials and energy
recovery by various transformation processes from the solid waste.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
level(%) level
(grade)
CO1. Apply the various recovery processes and Apply 70 A
volume reduction processes on solid waste
for sustainable development
CO2. Develop biological process for Apply 70 A
transformation of solid waste to useful by-
products
CO3. Develop Bio-chemical process for Apply
transformation of solid waste to useful by- 70 A
products.
70 A
CO4. Develop Thermo-chemical process for Apply
transformation of solid waste to useful by-
products.
CO5. Analyze the recycling and recovery Analyze 70 A
concepts of various solid wastes
CO6. Analyze the recycling and recovery Analyze 70 A
concepts of various E- wastes

CO1 S M L - - L L L - - L -
CO2 S M M - - - - L - - L -
CO3 S M M - - - - L - - L -
CO4 S M M - - - - L - - L -
CO5 S S S - - L L L - - L L
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 30 30 50 50
Analyse 0 0 0 0
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0

1. State Sustainable Development
2. State the objectives of processing of waste
3. Describe the material and energy flow management
4. Explain the various ways of recovery of resources from waste
5. Explain the process of segregation, sorting and its conveyance
6. Describe the process of size separation and density separation
7. Explain the process of equipment selection
1. Name various methods of composting
2. List the factors affecting composting
3. List the scope and importance of vermi culture
4. Name the species used for vermi culture
5. State vermi culture
6. Explain the mechanisms involved in Biological processing
7. Explain aerobic process of organic fraction
8. Design a suitable biological process of energy recovery of organic waste from
vegetable markets
9. Describe the process of composting of organic waste

1. State the principles of anaerobic digester
2. Name some toxic substances which affects anaerobic disgestion
3. Explain the process of methane generation by anaerobic digestion
4. Explain the process of single stage and multi stage disgestors
5. Describe the commercially available anaerobic digestor technologies
6. Explain the process of collection of gas from anaerobic digestion
7. Design a suitable biological process of methane energy recovery of organic waste
from municipal solid waste
1. State the principles of Thermal chemical conversion of waste to energy
2. Explain the process of energy recovery from incineration
3. Describe the process of incineration systems
4. Design a suitable Thermal chemical conversion process for energy recovery of
municipal solid waste
5. Describe the procedure to determine stoichiometric air consumption
6. Explain the ways of calculating flue gas composition
7. Describe the process of pyrolysis and gasification
8. Explain the importance of cleaning of flue gases
9. Explain the treatment process of bottom ash
10. Explain utilization and disposal of bottom ash

1. Explain the concept of life cycle approach
2. Explain the process of recycling technologies practiced for various materials
3. Explain the process of recycling technologies of E waste with a case study
4. Explain the process of recycling technologies of paper waste with a case study
5. Prepare a preliminary report for the resource recovery of Institutional waste from
planning to the suitable transformation process. Assume the appropriate waste
generated.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Mechanical processing for material recycling: Resource recovery for a sustainable
development- Material and energy flow management and analysis - Systems and processes
for reduction, reuse and recycling -Objectives of Waste processing-Source Segregation and
Hand Sorting-Waste Storage and Conveyance – Shredding – Pulping - Size Separation by
Screens- Density Separation by Air Classification –magnetic and electromechanical
separation processes- Design Criteria and Equipment selection. Biological processing for
resource recovery : Mechanisms of Biological Processing – Aerobic Processing of Organic
fraction - Composting methods and processes- factors affecting- Design of Windrow
Composting Systems- In Vessel Composting- Compost Quality Control- Vermiculture:
definition, scope and importance – common species for culture - Environmental
requirements - culture methods- Applications of vermiculture- Potentials and constraints for
composting in India-Largescale and decentralized plants. Bio-chemical conversion of
waste to energy : Principles and Design of Anaerobic Digesters – Process characterization
and control- The biochemistry and microbiology of anaerobic treatment - Toxic substances in
anaerobic treatment -Methane generation by Anaerobic Digestion- Anaerobic reactor
technologies – Commercial anaerobic Technologies- Single stage and multistage digesters-
Digester design and performance-Gas collection systems-Methane Generation and
Recovery in Landfills – Biofuels from Biomass. Thermo-chemical conversion of waste to
energy: Principles and Design of Energy Recovery Facilities -Types and principles of energy
conversion processes - Incinerator design - Mass Burn and RDF Systems- Composition and
calorific value of fuels and waste, Determination of the stoichiometric air consumption,
Calculation of the flue gas composition - grate firing designs, boiler design, removal of
bottom ash, heat recovery- Emission Controls – flue gas cleaning, de-dusting, flue gas
scrubbers, DeNOx processes, dioxins and furans - Alternative thermal processes: co-
incineration, pyrolysis, gasification, plasma arc – Process characterization and control-
waste heat recovery- Bottom ash: Quantity, quality, treatment, utilization, disposal- Facility
design- decentralized mobile plants- Planning and construction of incineration plants. Case
studies: Recycling technologies for paper, glass, metal, plastic – Used Lead Acid Battery
Recycling –End of Life Vehicle Recycling – Electronic Waste Recycling – Waste Oil
Recycling.
Reference Books
1. Aarne Veslind and Alan E Rimer (1981), “Unit operations in Resource Recovery
Engineering“, Prentice Hall Inc., London.
2. Charles R Rhyner (1995),Waste Management and Resource Recovery, Lewis
Publishers
3. Chiumenti, Chiumenti, Diaz, Savage, Eggerth, and Goldstein , Modern Composting
Technologies , JG Press October 2005.
4. Gary C. Young (2010) Municipal Solid Waste to Energy Conversion Processes:
Economic, Technical, and Renewable Comparisons, John Wiley & Sons
5. Manser A G R, Keeling A A (1996). Practical handbook of processing and recycling
on municipal waste. Pub CRC Lewis London, ISBN 1-56670-164.

Module No. of
Topic
No Lectures
1.0 Mechanical processing for material recycling
1.1 Resource recovery for a sustainable development 1
1.2 Material and energy flow management and analysis 1
1.3 Systems and processes for reduction, reuse and recycling 1
1.4 Objectives of Waste Processing-Source Segregation and Hand 1
Sorting
1.4.1 Waste Storage and Conveyance – Shredding – Pulping 1
1.4.2 Size Separation by Screens- Density Separation by Air
Classification –magnetic and electromechanical separation 1
processes
1.4.3 Design Criteria and Equipment selection 2
2.0 Biological processing for resource recovery
2.1 Mechanisms of Biological Processing – Aerobic Processing of
1
Organic fraction
2.1.1 Composting Methods and processes- factors affecting 1
2.1.2 Design of Windrow Composting Systems- In Vessel
1
Composting- Compost Quality Control
2.2 Potentials and constraints for composting in India-Largescale and 1
decentralized plants.
2.3 Vermiculture: definition, scope and importance – common species
1
for culture
2.3.1 Environmental requirements - culture methods- Applications of
1
vermiculture
3.0 Bio-chemical conversion of waste to energy
3.1 Principles and Design of Anaerobic Digesters – Process
1
characterization and control
3.1.1 The biochemistry and microbiology of anaerobic treatment - Toxic
1
substances in anaerobic treatment
3.1.2 Methane generation by Anaerobic Digestion 1
3.2 Anaerobic reactor technologies – Commercial anaerobic
1
Technologies
3.2.1 Single stage and multistage digesters- Digester design and 1
performance
3.3 Gas collection systems-Methane Generation and Recovery in 1
Landfills – Biofuels from Biomass
4.0 Thermo-chemical conversion of waste to energy
4.1 Principles and Design of Energy Recovery Facilities 1
4.1.1 Types and principles of energy conversion Processes 1
4.1.2 Incinerator design - Mass Burn and RDF Systems- Composition
1
and calorific value of fuels and waste,
4.1.3 Determination of the stoichiometric air consumption, Calculation of
1
the flue gas composition
4.1.4 Grate firing designs, boiler design, removal of bottom ash, heat
1
recovery
4.1.5 Emission Controls – flue gas cleaning, de-dusting, flue gas
1
scrubbers, DeNOx processes, dioxins and furans
4.2 Alternative thermal processes: co-incineration, pyrolysis,
1
gasification, plasma arc
4.3 Process characterization and control- waste heat recovery- Bottom
2
ash: Quantity, quality,
4.4 Bottom ash treatment, utilization, disposal- Facility design-
2
decentralized mobile plants
4.4.1 Planning and construction of incineration plants 1
5.0 Case studies - Material recycling units
5.1 Recycling technologies for paper, glass, metal, plastic 1
5.2 Used Lead Acid Battery Recycling –End of Life Vehicle Recycling 1
5.3 Electronic Waste Recycling 1
5.4 Waste Oil Recycling – Solvent Recovery 1
TOTAL 36
Course Designers
1. Mr. V. Ravishankar environmentengr@tce.edu

2. Mr. R.K.C. Jeykumar rkcjciv@tce.edu
Categor L T P Credi
14CERE0 INDUSTRIAL WASTEWATER y t
MANAGEMENT PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
As a fastly growing country, India is flooded with very good numbers of small, medium and
large sized industries. The liquid effluent generated from such industries would pose a great
danger to the environment, if they are not managed properly. Hence, industrial wastewater
management will be of great importance in maintaining the quality of the environment for
sustainable living. This course work deals with characterization of industrial effluents, its
impact on the environment, possible preventive measures against generation of wastes and
treatment and reuse option for the generated wastewater.
Prerequisite
Knowledge on characterization of wastewater (14CE440), physico-chemical treatment and
biological treatment.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
attainment proviciency
CO1. Fix the characteristics of the wastewater generated Apply 70 A
from any industry and identify factors influencing their
generation
CO2. Identify the means and methods to reduce the quantity Apply
70 A
of generation of wastewater by performing source
reduction techniques and waste audit. 70 A
CO3. Develop appropriate treatment systems for the Apply
wastewater generated from the industries.
CO4. Identifythe possible recycling and reuse opportunities Apply
for the generated wastewater and residuals by 70 A
employing suitable treatment units.
CO5. Investigate the feasibility and benefits of individual, Apply
common and joint treatment of industrial wastewater. 70 A
CO6. Suggest suitable treatment schemes for wastewater Apply
generated from specific industries based on their 70 A
characteristics

CO1 S M L L - M S - - - - - M L
CO2 S S S S - S S M M M - - M M
CO3 S S S M - M S - - - - - M L
CO4 S S S S - S S S S S - - M M
CO5 M S S S - S S - M S - - M M
CO6 S S S S - S S M - - M M M

Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 30 50 50 50
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -
1. Explain the importance of population equivalent of an industrial effluent.
2. Describe the typical impacts of industrial wastewater on water bodies.
3. Discuss the classification of wastewater generated from an industry.

1. Illustrate the good operating practices that would lead to pollution prevention.
2. Demonstrate the process of segregation and recovery of waste in waste volume
reduction.
3. Perform a waste audit programme in an industry and highlight the various stages
involved in it.
1. Compute the volume of equalization basin required for the following flow regime.
Time
02.00 04.00 06.00 08.00 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00 18.00 20.00 22.00 24.00
(hrs)
Flow
rate 8000 6000 9400 12,800 13,000 14,400 12,000 9600 11,000 8000 9000 8400
(m3/d)
2. A wastewater is to be treated with activated carbon to remove residual COD. The

following data were obtained from a laboratory adsorption study in which 1 g of
activated carbon was added to a beaker containing 1 L of wastewater at selected
COD values. Using these data, determine the more suitable isotherm.
Initial COD 140 250 300 340 370 400 450
(mg/L)
Equillibrium 5 12 17 23 29 36 50
COD (mg/L)
3. A wastewater to be desalinized by reverse osmosis using a thin-film composite
membrane. Determine the required membrane area, the rejection rate, and the
concentration of the concentrate system.
Flowrate m3/d 10,000
Influent TDS g/m3 2700
3
Effluent TDS g/m 225
Flux rate coefficient kw /sec 1.5x 10-6
Mass transfer rate m/s 1.8x 10-6
coefficient, ki
Net operating pressure Kpa 3000
Recovery % 86

1. The sludge production having 96% moisture content from a wastewater treatment
plant is 1000 kg on dry solid basis. The solid contain 70% volatile matter with a
specific gravity of 1.02 and 30% mineral matter with a specific gravity of 2.5.
Determine the volume of raw and digested sludge if reduction in volatile solids is 55%
during digestion and moisture content of digested sludge is 92%.
2. Explain the quality requirements for wastewater reuse, suggest a treatment scheme
to achieve the above for an Industrial effluent.
3. Explain the role of evaporates in achieving effluent quality requirements.

1. Exhibit the positives and issues in the joint treatment of industrial waste with
municipal waste.
2. Identify and explain favourable factors in the common effluent treatment facility.
3. Compare individual treatment with joint treatment and identify the challenges.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction to industrial wastewater: Industrial scenario in India – industrial activity and
environment, uses of water by industry, sources and types of industrial wastewater.
Regulatory requirements for treatment of industrial waste water, industrial waste survey,
industrial waste water generation rates, characterization and variables, population
equivalent. Industrial Pollution Prevention: Prevention Vs Control of industrial pollution –
benefits and barriers. Source reduction techniques – waste audit, evaluation of pollution
prevention options, environmental statement as a tool for pollution prevention, waste
minimization circles. Industrial Wastewater Treatment: Equalization – neutralization, oil
separation, flotation, precipitation, Aerobic and anaerobic biological treatment – sequencing
batch reactors, high rate reactors(Recall) Advanced Chemical oxidation – Electro chemical
oxidation, wet air oxidation, ozonation, photocatalysis, Other Treatment Processes Heavy
metal removal, Refractory organics separation by adsorption. ion exchange, membrane
technologies, nutrient removal. Wastewater Reuse and Residual management:
Evaporation- Evaporators types and classification. Zero effluent discharge systems - Quality
requirements for wastewater reuse, industrial reuse, disposal on water and land. Residuals
from industrial wastewater treatment units - quantification and characteristics of sludge -
thickening, digestion, conditioning, dewatering and disposal of sludge. Management of RO
rejects. Individual and common effluent treatment plants – combined treatment of industrial
waste water and domestic/municipal wastewater. Case Studies: Industrial manufacturing
process description, waste water characteristics, source reduction options and waste
treatment flow sheet for textiles, tanneries, pulp and paper, metal finishing, sugar and
distilleries.
Reference Books
1. Arceivala, S.J., “Wastewater Treatment for Pollution Control”, Tata McGraw Hill,
1998.
2. Eckenfelder, W.W., “Industrial Water Pollution Control”, McGraw – Hill, 2000.
3. Frank Woodard, Industrial Waste Treatment Handbook, Butterworth Heinemann,
New Delhi, 2001.
4. Paul L. Bishop “Pollution Prevention: - Fundamentals and Practice”, McGraw – Hill
International, 2000.
5. World Bank Group, “Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook – Towards
Cleaner Production”, World Bank and UNEP, Washington.D.C, 1998.
Module No. of
Topics
No Lectures
1.0 Introduction to industrial wastewater
Industrial scenario in India – industrial activity and environment -
1.1 1
Uses of water by industry
1.2 Sources and types of industrial wastewater 1
1.3 Regulatory requirements for treatment of industrial wastewater 1
1.4 Wastewater generation rates 1
1.5 Characterization and variables, population equivalent 2
2.0 Industrial Pollution Prevention
2.1 Prevention Vs Control of industrial pollution 1
2.2 Benefits and barriers 1
2.3 Source reduction techniques 1
2.4 Waste audit 1
2.5 Evaluation of pollution prevention option 1
2.5.1 Environmental statement 1
Waste minimization circles – PCB Norms for water usage in
2.5.2 1
industries
3.0 Industrial Wastewater Treatment
3.1 Recall of Conventional treatment system 1
3.2 Advanced chemical oxidation- Electro-chemical oxidation 1
3.2.1 Wet air oxidation - Ozonation - Photocatalysis 1
3.3 Heavy metal removal 1
3.4 Refractory organics separation by adsorption 1
3.5 Ion exchange 1
3.6 Membrane technologies 2
3.7 Nutrient removal 1
4.0 Wastewater Reuse and Residual Management
4.1 Evaporation- Types of evaporators and classification 1
4.2 Zero effluent discharge systems 1
4.3 Quality requirement for reuse and disposal 1
4.4 Quantification and characteristics of sludge 1
Thickening, digestion, conditioning, dewatering and disposal of
4.4.1 2
sludge.
4.5 Management of RO reject 1
4.6 Individual, common and joint treatment 2
5.0 Case Studies
Industrial manufacturing processes, wastewater characteristics,
5.1 Source reduction options and waste treatment flow sheet for 5
textiles, tanneries, pulp and paper, metal finishing, sugar and
distilleries.
TOTAL 36
Course Designers
2. Mr. R. K. C. Jeyakumar rkcjciv@tce.edu
14CERF0 Categor L T P Credi
SUSTAINABLE MANAGEMENT OF y t
URBAN ECOLOGY PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course provides an overview of, and engagement with, various theoretical perspectives,
debates and research practices in urban ecology, urban ecosystems, and urban
sustainability. At the intersection of increasing urbanization and ecological crises, there has
been an intense theoretical debate on how to understand and research urban nature and
urban ecology in a sustainable manner. This course work covers the concept of sustainable
management especially in the urban environment. It also explains the various environmental
issues in an urban scenario and its impacts on ecology. It provides exposure to various
issues in the management of urban water resources and wastewater. The future of Urban
ecosystems and managing the climate change through the concept of future proofing is also
addressed in the course work.
Prerequisite
Basic knowledge on Ecology, Environment Science (14CE250) and wastewater engineering
(14CE440)
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Level in % Level in
grade
CO1 Explain the concept of sustainable Understand
development in the urban perspective
CO2 Describe the concept of urban ecology and Understand
its framework
CO3 Apply the Urban water management tools Apply
and models
CO4 Illustrate the present scenario and Understand
introduce eco friendly techniques to
manage the wastewater
CO5 Develop the future urban ecosystems Apply
keeping the climate change as a constraint

CO1 L L - - - L M - - - - -
CO2 L L - - - L M - - - - -
CO3 S M L - L L M - - - - -
CO4 L L - - - L M L - - - L
CO5 S M M - L L M L - - - L
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply - 30 30 30
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -
1. Describe the Principles of Sustainable Development.
2. List the Millennium Development Goals.
3. Discuss the economic dimensions of Urban sustainability.
4. Explain the Ecological Foot Print.

1. Discuss the various theories of Urban Ecology.
2. Describe concept of Ecocity
3. Distinguish: Smart City and Compact city
4. Demonstrate the Urban Ecological Framework with a case study.

1. Draw the Urban Water Cycle.
2. Define: IWRM
3. List the applications of IWRM
4. Apply the concept of IWRM to your city and comment on the outcome.
5. Solve the Interstate water disputes using IWRM concept.

1. Sequence the status of wastewater generation, collection, treatment and disposal in
the country.
2. Describe the impacts of improper disposal sewage on eco system
3. Differentiate: Bio Remediation and Phytoremediation.
4. Illustrate a Eco restoration of river project in India.

1. Discuss the emerging trends and Technologies in Urban ecology.
2. Produce the results of Future Proofing Cities done for Madurai city and comment on
it.
3. How to adapt the climate change impacts in Cities?
4. Write components of Ecological Design.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction to Sustainable Development: Definitions and principles of Sustainable
Development –Environment and Development linkages –Millennium Development Goals
Environmental Sustainability: Planning, Measuring Sustainability - Carrying Capacity and
its limits - Social Capital and its limits- Urban sustainability, Social, Economic , Ecological
dimensions, Concept of Ecological Foot print Urban Ecosystem Concepts and theories of
urban ecology- Linkages with sustainable urbanism – Concepts of Eco cities, smart cities,
compact cities- Urban Ecosystem Challenges and opportunities – Urban areas and
ecological services, Urban Ecological Frameworks Urban water resources management:
Water in urban ecosystem – Urban Water Cycle - storm water management practices –
Water harvesting Structures – IWRM concepts and applications to Urban Water
management - Integrated urban water planning– Water Resources management models
and Water policy of Developed nations- National water Policy -Conflicts on water between
Interstate and country – water Pricing – Case studies Urban wastewater management:
Status of Wastewater treatment and disposal, pollution in India – Impacts on ecosystem, Eco
friendly treatment systems- concept of decentralization – Bio remediation, Phytoremediation-
Wastewater management policy and models of Developed nations– eco restoration of
rivers – Case studies. Futures of Urban Ecosystems Scenario Planning and Adaptive
Management, Ecological Design, Emerging Trends and Technologies, Integrated Models,
Climate modifications and managing climate change challenges in cities, Adaptation and
mitigation measures to make cities resilient Future proofing of cities.
Reference Books
1. Neil S. Grigg., “Urban Water Infrastructure Planning – Management and Operations”,
John Wiley and Sons, 1986.
2. Philip James, Jari Niemelajurgen H . Breuste “Urban Ecology: Patterns, Processes
and Applications”, OUP Oxford, 2011.
3. Tracer Strange and Anne BAley ,“Sustainable Development –Linking
economy,Society , environment” , StatLink from OECD Publishing 2008.
4. UNU/IAS Report ,“Defining an Ecosystem Approach to Urban Management and
Policy Development” March 2003 .
5. Zhifeng Yang “Eco- Cities: A Planning Guide (Applied Ecology and Environmental
Management)” CRC Press, 2012.

Module No of
Topics
No Lectures
1.0 Introduction to Sustainable Development
Definitions and principles of Sustainable Development - History
1.1 1
and emergence of the concept of Sustainable Development
Environment and Development linkages - Globalization and
1.2 environment- Millennium Development Goals: Status (global 1
and Indian)
Environmental Sustainability Planning Measuring Sustainability
1.3 1
- Carrying Capacity And its Limits
1.4 Social Capital And its Limits 1
1.5 Introduction to urban sustainability 1
Social dimensions, Economic dimensions, Ecological
1.6 1
dimensions
1.7 Physical aspects 1
1.8 Concept of Ecological Foot print. 1
2.0 Urban ecology
Concepts and theories of urban ecology and linkages with
2.1 1
sustainable urbanism
2.2 Concepts of Eco cities, smart cities, compact cities etc. 1
Urban Ecosystem Challenges and opportunities of urban, rural
2.3 1
and periurban growth,
Processes in human population growth, urbanization and
2.4 1
implications for urban ecology
2.5 Urban areas and ecological ecosystem services 1
Urban Ecological Frameworks, the principles and frameworks
2.6 1
of ecology
2.7 Environmental perspectives on Urban master plans 1
Institutions working on Water, Environment- National /
2.8 1
International levels
3.0 Urban water resources management
3.1 Water in urban ecosystem 1
3.2 Urban Water Cycle 1
3.3 Urban water resources planning and organization aspects 1
3.4 Rainfall- runoff- Groundwater Recharge in urban regions 1
Storm water management practices storage capacity of urban
3.5 1
components
3.6 Water harvesting Structures 1
IWRM – concepts and applications to Urban Water
3.7 1
management and Distribution
3.8 Integrated urban water planning 1
Water Resources management models and Water policy of
3.9 1
Developed nations
3.10 Case studies -Conflicts on water- Interstate/ country – water 1
Pricing
4.0 Urban wastewater management
Status of Wastewater treatment and disposal on India/
4.1 1
developed nations
4.2 Status of pollution 1
4.3 Eco friendly treatment systems-concept of decentralization 1
4.4 Bio remediation, Phytoremediation 1
Wastewater management policy and models of Developed
4.5 1
nations-Case studies
4.6 Case study on restoration of rivers 1
5.0 Futures of Urban Ecosystems
5.1 Scenario Planning and Adaptive Management 1
5.2 Ecological Design, Emerging Trends and Technologies 1
Integrated Models, Climate modifications and managing
5.3 1
climate change challenges in cities,
Adaptation and mitigation measures to make cities resilient
5.4 1
Future proofing of cities
TOTAL 36
Course Designer
Dr. S. Chandran schandran@tce.edu
Preamble
Course Outcomes
14CERGO ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR Category L T P Credit
PE 4 0 0 4
To impart knowledge on the importance of Organization Behaviour (OB), individual and group
dynamics and organizational processes.
Expected Expected
(CO1) Understand the meaning, importance, scope

and different approaches of OB Understand
70 A
(CO2) Explain the categories, dimensions and
Apply
physiology of emotional intelligence and
applications of emotions to OB
Apply
70 A
Apply
(CO3) Explain the determinants, theories and
attributes of personality, apply process and Apply
theories for motivation and leadership 70 A
(CO4) Explain the need, importance of Group

dynamics in OB and strategies of Understand
organizational culture.
70 A
(CO5) Explain and apply strategies for organisational
culture
(CO6) Understand the need, influencing factors for

organizational change and strategies for
reducing change 70 A
70 A
CO35. --- --- --- --- --- L L --- --- --- --- --- L L
CO36. L L --- M --- M M M M S M --- L M
CO3 L M L --- --- M M M M S M --- M M
CO4 --- M M --- --- S M M S S M --- L M
CO5. --- L M L --- M M M L --- M --- --- M
CO6 --- L M L --- M M M L --- M --- --- M
Assessment Pattern

Category 1 2 3 Examination
Apply 30 40 40 40
Analyse 0 0 0 0
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0
92. “Organizational theories should follow the contingency approach”. Discuss and
Comment on the accuracy of this statement.
93. Define Organizational Behaviour. Mention its need for study in an industry
94. Discuss how globalization influences organizational behavior
1. After few months on a job, Mr.X has experienced several emotional episodes ranging from
frustration to joy about work he has been assigned. Use the attitude model to explain how
these emotions affects Mr.X’s level of job satisfaction with the work itself
2. “Happy employees create happy customers”, Discuss.
3. Describe the dimensions of emotional intelligence
1. Find two newspaper ads for management or executive positions. What leadership
competencies are mentioned in these ads? If you were on the selection panel, what
methods would you use to indentify these competencies in job applicants?
2. Explain why values have gained importance in organizations
3. List the elements of Lewin’s force field analysis model
4. Explain how personality relates to Holland’s model of vocational choice
Concept Map
Syllabus
1. “Organizations are more likely to succeed when they have an adaptive culture”. Give your
comments on the statement with reasons
2. Identify the five types of individual behavior in organizations
3. A steel industry redesigned its production facilities around a team-based system. However
the president of the industry believes that employees will not be motivated unless they
receive incentives based on their individual performance. Give explanations why the
industry should introduce team-based rather than individual rewards in this setting.
4. Differentiate between team and group with examples
1. Identify changes in work place in recent years

2. List the five anchors on which organizational behavior is based
3. Compare and contrast Maslow’s needs hierarchy theory with Alderfer’s ERG theor
Introduction to OB- Definition, Meaning and Importance of OB, Historic developments of OB,
Hawthorne experiment, Basic OB Model, Different approaches to OB, Contributing disciplines to OB,
Scope of OB, Significance of OB. Personality- Definition, Origin of the word Personality,
Determinants of Personality, Theories of Personality (Psychoanalytic theory, Self theory, Holland’s
personality theory, Myers Briggs Type Indicators and Big 5 personality theory), Attributes of
personality. Emotional Intelligence- Definition and Meaning, Categories of intelligence, EI
Dimensions, Physiology of EI, OB applications of emotions. Motivation- Definition, Meaning,
Characteristics of Motivation, Process of Motivation, Theories of Motivation (Maslow’s need theory,
ERG theory, Hertzberg theory, Expectancy theory, Theory X & Y, McClelland’s theory of needs, Goal
setting theory, Equity theory), Incentives for Motivation. Leadership - Definition and Meaning, Styles
of leadership, Theories of leadership (Trait theory, Ohio state theory, Managerial grid, Contingency
theory, Path goal theory, Leader Member Exchange(LMX), Transactional & transformational
leadership theory, Charismatic and Visionary leadership theory), Conflict and resolution. Group
Dynamics - Definition and Meaning, Difference between Group and Team, Groups in Organization,
Team Effectiveness model, Troubles with team, Social loafing- law of requisite variety- Ashby theory.
Organizational Culture- Meaning and Definition, Characteristics of Organizational culture, Elements
of Organizational culture, Organizational sub culture, Artifacts for Organizational culture, Bicultural
audit, Strategies to merger different organizational culture. Organizational Change - Meaning, need
for change, Factors of Organizational change, Lewin’s forced field model, Human reactions to
change, Organization - Control, review and updating. Resistance to change, Strategies for reducing
change, Ethical issues in Organizational change. Case Studies.
References
1. Fred Luthans, “Organisational Behaviour”, McGraw-Hill International Edition., Tenth Edition,
2005.
2. Kreitner Robert., Kinicki Angelo.,“Organisational Behaviour”, Illinois, Irwin Inc., 1997.
3. Robbins P.Stephen., “Organizational Behavior”, New Delhi, Prentice-Hall of India., Eigth
Edition, 1999.
4. Steven L. McShane, Mary Ann Von Glinow, “Organisational Behaviour”, New Delhi, Tata
McGraw-Hill Edition. third reprint, 2005.
5. Vlad Dimitrov, “Law of Requisite Vorticity in Human Dynamics“,
http://www.zulenet.com/vladimirdimitrov/pages/vorticity.html
Module Topic No. of

No. Lectures
1.0 Introduction to Organization Behaviour
1.1 Definition, Meaning and Importance of OB 1
1.2 Historic developments of OB, Hawthorne experiment 1
1.3 Basic OB Model, Different approaches to OB 2
1.4 Contributing disciplines to OB, Scope of OB, Significance of OB 1
2.0 Cognitive Processes of Organization Behaviour
2.1 Personality
2.1.1 Definition, Origin of the word Personality, Determinants of Personality 1
2.1.2 Theories of Personality - Psychoanalytic theory, Self theory 1

2.1.3 Theories of Personality - Holland’s personality theory & Myers Briggs 1
Type Indicators)
2.1.4 Theories of Personality - Big 5 personality theory 1
2.1.5 Attributes of personality 1
2.2 Emotional Intelligence
2.2.1 Definition and Meaning, Categories of intelligence 1
2.2.2 EI Dimensions, Physiology of EI 1
2.2.3 OB applications of emotions 1
2.3 Motivation
2.3.1 Definition, Meaning, Characteristics of Motivation 1
2.3.2 Process of Motivation 1
2.3.3 Theories of Motivation - Maslow’s need theory, ERG theory 1
2.3.4 Theories of Motivation - Hertzberg theory, Expectancy theory 2
2.3.5 Theories of Motivation - Theory X & Y, McClelland’s theory of needs 2
2.3.6 Theories of Motivation - Goal setting theory, Equity theory 2
2.3.7 Incentives for Motivation 2
2.4 Leadership
2.4.1 Definition and Meaning, Styles of leadership 1
2.4.2 Theories of leadership -Trait theory, Ohio state theory 1
2.4.3 Theories of leadership - Managerial grid, Contingency theory 1
2.4.4 Theories of leadership - Path goal theory, Leader Member Exchange(LMX) 2
2.4.5 Theories of leadership - Transactional & transformational leadership 1

theory
2.4.6 Theories of leadership - Charismatic and Visionary leadership theory. 1

Conflicts and resolution
3.0 Group Dynamics
3.1 Definition and Meaning 1
3.2 Difference between Group and Team Groups in Organization, Team 1

Effectiveness model
3.3 Dysfunction of groups and teams -Troubles with team 1

3.4 Social loafing – law of requisite variety- Ashby theory 2
4.0 Organizational Culture
4.1 Meaning and Definition, Characteristics of Organizational culture 1
4.2 Elements of Organizational culture 1
4.3 Organizational sub culture, Artifacts for Organizational culture, Bicultural 1

audit
4.4 Strategies to merger different organizational culture 2
5.0 Organizational Change
5.1 Meaning, Need for change 1
5.2 Factors of Organizational change, Lewin’s forced field model 1
5.3 Human reactions to change, Organization - Control, review and updating 1
5.4 Strategies for reducing change, Resistance to change 1
5.5 Ethical issues in Organizational change 1
6.0 Case Studies 2
Total Periods 48
esigners:
Dr. G.Chitra gcciv@tce.edu

14CERHO CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
MANAGEMENT PE 2 2 0 3
Preamble
Selection of appropriate equipment based on the requirements of project is crucial for completion of
project at optimal cost and time. The mistakes during selection of equipment for any construction
can be avoided by scheduling and optimising the construction equipment system productivity and
making proper equipment financing decisions. This can be accomplished by understanding cost and
life of equipment and its maintenance.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Level (%) Level
(grade)
CO1 Explain the significance of equipment Understand 70 A

management in
construction
(CO2) Estimate various cost components of equipment Apply 70
in relation to its life cycle.
Mapping with (CO3) Choose an appropriate equipment for a specific Apply 70
Programme Outcomes purpose
(CO4) Estimate and Optimize equipment system Apply 70
productivity
(CO5) Analyse the projects and identify the suitable Analyze 70
equipment
(CO6) Compare and contrast various financing Apply 70
decisions for equipment purchase, operation
and maintenance
CO37. - - - L - L - S S L L - L L
CO38. S L - M - - - - - L - S M M
CO3. M L - M - M - - L S L - M M
CO4. M L M M - - - - - L - M M M
CO5. M M M S - S - L S L M M M M
CO6. S M M L - L - - S S M S M M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 40 40 40 40
Analyse 0 20 20 20
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0

95. Identify the role of heavy equipment in construction.

96. Discuss the development of earth moving and excavating equipment.
97. List the various and equipment and tool used in construction.
98. List the constituents of ownership cost.

99. Compare the depreciation in each year of the equipment’s useful life for each of the
above depreciation methods for the following wheeled front-end bucket loader:
 Initial cost: Rs.148,000 includes delivery and other costs
 Tire cost: Rs.16,000
 Useful life: 7 years
 Salvage value: Rs.18,000
100. Estimate the hourly repair cost of the scraper in Example 2.3 for the second
year of operation. The initial cost of the scraper is Rs. 1,86,000, tire cost Rs.14,000,
and its useful life is 5 years. Assume average operating condition and 2000 h of
operation per year.
101. Report the conditions in which choice of front shovel for earthwork is suitable.
102. Discuss the various activities for which a dozer can be used.
103. Explain fork lifts.
1. An 18–cubic yard dump truck has a loading time of 3 min, a travel time of 7 min, and
the dumping and delay times of 5 min. Calculate the cycle time, optimum number of
hauling units, and productivity.
2. List the assumptions in Peurifoy’s method.
3. Compare Peurifoy’s method with Phelp’s method.
104. Discuss the equipments for Vertical construction.

105. A free standing, top slewing, standard configuration, two-part standard line
Liebherr tower crane secured in a concrete foundation base is hoisting a 1.75 cy
bucket to pour concrete columns on a high-rise office building. The pour is a 10th
floor column. Each floor is about 110600 floor surface to floor surface. The top of this
column form is 60 off the 10th floor surface. The crane capacity is verified for the
lifting radius of 900 and the setup. Arrive at the hourly production rate for the
concrete to make this pour.
106. Describe linear scheduling method.
107. Explain the significance of a maintenance program

108. Describe equipment renting and the conditions for adopting the same.
109. Prepare a list of factors making lease an attractive option for financing.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Role of Heavy Equipment in Construction; Cost of Owning and Operating Construction Equipment -
Ownership cost, Depreciation, Operating cost, and Ownership and operating costs calculation
methods; Equipment Life and Replacement Procedures - Physical, profit and economic life,
Replacement analysis and selection; Earthmoving, Excavating Lifting and other Equipment Selection
- Bulldozers, Front-end Loaders, Scrapers, Trucks, Excavators, Backhoes, Front shovels, Cranes, and
Forklifts; Piles and Pile-Driving Equipment; Production of Crushed-stone Aggregate; Concreting
Equipment; Asphalt Mix Production and Placement - Asphalt Plants, and Paving Equipment;
Estimating and Optimizing Construction Equipment System Productivity - Peurifoy’s method of
optimizing productivity, Phelps’ Method, Optimizing hauling system based on loading facility,
Stochastic methods for estimation of productivity; Scheduling Equipment Intensive Horizontal
Construction Projects - Linear scheduling method, Precedence diagramming method, Developing
equipment resource packages; Scheduling Lifting Equipment for Vertical Construction; Equipment
Financing Decisions – Fundamental Concepts of Equipment economics - Financing methods, Rental
and lease contract considerations, Construction Equipment Maintenance.
References
1. Gransberg, D.G., Popescu, C. M., and Ryan, R. C., “Construction equipment management for
engineers, estimators, and owners”, Taylor & Francis, New York, 2006.
2. Peurifoy, R. L., Schexnayder, C. J., Shapira, A., and Schmitt, R., “Construction planning,
equipment, and methods”, 8th ed., McGraw Hill, New York, 2010.
3. Day, D. A. and. Benjamin, N. B. H., “Construction equipment guide”, 2nd edition, Wiley
Publications, New Jersey, 1991.
4. Harris, F., “Modern construction and ground engineering equipment and methods”, 2nd
edition, Longman, London, 1994.
5. Singh, J., “Heavy construction - planning, equipment and methods”, 3rd edition, CRC Press,
2009.
6. Sharma S.C., “Construction equipment and management, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
2011.
7. Ministry of Rural Development, GOI, “Procurement Manual”, National Rural Livelihoods Project, 2010
8. Peter Holm Andreasen, “Dynamics of Procurement Management – A Complexity Approach”,
Copenhagen Business School, 2012
9. Peter Baily, David Farmer, Barry Crocker, David Jessop & David Jones, “Procurement Principles and
Management”, FT Prentice Hall, 2010
Module
No.
1 Introduction
1.1 Role of Heavy Equipment in Construction 1
2 Cost of Owning and Operating Construction Equipment
2.1 Ownership cost – depreciation cost 1
Tutorials 1
2.2 Cost of operating construction equipment 1
Tutorials 1
2.3 Methods of calculating ownership and operation cost – Corps 1
Module
No.
of engineers method, AGC method, Peurifoy method
Tutorials 1
3 Equipment Life and Replacement Procedures
3.1 Equipment life – Physical life, Profit life and Economic life 1
3.2 Replacement Analysis - Theoretical methods, Practical
methods, and sensitivity analysis
Tutorials 1
3.3 Replacement equipment selection 1
4 Earthmoving, Excavating Lifting and other Equipment
Selection
4.1 Earthmoving Equipment Selection - Bulldozers, Front-end 1
Loaders, Scrapers, Trucks
4.2 Excavating Equipment Selection - Excavators, Backhoes, 1
Front shovels
4.3 Lifting Equipment Selection - Cranes, and Forklifts 1
4.4 Other Equipment - Piles and Pile Driving Equipment, 2
Production of Crushed-stone Aggregate, Concreting
Equipment, Asphalt Mix Production and Placement Equipment
5 Estimating and Optimizing Construction Equipment
System Productivity
5.1 Peurifoy’s Method 1
Tutorials 2
5.2 Phelps’ Method 1
Tutorials 3
5.3 Optimizing the Hauling System Based on Loading Facility 1
Characteristics
Tutorials 3
5.4 Stochastic Methods 1
Tutorials 3
6 Scheduling Equipment Intensive Horizontal Construction
Projects
6.1 Linear scheduling method 1
6.2 Precedence diagramming method
Tutorials 3
6.3 Developing equipment resource packages 1
Tutorials 3
7 Scheduling Lifting Equipment for Vertical Construction
7.1 Scheduling lifting for high rise work 1
7.2 Scheduling concrete placing cranes
Tutorials 3
8 Equipment Financing Decisions
8.1 Fundamental concepts of equipment economics 1
8.2 Financing Methods 1
Tutorials 3
8.3 Rental and lease contract considerations 1
Tutorials 3
9 Construction Equipment Maintenance
9.1 Need for a maintenance program 1
9.2 Designing a Maintenance Program 1
9.3 Preventive and predictive maintenance 1
Total Hours 48
Course Designers:
Dr. G.Chitra gcciv@tce.edu
MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN
14CERK0 PE 4 0 0 4
RESOURCES, SAFETY AND QUALITY
Preamble
To impart knowledge on management of human resources, labour legislation, safety and
quality aspects in construction.
Course Outcomes
Expected Attainment Expected

Level (%) Proficiency Level
(grade)
(CO1) Identify the need and importance ofhuman Understand

resource management, labour laws relating
to construction industry 70 A
(CO2) Explain labour laws relating to construction Understand 70 A

industry
(CO3) Identify the types and causes of accidents in Understand 70 A

construction sites
(CO4) Identify the need and measures to Apply 70
improve safety in construction
industry and safety audit
(CO5) Identify the need for applying Apply 70

ergonomics to construction industry
(CO6) Enumerate the need, importance, elements Apply 70 A

of quality and significance of quaity assurance in
industry

CO39. -- M L -- -- M S M S S L -- - L
CO40. L S M M -- S S M M S M L M L
CO3 L S M M -- S S M M S M L M L
CO4 M S M L -- S S -- -- -- S -- M S
CO5 M S M M -- L M S M S S L L M
CO6 M S M M -- L M S M S S L L M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Assessment Tests Terminal Examination
Category 3
1 2
Apply 30 40 40 40
Analyse 0 0 0 0
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0
1. With more women in the work force, what would be the major changes introduced into our
society? Discuss
2. Discuss the challenges faced by modern personnel management
3. With the educational level of the nation’s work force steadily increasing, discuss the
problems and opportunities created for the personnel manager
1. As a safety inspector, discuss the parameters you would look for, while auditing an industry
for safety. Justify
2. Mention two measures by which fire at sites can be prevented
3. Discuss the various causes mentioning its effects and measures to minimize accidents in
infrastructure industry
1. Define the term ergonomics

2. Discuss the best practices of ergonomics in construction industry
3. As a HR manager of a firm discuss the schemes you would implement for your labour to
work in harmony
1. “Quality improves performance of an industry”. Discuss and comment on this statement

2. Define quality assurance. Discuss its various components
3. Define the term quality and mention its need in infrastructure industry
Concept Map
Syllabus
Human Resources Management- Introduction – Concept- Growth – Role and function. Manpower
Planning for Construction Companies – Line and Staff function. Recruitment, selection, placement,
induction and training; over staffing; Time office and establishment functions; wage and salary
administration – Discipline- Separation Process. Labour Legislation- Labour laws - labour law relating
to construction industry- Interstate migration- Industrial relations- Collective bargaining- Worker’s
participation in management. Grievance handling- discipline-role of law enforcing agencies and
judiciary – women in construction industry. Safety Management- importance of safety- causes of
accidents – responsibility for safety –Role of various parties in safety management – safety benefits-
approaches to improve safety in construction for different works- measuring safety. Safety
Implementation - Application of Ergonomics to the construction industry- prevention of fires at
construction site- Safety audit. Quality Management in Construction- Importance of quality;
Elements of quality- quality characteristics- quality by design - quality conformance, contractor
quality control- identification and traceability, Continuous Chain Management – brief concept and
application. Importance of specifications- Incentives and penalties in specifications – Workmanship
as a mark of quality – Final Inspection. Quality assurance techniques – Inspection, testing, sampling.
Documentation – Organization for quality control, Cost of quality. Introduction to TQM, Six Sigma
Concept
Reference Books
1. Arya Ashok, “Human Resources Management – Human Dimensions in
Management” March 24-26, 2011, Organizational Development Programme
Division – New Delhi
2. Arya Ashok, “Essence of Labour Laws”- www.odiindia.in/about-the-books.pdf
3. Arya Ashok “Discipline & Disciplinary procedure” Organisation Development
Institute, 1998
4. Arya Ashok, “Management case studies – An analytical and Developmental Tool”
Organisation Development Institute, New Delhi, 1999
5. Corlecton Coulter, Jill Justice Coulter, The Complete Standard Hand Book of
Construction Management”, Prentice Hall, (1989)
6. Dwivedi R.S., “Human Relations and Organisational Behaviour”, (BH – 1987)
7. Grant E.L., and Leavens worth, “Statistical Quality Control”, Mc Graw Hill, 1984.
8. James J Obrien, “Construction Inspection Hand Book – Quality Assurance and
Quality Control”, Van NOstrand, New York, 1989
9. Josy J. Farrilaro, “Hand Book of Human Resources Administration” Mc.Graw Hill
(International Edition) 1987.
10. Juran Frank, J.M. and Gryna F.M. “Quality Planning and Analysis”, Tata Mc Graw
Hill, 1982.
11. Malik, P.L., “Handbook of Labour & Industrial Law”, Eastern book company,
Lalbagh, Lucknow, 2010
12. Manoria C.B., “Personnel Management”, Himalaya Publishing House, 1992.

Module Topic No. of
Lectures
No.
1.0 Human Resources Management
1.1 Introduction – Concept- Growth – Role and function 2
1.2 Manpower Planning for Construction Companies– Line and Staff function. 2
Recruitment, selection, placement, induction and training; over staffing
1.3 Time office and establishment functions; wage and salary administration 2
1.4 HRM - Discipline 2
1.5 HRM - Separation Process 2
2.0 Labour Legislation
2.1 Labour laws- labour law relating to construction industry 2
2.2 Interstate migration- Industrial relations -Collective bargaining 2
2.3 Worker’s participation in management 2
2.4 Grievance handling - discipline 2
2.5 Role of law enforcing agencies and judiciary – women in construction 2

industry
3.0 Safety Management
3.1 Importance of safety- causes of accidents – responsibility for safety 2
3.2 Role of various parties in safety management 2
3.3 Safety benefits 2

3.4 Approaches to improve safety in construction for different works 3
3.5 Safety Measurement, Safety standards 2
4.0 Safety Implementation
4.1 Application of Ergonomics to the construction industry 3
4.2 Prevention of fires at construction site, Site safety planning 2
4.3 Safety audit 2
5.0 Quality Management in Construction
5.1 Importance of quality; Elements of quality- quality characteristics, Quality 3

control in construction- identification and traceability, Continuous Chain
Management – brief concept and application
5.2 Quality by design- quality conformance, contractor quality control 3
5.3 Importance of specifications- Incentives and penalties in specifications – 2

Workmanship as a mark of quality – Final Inspection
5.4 Quality assurance techniques – Inspection, testing, sampling 2

Documentation – Organization for quality control, Cost of quality,
Introduction to TQM, Six Sigma Concept
Total Periods 48
Course Designers:
gcciv@tce.edu
Dr. G.Chitra
SIXTH SEMESTER
Course Name of the Course Category No. of Hours / Credits

code Week
L T P
THEORY
14CE610 Design of RC Elements PC 2 2 - 3
14CE620 Railways, Airways and Waterways PC 3 - - 3
14CE630 Foundation Engineering PC 2 2 - 3
14CE640 Irrigation and Water Resources Engg. PC 2 - - 2
14CE670 Design of Steel Structures PC 2 2 - 3
14CEPX0 Programme Elective PE 3 - - 3
14CEGX0 General Elective GE 3 - - 3
THEORY CUM PRACTICAL
PRACTICAL
14CE680 Soil and Highway Engg Lab - - 2 1

PC
Total 16 6 4 21
** BS- Basic Sciences; HSS-Humanities and Social Sciences; ES-Engineering Sciences;

PC- Programme Core; PE-Programme Elective; GE-General Elective; OC-One Credit
Course; TC- Two Credit Course; GS- Guided Study Course (in the list of Programme
Electives)
Note:
1 Hour Lecture is equivalent to 1 credit
2 Hours Tutorial is equivalent to 1 credit
2/3 Hours Practical is equivalent to 1 credit

SIXTH SEMESTER
S.No Sub. Name of the Duration Marks Minimum Marks for

. Code subject of Pass
Terminal
Exam. in Continuous Termin Max. Terminal Total
Hrs. Assessment * al Marks Exam
Exam
**
THEORY
1 14CE610 Design of RC 3 50 50 100 25 50

Elements
2 14CE620 Railways, 3 50 50 100 25 50

Airways and
Waterways
3 14CE630 Foundation 3 50 50 100 25 50

Engineering
4 14CE640 Irrigation and 3 50 50 100 25 50

Water
Resources
Engg.
5 14CE670 Design of Steel 3 50 50 100 25 50

Structures
6 14CEPX0 Programme 3 50 50 100 25 50

Elective
7 14CEGX0 General Elective 3 50 50 100 25 50
PRACTICAL
8 Soil and Highway 3 50 50 100 25 50

14CE680
Engg Lab
* Continuous Assessment evaluation pattern will differ from subject to subject and for different tests. This will
have to be declared in advance to students. The department will put a process in place to ensure that the actual
test paper follow the declared pattern.
** Terminal Examination will be conducted for maximum marks of 100 and subsequently be reduced to 50 marks
for the award of terminal examination marks.
SEVENTH SEMESTER
Course Name of the Course Category No. of Hours / Credits

code Week
L T P
THEORY
14CE710 Accounting and Finance HSS 2 2 - 3
14CE720 Project Management PC 2 2 - 3
14CEPX0 Programme Elective I PE 3 - - 3
14CEPX0 Programme Elective II PE 3 - - 3
14CEGX0 General Elective GE 3 - - 3
14CE770 Design of RC Structures PC 2 2 - 3
14CE7C0 Capstone Course II PC 2 - - 2
PRACTICAL
14CE780 Estimation and Costing Lab - - 2 1

PC
Total 17 6 2 21
** BS- Basic Sciences; HSS-Humanities and Social Sciences; ES-Engineering Sciences;

PC- Programme Core; PE-Programme Elective; GE-General Elective; OC-One Credit
Course; TC- Two Credit Course; GS- Guided Study Course (in the list of Programme
Electives)
Note:
1 Hour Lecture is equivalent to 1 credit
2 Hours Tutorial is equivalent to 1 credit
2/3 Hours Practical is equivalent to 1 credit

SEVENTH SEMESTER
S.No Sub. Name of the Duration Marks Minimum Marks for

. Code subject of Pass
Terminal
Exam. in Continuous Termin Max. Terminal Total
Hrs. Assessment * al Marks Exam
Exam
**
THEORY
1 14CE710 Accounting and 3 50 50 100 25 50

Finance
2 14CE720 Project 3 50 50 100 25 50

Management
3 14CEPX0 Programme 3 50 50 100 25 50

Elective I
4 14CEPX0 Programme 3 50 50 100 25 50

Elective II
5 14CEGX0 General Elective 3 50 50 100 25 50
6 14CE770 Design of RC 3 50 50 100 25 50

Structures
PRACTICAL
7 14CE780 Estimation and 3 50 50 100 25 50

Costing Lab
** Terminal Examination will be conducted for maximum marks of 100 and subsequently be reduced to 50 marks
for the award of terminal examination marks.
EIGHTH SEMESTER
Course Name of the Course Category No. of Hours credits

code / Week
L T P
14CEPX0 Programme Elective I PE 3 - - 3
14CEPX0 Programme Elective II PE 3 - - 3
14CEPX0 Programme Elective III PE 3 - - 3
14CE880 Project PC - - 24 12
PRACTICAL
Total 9 - 24 21
EIGHTH SEMESTER
S. Course Name of the Duration Marks Minimum Marks

No. Code Course of for Pass
Terminal
Exam. in Continuous Terminal Max. Terminal Total
Hrs. Assessment Exam ** Marks Exam
*
THEORY
1 14CE880 Project - 100 100 300 75 100
** Terminal Examination will be conducted for maximum marks of 300 and subsequently be reduced to 100
marks for the award of terminal examination marks.
SE Theory Theory cum Practical Specia Cre
M Practical l dits
Course
s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I Common to All Branches 21
14CE270
14CE21
14CE22 14CE24 Building
0 14CE250
0 14CE2 0 Material and 14CE290
Enginee Environm 14CE280
Strength 30 Engineer Technology Worksho
II ring ental --- Survey --- 20
of Surveyi ing (Theory p
Mathem Science lab –I (1)
Material ng (3) Geology Cum (1)
atics (3)
s (3) (3) Practical)
II (3)
(3)
14CE31
14CE36
0 14CE32 14CE34
14CE3 0
Fourier 1 0 14CE351 14CE390
30 Problem
Series & Mechani Water Concrete 14CE380 Survey
III Fluid solving --- --- 20
Partial cs of Supply Technolo CAD (1) lab – II
Mecha using
Diff. solids Engineer gy (3) (1)
nics (3) Compute
Eqns. III (3) ing (3)
r (3)
(3)
14CE4
14CE470 14CE490
14CE42 30 14CE44 14CE480 14CE4
14CE41 Professional Fluid
0 Hydraul 0 14CE450 Compute C1
0 Communicat Mechanic
Structur ics and Wastewa Engineeri r Capsto
IV Mathem --- ion (Theory s& 21
al Hydraul ter ng Design program ne
atics IV Cum Machiner
Analysis ic Engineer (3) ming lab Course
(3) Practical) y lab
(3) Machin ing (3) (1) I (2)
(2) (1)
ery (3)
14CE54
14CE52
0 14CE570
0
14CE51 14CE5 Highway Design of, 14CE580 14CE590
Enginee
0 30 and 14CEPX0 Masonry, Materials Environm
ring
V Mathem Soil Paveme Prog. --- Timber and Testing ental --- 19
Hydrolo
atics V Mecha nt Elect. I (3) Steel lab Engineeri
gy
(3) nics (3) Engineer Elements (1) ng lab (1)
(2)
ing (3)
(3)
14CE62 14CE64
14CE61 0 14CE6 0
0 Railway 30 Irrigation 14CE670 14CE680
14CEPX0 14CEGX
Design s, Founda and Design of Soil and
Prog. 0
VI of RC Airways tion water Steel Highway --- --- 21
Elect. II Gen.
Element and Engine Resourc Structures Engg lab
(3) Elect. (3)
s Waterw ering es (3) (1)
(3) ays (3) Engineer
(3) ing (2)
14CE71 14CE72 14CEP 14CE7
14CEPX 14CE770 14CE780
0 0 X0 14CEGX0 C0
0 Design of Estimatio
Accounti Project Prog. Gen. Capsto
VII Prog. --- RC n and --- 21
ng and Manage Elect. Elect. ne
Elect. IV Structures Costing
finance ment III (3) Course
(3) (3) (1)
(3) (3) (3) II (2)
14CEPX 14CEPX 14CEP
0 0 X0
VII 14CE880
Prog. Prog. Prog. --- --- --- --- --- 21
I Project (12)
Elect. V Elect. VI Elect.
(3) (3) VII (3)
SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
14CEGA0 GE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This coursework covers the concept of sustainable development in the context of various
environmental components and its interaction with human development.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course outcome
students will be able to Attainment Proficiency
Level (%) Level (grade)
CO1 Understand the concepts of Sustainable Understand 70 A
Development.
CO2 Analyze the sustainability in environmental Understand 70 A
components
Understand
80 A
CO3 Identify the drivers and processes towards
attaining sustainability
CO4 Measure the sustainability through Apply 70 A
performance indicators
70 A
CO5 Understand the international protocols and Understand
commitments towards sustainability
CO6 Develop strategies to achieve sustainable Apply 70 A
Development

Cos PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO41. M L - - - M S M M L L -
CO42. M M M - - L S M M M L M
CO3 M S M L - L S M L L - -
CO4 S L M - - L S L L L - -
CO5 L M - - - M S M L M - -
CO6 M M S L - M S M M M - M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 40 40 40 40
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -

1. What are the principles of sustainable development?
2. Explain the different sources of indoor air pollutants.
3. Indoor air pollutant is different in rural and urban area-why?

1. What will be the influence of ventilation in handling Indoor air pollution?
2. Radon and its decay- explain with reference to Indoor air quality.
3. What is the significance of VOC in inducing indoor air pollution?

1. Formulate a statistical model for Indoor air pollution
2. Model Indoor air pollutant concentration using material balance.
3. Compare and contrast Statistical model with material balance model.

1. What are the generally adopted control technology for infectious disease
transmission?
2. Comment on sick building syndrome and its control technique
3. What are special indoor environments?
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction to Sustainable Development:Definitions and principles, History and
emergence of the concept of Sustainable Development, Environment and Development
linkages, Globalization and environment- Millennium Development Goals, Evolving
conceptions - causes and consequences, Social Capital And its Limits, Introduction to urban
sustainabilityEcological dimensions Environmental sustainability:Land, Food, Water and
Energy sustainability, Measuring Sustainability, Carrying Capacity And its Limits, Finance for
Environment , Concept of Ecological Foot print;Drivers, processes and institutions:Critical
drivers, social mechanisms and cognitive factors, Empowerment of stakeholders, Role of
Corporate Social Responsibility, Regulatory and policy context of
Sustainability;Sustainability measurementsIndicators – guidelines; Interconnected
prerequisite for Sustainable development, Science and Technology for Sustainable
development, Performance indicators of Sustainability, Assessment mechanism ofEconomic
performance - production and consumption, Constraints and barriers for sustainable
development; Global commitments:International Summits and Trans boundary
issues,Integrated approach for resource protection and management,Role of Fossil fuel in
Climate Change- future use of renewable energy, Role of Governments, Industries and
Individuals, International agreement and Protocols;Strategic approach to sustainability-
Sustainable Concept measurement strategies, From sustainability 'Problems' to 'Solution'
strategies, New international institutional contexts, International Trade and IPR, Global
Accord.
Text Book
1. OECD INSIGHTS,Sustainable Development- linking economy, society, environment ,
Tracey Strange, Anne Bayley.
Reference Book
1. Environmental Concerns and Sustainable development: Some perspectives from
India,Editors: GaneshaSomayaji and SakaramaSomayaji, publisher TERI Press,
ISBN 8179932249.
2. “Achieving Broad-Based Sustainable Development: Governance, Environment, and Growth
with Equity” James H. Weaver, Michael T. Rock, Kenneth Kustere. Kumarian Press, West
Hartford, CT. Publication Year: 1997
3. “Sustainable development” Kirkby. J, O’Keefe P. and Timberlake, Earth Scan
Publication, London, 1996.
4. Sustainable Environmental Management: Principles and Practice by R. Kerry Turner.
292 pgs. Publisher: Belhaven Press, ISBN:1852930039.
5. “Introduction to Sustainability”, N. Munier ,Springer 2005
Lecture schedule
Module Topics No of
No Lectures
1. Introduction to Sustainable Development
1.1 Definitions and principles of Sustainable Development 1
1.2 History and emergence of the concept of Sustainable Development 1
1.3 1
Environment and Development linkages
Globalization and environment- Millennium Development Goals: Status
1.4 1
(global and Indian)
1.5 Evolving conceptions - causes and consequences 1
1.6 Social Capital And its Limits 1
1.7 Introduction to urban sustainability 1
1.8 Social dimensions, Economic dimensions, Ecological dimensions 1
2. Environmental Sustainability
2.1 Sustainability movement towards Land, Food, Water and Energy 1
Environmental Sustainability Planning Measuring Sustainability -

2.2 1
Carrying Capacity And its Limits
2.3 Moving towards Sustainability-Possible ways 1
2.4 Finance for Environment-Sustainable development 1
2.5 1
Concept of Ecological Foot print,
3. Drivers, processes and institutions
3.1 Critical drivers, social mechanisms and cognitive factors 1
3.2 Empowerment of women, Children, Youth, Indigenous people 1
3.3 Empowerment of NGOs, Local authorities, Industries 1
3.4 Role of Corporate Social Responsibility 1
3.5 Regulatory and policy context of Sustainability 1
4. Sustainability Measurements
4.1 Sustainability Indicators - Operational guidelines 1
4.2 Interconnected prerequisite for Sustainable development 1
4.3 Science and Technology for Sustainable developments 1

4.4 Performance indicators of Sustainability 1
4.5 Assessment mechanism – Carbon Foot print calculator by spreadsheet 1
4.6 Economic performance - production and consumption 1
4.7 Constraints and barriers for sustainable development. 1
5. Global Commitments
5.1 International Summits and Trans boundary issues 1
5.2 Integrated approach for resource protection and management 1
5.3 Role of Fossil fuel in Climate Change- future use of renewable energy 1
5.4 Role of Governments, Industries and Individuals 1
5.5 International agreement and Protocols 1
6. Strategic approach to sustainability
6.1 Sustainable Concept measurement strategies 2
6.2 From sustainability 'Problems' to 'Solution' strategies 1
6.3 New international institutional contexts 1
6.4 International Trade and IPR 1
6.5 Global Accord 1
Total periods 36
Course designers
Dr.T. Velrajan tvciv@tce.edu
Dr.S. Chandranschandran@tce.edu
BUILDING SERVICES
14CEGB0 GE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
This course work imparts knowledge required for understanding the general
principles of building planning and services with the help of relevant codes, manuals
and guidelines.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
Level (%) Level
(grade)
CO1 Apply the general planning considerations and Apply 70 A
development control rules for different types of
buildings.
CO2 Remember and Understand the Relevant code Apply 70 A
and manuals for designing of building services
CO3 Apply the principles of electrical and lighting Apply 70 A
services for different uses in buildings
CO4 Understand and apply the principles of Apply 70 A
plumbing services for domestic and industrial
needs
CO5 Plan and design the requirements for HVAC Apply 70 A
systems, fire fighting and other necessary
services for a various types buildings
CO6 Incorporate the integrated planning and Apply 70 A
designing of necessary building services for
better usage of buildings

CO43. L L - - - M M S L L - -
CO44. L L - - - M M M M L - L
CO3 M M S L - M M M L M - L
CO6 M S S S - M S M M M - M
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 30 30 30 40
Analyse - - - -
Evaluate - - - -
Create - - - -

4. List the types of land use according to Building Development Control Rules

4. Explain the need and details of earthing to a building as per IS specifications
5. Specify the minimum levels of illumination for different buildings as per NBC
6. Discuss the various water conservation measures applied to an Educational
Institute with hostel facility?

4. Assume an IT building is to be constructed in a metropolitan area of 20,000
sq.m. The width of road in front is 15 m. Plan the building according to F.S.I
and height restrictions. Justify your recommendations
5. Select a suitable wiring system for a building having a connected load of
500kW. Make suitable assumptions. Justify your selection
6. Suggest suitable fire fighting installations needed for a commercial complex
building of 4 floors

6. Plan and draw an electrical layout for a residential building considering the
essential electrical points in various rooms
Concept Map
Syllabus
General Planning:– classifications of buildings, Planning permissions, permitted
activity, Area and height limitations, Community open spaces and amenities .- Green
buildings-Intelligent buildings Electrical Systems and Installations: Basics of
electricity – Single and three phase supply- Protective devices in electrical
installation – types of earthing ,Planning electrical wiring for building-Electrical layout
for residential buildingsLighting services: Classification of Lighting, -Energy
conservation in lighting-Minimum level of illumination required for different types of
buildings. Plumbing Services: Principles of Water supply and distribution,
Sanitation in buildings , Water Conservation measures – Plan and design of storm
water drainage and rain water harvesting system. –Decentralized wastewater
treatment system.HVAC -Behavior of Heat Propagation, General methods of
Thermal Insulation- Basic principles of Ventilation-Systems of ventilation,Basic
principles and essentials of Air ConditioningFirefighting services:Classification of
buildings based on occupancy- fire fighting protection and fire resistance rating
,planning considerations in building for Fire protection-fire detection and fire fighting
installation in buildings.. Miscellaneous: Building safety and security systems -
Elevators and Escalators their standards and uses - Acoustic services - Necessity of
integrated planning and designing of different services in buildings.
Text Book
2. National Building Code of India -2005
Reference Book
5. Development Control Rules by Chennai Metropolitan Development Agency -
2006
6. Energy Conservation Building Code – 2007
7. CPHEEO Manual on Sewerage and sewage treatment systems – 2013
8. Manual for environmental clearance for large construction projects – by
Ministry of environment , forest and climate change.
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1.0 General Planning
1.1 Classification of buildings, importance of building services 1
1.2 Planning Permission- Development Control Rules, land use 1
classificationsand permitted activity
1.3 Area, height limitations and parking requirements 1
1.4 Community open spaces and amenities - Provisions for 1
physically challenged people
1.5 Green buildings –Necessity and Green Rating systems 1
1.6 Intelligent buildings concepts and Building management 1
systems.
2.0 Electrical Systems and Installations
2.1 Basics of electricity - Single and three phase supply 1
2.2 Protective devices in electrical installation 1
2.3 Types of earthing- ISI specifications and NBC 2
recommendations
2.4 Wiring systems and their choice 1
2.5 Planning electrical wiring for building-Main and Distribution 1
boards and energy ratings for appliances.
2.6 Electrical layout for residential buildings 1
3.0 Lighting services
3.1 Classification of Lighting, Need for artificial Lighting 1
3.2 Energy conservation in lighting -Energy efficient luminaries 1
and light sources
3.3 Minimum level of illumination required for different types of 1
building- lighting design
4.0 Plumbing Services
4.1 Principles of Water supply and distribution 1
4.2 Sanitation services – type of plumbing system 1
4.3 Water Conservation measures. 1
4.4 Plan and design of storm water drainage and rain water 1
harvesting system
4.5 Decentralized wastewater treatment system – design of 1
septic tank and solid waste disposal system
5.0 Heat, Ventilation and Air Conditioning services
5.1 Behavior of Heat Propagation – Thermal Insulating materials 1
and Coefficient of Thermal Conductivity
5.2 General methods of Thermal Insulation – Roofs, exposed 1
walls
5.3 Basic principles of Ventilation – Definition and Necessity 1
5.4 Systems of Ventilation 1
5.5 Basic principles of Air Conditioning – Types and Systems of 1
ducting
5.6 Essentials of Air conditioning systems 1
6.0 Firefighting services
6.1 Classification of Building based on occupancy - Causes of 1
Fire
6.2 Fire fighting protection and Fire resistance rating 1
6.3 Planning considerations in building for fire protection 1
6.4 Fire detection and fire fighting installations in buildings. 1
7.0 Miscellaneous
7.1 Building safety and security systems 1
7.2 Elevators and Escalators their standards and uses. 1
7.3 Acoustic services and 1
7.4 Necessity of integrated planning and designing of different 2
services in buildings and solid waste management options.
TOTAL 36
Course designers
3. V. Ravisankarenvironmentengr@tce.edu
4. D. Rajkumar rajkumarcivil@tce.edu
14CEGC0 DISASTER ASSESSMENT Category L T P Credit
GE 3 0 0 3
AND MITIGATION MEASURES
Preamble
This course deals with the various disasters and to expose the students about the measures,
its effect against built structures, and Hazard Assessment procedure in India. This course
also deals with the methods of mitigating various hazards such that their impact on
communities is reduced.
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the student will be able Expected Expected
to Attainment Proficiency
Level (%) Level
(grade)
CO1 Understand the various types of disaster Understand 70 A
vizHydrological, Coastal and Marine Disasters,
Atmospheric Disasters, Geological, Mass
Movement and Land Disasters, Wind and
Water Driven Disasters
CO2 To identify the potential deficiencies of existing Understand 70 A
buildings for Earthquake disaster and suggest
suitable remedial measures.
CO3 Derive the guide lines for the precautionary Apply 70 A
measures and rehabilitation measures for
Earthquake disaster.
CO4 Derive the protection measures against floods, Apply 70 A
cyclone, land slides
CO5 Understand the effects of disasters on built Understand 70 A
structures
CO6 Understand the hazard Assessment procedure Understand 70 A

CO1 L M - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 L M - - - - - - - - - -
CO3 S S M L - - - - - - - -
CO4 S S M L - - - - - - - -
CO5 L M - - - - - - - - - -
CO6 L M - - - - - - - - - -

Assessment Pattern

1 Remember 20 20 20
3 Apply 0 20 20
4 Analyse 0 0 0
5 Evaluate 0 0 0
6 Create 0 0 0
5. What is Richter Magnitude?

6. What is Peak ground Acceleration?
7. What is meant by hazard mitigation?
8. What is a Local Hazard Mitigation Plan?
5. List the different types of droughts and highlight its various causes.
6. Define community Contingency Plan
7. How does the site soil affect the EQ response of structures?
8. Explain the classification and causes of landslides indicating the places where they
could occur in India.
3. Explain the plan, Mass and Geometric irregularities in the RC buildings. How these
irregularities adversely affect the performance of the RC buildings during Earthquake
4. Discuss the various types of natural disasters and highlight the specific efforts to
mitigate disasters in India
3. Describe various types of hazards and impacts associated with earthquakes and
highlight the lessons learnt
4. Briefly explain the components of follow-up activities in psychological rehabilitation of
disaster affected people.
4. If you were the relief commissioner of the state of Assam which is affected by floods
every year list out five departments that you need to contact.
5. Identify four different task forces and list out two responsibilities of each of the task
forces
6. Do you think disaster risk can be reduced through community participation? Discuss
4. Which areas are more prone to heat and cold waves in India? Discuss the preventive
and preparedness measures that are mostly adopted for protection from heat and
cold waves
5. Explain the role of central Government in responding to disasters
6. Describe suitable mitigation and preparedness measures that the community should
take in advance to guard a EQ disaster occurring again.
Concept Map
Module No. of
Topics
No. Lectures
1 Introduction - Disaster
1.1 Over view of Disaster Management 1
2 Land slide
2.1 Introduction ,Causes,types,preparation of hazard zonation map 1
2.2 Liquefaction -remedial options 1
2.3 Liquefaction related phenomena 1
2.4 Evaluation of Liquefaction hazards and Liquefaction resistance 1
2.5 Slope failures 1
3 Floods
3.1 Introduction- Causes -Rescue and relief Management 1
Effects on buildings, protection measures from damage to

3.2 buildings 1
3.3 Case studies 1
4 Earthquake Disaster
4.1 Causes of Earthquakes ,Earthquake Size Seismic waves 1
4.2 Earthquake resistant measures in RC and Masonry buildings 1
4.3 Seismic response of free and forced damped vibration 1
5 Tropical cyclones
5.1 Introduction , Effects on buildings,Warning systems in India 1
5.2 Damaging effects of cyclone 1
5.3 Design procedure for wind resistant buildings 1
6 Tsunami
6.1 Tsunami causes ,Warning systems DART floatingbouys 1
Tsunami impact on coastal lines Effects of Tsunami on built

6.2 structures 1
7 Man made Disaster - Industrial accident case study 1
7.1 NBC,Radioactivity,Alpha ,Beta , Gamma decay,fission and fusion 1
Chemical warfare agents,universal classification of hazard

substances and explosives,decontamination procedure - BW
7.2 agents -Emergency Medical responder,Vital signs (RPSPBP) 2
7.3 Classification of Hazardous chemicals 1

8 CSSR -Collapsed Structure & Rescue operations
8.1 Search and rescue and evacuation methods 1
8.2 Fire safety technique classification Extiguishers 1
Life saving skills - Body mechanics - CPR - Burn and its

8.3 classification 1
9 Role and responsibility of NDRF 1
9.1 Skill variety of NDRF Battalions-MFR-FRRM,CBRN disasters 1
9.2 START system,TRIAGE,FBAO(Foreign body airway Obstruction 1
9.3 Community training 1
10 Hazard Assessment Procedure
10.1 DSHA - Case studies 1
10.2 PSHA - completeness analysis (step method), 1
10.4 RVS,Push Over Analysis 1
10.5 Policy and procedures 1
10.6 Role of Local and state bodies,Alternate communication systems 1
10.7 Community planning Community Contingency plan 1
Total Hours 36
Syllabus
Introduction -Introduction-Difference between hazards and disaster –Types of disasters-

Phases of disaster Management -Hazards -Classification of Hazards - Hazards affecting
buildings - Building safety against hazards –Floods – Cyclone – Landslides –Tsunami Fire
hazards Earthquake Disaster - Earthquake Hazard Map -Causes of Earthquakes -
Classification of Earthquakes - -Seismic waves -Energy release - Inertia forces, Natural
period -Resonance, Damping -Seismic response of free vibration -Seismic response of
damped vibration -Performance of ground and buildings in past Earthquakes-Earthquake
resistant measures in RC and Masonry buildings -Potential deficiencies of RC and Masonry
buildings Landslides – Landslide zoning map - Causes –Protection measures Floods –
Flood zone map - Effects on buildings – protection measures from damage to buildings –
Mitigation Strategies
Tropical cyclones - Effects on buildings – protection measures from damage to buildings

Tsunami - Tsunami magnitude and intensity -Tsunami wave characteristics -Peculiarities of
tsunami deposits -Tsunami impact on coastal lines -Effects of Tsunami on built structures –
Mitigation Management Nuclear disaster – chemical and industrial accidents - Mitigation
strategies Hazard Assessment - Vulnerability Assessment and seismic strengthening of
buildings -Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings procedure -Hazard Assessment-Visual
Inspection and Study of Available Documents-Detailed In - situ Investigation Planning and
Interpretation of Results-Foundation Capability -Non- structural Components -Seismic
Strengthening of Buildings-Repairs Restoration Strengthening of Existing Buildings
Strengthening Materials-Retrofitting of Load Bearing Wall Buildings Retrofitting of RC
Buildings- Alternative communication systems during disaster- Modes of emergency
communications-Satellite based communication systems -Radio communications Role of
local and state bodiesNatioanallevel,State level , district level -Community contingency
plan –Risk Management - Vulnerabilty mapping.
Reference Books:
10. Ray.N.Glough, Joseph Penzein, (1996), “Dynamics of Structures”, McGraw Hill

International Ltd.
11. Jaikrishna&A.R.Chandrasekaran, (1996) “Elements of Earthquake
Engineering”,SaritaPrakashan, Meerut.
12. Berg.GV (1982), “Seismic Design codes and procedures”, EERI, CA.
13. Booth, Edmund (1994), “Concrete Structures in earthquake regions; Design and
Analysis”, Longman.
14. Dowrick. D.J (1987), “Earthquake resistant design for Engineers and Architects”,John
Wiley & Sons, Second Edition.
15. G.K. Ghosh(1993) “Disaster Management” A.P.H. Publishing Corporation,New Delhi
16. R.B. Singh (1992)“Disaster Management”RawatPublications,New Delhi
17. Ayaz Ahmad(1990) Disaster Management: Through the New Millennium By
Anmol Publications,New Delhi
18. Goel, S. L.(1991) “Encyclopaedia of Disaster Management” Deep & Deep
Publications PvtLtd,New Delhi
IS Codes:
3. IS: 4326-1984, “Indian Std Code of practice for Earthquake Resistant Design and
Construction of Buildings”.
4. IS: 1893 (Part I)-2002 “Code of practice for Earthquake Resistant Design of
Structures
Course Designers:
PROJECT Category L T P Credit
14CEGDO GE 2 2 0 3
MANAGEMENT
Preamble
This course gives an exposure to the basic concepts involved in the formulation of a project, project
management principles, importance and need for network techniques and its applications to a
project.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, students will be Expected Expected

able to: Attainment Proficiency
(CO1) Explain project, project management, life cycle Understand 70 A

and project formulation
(CO2) Analyze and Manage time in projects through Gantt Apply 70 A
charts, And network techniques.
(CO3) Analyse and manage time in projects through CPM and Apply 70 A
PERT, update and monitor projects
Analyze
70 A
(CO4) Manage resources of project using resource smoothing
and levelling techniques Apply
70 A
(CO5) Optimize resources of projects using scheduling, fast
tracking and re-estimation techniques
(CO6) Identify the need for communication and risk Apply 70 A

management in projects with emerging trends in
project management
CO45. L L L L - M L L M M L M
CO46. S M M M M - - L M L S M
CO3 S M M M M - - L M L S M
CO4 S M M M - M L - L M - S
CO5 S M M S - M L - L M - S
CO6 L L L L L - M - S M M L

Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1 2 3
Apply 60 60 60 60
Analyze 0 20 20 20
Evaluate 0 0 0 0
Create 0 0 0 0
110. Define project and project management. Mention its need

111. Discuss the functions of project management
112. Discuss the life cycle of projects with influencing factors
113. Differentiate between CPM and PERT

114. A project consists of six activities with the following logical
relationships. Draw a network for the project and determine the critical path
using traditional method
- A and B are initial activities and can be performed concurrently
- C follows A but cannot start until B is over
- D and E succeed B
- C and D precede F
- E and F are terminal activities
Activity A B C D E F
Duration (Days) 7 8 3 2 7 4
Find the status of the project on the 10th day of its commencement.
115. Conduct Event oriented network analysis for the following project and
determine:
- Earliest and latest allowable occurrence times for the events
- Expected time and standard deviations for activities
- Project completion time and its degree of variability
- What is the probability of completing the project 2 days ahead of schedule?
- What is the probability of not completing the project 1 day behind schedule?
- Find the due date that has 75% chance of being met?
Activity (i-j) 1-2 1-3 2-4 3-4 3-5 4-5 5-6
t0 days 2 3 4 0 7 2 4
tm days 3 3 10 0 12 7 6
tpdays 5 3 12 0 15 9 8
116. Write the need for balancing of resources in project? Mention its
significance
117. For an automobile industry project you as a project manager is vested
with the responsibility of balancing manpower requirement, which method
would you adopt for this process. Justify your answer with suitable reasons.
118. Balance the resource demand for the following project so as to meet the
availability of only 7 men/day
Activity (i-j) 0-1 0-3 0-6 1-2 3-4 3-7 6-7 2-5 4-5 7-8 5-8
Duration (days) 2 2 1 4 5 8 3 1 4 5 3
Manpower 3 6 4 2 2 4 5 4 2 2 5
1. Define the term direct cost in projects with examples
2. Write the need and meaning of fast tracking and estimation of projects
3. A project consists of 7 activities with costs and times gives as shown in table. Crash the project
and determine the optimum time and minimum cost relationship for the project. Assume the
indirect cost to vary at Rs.500/- per day.
Activity (i-j) 1-2 1-3 2-4 3-4 3-5 4-5 5-6
Normal time days 5 7 4 2 5 3 4
Crash time days 3 4 2 1 3 2 1
Normal cost Rs. 500 100 200 400 350 380 50

Crash cost Rs. 800 300 500 750 800 900 150
4. List the benefits and limitations of latest tools in project management

5. Discuss why effective communication is needed for the success of any
projects taking an example
6. Take of project of your choice in a mechanical industry and list and discuss
the risks in the project along with possible methods of its mitigation.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Project and its process- Define project and process, boundaries of project, Objectives and functions
of Project management, characteristics and types of projects, organization structure / styles, roles of
project management group, project management office and its role, project knowledge area, project
integration- process group interaction. Project flow, project life cycle- influencing factors. - Case
study. Project Formulation: Generation and Screening of PM ideas- Triple Constraint – Time, Cost
and Scope. TOR/ Project Charter/ SOW (Statement of Work)- Creation of project Charter. Preliminary
planning and estimate- Types of estimate- Ball park, Parametric and Bottom up estimates. Project
Presentation & Approval – Detailed Project Report & Approval (Technical and Budget Sanction),
Project finance- sources of finance. Technology transfer- PPP Concepts,BOT, BOLT, BOOT.
Stakeholder Management - Case study. Time Management: Project Scope Management - Work
break down structure- Activity/ Task- Events- Case study. Project planning tools- Rolling wave
planning. Gantt Charts, Milestone chart, Program Progress chart- Creating milestone plan. Project
Network- Fulkerson’s rules – Activity-On-Arrow and Activity- On -Node networks. Analyze project
time- Critical path method (deterministic approach- activity oriented network analysis- 80-20 rule-
Case study, type of time estimates & Square network diagram. Project updating and monitoring-
Case study. Estimate time- Program Evaluation & Review Technique (Probabilistic Approach)- Event
oriented network analysis- Optimistic, Pessimistic and Most likely time, Degree of variability in
average time, Probabilistic estimate, % utilization of resources. Resource Management: Types of
resource- Time, Men, Material, Machinery, Money, Space. Balancing of resource- Resource
Smoothing technique- Time constraint. Resource levelling technique- Resource constraint- Case
study. Resource optimization: Types of cost – Direct, Indirect and Total Cost. Variation of Cost with
time. Schedule Compression Techniques- Crashing, Fast Tracking & Re-estimation- Crash time and
crash cost. Optimize project cost for time and resource.CPM Cost model. Communication
Management: Communication Management- meaning and process, communication matrix,
Management information system, Guidelines of meeting- Case study. Risk Management: Risk
management – meaning and process, Risk identification and analysis techniques- FMEA and SWOT
analysis- Risk reporting and monitoring- Case study. Emerging trends in project Management:
Introduction to Theory of Constraints, Agile Project management - Case study. Stakeholder
Management – brief idea.
Text Book
3. Punmia B. C. and Khandelwal K.K., “Project Planning and Control with PERT/CPM”,
Laxmi publications, New Delhi, 1989.
4. "A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide) - Fifth Edition, An
American National Standard, ANSI/PMI 990001-2008"
References
6. Jerome D. Wiest and Ferdinand K. Levy, “A Management Guide to PERT/CPM”, Prentice Hall
of India Publishers Ltd., New Delhi, 1994.
7. Srinath L.S., “PERT & CPM- Principles and Applications”, Affiliated East West Press Pvt., Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2008
8. A Risk Management Standard, AIRMIC Publishers, ALARM, IRM: 2002
9. Gene Dixon, “Service Learning and Integrated Collaborative Project Management”, Project
Management Journal, DOI:10.1002/pmi, February 2011, pp.42-58
10. NPTEL videos at nptel.ac.in/courses/112102106 by Prof. Arun Kanda, Dept of
Mechanical Engineering, IIT, Delhi
Module No. of
Topics
No. Lectures
1.0 Project and its process
1.1 Define project and process, boundaries of project 1
1.2 Objectives and functions of Project management, characteristics of 1

projects, Organization structure / styles of project
1.3 Roles of project management group, project management office and its 1
role
1.4 Project knowledge area, project integration- process group interaction 1
1.5 Project flow, project life cycle- influencing factors, Case study 1
2.0 Project Formulation
2.1 Generation and Screening of PM ideas, Triple Constraint – Time, Cost and 1
Scope
2.2 TOR/ Project Charter/ SOW (Statement of Work)- Creation of project 2

Charter
2.3 Preliminary planning and estimate- Types of estimate- Ball park, 1

Parametric and Bottom up estimates
2.4 Project Presentation and Approval- Detailed Project Report and Approval 1
(Technical and Budget Sanction)
2.5 Project Finance - sources 1
2.6 Technology Transfer – PPP (BOT,BOLT, BOOT), Stakeholder Management 2
2.7 Case study - Tutorial 2
3.0 Time Management
3.1 Project Scope Management, Work break down structure -Activity/ Task- 2
Events- Case study. Project planning tools- Rolling wave planning
3.2 Gantt Charts, Milestone chart, Program Progress chart- Creating 2

milestone plan
3.3 Project Network- Fulkerson’s rules – A-O-A and A-O-N networks 2
Introduction to project management software
3.4 Analyze project time- Critical path method (deterministic approach- 2

activity oriented network analysis- Square network diagram
3.5 80-20 rule, type of time estimates - Case study 1

3.6 Project updating and monitoring- Case study 1
3.7 Estimate time- Program Evaluation & Review Technique (Probabilistic 2

Approach)- Event oriented network analysis- Optimistic, Pessimistic and
Most likely time, Degree of variability in average time, Probabilistic
estimate, % utilization of resources.
Tutorial 2
4.0 Resource Management
4.1 Types of resource- Time, Men, Material, Machinery, Money, Space. 1

Balancing of resource- need and purpose- Case study
4.2 Resource Smoothing technique- Time constraint 2
4.3 Resource levelling technique- Resource constraint 2
Tutorial 2
5.0 Resource optimization
5.1 Types of cost – Direct, Indirect and Total Cost. Variation of Cost with time. 2
Schedule Compression Techniques- Crashing, Fast Tracking & Re-
estimation Crash time and crash cost
5.2 Optimize project cost for time and resource- CPM Cost model- Case study 2
Tutorials 2
6.0 Communication & Risk Management
6.1 Communication Management- meaning and process, communication 1

matrix
6.2 Management information system, Guidelines of meeting- Case study 1
6.3 Risk management – meaning and process. Risk identification and analysis 1
techniques- FMEA and SWOT analysis
6.4 Risk reporting and monitoring- Case study 1
6.5 Emerging trends in project management: (Brief concept only)- Theory of 1

Constraints, Agile Project Management. Stakeholder management – brief
concept
Total Periods 48
Course Designers:

GE 3 0 0 3
14CEGE0 ROAD SAFETY
Preamble
The course has an exposure to the basic principles of road safety, traffic rules and
regulations. It provides broad ideas and suggestions for safety of vulnerable road users.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students will be able to: Expected Expected
Level (%) Level
(grade)
CO1 Enumerate the concepts of road safety and its Understand 70 A
principles
CO2 Enumerate the need for crash data and analysis Understand 70 A
CO3 Apply the knowledge of traffic flow concepts at Apply 70 A
intersections
CO4 Apply the knowledge of road markings, traffic signs Understand 70 A
and signals for safe driving
CO5 Enumerate the traffic policies and regulations for Understand 70 A
vulnerable road users
CO6 Enumerate the road safety management techniques Understand 70 A

CO47. L - - M - - - - - - - -
CO48. L - - M - - M - - - - -
CO3 M - L S - - M L - - - -
CO4 M - L S - - - L - - - -
CO5 L - - M - - - - - - - -
CO6 L - - M - - - - - - - -
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Blooms Test-1 Test-2 End semester
1. Remember 20 20 20
2. Understand 50 50 50
3. Apply 30 30 30
4. Analyze 0 0 0
5. Evaluate 0 0 0
6. Create 0 0 0

1. Define the term road safety based on science perspectives.

2. List various road demographics for understanding road safety.
3. Mention the various uses of crash data.
4. Draw a sketch of pedestrian crossing.
5. State the need for international standardization for traffic signs and signals.
1. Draw the sketch of half cloverleaf and shown the traffic flow directions.
2. List out the important sections of Motor Vehicle Act related to road safety.
3. List the regulatory measures for pedestrians.
4. Mentions few road safety management techniques adopted in the urban locations.
5. List the countermeasures to be taken to avoid accidents during driving.
6. Mention the traffic rules to be followed while driving in rural areas.
1. Discuss traffic management measures and their influence in the accident prevention
in metro cities.
2. Discuss the details required for preparation of collision diagram and crash data
analysis.
3. Draw a neat sketch of a four lane carriageway and discuss the lane markings,
obstruction approach marking, STOP lines and route markings.

1. Discuss the various causes of accidents.
2. Discuss the need for study on crash data.
3. Write the objectives of road safety management.
4. Discuss the role of Government and NGO’s in road safety management.
5. Discuss the merits and limitations of providing grade separated structures.
1. Compare the various types grade separated structures.

2. Discuss various types of signs used for road users.
3. Write the need for road safety management programs.
4. Write the significance of Motor vehicle Act in road safety in Indian Scenario.
5. Discuss the regulation given by Indian Government for vulnerable road users.
6. Discuss the essential road side facilities provided for road users.
Concept Map

S. No. Topics Periods
1.0 Nature of road safety
1.1 Introduction, definition - science based perspectives 1
1.2 Road safety demographics 2
1.3 Road user decisions 1
1.4 Classification of accidents, causes Origin, characteristics and uses 2

of crash data
1.5 Contributing to crash factors, countermeasures 2
2.0 Road markings
2.1 Functions, types, general principles 1
2.2 Carriageway marking, pedestrian crossing, cyclist crossing, 3

marking at parking space, object marking, word messages
3.0 Traffic Signs and Signals
3.1 Importance of traffic signs, need for international standardization, 2

general principles of traffic signing
3.2 Types of traffic signs – purposes 1
3.3 Advantages and disadvantages of traffic signals, signal faces, fixed 1

time signals
3.4 Vehicle actuated signals, concept of signal coordination 1
4.0 Road Safety Management
4.1 Introduction to traffic control aids 1
4.2 Street furnitures - types and purposes 1
4.3 Traffic islands and channelization – general principle and purposes, 3

street lighting
4.4 At grade intersection – types, conflict points 1
4.5 Grade separated structures – types, advantages and 1

disadvantages, traffic flow concepts
4.6 Traffic regulations – basic principles, Roles of Government and 2

NGO’s, Motor Vehicle Act – 1988
4.7 Rules of Road Regulations – 1989, National Road Safety Policy, 1

Parking regulations
4.8 Road side facilities and amenities – general principles and 1

purposes
5.0 Safe Driving
5.1 Tips and suggestions for safe driving at urban and rural locations 1
5.2 safety in long journey, driving in night times, hill roads and tunnels 2
5.3 vulnerable road user – regulatory measures for motor cycle and 2
scooter riders
5.4 Common rules for pedestrians and cyclists. 1

5.5 Case studies 2
Total Periods 36
Syllabus
Nature of road safety – science based perspectives, road safety demographics, and road
user decisions. Classification of accidents, blackspots, causes - roadside hazards, Origin,
characteristics and uses of crash data – contributing to crash factors, countermeasures.
Road markings – functions, types, general principles, carriageway marking, pedestrian
crossing, cyclist crossing, marking at parking space, object marking, word messages. Traffic
signs and signals – importance of traffic signs, need for international standardization,
general principles of traffic signing, types of traffic signs – purposes. Traffic signals -
Advantages and disadvantages, signal faces, fixed time signals, vehicle actuated signals,
concept of signal coordination. Road safety management – traffic control aids – street
furnitures, traffic islands and channelization, street lighting, at grade intersection – types,
conflict points, grade separated structures – types, advantages and disadvantages, traffic
flow concepts. Traffic regulations – basic principles, Roles of Government and NGO’s, Motor
Vehicle Act – 1988, Rules of Road Regulations – 1989, National Road Safety Policy, Parking
regulations. Road side facilities and amenities – general principles and purposes. Safe
Driving – Tips and suggestions for safe driving at urban and rural locations, safety in long
journey, driving in night times, hill roads and tunnels, vulnerable road user – regulatory
measures for motor cycle and scooter riders, common rules for pedestrians and cyclists.
Text Books
1. Kadiyali L.R, “Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning”, Khanna Publishers, New
Delhi, seventh edition, 2011.
References
11. Elvik Rune, “The Handbook of Road Safety Measures”, Emrald Group Publishing
Limited, 2nd revised edition 2009
12. Ashwini Bagga and Nisha Bagga, “Essentials of Road Safety”, Mayas Publishers,
2012
13. Highway Safety Code, Indian Road Congress, New Delhi, 1996
14. Transportation Planning Handbook, The Institute of Transportation Engineers,
Prentice Hall, Englewood Clifts, 1992
15. Code of Practice for Road Markings, IRC: 35 – 1970, revised edition, 1990
16. Recommended Practice for Road Delineators, IRC:79 Indian Road Congress, New
Delhi, 1981
17. The Diver’s Handbook, Government of South Australia, published in 2015
18. www.indiatransportportal.com, 2012
19. www.morth.nic.in
20. www.legislation.sa.gov.au
Course Designers:
1. D.Srividya dsciv@tce.edu
2. Dr. R.Velkennedy rvkciv@tce.edu
14CEGF0 BASICS OF CLIMATE SCIENCE AND
POLICY Category L T P Credit
GE 3 0 0 3
Preamble
Science has established the existence of climate change and related anthropogenic activity
as the leading cause of it. There is a need to understand climate science, the implications on
various regions, resources, societies, and to study ways of mitigating its impacts. Role of
policies and measures are also equally important. The aims of this course are to provide
basic understanding about the climate system: its attributes, underlying processes, and the
drivers of climate change. This course will provide basic understanding about important
climate variables, which are indicators and predictors of the changes in the climatic systems.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
P
Level Level
(grade)
(%)
CO1 Explain the workings of the climate systems 80 B
and feedback mechanisms. Understand
CO2 80 B
Apply
Apply climate science related knowledge to
solve societal problems
CO3 Assess the Climate related Issues in different Apply 80 B

engineering Disciplines.
CO4 Choose relevant options (technological and 80 B

policy) for mitigating climate change Apply

CO49. S M - - - - - S - M - -
CO50. S S S M - M L - S L L -
CO3 S S S M - - M L L L M L
CO4 S M - S - S S L L L S L
Assessment Pattern
S.No Blooms Test – 1 Test – 2 Test – 3 / End
Category semester
examination
1 Remember 20 20 20
3 Apply 30 30 30
4 Analyze 0 0 0
5 Evaluate 0 0 0
6 Create 0 0 0
1. With a help of case studies discuss why climate change is irreversible

2. Summarize your views on climate change and explore the answers for unanswered
questions behind it.
3. Critically analyze the roles and responsibilities of various agencies towards fighting
Global Warming and Climate change.
4. How climate change affects human health in dry and arid region?
5. The consumption of fuel in India is increasing everyday and cost of it too. Propose a
suitable alternate fuel for the future after analyzing the pros and cons of its
implementation.
1. List the Green House gases.

2. Draw the atmospheric profile of temperature
3. Define carbon foot print.
4. Define the term low carbon economy
5. What is Kyoto protocol
1. Write funding status of Indian Government on climate change mitigation and

adaptation.
2. Review the India’s policy initiatives towards climate change
3. Discuss in detail about climate sensitivity and its feedback.
4. Discuss the classification of climate.
1. Explain the Global warming phenomenon and its effect.

2. Discuss the uncertainties in the projected impact of climate change.
3. Discuss the relation between global ocean circulation and climate change.
4. Discuss the factor to be considered for the preparation of flood inundation plant for
your city.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Understanding climate science: Fundamentals of meteorology, atmospheric vertical profile
of temperature and pressure, microphysical processes in the atmosphere.
Introduction to components of climate science: Climate System and Interaction among
components of climate system and feedback mechanisms, Atmospheric thermodynamics,
radiation in the atmosphere, greenhouse gases and climate forcing. overview for weather
systems: extreme weather events and western disturbances. Paleoclimatology:
Introduction of the concept, measurement techniques, Heinrich events and Dansgaard-
Oeschger events and its relevance studies. Aerosol science: Introduction and overview of
aerosols, properties of atmospheric aerosols; carbonaceous aerosols; radiative effects of
Atmospheric aerosols; direct and indirect effects of aerosol particles.Overview of climate
change impacts and mitigation: Overview of climate change and its impacts; time series
trends of important climate variables temperature and precipitation, Introduction to mitigation
of GHGs and stabilization scenario; characteristics of mitigation in regional and national
context; long term and short term mitigation options; Linkages between mitigation and
adaptation of climate change. Mitigation from cross sector perspective and its linkages with
sustainable development- case study based approach. Governance and Policy
Instruments: market based approaches (CDM, REDD, REDD plus); Co-operatives
arrangements for implementation; National Action Plan on Climate change (Mitigation
specific Missions); Nationwide policies for alternate energy programmes; alternate energy
crops programmes and afforestation; Regulatory approaches (command and control, flexible
mechanism and voluntary measure), Micro level initiative (Panchayat Raj institutions)
Text Book
1. Banerjee K.K.(2005) Global Warming Database Technology Options in Power and
End-use Sectors Using Fossil Fuels, New Delhi.
2. Gupta M.(2006) Restricting Greenhouse Gas Emissions: Economic Implications for
India, New Delhi.
Reference Books
1. Barbara J., Pitts F. and Pitts J.N.,Jr (2000) Chemistry of the Upper and Lower Atmosphere-
Theory, Experiments and Applications Academic Press, San Diego.
2. Climate Change Science: An Analysis of Some Key Questions-National Academy of
Sciences Committee on the Science of Climate Change, (National Academy Press,
Washington, DC, 2001.
3. Marshall J. and Plumb R.A. (2001) Atmosphere, Ocean and Climate, Elsevier, Amsterdam.
4. Oliver J.E. and Hidore J.J. (2008) Climatology: An Atmospheric Science, Prentice Hall.
5. Seinfeld J.H. and Pandis S.N. (2006) Atmospheric Chemistry and Physics-from Air Pollution
to Climate Change, John Wiley and Sons, INC.
6. Hardy J.(2003) Climate Change: Causes, Effects and Solutions, John Wily & Sons.
7. Nakicenovic N. (Eds) (1993) Integrative Assessment of Mitigation, Impacts and Adaptation
to Climate Change, Austria.
8. Sathaye J. and Meyers S.D.(1995) Greenhouse Gas Mitigation Assessment: A Guidebook,
Kluwer.
9. Thomas S.(2003) Policy Instruments for Environment and Natural Resource Management,
RFF Publication, Washington DC.
10. Tiwari G.N.(2003) Greenhouse Technology for Controlled Environment, New Delhi.
Course content and Lecture schedule

Module No. of
Topics
No Lectures
1.0 Understanding Climate science
1.1 Fundamentals of meteorology 1
1.2 Atmospheric vertical profile of temperature and pressure 2
1.3 Microphysical processes in the atmosphere 1
2.0 Introduction to Components of climate science
Climate System and Interaction among components of climate
2.1 1
system and feedback mechanisms
2.2 Atmospheric thermodynamics 1
2.3 Radiation in the atmosphere 1
2.4 Greenhouse gases and climate forcing 2
Overview for weather systems: extreme weather events and
2.5 1
western Disturbances
3.0 Paleoclimatology
3.1 Introduction of the concept 1
3.2 Measurement techniques 1
Heinrich events and Dansgaard-Oeschger events and its relevance
3.3 2
Studies
4.0 Aerosol science
4.1 Introduction and overview of aerosols 1
Properties of Atmospheric aerosols
4.2 1
4.3 Carbonaceous aerosols 1

4.4 Radiative effects of Atmospheric aerosols 1
4.5 Direct and indirect effects of aerosol particles 2
5.0 Overview of climate change impacts and mitigation
5.1 Overview of climate change and its impacts 1
Time series trends of important climate variables temperature and
5.2 1
precipitation
5.3 Introduction to mitigation of GHGs and stabilization scenario 1
5.4 Characteristics of mitigation in regional and national context 2
5.5 Long term and short term mitigation options 1
5.6 Linkages between mitigation and adaptation of climate change 1
Mitigation from cross sector perspective and its linkages with
5.7 2
sustainable development- case study based approach.
6.0 Governance and Policy Instruments
6.1 Market based approaches (CDM, REDD, REDD plus) 1
6.2 Co-operatives arrangements for implementation 1
6.3 National Action Plan on Climate change (Mitigation specific Missions) 1
6.4 Nationwide policies for alternate energy programmes 1
6.5 Alternate energy crops programmes and afforestation 1
Regulatory approaches (command and control, flexible mechanism
6.6 1
and voluntary measure)
6.7 Micro level initiative (Panchayati Raj institutions) 1
TOTAL 36
Course Designers
1. Mr. V. RaviSankar environmentengr@tce.edu
2 .Dr. S. Chandran schandran@tce.edu
14CE1A0 PRACTICAL VALUATION 1 0 0 1
Preamble
This course addresses the overall idea of Practical Valuation of land and buildings.
Prerequisite
Nil
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the Expected Expected

course, students will be able to Attainment Proficiency
CO1 Identify the factors influencing Understand 80 S
valuation of a property
CO2 Apply the principles of valuation for Apply 80 S
Valuation of open land, Building,
plant and Machinery.
CO3 Calculate the value of a property Apply 80 S
through various methods of valuation
and prepare reports based on
international financial reporting
system
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PSO2
CO51. M - - - - L - - - - - - L -
CO52. S - - - - L - - - - - - L -
CO3 S - - - - L - - - - - L L -
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Test
1
Remember 20 20
Understand 40 40
Apply 40 40
Analyse - -
Evaluate - -
Create - -
1. Define Cost, Price, and Value and Explain different kinds of properties
2. What are the different methods of valuation?
3. Define Plinth area, floor area, Carpet area? Whether super built up area is
recognized by BIS
4. Indicate any five different purpose of Valuation

1. What are the factors affecting value in General?
2. What are the two Principal interests in a property
3. Explain FSI, Floor area Ratio, Plot Coverage, Set Backs
4. Describe various types of Value.
5. Explain in detail about hypothetical value alongwith examples and comment on
whether hypothetical value can be adopted in valuation

1. For a plot of 300 sq. m area, estimate the approximate cost of construction of the
building meant for I.T.Purpose situated in the outskirts of city limit
2. For a residential building on the first floor of a 2-storey building in a Madurai
Palanganatham area with 15 years of construction, fix the rent as per Tamil Nadu
Rent Contract Act. Justify your suggestions.
3. What are all the aspects to be considered in report writing for the purpose of
Valuation for Banks?
4. Explain about salient features of IFRS and its relevance to Valuation of properties.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Principles of Valuation, Purpose of Valuation, Kinds of Value, Factors affecting Value of

property, Different methods of Valuation, Valuation of open land, Land & Building, Valuation
of Flats for Various purposes, Valuation under Direct Taxes, Procedure to determine Fair
Rent, Procedure of Estimating Rent for Private Building, Ground Rent, Valuation of
Leasehold properties, Plant & Machinery Valuation, Valuation for Accounting Standards,
International Financial Reporting System
Reference Books
1. Kanagasabapathy. B, “Practical Valuation” Vol I to VIII, M/s. Ezhilarasi

Kanaga Sabapathy, Tiruchirappalai
2. Syamales Datta, “ Valuation of Real Property”, Eastern Law House Private
Ltd, Calcutta, 2004
3. Roshan H.Namavati, “Theory & Practice of Valuation”, Lakhani Book Depot,
Mumbai, 2010
4. Gopinatha Rao. C.H., “Valuation practice of Immovable properties” 2005
5. Banerjee D.N., “Principles & Practice of Valuation” 5th Edition, Eastern Law
House Private Ltd, Calcutta,1998
6. Gupta P.C., “Valuation of Plant and Machinery”
7. L.Balaji, Course material on Practical Valuation

S.No. Topic No. of
Lectures
1. Principles of Valuation 1
2. Purpose of Valuation 1
3 Kinds of Value 1
4 Factors affecting Value of property 1
5. Different methods of Valuation 1
6. Valuation of open land, Land & Building 1
7. Valuation of Flats for Various purposes 1
8. Valuation under Direct Taxes 1
9. Procedure to determine Fair Rent 1
10. Procedure of Estimating Rent for Private Building, Ground Rent 1
11. Valuation of Leasehold properties 1
12. Plant & Machinery Valuation 1
13. Valuation for Accounting Standards 1
14. International Financial Reporting System 1
TOTAL 14
Course designers
Er. L. Balaji, valuerbalaji@yahoo.co.in

14CE1B0 ARBITRATION AND DISPUTE PE 1 0 0 1
RESOLUTION
Preamble
This course will create awareness on contracts for construction industry, laws on arbitration,
arbitration procedure and laws on dispute resolution in India.
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the graduates will Expected Expected

be able to: Attainment Proficiency
C01. Enumerate the laws on contracts for Understand 80 S

construction industry in India, procedure for
arbitration and dispute resolution
CO2 Apply appropriate methods to assess the Apply 80 S

. critical factors in contracts leading to
arbitration and disputes between the parties
CO3 Suggest suitable type of arbitration or Apply 80 S

. dispute resolution for the situation of
problem

COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PSO2
M
CO1. M M M L - - - - - M - L -
S - -
CO2. S M M M - - - - M L -
S - -
CO3. S M M M - - - - M L -
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Test 1 Test 2 End -semester

1. Remember 30 30 30
2. Understand 40 40 40
3. Apply 30 30 30
4. Analyze 0 0 0
5. Evaluation 0 0 0
6. Create 0 0 0
Concept Map
1. Mention various types of contracts
2. Write the essentials of contract
3. Discuss the essentials and clauses of contract.
4. Discuss the Geneva Protocols and its conventions.
5. Explain in detail UNCITRAL model law and its application

1. Differentiate between Negotiation, mediation and reconciliation.
2. Explain the dispute resolution mechanism in Indian system.
3. There is a dispute between the contractor and the funding organization of a project on
interpretation of quantum of work for payment of wages to the contractor. As an
arbitrator for this case, discuss the procedure and powers you would exercise to settle
the dispute in an unbiased manner.

1. Explain the litigation in the Indian courts on disputes.
2. A highway is under distress which requires repair. The repair is to be let out as
contracting work by calling for tenders. Identify a suitable type of contract that can be
undertaken for the repair work with suitable reasons.
No. Lectures
1.0 Introduction to contracts in construction industry
1.1 Brief details of engineering contracts – definition, types and essentials of 1
contracts, clauses of contract
1.2 Brief details of Geneva protocols and its conventions. 1
2.0 Arbitration of Engineering Contracts
2.1 Background of Arbitration in India, Indian Arbitration Act 1996, UNCITRAL 1
model law
2.2 Forms of arbitration – arbitration agreement, Commencement of arbitral 1
proceedings, Constitution of arbitral tribunal
2.3 Institutional procedure of arbitration, Impartiality and independence of 2
arbitrator’s jurisdiction of arbitral tribunal, Interim measures, Enforcement of
awards.
2.4 Negotiation, Mediation and conciliation – concepts and purpose 1
2.5 Statutory back ground ADR and mediation rules 1
2.6 Duty of mediator and disclose facts, Power of Court in mediation. 1
3.0 Alternate Dispute resolution
3.1 Structure of Indian Judicial, The arbitration and reconciliation ordinance 1
1996
3.2 The dispute resolution mechanism under the Indian judicial System 1
3.3 Litigation in Indian courts 1
3.4 case studies 2
Total Periods 14
Syllabus
Introduction to contracts in construction industry: Brief details of engineering contracts
– definition, types and essentials of contracts, – brief details of Geneva protocols and its
conventions. Arbitration of Engineering Contracts – Background of Arbitration in India,
Indian Arbitration Act 1937, UNCITRAL model law, forms of arbitration – arbitration
agreement, Commencement of arbitral proceedings, Constitution of arbitral tribunal,
Institutional procedure of arbitration, Impartiality and independence of arbitrators jurisdiction
of arbitral tribunal, Interim measures, Enforcement of awards. Negotiation, Mediation and
conciliation – concepts and purpose, statutory back ground ADR and mediation rules, Duty
of mediator and disclose facts, Power of Court in mediation. Alternate Dispute resolution -
Structure of Indian Judicial, The arbitration and reconciliation ordinance 1996, The dispute
resolution mechanism under the Indian judicial System, Litigation in Indian courts, case
studies.
References
1. B.J. Vasavada, “Engineering Contracts and Arbitration”, Jubilee Publications, 1996
2. Roshan Namavati, “Professional Practice”, Lakhani Book Depot, 2013
Course Designer:
Er. Sanna Ratnavel, Sceba Consultancy Services, Madurai, ratsiit@gmail.com

14CE1C0 DURABILITY OF CONCRETE PE 1 0 0 1

STRUCTURES
Preamble
Durable concrete will retain its original form, quality and serviceability when exposed to the
environment. This course gives an exposure to the importance and need for making durable
concrete with overview on factors affecting durability
Prerequisite
Fundamentals of Concrete Technology.
Course Outcomes
Expected Expected
CO1 Identify and describe the materials 80 S
used in production of concrete Understand
along with concrete properties
CO2 Infer the need for making durable 80 S

concrete and the factors affecting Understand
durability of concrete.
CO3 Predict the deterioration in concrete 80 S

structures Understand
CO4 Infer crack occurrence and crack 80 S
measurement techniques Understand

CO1. - - - - - - M - - - - - - -
CO2. M M M L - - - - - - L - L -
CO3. M M M M - - - L L - L - L -
CO4. L M L - - M S L - L L - L -
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1
Remember 20 20
Understand 80 80
Apply --- ---
Analyse --- ---
Evaluate --- ---
Create --- ---

1. List the transport properties of concrete

2. Discuss the admixtures used in concrete
3. Can we control the coefficient of thermal expansion of concrete? If so, how?
1. What do you understand by the term durability?

2. Explain the factors governing the durability of concrete.
3. Defend the importance of durability considerations in the design and construction of
concrete structures.
1. Outline the causes of corrosion of rebar in concrete

2. Briefly explain the causes and controlling of scaling and D-cracking in concrete
3. Explain alkali silica reaction
1. List the crack classification

2. Identify the sources of crack development in concrete
3. Explain the crack measurement techniques in detail.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Basic properties of concrete, special admixtures, alternatives, binders, pozzolanic materials
and their reaction process in concrete, micro structure of concrete, shrinkage, creep and
strength of concrete, effect of temperature on concrete, transport properties of concrete,
tensile, shear bond and torsional strength of plain and reinforced concrete. Definition of
durability and service life of concrete, causes of inadequate durability, need for durable
concrete, factors responsible for durable concrete. Deterioration processes in concrete
corrosion of steel in concrete, acid attack, alkali-silica attack, sulphate attack, alkali-
carbonate reaction, efflorescence, scaling, erosion, alkali-silicate reaction, abrasion
resistance, cavitations resistance, freezing-thawing resistance, fire resistance, microbial
attack on concrete, leaching effects in concrete and testing for all these durability measures.
Health monitoring of concrete structures - durability measuring devices.Methods of
enhancing durability of concrete - re-alkalization of concrete and chloride removal from
concrete. Cracking of concrete: Classification of cracks, crack width crack spacing, crack
development and measuring techniques.
Reference Books
1. P. Kumar Mehta ,Paulo J. M. Monteiro, “Concrete: Microstructure, Properties, and

Materials”, McGraw Hill Publication, 2014
2. A.M. Neville, “Properties of Concrete”, Pearson Publication, 2011

Module Topic No. of
No. Lectures
1.0 General Details of concrete
1.1 Properties of Concrete
1.2 Special admixtures
1.3 Alternatives
2
1.4 Binders
1.5 Pozzolanic materials and their reaction process in concrete
1.6 Micro structure of concrete
1.7 Shrinkage, creep and strength of concrete
1.8 Effect of temperature on concrete
1.9 Transport Properties of concrete 1
1.10 Tensile, shear bond and torsional strength of plain and reinforced
concrete
2.0 Durability/ Service life
2.1 Definition of durability and service life of concrete, causes of
inadequate durability
1
2.2 Need for durable concrete
2.3 Factors responsible for durable concrete
3.0 Deterioration processes in concrete
3.1 Corrosion of steel in concrete
3.2 Acid attack and Sulphate attack 1
3.3 Alkali-silica reaction
3.4 Abrasion resistance, cavitations resistance
3.5 Freezing-thawing resistance 1
3.6 Fire resistance
3.7 Microbial attack on concrete
1
3.8 Leaching effects in concrete
3.9 Various Tests on Durability 2
Health monitoring of concrete structures – durability measuring
2
devices
Methods of enhancing durability of concrete - re-alkalization of
1
concrete and chloride removal from concrete
4.0 Cracking of concrete
4.1 Classification of cracks
1
4.2 Crack width crack spacing
4.3 Crack development and measuring techniques 1
TOTAL 14
Course Designers:
6. Dr. R. Selvarajselvarajcecri@gmail.com
14CE1D0 GREEN CONSTRUCTION PE 1 0 0 1
Preamble
This course will create awareness on the impact of constructions on the environment and the
various techniques of mitigating the adverse impacts
Prerequisite
Knowledge on building construction
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of Expected Expected

the course, students will be able Attainment Proficiency
to: Level (%) Level (grade)
CO1 Enumerate the aspects of green Understand 80 S

construction and certification
systems
CO2 Select materials and appropriate Apply 80 S

construction technologies for the
green construction
CO3 Plan green buildings knowing Apply 80 S

various innovative techniques
CO4 Apply concept of sustainability to Apply 80 S

various construction activities
CO5 Suggest Mitigation measures for Apply 80 S

environmental degradation
CO6 Address Impact of Life cycle Apply 80 S

effects, durability and certification
process

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 - - - - - - M - - - - - - -
CO2 M M M L - - - - - - L - L -
CO3 M M M M - - - L L - L - L L
CO4 L M L - - M S L - L L - L L
CO5 - L M M - M S - - L L - - L
CO6 L - - - - - - - - - M L - -
Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1
Remember 10 10
Understand 50 40
Apply 40 50
Analyze -- --
Evaluate -- --
Create -- --

1. Write the meaning of green construction mentioning its need

2. Discuss the various aspects and measures taken to make a building green
3. Enumerate the salient features of green certification systems with purpose
1. List few materials used in green construction

2. Relate sustainability with green construction with reasons
3. As a civil engineer having the knowledge on green construction, identify the material and
technologies you would recommend for your buildings to attain sustainability. Discuss with
suitable reasons

1. Discuss the principles of planning for green construction
2. Enumerate various innovative technologies for green buildings
3. Differentiate green and smart buildings with examples

1. Define desertification and its relation with sustainability
2. Identify strategies you would consider for implementation of an eco-
development programme for Madurai city
3. With the knowledge of green construction materials identify suitable measures
to minimize environmental impacts in construction projects

1. Relate development with environmental degradation
2. Suggest suitable scheme to protect and enhance the living environment in and
around TCE campus
3. For an existing traditional building identify suitable technologies to convert it into
a green building with cost effectiveness
Address Impact of Life cycle effects, durability and certification process
1. Compare GRIHA and IGBC rating systems

2. Discuss the measures/ schemes contributing to good construction practice
3. Enumerate the techniques you would implement for energy saving in your residence.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Aspects of green construction and certification systems: Global warming - Pollution -
Degradation of the environment - Unsustainable use of materials - IGBC - LEED - GRIHA.
Selection of materials and appropriate construction technologies: Embodied energy of
materials - incorporation of pollutants and recycled materials - alternative technologies in
construction. Planning of green buildings and various innovative techniques: Solar
passive techniques - traditional and innovative techniques. Sustainability of construction
activities: Wood - Water - Aggregates - Raw materials. Mitigation of environmental
degradation: Improving IAQ - reducing noise pollution - construction waste management.
Life cycle effects, durability, and certification process: Energy reduction in buildings
maintenance - Repairs and rehabilitation - Requisites of good construction practice -
Process for obtaining green certification.
Reference Books
1. Bureau of Energy Efficiency, “Energy Conservation Building Code 2007”, Ministry of
Power, Government of India
2. Wright, R.T., and Nebel, B.J., “Environmental Science - Toward a Sustainable
Future”, 2002, Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi
3. Jagadish, K.S., Venkatarama Reddy, B.V., Nanjunda Rao, K.S., “Alternative Building
Materials and Techonologies”, 2007, New Age International (P) Limited
4. CII and IGBC, “Training Programme on ‘LEED’ Green Building Rating System”
5. USGBC, “Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major
Renovations - Version 2.2”, 2005
6. Resource Material to be provided by the course handling expert

Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1.0 Aspects of green construction and certification systems
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1.1 Global warming, Pollution & Degradation of the environment 1
1.2 Unsustainable use of materials - IGBC - LEED - Griha 1

2.0 Selection of materials and appropriate construction technologies
2.1 Embodied energy of materials 1
2.2 Incorporation of pollutants and recycled materials 1
2.3 Alternative technologies in construction 1
3.0 Planning of green buildings and various innovative techniques
3.1 Solar passive techniques 1
3.2 Traditional and innovative techniques 1
4.0 Sustainability of construction activities

4.1 Wood , Water, Aggregates & Raw materials 2
5.0 Mitigation of environmental degradation
5.1 Improving IAQ - Reducing noise pollution 1

5.2 Cconstruction waste management 1
6.0 Life cycle effects, durability, and certification process
6.1 Energy reduction in buildings maintenance 1

6.2 Repairs and rehabilitation 1
6.3 Requisites of good construction practice & Process for obtaining green 1
certification
TOTAL 14 Hrs
Course Designers:
1. Er. S.P. Srinivasan, MD, ES Consultancy Services, Madurai er.spsvasan@gmail.com
14CE1E0 PRECAST TECHNOLOGY IN BUILDINGS PE 1 0 0 1
Preamble
Precast is an industrialized way to build. It means transfer of work from sites to factories which
improves productivity, quality and shortens construction time of a building. Precast also has lower
lifetime costs than any other building solution. This is possible due to consistent high quality of
industrially produced products.
Precast suits well for any type of building namely; residential, commercial, industrial, public etc. This
course gives an exposure on the need and importance of using precast technology along with
awareness on the technology.
Prerequisite
Knowledge on building construction
Course Outcomes

students will be able to: Attainment level Proficiency
(%) level (grade)
CO1 Compare Precast and cast in-situ technology Understand 80 S

with implementation challenges
CO2 Explain the details of production erection of Understand 80 S

Hollow core slab with precautions to be taken
CO3 Identify the planning aspects for precast Understand 80 S
projects along with Machinery usage
CO4 Enumerate the details of Stacking, Handling, Apply 80 S
Transportation and Erection of precast
elements with precautions
CO5 Discuss the fixing and jointing in precast Apply 80 S

buildings with construction sequence

CO53. L - - - - - M - - - - - - -
CO54. L - - - - - - - - M - - - -
CO3 L - M - - M L - M M M L L L
CO4 L L - M - - L - L M - - L L
CO5. L L M M - - - - - M - - L -

Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Category Test 1 End -semester
Examination
1. Remember 20 20
2. Understand 50 40
3. Apply 30 40
4. Analyze 0 0
5. Evaluation 0 0
6. Create 0 0

119. Mention the need and advantages of using precast technology

120. Define the term modular co-ordination mentioning its purpose
121. Discuss the challenges that would faced while implementing precast
technology in relation to Indian context
122. Enumerate the factors you would consider when deciding to implement
precast concrete construction
123. Explain the details to be noted in the production of hollow core slabs
124. Discuss the merits of hollow core slabs over solid slabs mentioning the
applications of each
125. Enumerate the precautions to be taken in erection of hollow core slabs
mentioning its need
126. Explain the points you would consider in planning of precast projects
127. As an engineer in-charge of precast installation illustrate the provisions
and precautions you would consider in jointing of components
128. Discuss the machinery used with purpose in precast construction
129. As an engineer discuss the process of stacking of precast units

considering a specific unit with precautions to be taken
130. Discuss the points to be considered in transportation of precast units
131. Discuss the precautions to be taken while erection of precast elements
132. As an site engineer identify the sequence of fixing and jointing of wall
panels in a buildings
133. Discuss the tolerances to be provided while fixing and jointing of
precast elements
134. Discuss the good practices in jointing of elements
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction to precast technology in residential /commercial building - Challenges in
market to familiarize the technology - Hollow core slab production /erection - Machinery
used in precast projects - General functioning of project site - General planning for precast
projects - Different types of Casting yard/bay - Different types of Mould - Handling of
precast elements - Stacking of precast elements -Transportation of precast element -
Erection of precast elements - Fixing & jointing in precast buildings - Typical Construction
Sequence of precast buildings.
Reference Books
1. IS: 15916 -2011, “Building Design and Erection using Prefabricated Concrete – Code of
Practice”
2. NBN EN 1168-2005, “Precast Concrete Products - Hollow Core Slabs”

Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
1.0 Precast Technologies in Buildings
1.1 Introduction to Precast Technologies in residential and 1
commercial buildings
1.2 Challenges in implementation of Precast Technologies 1
1.2.1 Hollow Core slab production/ erection 1
1.3 Machineries used for precast projects 1
1.3.1 General functions of project site 1
1.3.2 General planning for precast projects 1
2.0 Installation of precast products
2.1 Types of casting yards/ bay for precast products 1
2.1.1 Different types of moulds used for precast products 1
2.1.2 Handling of precast elements 1
Module No. of
Topic
No. Lectures
2.1.3 Stacking of precast elements 1
2.2 Transportation of precast elements 1
2.2.1 Erection of precast elements 1
2.2.2 Fixing and jointing in precast buildings 1
2.3 Typical construction sequence of precast buildings 1
TOTAL 14
Course Designers:
1. Mr. R. Karunanithi, karunanithi@lntecc.com
L&T, Bangalore
14CE1F0 FRAMING OF STRUCTURES AND OPTIMUM Category L T P Credits
FOUNDATION SYSTEMS
PE 1 0 0 1
Preamble
This course is framed to give an overview on the guidelines for idealisation and basic concepts in
framing of structures along with optimum foundation systems.
Prerequisite
Knowledge on structural analysis and design of RCC and Steel elements
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the Expected Expected
course, students will be able to: Attainment level Proficiency
(%) level (grade)
CO1 Understand the concept of load Understand 80 S

transferring mechanism and various
components of structures.
CO2 Enumerate the details of RCC structural Understand 80 S

behaviour and their Reinforcement
detailing
CO3 Enumerate the details of Steel Apply 80 S

structural behaviour and their
Reinforcement detailing
CO4 Identify and choose an appropriate Apply 80 S

foundation systems for a given situation

CO55. M L L L - - - - - - - - L -
CO56. M M L L - - - - - - - L L -
CO3. M M L L - - - - - - - L L -
CO4. M M M M - - - - - - - - L -

Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Category Test 1 End -semester Examination
1. Remember 20 20
2. Understand 50 40
3. Apply 30 40
4. Analyze 0 0
5. Evaluation 0 0
6. Create 0 0

135. Mention the meaning of framed structures with its purpose

136. Discuss the load transfer mechanism in framed structures
137. Compare Frame structures with Normal Load bearing Traditional High
Rise Building
138. Discuss the structural behaviour of framed structures

139. Discuss the do’s and dont’s in detailing of RCC beam
140. By means of a sketch explain the points to be considered at the junction
of framed structures
1. Enumerate the precautions to be noted while designing steel framed structures

2. Discuss the behaviour of steel structural members in seismic prone areas
3. Draw and explain the junction details to be provided for steel and concrete
structures
141. List the types of foundation systems to be used in framed structures

142. Discuss the guidelines to be used in design of optimum foundation
systems for framed structures
143. Identify an appropriate foundation system for a framed structure in a
seismic prone area and discuss the guidelines for construction
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction to framing of structure: Introduction –Structures-Types- Practical suitability
of framed structures and load bearing structures- Functional requirements of
structures and its components. Components of structures – slab, beam, column &
footing in RCC structures- Chequered plate flooring/grating, Steel beams & Columns,
bracings –vertical & horizontal. Loads – appropriate Loading considerations in
various structures. Load path and load transfer mechanism-Engineer’s handiness in
load transfer in structures- Load combinations. Behaviour of RCC structures and its
framing concepts: Behaviour of structures – Bending, shear, deflection, sway &
torsion- Explanation on control of behaviour of structure’s exclusively on engineer’s
idea. Framing concepts –Rigid framed structures –- Orientation of columns- Beams
framing arrangement in floors – Primary beams & secondary beams concepts. Pinned
& rigidity end connections Concepts using reinforcement detailing with practical
implications in RCC structures. Framing Concepts of Steel Structures: Framing
concepts – steel structures-Rigid, semi-rigid & braced structures . Rigid and shear
connections of steel beams – Effective bracing pattern. Foundation systems –
overview- Explanation on Foundations for RCC structures and steel structures.
Introduction to Foundation System: Foundation systems –FFL (finished floor levels),
FGL (Finished ground level) , NGL (Natural ground level). Soil investigation report
study- required inputs from soil investigation. Overall Discussions/Q&A/ Case
studies/Practical challenges in design and construction.
Text Book
1. P. Purushothaman, “Reinforced Concrete Structural Elements: Behaviour, Analysis and
Design”, 1984, McGraw-Hill Inc.,US
2. S.Unnikrishna Pillai, Devdas Menon, “Reinforced concrete design”, 2005, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co. Ltd.
3. S.K.Duggal, “Design of Steel Structures”, 2000, Tata McGraw Hill Education
4. IS 456: 2000: Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete
5. IS 800: 2007: Code of Practice –General construction in steel

Module No. of
Topics
No. Lectures
1.0
Introduction to framing of structure
1.1 Introduction –Structures-Types- Functional requirements of structures 1
and its components. Components of structures.
1.2 Loads – appropriate Loading considerations in various structures. 2
Load path and load transfer mechanism- Load combinations
2.0
Behaviour of RCC structures and its framing concepts
2.1 Behaviour of structures – Bending, shear, deflection, sway & torsion. 2
2.2 Framing concepts -Primary beams & secondary beams concepts. 1
Pinned & rigidity end connections
2.2.1 Concepts using reinforcement detailing with practical implications in 1
RCC structures
3.0
Framing Concepts of Steel Structures
Framing concepts – steel structures-Rigid, semi-rigid & braced 2
3.1 Structures Rigid and shear connections of steel beams – Effective
bracing pattern
3.2 Foundation systems – overview- Explanation on Foundations for RCC 1
structures and steel structures.
4.0 Introduction to Foundation System
4.1 Foundation systems –FFL (finished floor levels), FGL (Finished 1

ground level) , NGL (Natural ground level).
4.1.1 Soil investigation report study- required inputs from soil investigation 1
4.2 Overall Discussions/Q&A/ Case studies/Practical challenges in design 2
and construction
TOTAL 14
Course Designers:
1. S. Prasanna, Category L T P Credit
Assistant s.l.prasanna@gmail.com
Manager
Structural
Design, L&T,
Chennai
14CE1G0 LARGE SCALE SYSTEMS PE 1 0 0 1
Preamble
The aim of this course is to sensitize the undergraduates about the basic concepts of
systems engineering methodologies to approach the Socio-Techno problems in a holistic
manner. This course will address the basic concepts of cause-effect impacts due to the
interrelationships of components and elements of systems in a complex environment.
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course students will be Expected Expected

able to: Attainment Proficiency
CO1 Identify tools for process of forecasting Understand 80 S

and assessment -the indented and
unintended impacts on policies and
technological solutions
CO2 Participate and coordinate in group Understand 80 S

discussions in organizations.
CO3 Understand the components and elements Apply 80 S

involved in DPR, FR, EIA, EMS and
Resettlement & Rehabilitations programs.
CO4 Understand the problem situation for Understand 80 S

higher level policy discussion on any
societal and technological issues
seamlessly in all domains.
CO57. L L --- --- --- M S M --- S L L --- L
CO58. L L --- --- --- --- S M --- S --- --- --- L
CO3 L M M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L
CO4 L --- M --- --- M S M --- S --- --- --- L

Assessment Pattern
S.No Bloom’s Category End-Semester

examination
1. Remember 20
2. Understand 40
3. Apply 40
4. Analyze 0
5. Evaluate 0
6. Create 0
CO1:
1. Define Systems?
2. Distinguish Boolean algebra and Conventional Martix
3. List the steps involved in value system design.
4. Mention the steps involved in Project Planning.
5. State the “Law of requisite theory”.
CO2:
1. Compare System and organism.

2. Discuss various components of System.
3. Explain the System Behaviors with examples.
4. Discuss Constraints Theory with an example.
5. Discuss the components of System Behaviour.
CO3:
1. Narrate any technology that interacts with society environment.

2. Identify the various needs to combat the educational challenges in India.
3. Draw the intent structures for education and energy supply.
4. Discuss the various Objectives, constraints, alterable measures for personal
transportation in India in 2050 Interrelations
5. Create a system dynamics model population growth, health, industry and
environment.
Concept Map

No. Lectures
1.0 Knowledge on Concepts
1.1 Systems, Systems Thinking, Cybernetics 1
1.2 Contextual Relations, Systems Morphology 1
1.3 Systems Behaviour 1
1.4 Digraph Concepts 1
2.0 Knowledge of Methodologies
2.1 Brain storming 1
2.2 Boolean Concepts 1
2.3 Interaction Matrix 1
2.4 Casual Loop Methods 1
3.0 Knowledge of Applications

3.1 Group Discussions 1
3.2 Need Analysis 1
3.3 Project Planning, Program Planning 1
3.4 Value System Design 1
3.5 Feasibility Studies 1
3.6 Impact Studies 1
Total Periods 14
Syllabus
Systems thinking: Introduction, Problem Situation, Systems & Cybernatics, System

Models, Hard/Soft Systems, Soft Systems Methodology, Soft System Examples/Case
studies, Ashby’s Requisite Variety Theory. Systems Methodology and Planning: Halls
Morphological Box, Seven Phases of System Engineering, Seven Steps of System
Engineering, Program Planning Linkage, Goals, Objectives, Constraints, Alterable,
Measures etc., Example: Energy Supply and Demand, Value System Synthesis and
Linkage. Technology Forecasting and Assessment: Philosophical Basis for TA/TF,
Limits to growth model, Methodology in TA/TF- Brainstorming, Delphi, Relevance Tree
Techniques, System Dynamics- Examples. Theory of Constraints: Fundamental
Principles of the theory of Constraints, Understanding and Managing Constraints.
Reference Books
Handouts will be prepared and distributed to students
1. Warfield, J. N. “An Introduction to Systems Science”, World Scientific, Singapore,

2006.
2. Andrew P. Sage, “Methodology for Large-Scale Systems”, McGraw Hill Publication,
1977
Course Designer
Er. S. Ratnavel,
CEO, Sceba Consultancy Services, Madurai ratsiit@gmail.com

14CE1H0 INTERIOR DESIGN PE 1 0 0 1
Preamble
Interior design addresses several issues in living spaces. Interiors play key role in functionality of
rooms. This trendy course is designed to create awareness on the need and importance of interiors
which would provide responsive and comfortable living to the users.
Course Outcomes
students will be able to Attainment Proficiency
CO1 Explain concepts of interior design Apply

80 S
Design interiors for corporate office, retail shops,
CO2 Apply
residential buildings, hospitality sector, hotels,
hospitals - Commercial Interiors
CO3 Choose different materials - Color scheme - Apply 80 S
Lighting for outward looks
80 S
CO4 Apply
Design inside stuff of interiors: services namely
- Auditoriums 80 S
CO5 Explain the
Electrical importance
- HVAC of Project
- Networking management
- Security and
systems. Apply
costing of interior.
80 S
CO1. M - L - - - - - - L M - L L
CO2. M M M M - M - - M - L - L L
CO3. L L M L - M - - L - L - L L
CO4. M M M L - M - - L - L - L L
CO5. L L L - M - - - L M - M L L

Assessment Pattern
Continuous
Bloom’s Terminal
Assessment Tests
1
Remember 10 10
Understand 50 40
Apply 40 50
Analyze -- --
Evaluate -- --
Create -- --

CO1: Explain concepts of interior design
1. Explain the types of walls in interiors

2. Explain the meaning of formal and informal design of walls
3. Define the terms: hardscape and softscape. Explain with examples
CO2: Design interiors for corporate office, retail shops, residential buildings, hospitality sector,
hotels, hospitals - Commercial Interiors - Auditoriums
1. Define Ergonomics and mention its need in corporate offices

2. Explain types of plants that can be used for interior decoration
3. Make use of interior concept, design the interior wall, floor and ceiling for a
conference hall in an office of size 8m x10m.The ceiling height is 4m and a beam
of 45cm depth runs through the shorter span at 3m intervals. Assume the window
positions and sizes. Show the construction detail of the interior elements through
proper sections
CO3 : Choose different materials - Color scheme - Lighting for outward looks
1. What is the difference between a particle board and plywood
2. Explain the different types of walls and classify it based on its material and
application in interior design.
3. Explain the different types of floors and classify it based on its material and
application in interior design.
CO4: Design inside stuff of interiors: services namely Electrical - HVAC – Networking -
Security systems
1. Illustrate the interior layout with proper space planning and lighting design for an
art gallery of size 10m x 12m and height 4m.Specify the colour, texture and finishes
of the wall, floor and ceiling
2. Demonstrate the design of a wall mural as a background for the reception area of
five star hotel lobby of size 10m x 10m and height 6m, applying the principles the
interior design. Assume the necessary details. Specify and illustrate the materials
and concept of your mural.
3. Expalin the differences between halogen lamps and fluorescent lamps
CO5: Explain the importance of Project management and costing of interior
1. What is the need for knowledge on project management in interior design
2. What are the softwares to be used for interior designing and project management
3. Discuss the role of consultants in interior design
Concept Map
Syllabus
Introduction to interior design: Outward looks - Aesthetics - Inside stuff - Services. Different types
of Interiors: Corporate office interiors - Retail interiors - Residential interiors - Hospitality sector –
Hotels - Health sector - Hospitals - Commercial interiors - Auditoriums etc. Outward Looks and
Aesthetics: Different Materials - Color scheme - Lighting. Inside Stuff and Services: Electrical - HVAC
- Networking - Security systems. Miscellaneous: Presentation - Project Management and Costing -
Softwares used - Role of consultants.
Reference Books
1. Resource Materials to be provided by the course handling expert
2. Faulkner, S. and Faulkner, R, Inside Today’s Home, Rine hart publishing company,
Newyork, 1987
3. Stewart Walton, The complete Home Decorator, Portland House New York, 1997
4. Seetharaman, P and Pannu, P. Interior Design and Decoration, CBS publishers and
Distributors, New Delhi, 2013
5. Pratap Rao.M, Interior Design principles and practice, Standard Publishers Distribution,
Delhi 2015
6. Harriet Goldstein, Art in Everyday life, Oxford and IBH publishing house, 2016
Module No. of
Topics
No. Lectures
1.0 Introduction to interior design
1.1 Outward Looks - Aesthetics - Inside Stuff – Services 2
2.0 Different types of interiors
2.1 Corporate Office Interiors- Retail Interiors - Residential Interiors 2
2.2 Hospitality Sector – Hotels- Health Sector – Hospitals- Commercial 2
Interiors Auditoriums etc
3.0 Outward looks and Aesthetics
Module No. of
Topics
No. Lectures
3.1 Different materials - Color scheme - Lighting 2
4.0 Inside stuff and Services
4.1 Electrical - HVAC 2
4.2 Networking - Security Systems 1
5.0 Miscellaneous topic related to Interior design
5.1 Presentation - Project Management and Costing 2
5.2 Softwares used - Role of consultants 1
Total hours 14 Hrs
Course Designers:
1. Mr. Immanuel B Samuel, Principal Architect Chris Brown Architects,
Bangalore sam@cbarchitects.in
CORROSION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE Category L T P Credit
14CE1J0 STRUCTURES PE 1 0 0 1
Preamble
Construction plays a vital role in economic development. The durability of concrete has become a
highly discussed topic in global development. Even though several factors are responsible for early
distress in reinforced concrete structures it is observed that in majority of cases, it is because of the
corrosion of reinforcement. Therefore, basic understanding of corrosion technology for both
durability of structure and rehabilitation work is a must. This course gives an overall knowledge on
factors influencing, monitoring and methods of control of corrosion affected RC structures.
Prerequisite
Knowledge on Concrete Technology
Course Outcomes

students will be able to Attainment Proficiency level
(grade)
level (%)
CO1 Explain the factors influencing reinforcement Apply 80 S

corrosion in RC structures
CO2 Demonstrate the various types of corrosion Apply 80 S

monitoring methods
CO3 Apply appropriate corrosion control methods Apply 80 S

to distressed concrete structures
CO4 Suggest suitable repair and rehabilitation Apply 80 S

techniques for corrosion affected concrete
structures

CO59. S - M - - M - S M L - - L L
CO60. S - M - - M - S M L - - L L
CO3. M - M - - M - S M L L - L L
CO4. M - M - - M - S M L M - L L

Assessment Pattern: Theory cum PracticePart:
Bloom’s Category Test 1 End -semester

Examination
Remember 10 10
Understand 20 20
Apply 20 20
Analyze 0 0
Evaluation 0 0
Create 0 0

4. Mention two factors influencing rebar corrosion in RCC.

5. Discuss the mechanism of corrosion in rebars and discuss the influencing factors.
6. Suggest suitable methods of making concrete buried under polluted ground resistant to
corrosion? Justify with reasoning
1. Write the principle of gravimetric method of monitoring of corrosion in concrete

structures.
2. Explain the principle of any two methods of monitoring corrosion affected RC structures.
3. Explain the working principle of electrochemical impedance spectroscopy.
1. Define the term service life of structures and mention the need for its prediction.
2. Discuss the properties and uses of various supplementary cementitious materials in
concrete.
3. Explain the principle of Electrochemicalrealkalisation mentioning its application.
4. An RCC structure is to be constructed in a marine environment; discuss the various
measures you would recommend to make the structure safe against corrosion. Justify with
proper reasons.
5. Compare the following techniques: Electrochemical realkalisation and Electrochemical
chloride removal discussing the principle behind each and mentioning their applicability.
4. Corrosion of rebars is influenced by cover thickness- justify. Mention the cover thickness to
be provided for the following situations: Underwater concreting structure, Normal exposure
concrete.
5. An old RCC bridge is showing cracking due to rebar corrosion; discuss the procedure you
would adopt while inspecting the structure to diagnose distress and suggest suitable
methods of repair to make the structure functionally fit and ensure quality assurance to its
users.
6. Explain the factors to be considered in choice of repair materials for corrosion affected RC
structures.
7. Discuss the method of diagnosing distress in concrete structures.
Concept Map
Syllabus
Factors Influencing Reinforcement Corrosion: Physical, chemical, biological, mechanical and
structural factors, micro cell and macro cell formation in concrete, attack by sea water and
consequences of rebar corrosion, initiation and propagation of corrosion, repassivation of steel,
concrete cover, chloride binding mechanism, chloride threshold value, carbonation and sulphidation
induced corrosion. Corrosion Monitoring of Concrete Structures: Health assessment of concrete
structures, Methods to assess the deterioration of concrete: Gravimetric Method, Electrochemical
methods of corrosion monitoring of rebars: Surface potential measurements, Half-cell potential
measurements, Electrical resistance Probe Technique, Instantaneous corrosion rate by Linear
Polarization method, Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy, Tafel Extrapolation, Galvapulse
Method, Noise measurements, Simulation and modeling, Service life prediction. Corrosion Control
Methods For Concrete Structures: Design and Durability of Concrete, Chemical and mineral
admixtures, Coatings to Concrete surface, Supplementary cementitious materials in concrete,
Blended cements. Various grades and types of rebars, Electrochemicalrealkalisation, Electrochemical
chloride removal, Corrosion inhibiting admixtures. Repair and Rehabilitation of Concrete Structures:
Basic principle of repair, Concrete removal and surface preparation, Preparation of the
reinforcement, quality assurance and the use of materials for concrete, filling cracks and cavities in
concrete, Concrete properties : strength, permeability, thermal properties and cracking, Effects due
to climate, temperature, chemical corrosion, design and construction errors - Effects of cover
thickness and cracking, crack width measurements, carbonation depth, chloride profile tests, Slant-
shear tests for new concrete to old concrete bonding, selection of repair materials, Properties of
repair materials, Repair Techniques: Guniting and Shotcrete techniques.
Reference Books
1. John P Broomfield, “Corrosion of Steel in Concrete”, E & FN SPON, Chapman and Hall,
London and New York, 1997.
2. Luca Berttolini, Bernhard Elsener, PietroPedeferri, Rob Polder, “Corrosion of Steel in
3. Concrete, Prevention, Diagnosis, Repair”, WILEY-VCH publication, Weinheim, 2004.
4. Kumar Mehta, “Concrete in Marine Environment”, Elsevier Applied Science, London and
New York, 2003.
5. John New man, Ban SengChoo, “Advanced Concrete Technology”, Elsevier Ltd, 2003.
6. Hans Bohni, “Corrosion in Reinforced Concrete Structures”, CRC Woodhead Publishing
Limited, Cambridge, England, 2005.
7. Mohamed A. El-Reedy, “Steel Reinforced Concrete Structures-Assessment and Repair of
Corrosion”, CRC Press (Taylor & Francis Group), 2008.
8. M Raupach, B Elsener, R Polder and J Mietz, “Corrosion of Reinforcement in Concrete -
Mechanisms, Monitoring, Inhibitors and Rehabilitation techniques”, Woodhead Publishing
Limited, Cambridge, England 2007.
9. M.S.Shetty, “Concrete Technology - Theory& Practice”, S. Chand and Company Limited,
New Delhi, 2003.
10. R.N.Raikar, “Leaning from Failures”, Publisher - R & D Center (SDCPL), RaikarBhawan,
Sector-17, Vashi, Navi Mumbai, 1987.

No. Lectures
1.0 Factors Influencing Reinforcement Corrosion
1.1 Physical, chemical, biological, mechanical and structural factors, micro cell 1
and macro cell formation in concrete
1.2 Attack by sea water and consequences of rebar corrosion initiation and 1
propagation of corrosion, depassivation of steel, concrete cover
1.3 Chloride binding mechanism, chloride threshold value, carbonation and 1

sulphidation induced corrosion
2.0 Corrosion Monitoring of Concrete Structures

2.1 Health assessment of concrete structures, Methods to assess the
deterioration of concrete: Gravimetric Method, Electrochemical methods
1
of corrosion monitoring of rebars
2.2 Surface potential measurements, Half-cell potential measurements, 1

Electrical resistance Probe Technique
2.3 Instantaneous corrosion rate by Linear Polarization method, 1

Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy, Tafel Extrapolation
2.4 Galvapulse Method, Noise measurements, Simulation and modeling, 1

Service life prediction
3.0 Corrosion Control Methods For Concrete Structures
3.1 Design and Durability of Concrete 1
3.2 Chemical and mineral admixtures, Coatings to Concrete surface,

Supplementary cementitious materials in concrete, Blended cements
1
3.3 Various grades and types of rebars, Electrochemical realkalisation, 1

Electrochemical chloride removal, Corrosion inhibiting admixtures
4.0 Repair and Rehabilitation of Concrete Structures
4.1 Basic principle of repair, Concrete removal and surface preparation, 1

Preparation of the reinforcement, quality assurance and the use of
materials for concrete, filling cracks and cavities in concrete
4.2 Concrete properties : strength, permeability, thermal properties and 1

cracking, Effects due to climate, temperature, chemical corrosion, design
and construction errors
4.3 Effects of cover thickness and cracking, crack width measurements, 1

carbonation depth, chloride profile tests, Slant-shear tests for new
concrete to old concrete bonding
4.4 Selection of repair materials, Properties of repair materials, Repair 1

Techniques: Guniting and Shotcrete techniques
Total 14
Course Designers:
1. Dr. V. Saraswathy, corrsaras@rediffmail.com
CECRI, Karaikudi

BE Civil Degree Programme 18

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BE Civil Degree Programme 18

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BE Civil Degree Programme 18

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

REVISED SYLLABI

B.E DEGREE (CIVIL ENGINEERING) PROGRAMME

SECOND TO EIGHTH SEMESTER

FOR THE STUDENTS ADMITTED FROM THE

ACADEMIC YEAR 2014-2015 ONWARDS

THIAGARAJAR COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

(A Government Aided ISO 9001-2008 certified

Autonomous Institution affiliated to Anna University)

MADURAI – 625 015, TAMILNADU

Phone: 0452 – 2482240, 41

Fax: 0452 2483427

DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING

We are committed to:

 Provide quality education through innovation in teaching and learning

III) Programme Educational Objectives (PEO) for B.E Civil Engineering

PEO1. Graduates of the programme will contribute to the development of

Graduating Students of B.E. Civil Engineering programme will be able to:

Programme Outcomes (POs) of B.E. (Civil Engineering)

Graduating Students of B.E. Civil Engineering programme will:

1. Engineering Knowledge: Apply knowledge of mathematics, science,

2. Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, research literature and analyze complex

3. Design/ Development of Solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering

4. Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge

6. The Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by contextual

7. Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of professional

8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and

9. Individual and Team Work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a

10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities

11. Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and

Course Outcomes Bloom’s Expected Expected

CO4: Predict an analytic function, when its real or Apply 65

CO6: Predict the suitable method to evaluate Understand 70 B

Mapping with Programme Outcomes

Continuous Assessment Tests

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

3. Estimate the area enclosed by the curves y  x and x  y  2

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

Course Outcome 4 (CO4)

1. Compute an analytic function f(z)=u+iv, where u  e ( x cos y  y sin y) .

Course Outcome 5 (CO5) :

1. Define the term Residue of f(z) at z = a.

2. Give an example of meromorphic function.

Course Outcome 6(CO6):

3. Distinguish between isolated singularity and removable singularity.

LAPLACE TRANSFORM : Laplace transform –Sufficient condition for existence –Transform of

COMPLEX INTEGRATION :Complex integration –Statement and applications of Cauchy’s integral

Course content and lecture schedule

1.1 Double integrals and areas 2

1.2 Triple integrals and volumes 2

1.3 Change of order of integration 1

1.4 Change of variables between Cartesian and polar with applications 2

2.1 Operators Grad, div and curl with properties 2

2.2 Solenoidal and irrotational vectors 2

2.3 Vector integration(three famous theorems) 3

3.1 Laplace transformation-properties, inverse laplace transforms 3

3.3 Solution of differential equations and integral equations 2

4.1 Analytic functions, C-R equations and properties 2